Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training ManualV2.1

2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge
Enterprise Customer Training Manual
Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department
2013
2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual
CONTENTS
1
Huawei Training&Certification Service ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1
ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution ...................................................................................... 1
1.2
Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei products and solutions........................ 1
1.3
Learning Path ............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.4
Training Instructors ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.5
Training Methods........................................................................................................................................ 1
Enterprise IP Training Path ......................................................................................................................................... 1

2.1
Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ...................................................................................... 1
2.2
WLAN Certification Training Path ............................................................................................................... 1
2.3
Huawei Routing and Switching Product Features Training (Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training)
Path
2.4
IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path .................................................................................. 1
2.5
NE Routers Training Path........................................................................................................................... 1
2.6
AR G3 Routers Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 1
2.7
AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path ................................................................................................ 1
2.8
AR G3 Voice System Training Path ............................................................................................................ 1
2.9
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path ......................................................................................... 1
2.10
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path ........................................................................................... 1
2.11
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path ........................................................................ 1
2.12
WLAN (AC/AP) Training Path..................................................................................................................... 1
2.13
MSCG(ME60) Training Path....................................................................................................................... 1
2.14
PTN Product Training Path......................................................................................................................... 1
2.15
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path ................................................................. 1
2.16
Enterprise Network Design Training Path................................................................................................... 1
Enterprise IP Training Courses ................................................................................................................................... 1

3.1
Certification Training Programs .................................................................................................................. 1

3.1.1
HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training ............................................................. 1
3.1.2
HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training............ 1
3.1.3
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training ................................... 1
3.1.4
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training ................................. 1
3.1.5
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training ................................. 1
3.1.6
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training ................................................ 1
3.1.7
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training (Fast-Track 3 days)................. 1
3.1.8
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training ..................................................................... 1
3.2
IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Programs .......................................................................... 1

3.2.1
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ................................................................................... 1
3.2.2
Huawei VRP System Training ............................................................................................................ 1
3.2.3
Enterprise LAN Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.2.4
Enterprise WAN Technology Training................................................................................................. 1
3.2.5
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ........................................................................................ 1
3.2.6
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track) ......................................................................................... 1
-1-
3.3
Advanced Technology Training Programs .................................................................................................. 1

3.3.1
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training.................................................................................... 1
3.3.2
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training ............................................................................................. 1
3.3.3
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training .................................................................................... 1
3.3.4
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training ....................................................................................... 1
3.3.5
Enterprise QoS Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.3.6
Enterprise HA Technology Training .................................................................................................... 1
3.3.7
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.4
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs ............................................................................................. 1

3.4.1
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training ........................................................................ 1
3.4.2
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 1
3.4.3
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ....................... 1
3.4.4
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ......................................................... 1
3.4.5
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................... 1
3.4.6
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................................. 1
3.4.7
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 1
3.4.8
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ................. 1
3.4.9
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ................................................... 1
3.4.10
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)..................................... 1
3.5
AR Series Industrial Routers Training Programs ........................................................................................ 1

3.5.1
3.6
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................... 1

AR G3 Voice System Training Programs.................................................................................................... 1
3.6.1
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 1
3.6.2
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ..................................................... 1
3.6.3
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation .............................................. 1
3.6.4
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting ...................................................... 1
3.6.5
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................... 1
3.7
Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs ....................................................................................... 1

3.7.1
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training ...................................... 1
3.7.2
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................. 1
3.7.3
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
3.7.4
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ....................... 1
3.7.5
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training ..................................... 1
3.7.6
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 1
3.7.7
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
3.7.8
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ............................... 1
3.8
Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs ............................................................................... 1

3.8.1
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning Training ...................... 1
3.8.2
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training.................. 1
3.8.3
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
-2-
Basic O/M Training) .............................................................................................................................................. 1

3.8.4
3.9
WLAN(AC/AP) Training Programs ............................................................................................................. 1

3.9.1
WLAN Technology Basics Training .................................................................................................... 1
3.9.2
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................ 1
3.9.3
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 1
3.9.4
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ............................... 1
3.9.5
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 1
3.9.6
AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 1
3.9.7
WLAN Planning and Design Training ................................................................................................. 1
3.10
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 1

3.10.1
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training .................................................................................. 1
3.10.2
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 1
3.10.3
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training ................................................................................ 1
3.10.4
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training .......................................................................................... 1
3.10.5
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training .......................................................................... 1
3.11
PTN Products Training Programs ............................................................................................................... 1

3.11.1
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................................... 1
3.11.2
PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training .................................................................................... 1
3.11.3
PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 1
3.11.4
PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 1
3.11.5
PTN Network Planning and Design Training ...................................................................................... 1
3.12
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs ......................................................... 1

3.12.1
eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 1
3.12.2
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ....... 1
3.12.3
eSight WLAN Management Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.12.4
eSight MPLS VPN Management Training .......................................................................................... 1
3.12.5
eSight SLA Management Training...................................................................................................... 1
3.12.6
eSight IPSec VPN Management Training .......................................................................................... 1
3.12.7
eSight Smart Report Management Training ....................................................................................... 1
3.12.8
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training ............................................................ 1
3.12.9
eSight Access Management Training ................................................................................................. 1
3.12.10
eSight Data Center Management Training ......................................................................................... 1
3.13
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ....... 1
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs .......................................................................................... 1

3.13.1
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training .................................................................................... 1
3.13.2
Enterprise Campus Network Design Training .................................................................................... 1
3.13.3
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training.............................................................................................. 1
3.13.4
Data Center Network Design Training................................................................................................ 1
Enterprise Security Training Path................................................................................................................................ 1

4.1
Security Certification Training Path ............................................................................................................ 1
4.2
Firewall Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 1
4.3
Security Management Software Training Path ........................................................................................... 1
-3-
4.4
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path ...................................................................................... 1
4.5
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path ..................................................................... 1
Enterprise Security Training Courses.......................................................................................................................... 1

5.1
Security Certification Training Programs .................................................................................................... 1

5.1.1
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training ............................................... 1
5.1.2
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network Training ................................ 1
5.1.3
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training ............................................ 1
5.1.4
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training ............................................ 1
5.2
Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs ............................................................................. 1

5.2.1
Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training ...................................................................................... 1
5.2.2
VPN Technology Fundamentals Training ........................................................................................... 1
5.2.3
Terminal security Technology Fundamentals Training ........................................................................ 1
5.2.4
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology Fundamentals Training ............................................ 1
5.3
Security Advanced Technology Training Programs .................................................................................... 1

5.3.1
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology Training ...................................................................... 1
5.3.2
Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training ............................................................................................... 1
5.3.3
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training ............................................................................................... 1
5.3.4
Firewall Advanced Technology Training ............................................................................................. 1
5.3.5
Firewall IPV6 Technology Training ..................................................................................................... 1
5.3.6
Optimal Terminal Security Practice Training ...................................................................................... 1
5.4
Firewall Training Programs......................................................................................................................... 1

5.4.1
Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................... 1
5.4.2
Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include Low-and-middle Firewall
Installation and Commissioning Training) ............................................................................................................. 1

5.4.3
High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................................... 1
5.4.4
High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include High-end Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training) ...................................................................................................................................... 1

5.4.5
Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) ........................................ 1
5.4.6
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................... 1
5.4.7
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and Commissioning Training) .. 1
5.4.8
ASG Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................... 1
5.4.9
ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and Commissioning Training) .. 1
5.5
Security Management Software Training Programs ................................................................................... 1

5.5.1
TSM Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................... 1
5.5.2
TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM Installation and Commissioning Training) .. 1
5.5.3
DSM Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................................ 1
5.5.4
TSM/DSM Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) ............................................................ 1
5.6
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs .............................................................................. 1

5.6.1
NIP Installation and Commissioning Training ..................................................................................... 1
5.6.2
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and Commissioning Training) ..... 1
5.7
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs ............................................................. 1

5.7.1
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training......................................................................... 1
-4-
5.7.2
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 1
5.7.3
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................................... 1
5.8
Security Planning and Design Training Programs ...................................................................................... 1

5.8.1
Firewall Planning and Design Training ............................................................................................... 1
5.8.2
Terminal security Planning and Design Training ................................................................................ 1
Enterprise IT Training Path ......................................................................................................................................... 1

6.1
Storage Certification Training Path ............................................................................................................. 1
6.2
Cloud Computing Certification Training Path.............................................................................................. 1
6.3
Unified Storage Training Path .................................................................................................................... 1
6.4
NAS and Data Protection Training Path ..................................................................................................... 1
6.5
Cloud Storage Training Path ...................................................................................................................... 1
6.6
Server Products Training Path ................................................................................................................... 1
6.7
Cloud Computing Training Path ................................................................................................................. 1
6.8
Data Center Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 1
Enterprise IT Training Courses ................................................................................................................................... 1

7.1
Storage Certification Training Programs..................................................................................................... 1

7.1.1
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training........................................ 1
7.1.2
HCNP-Storage-SSAM SAN Storage Advanced Management Training.............................................. 1
7.1.3
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training ............................................. 1
7.1.4
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training............................................... 1
7.2
Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs ..................................................................................... 1

7.2.1
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training ..................................................... 1
7.2.2
HCNP-Cloud-BCCS Building Cloud Computing Solution Training ..................................................... 1
7.3
IT Technology Foundation Training Programs ............................................................................................ 1

7.3.1
Storage Technology Foundation Training ........................................................................................... 1
7.3.2
Cloud Storage Technology Foundation Training ................................................................................ 1
7.3.3
Cloud Computing Technology Foundation Training ............................................................................ 1
7.4
IT Advanced Technology Training Programs .............................................................................................. 1

7.4.1
Storage Area Network(SAN) Advanced Technology Training ............................................................. 1
7.4.2
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology Training ...................................................... 1
7.4.3
Backup Advanced Technology Training ............................................................................................. 1
7.4.4
Enterprise Data Center Architecture Training ..................................................................................... 1
7.5
Unified Storage Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 1

7.5.1
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and Management Training ....... 1
7.5.2
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and Management Training
(Fast-Track) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
7.6
7.5.3
T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) High-end Storage System Deployment and Management Training .. 1
7.5.4
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage System Deployment and Management Training ........................... 1
7.5.5
SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product Deployment and Management Training........................ 1
7.5.6
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management Training ....................... 1
7.5.7
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and Management Training ............. 1
NAS and Data Protection Training Programs ............................................................................................. 1
-5-
7.6.1
N9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 1
7.6.2
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and Management Training ........................................ 1
7.6.3
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training ................................. 1
7.6.4
HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management Training................................................. 1
7.7
Cloud Storage Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 1

7.7.1
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training .................................. 1
7.7.2
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training(Fast-Track) ............... 1
7.7.3
UDS Mass Storage Deployment and Management Training .............................................................. 1
7.8
Server Products Training Programs ........................................................................................................... 1

7.8.1
RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 1
7.8.2
X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training ........................................................... 1
7.8.3
E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ................................................. 1
7.8.4
E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ................................................. 1
7.9
Cloud Computing Training Programs ......................................................................................................... 1

7.9.1
Mini VDI Deployment and Management Training ............................................................................... 1
7.9.2
Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 1
7.9.3
FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................................................... 1
7.9.4
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................................................ 1
7.10
Data Center Training Programs.................................................................................................................. 1

7.10.1
Micro DC Deployment and Management Training ............................................................................. 1
7.10.2
ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................................................... 1
7.11
IT Design Training Programs ...................................................................................................................... 1

7.11.1
Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training ................................................................... 1
7.11.2
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design Training ........................................................... 1
7.11.3
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training .................................................................. 1
7.11.4
Enterprise Data Center Network Design Training .............................................................................. 1
7.11.5
Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training .............................................................................. 1
7.11.6
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training .......................................... 1
Enterprise UC&C Training Path .................................................................................................................................. 1

8.1
Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path ....................................................................... 1
8.2
Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path (Fast-Track) ................................................... 1
8.3
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Path ..................................................................... 1
8.4
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Path ............................................................................................... 1
8.5
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Path .................................... 1
8.6
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Path ................................................................... 1
8.7
Contact Center Certification Training Path ................................................................................................. 1
8.8
Contact Center Certification Training Fast-Track Path ............................................................................... 1
8.9
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Training Path .................................................. 1
8.10
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Training Path .......... 1
8.11
Video Conference Certification Training Path ............................................................................................. 1
8.12
Video Conference Certification Fast-Track Training Path ........................................................................... 1
8.13
VC Product Training Path (ViewPoint/TelePresence) ................................................................................. 1
-6-
8.14
9
Huawei eSpace IVS system Training Path ................................................................................................. 1
Enterprise UC&C Training Courses ............................................................................................................................ 1

9.1
Certification Training Programs .................................................................................................................. 1

9.1.1
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration ................................. 1
9.1.2
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony Solutions ........................................................ 1
9.1.3
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3 Voice Solutions and QoS ....................................... 1
9.1.4
HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions (Fast-Track) ............................. 1
9.1.5
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration ........................................... 1
9.1.6
HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise Contact Center(Fast-Track) ....................................... 1
9.1.7
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal Access Platform ............................. 1
9.1.8
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Solution .................................................... 1
9.1.9
HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR Advanced Application ......................................................... 1
9.1.10
HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Conference ................................................... 1
9.1.11
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference ............................................... 1
9.1.12
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference (Fast-Track) .......................... 1
9.2
Fundamental of VoIP Technology Training Programs ................................................................................. 1

9.2.1
Fundamental of VoIP Technology ...................................................................................................... 1
9.2.2
Fundamental of VoIP Technology (Fast-Track) .................................................................................. 1
9.3
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs ............................................................. 1

9.3.1
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Installation and Commissioning ................................ 1
9.3.2
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ........................... 1
9.3.3
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation .................... 1
9.3.4
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Troubleshooting ........................................................ 1
9.3.5
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) .............................. 1
9.4
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Programs ....................................................................................... 1

9.4.1
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 1
9.4.2
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ..................................................... 1
9.4.3
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation .............................................. 1
9.4.4
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting ...................................................... 1
9.4.5
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................... 1
9.5
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Programs ............................ 1

9.5.1
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Installation and Commissioning ....................................................... 1
9.5.2
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Basic Configuration and Operation .................................................. 1
9.5.3
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Advanced Configuration and Operation ........................................... 1
9.5.4
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 1
9.5.5
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................ 1
9.6
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs ........................................................... 1

9.6.1
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Installation and Commissioning ....................................................... 1
9.6.2
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Basic Configuration and Operation .................................................. 1
9.6.3
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Advanced Configuration and Operation ........................................... 1
9.6.4
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 1
9.6.5
Huawei U29XX All in One Solution .................................................................................................... 1
-7-
9.6.6
9.7
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................ 1

UC Planning and Design Training .............................................................................................................. 1
9.7.1
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Design ....................................................................... 1
9.7.2
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Design................................................................................................. 1
9.7.3
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Design.............................................................................................. 1
9.7.4
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design (Small and Medium-sized Enterprise: U29XX All in One
Solution)
9.7.5
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design.............................................................................................. 1
9.7.6
Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System Design (Fast-Track) .................... 1
9.8
CC Advanced Technology Training Programs ............................................................................................ 1

9.8.1
Enterprise Contact Center Advanced Routing Policy ......................................................................... 1
9.8.2
Enterprise Contact Center IVR Process and Intelligent Routing Development .................................. 1
9.8.3
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Technology .............................................................................. 1
9.8.4
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia Technology ............................................................................ 1
9.9
CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 1

9.9.1
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Management and Monitoring .................. 1
9.9.2
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation ....................................................................................................................................................... 1

9.9.3
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Outbound Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation ................................................................................................................................. 1

9.9.4
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
1
9.9.5
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Installation and Commissioning.............. 1
9.9.6
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Troubleshooting ...................................... 1
9.9.7
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation ..................................... 1
9.9.8
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution Deployment(Fast-Track)

1
9.10
CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)Operation and Maintenance
Training
9.10.1
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Management
and Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 1

9.10.2
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation ............................................................................................................ 1

9.10.3
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Outbound Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation ............................................................................................... 1

9.10.4
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation) ................................................................................................................................ 1
9.10.5
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Installation and
Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.10.6
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Trouble
shooting
-8-
9.10.7
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation
1
9.10.8
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution
Deployment(Fast-Track) ....................................................................................................................................... 1
9.11
CC Enterprise Network Design Training Programs .................................................................................... 1

9.11.1
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Design .................................................... 1
9.11.2
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Design ........... 1
9.11.3
VTM Solution Design ......................................................................................................................... 1
9.11.4
Cloud Contact Center Solution Design .............................................................................................. 1
9.12
VC Operation and Maintenance Training Programs ................................................................................... 1

9.12.1
9000 Series HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance ...................................................................... 1
9.12.2
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC1.0) Operation and Maintenance ... 1
9.12.3
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC2.0) Operation and Maintenance ... 1
9.12.4
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation and
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.12.5
TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance ........................................................................... 1
9.12.6
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Operation and Maintenance
(Fast-Track) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.13
VC Planning and Design Training Programs .............................................................................................. 1

9.13.1
9.14
10
11
ViewPoint Video Conference System Planning and Design............................................................... 1

Huawei eSpace IVS system ....................................................................................................................... 1
9.14.1
Huawei eSpace IVS system installation and commissioning Training................................................ 1
9.14.2
Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily operation and maintenance training ................................ 1
9.14.3
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced maintenance training ................................ 1
Network Energy Training Path .................................................................................................................................... 1

10.1
Power Supply Training Path ....................................................................................................................... 1
10.2
Data Center Facility Training Path .............................................................................................................. 1
10.3
UPS Training Path ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Network Energy Training Courses .............................................................................................................................. 1

11.1
Power Supply Training Programs ............................................................................................................... 1

11.1.1
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 1
11.1.2
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 1
11.1.3
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................................... 1
11.1.4
PowerCube1000 system operation and maintenance training ........................................................... 1
11.2
Data Center Facility Training Programs...................................................................................................... 1

11.2.1
IDS1000 Cluster Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 1
11.2.2
IDS1000 All in one Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 1
11.2.3
IDS2000 Medium and Large Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ................. 1
11.2.4
IDS2000 Small Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................... 1
11.2.5
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)...................................... 1
11.2.6
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 1
11.2.7
NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance Training.................................................. 1
-9-
11.3
12
13
UPS Training Programs.............................................................................................................................. 1

11.3.1
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training......................................................................................... 1
11.3.2
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) ..................................................................... 1
GSM Training Path...................................................................................................................................................... 1

12.1
GSM RNP&RNO Training Path .................................................................................................................. 1
12.2
GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training Path ..................................................................................................... 1
12.3
GSM BSS Product Training Path ............................................................................................................... 1
12.4
GSMR BSS Product Training Path ............................................................................................................. 1
GSM Training Courses................................................................................................................................................ 1

13.1
GSM RNP&RNO Training .......................................................................................................................... 1

13.1.1
GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training........................................................................... 1
13.1.2
BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training ....................................................................... 1
13.1.3
BSC6900 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training ....................................................................... 1
13.1.4
GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training .............................................................. 1
13.1.5
GSM Indoor Coverage Training ......................................................................................................... 1
13.1.6
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training ............................................................................................... 1
13.1.7
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training................................................................. 1
13.1.8
GSM Radio Network Analysis Training .............................................................................................. 1
13.2
GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training ............................................................................................................. 1

13.2.1
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training .................................... 1
13.2.2
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training .................................... 1
13.2.3
GPRS EDGE Signaling Training ........................................................................................................ 1
13.2.4
Evolved EDGE Training ..................................................................................................................... 1
13.2.5
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training ................................................................................. 1
13.3
GSM BSS Product Training ........................................................................................................................ 1

13.3.1
GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.2
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.3
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration Training ......................................................................................... 1
13.3.4
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting Training ..................................................................................... 1
13.3.5
GSM BSS9.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.6
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.7
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Configuration Training ......................................................................................... 1
13.3.8
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training ..................................................................................... 1
13.3.9
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 1
13.3.10
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Configuration Training ....................................................................................... 1
13.3.11
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................... 1
13.3.12
GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0 Delta Training ............................................................................................... 1
13.3.13
GSM BSS8.1 - BSS12.0 Delta Training ............................................................................................. 1
13.3.14
PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 1
13.3.15
GSM BSS12.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 1
13.3.16
13.3.17
GSM BSS13.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 1
- 10 -
13.3.18
13.3.19
13.3.20
GSM BSS12.0 - BSS13.0 Delta Training ........................................................................................... 1
13.3.21
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training ...................................................................................... 1
13.3.22
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training .................................................................................... 1
13.3.23
13.3.24
13.3.25
GSM BSS14.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training................................................................. 1
13.3.26
13.3.27
13.3.28
13.3.29
GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta Training .............................................................................. 1
13.3.30
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 1
13.3.31
GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade Training ....................................................................................................... 1
13.3.32
GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder Maintenance Training ............................................................... 1
13.3.33
GSM IPRAN Application Training ....................................................................................................... 1
13.3.34
GSM IPRAN Reconstruction Training ................................................................................................ 1
13.4
14
15
GSMR BSS Product Training ..................................................................................................................... 1

13.4.1
GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15) ................................... 1
13.4.2
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15) ................................... 1
13.4.3
GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000V900R008C15) ........................................................... 1
13.4.4
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000V900R008C15) ....................................................... 1
13.4.5
GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008) .......................................... 1
13.4.6
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008) .......................................... 1
13.4.7
GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000 V901R008) ................................................................ 1
13.4.8
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000 V901R008) ............................................................ 1
WCDMA Training Path ................................................................................................................................................ 1

14.1
Principle Training Path ............................................................................................................................... 1
14.2
RNP&RNO Training Path ........................................................................................................................... 1
14.3
Product Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 1
WCDMA Training Courses .......................................................................................................................................... 1

15.1
Principle Training ........................................................................................................................................ 1

15.1.1
WCDMA RAN System Overview ........................................................................................................ 1
15.1.2
WCDMA RAN Overview Training ....................................................................................................... 1
15.1.3
WCDMA RAN Principle Training ........................................................................................................ 1
15.1.4
WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training .................................................................................................. 1
15.1.5
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training ................................................................................................. 1
15.2
RNP&RNO Training ................................................................................................................................... 1

15.2.1
WCDMA Radio Network Design and Planning Training ..................................................................... 1
15.2.2
WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution Training .................................................................... 1
15.2.3
UMTS 900M Coverage Solution Training ........................................................................................... 1
15.2.4
WCDMA Indoor Coverage Training .................................................................................................... 1
- 11 -
15.2.5
WCDMA RF Optimization Training ..................................................................................................... 1
15.2.6
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features and Algorithms Training ................................................... 1
15.2.7
15.2.8
15.2.9
15.2.10
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Advanced Training ..................................................... 1
15.2.11
15.2.12
15.2.13
15.2.14
WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Training ............................................... 1
15.2.15
WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN12 Radio Network Optimization Training............................................... 1
15.2.16
15.2.17
15.2.18
WCDMA RAN11 - RAN12 Delta Features Training ............................................................................ 1
15.2.19
15.2.20
15.2.21
WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features Training .............................................................................. 1
15.2.22
WCDMA uBro Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training .................................................... 1
15.3
Product Training ......................................................................................................................................... 1

15.3.1
WCDMA RAN11 NodeB Training ....................................................................................................... 1
15.3.2
WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation Training .......................................................................................... 1
15.3.3
WCDMA RAN11 RNC Configuration Training .................................................................................... 1
15.3.4
WCDMA RAN11 RAN Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.5
WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training .................................................................................................... 1
15.3.6
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation Training ....................................................................................... 1
15.3.7
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration Training ................................................................................. 1
15.3.8
WCDMA RAN11.1 Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................... 1
15.3.9
WCDMA RAN11.1 RAN Reconfiguration Training.............................................................................. 1
15.3.10
15.3.11
WCDMA RAN12 RNC Operation Training ......................................................................................... 1
15.3.12
15.3.13
WCDMA RAN12 Troubleshooting Training ........................................................................................ 1
15.3.14
WCDMA RAN12 RAN Reconfiguration Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.15
WCDMA RAN11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta Training .......................................................................... 1
15.3.16
WCDMA uBro2.0 Network Operation Training ................................................................................... 1
15.3.17
15.3.18
WCDMA RAN13 RNC Operation Training ......................................................................................... 1
15.3.19
15.3.20
WCDMA RAN13 RAN Reconfiguration Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.21
WCDMA RAN13 RAN Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.22
WCDMA RAN12.0-RAN13.0 Product Delta Training.......................................................................... 1
15.3.23
WCDMA uBro3.0 Network Operation Training ................................................................................... 1
- 12 -
16
15.3.24
WCDMA RAN14.0 NodeB Training .................................................................................................... 1
15.3.25
WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation Training ...................................................................................... 1
15.3.26
WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Configuration Training ................................................................................. 1
15.3.27
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Reconfiguration Training ............................................................................. 1
15.3.28
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting Training ............................................................................. 1
15.3.29
WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 Product Delta Training.......................................................................... 1
15.3.30
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Upgrade Training ......................................................................................... 1
15.3.31
WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training ....................................................................... 1
15.3.32
WCDMA IPRAN Application Training ................................................................................................. 1
CDMA Training Path ................................................................................................................................................... 1

16.1
17
CDMA Training Path ................................................................................................................................... 1
CDMA Training Courses ............................................................................................................................................. 1

17.1
CDMA Training ........................................................................................................................................... 1

17.1.1
CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training ..................................................................... 1
17.1.2
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................... 1
17.1.3
CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training ....................................................................................... 1
17.1.4
17.1.5
17.1.6
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training ................................................................................ 1
17.1.7
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training ............................................................. 1
17.1.8
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training .......................................................................... 1
17.1.9
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning Training ........................................ 1
17.1.10
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training ..................................................... 1
17.1.11
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training ............................................................... 1
17.1.12
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning.................................................................................... 1
18
LTE Training Path ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
19
LTE Training Courses ................................................................................................................................................. 1

19.1
Principle Training ........................................................................................................................................ 1

19.1.1
LTE System Overview Training .......................................................................................................... 1
19.1.2
LTE Air Interface Training ................................................................................................................... 1
19.1.3
LTE Protocols and Procedures Training............................................................................................. 1
19.1.4
TCP/IP in the Mobile World Training .................................................................................................. 1
19.1.5
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training ................................................................................................. 1
19.1.6
LTE Interoperability Training .............................................................................................................. 1
19.1.7
LTE Essentials Training ..................................................................................................................... 1
19.2
Product Training ......................................................................................................................................... 1

19.2.1
LTE eRAN2.1 Field Maintenance Training ......................................................................................... 1
19.2.2
LTE eRAN2.1 Network Operation Training ........................................................................................ 1
19.2.3
19.2.4
LTE eRAN2.2 Network Operation Training ........................................................................................ 1
19.2.5
19.2.6
LTE eRAN3.0 Operation and Configuration Training ......................................................................... 1
- 13 -
19.2.7
LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration Training ............................................................................................. 1
19.2.8
LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting Training ............................................................................................. 1
19.2.9
LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and Algorithms Training ......................................................... 1
19.3
20
RNP&RNO Training ................................................................................................................................... 1

19.3.1
LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms Training................................................................................ 1
19.3.2
LTE eRAN2.2 Features and Algorithms Training................................................................................ 1
19.3.3
LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training .............................................................................................................. 1
19.3.4
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms Training ...................................................................... 1
19.3.5
LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms Training ....................................................................... 1
19.3.6
LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and Algorithms Training .......................................................... 1
19.3.7
LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving Features and Algorithms Training ......................................... 1
19.3.8
LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms Training ...................................................................... 1
19.3.9
LTE Tuning Training ........................................................................................................................... 1
19.3.10
LTE Network Design and Dimensioning Training ............................................................................... 1
19.3.11
LTE Performance Management Training ........................................................................................... 1
19.3.12
LTE Radio Network Optimize Training ............................................................................................... 1
SingleRAN Training Path ............................................................................................................................................ 2

20.1
21
SingleRAN Training Path............................................................................................................................ 2
SingleRAN Training Courses ...................................................................................................................................... 2

21.1
SingleRAN Training .................................................................................................................................... 2

21.1.1
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 2
21.1.2
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 2
21.1.3
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration Training .................................................................. 2
21.1.4
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training .............................................................. 2
21.1.5
21.1.6
21.1.7
21.1.8
21.1.9
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 - SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training .............................................................. 2
21.1.10
21.1.11
21.1.12
21.1.13
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training ............................................................... 2
21.1.14
21.1.15
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 - SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training .............................................................. 2
21.1.16
21.1.17
21.1.18
21.1.19
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training ............................................................... 2
21.1.20
21.1.21
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 SingleRAN7.0 Delta Training ............................................................. 2
21.1.22
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Upgrade Training .................................................................................. 2
- 14 -
21.1.23
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Emergency Maintenance TrainingTraining Path ................................... 2
22
Wireless OSS Training Path ....................................................................................................................................... 2
23
Wireless OSS Training Courses ................................................................................................................................. 3

23.1
M2000 Training .......................................................................................................................................... 3

23.1.1
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration TrainingSun................................................ 3
23.1.2
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster) ..................................... 3
23.1.3
iManager M2000V200R012 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 3
23.1.4
iManager M2000V200R012 New Features Training .......................................................................... 3
23.1.5
iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration TrainingSun ................................................ 3
23.1.6
iManager M2000V200R011System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster) ...................................... 3
23.1.7
iManager M2000V200R011 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 3
23.1.8
iManager M2000V200R011 New Features Training .......................................................................... 3
23.2
PRS Training .............................................................................................................................................. 3

23.2.1
iManager PRS V100R006 Client Application ..................................................................................... 3
23.2.2
23.2.3
23.3
Nastar Training ........................................................................................................................................... 3

23.3.1
iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM Performance Analysis System Application................................... 3
23.3.2
iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA Performance Analysis System Application ............................. 3
23.3.3
iManager Nastar V600R009 GSM Performance Analysis System Application ................................... 3
23.3.4
23.3.5
iManager Nastar V600R010 GSM Performance Analysis System Application ................................... 3
23.3.6
23.4
PRS/Nastar Administrator Training ............................................................................................................. 3

23.4.1
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (HP) ............................................................... 3
23.4.2
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (ATAE) ........................................................... 3
23.5
24
Probe Training ............................................................................................................................................ 3

23.5.1
GENEX Probe V200R003 GSM Operation ........................................................................................ 3
23.5.2
GENEX Probe V200R003 WCDMA Operation .................................................................................. 3
23.5.3
GENEX Probe V200R003 LTE Operation .......................................................................................... 3
23.5.4
GENEX Probe V300R005 GSM Operation ........................................................................................ 3
23.5.5
GENEX Probe V300R005 WCDMA Operation .................................................................................. 3
23.5.6
GENEX Probe V300R005 LTE Operation .......................................................................................... 3
Access Network Training Path .................................................................................................................................... 3

24.1
24.2
FTTx PON Products Training Path ............................................................................................................. 3
24.3
DSLAM MA5600T Sereis Training Path ..................................................................................................... 3
24.4
DSLAM MA5100 Training Path .................................................................................................................. 3
24.5
24.6
24.7
MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Series Training Path ............................................................................................. 3
24.8
MSAN UA5000 Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 3
- 15 -
25
24.9
HONET Series Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 3
24.10
BITS Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 3
24.11
OSS U2000 Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3
24.12
OSS N2000 Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3
24.13
OSS N2510 Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3
Access Network Training Courses .............................................................................................................................. 3

25.1
Principle Training Programs Description .................................................................................................... 3

25.1.1
Access Network Related IP Technology Fundamental Training ......................................................... 3
25.1.2
Access Network Related Transmission Technology Fundamental Training ....................................... 3
25.1.3
VDSL2 Fundamental Training ............................................................................................................ 3
25.1.4
GPON Fundamental Training ............................................................................................................. 3
25.2
Evolution and Trends Training Programs Description ................................................................................ 3

25.2.1
FTTx Network Overview Training ....................................................................................................... 3
25.2.2
ODN Overview Training ..................................................................................................................... 3
25.2.3
NGPON Overview Training ................................................................................................................ 3
25.2.4
xDSL Access Network Overview Training .......................................................................................... 3
25.2.5
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training ..................................................................................................... 3
25.3
Planning Training Programs Description .................................................................................................... 3

25.3.1
GPON Planning Training.................................................................................................................... 3
25.3.2
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training ....................................................................... 3
25.3.3
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Planning Training .............................................................. 3
25.3.4
MSAN UA5000 Planning Training ...................................................................................................... 3
25.4
FTTx PON Products Training Programs Description .................................................................................. 3

25.4.1
GPON Hardware Installation Training ................................................................................................ 3
25.4.2
GPON Commissioning Training ......................................................................................................... 3
25.4.3
GPON Field Maintenance Training .................................................................................................... 3
25.4.4
GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................. 3
25.4.5
GPON (FTTH Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 3
25.4.6
GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 3
25.4.7
GPON Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 3
25.4.8
iODN Network Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 3
25.4.9
iManager U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 3
25.4.10
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................................... 3
25.5
DSLAM Products Training Programs Description ....................................................................................... 3

25.5.1
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Hardware Installation Training ................................................... 3
25.5.2
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Commissioning Training ............................................................ 3
25.5.3
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Field Maintenance Training ........................................................ 3
25.5.4
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................... 3
25.5.5
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................ 3
25.5.6
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training ............................. 3
25.5.7
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training ............................................................... 3
25.5.8
- 16 -
25.5.9
25.5.10
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................... 3
25.5.11
25.5.12
25.5.13
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 3
25.6
MSAN Products Training Programs Description ......................................................................................... 3

25.6.1
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 3
25.6.2
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training .................................................... 3
25.6.3
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 3
25.6.4
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training .................................................................................. 3
25.6.5
MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training ........................................................................................... 3
25.6.6
MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance Training ....................................................................................... 3
25.6.7
MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 3
25.6.8
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 3
25.6.9
HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................... 3
25.6.10
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
25.7
BITS Training Programs Description .......................................................................................................... 3

25.7.1
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 3
25.7.2
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 3
25.7.3
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 3
25.8
26
OSS Training Programs Description .......................................................................................................... 3

25.8.1
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Access Network) .................................................................... 3
25.8.2
iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training .................................................................................. 3
25.8.3
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
25.8.4
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON) ........................................................................... 3
25.8.5
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM).......................................................................... 3
25.8.6
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN) ........................................................................... 3
25.8.7
iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training ........................................................................... 3
25.8.8
iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training .......................................................................... 3
25.8.9
iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training .......................................................................................... 3
25.8.10
iManager N2510 Administration Training ........................................................................................... 3
Transmission Network Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3

26.1
Transmission Engineer Certification Training Path ..................................................................................... 3
26.2
26.3
Evolution and Trends Training Path ........................................................................................................... 3
26.4
MSTP Training Path(TDM) ......................................................................................................................... 3
26.5
MSTP Training Path(Packet) ...................................................................................................................... 3
26.6
MSTP Training Path(Packet+TDM) ............................................................................................................ 3
26.7
MSTP Training Path(OSN 500/550) ........................................................................................................... 3
26.8
MSTP Training Path(Metro 100/500/1000/OSN 2000) ............................................................................... 3
26.9
WDM Training Path(OSN380068008800) .................................................................................................. 3
26.10
WDM Training Path(OSN1800&OSN8800(packet)) ................................................................................... 3
- 17 -
27
26.11
WDM Training Path(OSN3800A6800A) ..................................................................................................... 3
26.12
WDM Training Path(BWS 1600G) .............................................................................................................. 3
26.13
RTN Training Path(RTN 900) ..................................................................................................................... 3
26.14
RTN Training Path(RTN 900 V100R001& V100R002) ............................................................................... 3
26.15
RTN Training Path(RTN 300&RTN 600)..................................................................................................... 3
26.16
Transmission Network OSS Training Path ................................................................................................. 3
26.17
Planning and Design Training Path ............................................................................................................ 3
26.18
Assessment and Optimization Training Path .............................................................................................. 3
Transmission Network Training Courses..................................................................................................................... 3

27.1
Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs ............................................................................. 3

27.1.1
Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device Training...................... 3
27.1.2
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission Network Training ....... 3
27.1.3
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission Network Training .......... 3
27.2
Principle Training Programs ....................................................................................................................... 3

27.2.1
SDH Fundamental Training ................................................................................................................ 3
27.2.2
WDM Fundamental Training .............................................................................................................. 3
27.2.3
Ethernet Fundamental Training .......................................................................................................... 3
27.2.4
ASON Fundamental Training ............................................................................................................. 3
27.2.5
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training .................................................................................................. 3
27.3
Evolution and Trends Training Programs ................................................................................................... 3

27.3.1
27.4
IP-oriented Transport Solution Training.............................................................................................. 3

MSTP Training Programs ........................................................................................................................... 3
27.4.1
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Product Overview Training....................................... 3
27.4.2
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Installation Training .................................................. 3
27.4.3
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training................................................... 3
27.4.4
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ..................... 3
27.4.5
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training .................................................. 3
27.4.6
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 3
27.4.7
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............. 3
27.4.8
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training ........................................................... 3
27.4.9
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 3
27.4.10
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training ........................................................... 3
27.4.11
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 3
27.4.12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training .................................................. 3
27.4.13
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 3
27.4.14
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training ................................................. 3
27.4.15
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 3
27.4.16
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 3
27.4.17
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................. 3
27.4.18
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 3
27.4.19
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................... 3
27.4.20
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................. 3
- 18 -
27.4.21
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 3
27.4.22
OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 3
27.4.23
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training ........................................................................................ 3
27.4.24
OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 3
27.4.25
OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 3
27.5
WDM Training Programs ............................................................................................................................ 3

27.5.1
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training ......................................................... 3
27.5.2
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training ...................................................................................... 3
27.5.3
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training ............................................................. 3
27.5.4
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 3
27.5.5
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) NMC Operation Training ............................................................. 3
27.5.6
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 3
27.5.7
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ......................... 3
27.5.8
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 3
27.5.9
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................... 3
27.5.10
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training ............................................................... 3
27.5.11
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 3
27.5.12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Commissioning Training ............................................................................ 3
27.5.13
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................... 3
27.5.14
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 3
27.5.15
OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance Training............... 3
27.5.16
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance Training .......... 3
27.5.17
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training ...................................................................................... 3
27.5.18
OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 3
27.5.19
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training ..................................................................................... 3
27.5.20
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................................... 3
27.5.21
OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 3
27.6
RTN Training Programs .............................................................................................................................. 3

27.6.1
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid) ..................................................... 3
27.6.2
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Packet) .................................................... 3
27.6.3
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid+Packet) ........................................ 3
27.6.4
OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 3
27.6.5
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid) .......................................................... 3
27.6.6
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Packet).......................................................... 3
27.6.7
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid+Packet) ............................................. 3
27.6.8
OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 3
27.6.9
OptiX RTN 300 Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................................. 3
27.6.10
27.6.11
OptiX RTN 300 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 3
27.6.12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................. 3
27.6.13
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
27.6.14
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 3
- 19 -
27.6.15
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................... 3
27.6.16
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
27.6.17
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the Basic O/M Training) 3
27.6.18
OptiX RTN 600 Installation & Commissioning Training ...................................................................... 3
27.6.19
27.6.20
OptiX RTN 600 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the Basic O/M Training) .................. 3
27.7
Transmission Network OSS Training Programs ......................................................................................... 3

27.7.1
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only) ................................................... 3
27.7.2
iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training .......................................................................................... 3
27.7.3
iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training...................................................................... 3
27.7.4
OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training ....................................................................................... 3
27.7.5
OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training .................................................................................. 3
27.7.6
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training ............................................................................... 3
27.7.7
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training ....................................................................................... 3
27.8
Planning and Design Training Programs .................................................................................................... 3

27.8.1
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training ........................................................................................ 3
27.8.2
OptiX MSTP Network Design Training ............................................................................................... 3
27.8.3
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training .................................................................................... 3
27.8.4
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training ............................................. 3
27.8.5
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training ...................................................................... 3
27.8.6
OptiX WDM Network Design Training ................................................................................................ 3
27.8.7
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training .......................................................................................... 3
27.8.8
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training ........................................... 3
27.8.9
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training ..................................................................................... 3
27.8.10
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)........................................................................... 3
27.8.11
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid) ........................................................................... 3
27.8.12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid) .............................................................. 3
27.8.13
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training ....................................................................... 3
27.8.14
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training .................................................................... 3
27.8.15
OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training ...................................................... 3
27.9
28
29
Assessment and Optimization Training Programs ...................................................................................... 3

27.9.1
OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training ......................................................................................... 3
27.9.2
OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training ......................................................................................... 3
27.9.3
OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training ............................................................ 3
27.9.4
OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training ........................................................................................ 3
27.9.5
OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training ....................................................................................... 3
27.9.6
OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training .......................................................................................... 3
27.9.7
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training ................................................................................... 3
PS Training Path ......................................................................................................................................................... 3

28.1
PS Training Path ........................................................................................................................................ 3
28.2
MBB Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 3
PS Training Courses ................................................................................................................................................... 3
- 20 -
29.1
PS Training Courses .................................................................................................................................. 3

29.1.1
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training ............................................................................................ 3
29.1.2
PS Interface Signaling Analysis ......................................................................................................... 3
29.1.3
SGSN9810 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA) .................................................... 3
29.1.4
SGSN9810 Data Configuration Training (ATCA)................................................................................ 3
29.1.5
SGSN APN and international roaming Training ................................................................................. 3
29.1.6
The difference of ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training ............................................................................. 3
29.1.7
GGSN9811 Routine Operation and Maintenance TrainingV9 ..................................................... 3
29.1.8
GGSN9811 Data Configuration Training V9 ............................................................................... 3
29.1.9
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance TrainingWindows ............................................................. 3
29.1.10
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance TrainingUNIX ................................................................... 3
29.1.11
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA) ...................................................................... 3
29.1.12
GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training .................................................................................................. 3
29.1.13
SGSN Gb ReconstructionFrom TDM to IPTraining ..................................................................... 3
29.1.14
PS QOS Training ............................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.15
GGSN Service Awareness Training ................................................................................................... 3
29.1.16
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.17
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training ...................................................................................... 3
29.1.18
PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting Training ........................................................ 3
29.1.19
PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training ....................................................................................... 3
29.1.20
PS Emergency Recovery Training ..................................................................................................... 3
29.1.21
PS Performance Monitoring Training ................................................................................................. 3
29.1.22
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management ............................................................................................. 3
29.1.23
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training ..................................................................................... 3
29.1.24
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training .................................................................. 3
29.1.25
EPC Principle Fundamental Training ................................................................................................. 3
29.1.26
From GPRS to EPC Delta Training .................................................................................................... 3
29.1.27
EPC Protocol and Procedure Training ............................................................................................... 3
29.1.28
EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training ........................................................................................... 3
29.1.29
EPC Equipment Commissioning Training .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.30
USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 3
29.1.31
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G) ........................................................................... 3
29.1.32
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G) .................................................... 3
29.1.33
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) ................................................................... 3
29.1.34
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training ................................................................................. 3
29.1.35
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G) ...................................................... 3
29.1.36
UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G) ........................................................................ 3
29.1.37
UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G) ................................................. 3
29.1.38
UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) .......................................................................... 3
29.1.39
MME POOL Training .......................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.40
EPC VOLTE Solution Training ........................................................................................................... 3
29.1.41
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training ............................................................................. 3
- 21 -
29.1.42
EPC Troubleshooting Training ........................................................................................................... 3
29.1.43
SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.44
EPC Network Planning and Design Training ...................................................................................... 3
29.1.45
UPCC ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training (UPCC HSS) ........................................ 3
29.1.46
UPCC Data Configuration Training .................................................................................................... 3
29.1.47
UPCC Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training ................................................................ 3
29.1.48
UPCC Service Policy Application and Design Training ...................................................................... 3
29.1.49
UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and Troubleshooting Training ............................................... 3
29.1.50
EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.51
iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 3
29.1.52
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.53
uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.54
WASN Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................................... 3
29.1.55
MAG9811 Engineer Training .............................................................................................................. 3
29.1.56
CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 3
29.1.57
CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................... 3
29.1.58
CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.59
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta Training ........................................................... 3
29.1.60
PS Netview Training........................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.61
PS Nastar Training ............................................................................................................................. 3
29.1.62
PS SUR Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 3
29.1.63
PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR) .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.64
GPRS Fundamental (WBT) ............................................................................................................... 3
29.1.65
GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT) ..................................................................................................... 3
29.1.66
GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT) ............................................................................................................ 3
29.1.67
EPC Principle (WBT) ......................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.68
EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT) .......................................................................................................... 3
29.1.69
EPC Health Check (WBT).................................................................................................................. 3
29.1.70
EPC Data Management (WBT) .......................................................................................................... 3
29.1.71
EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT) ..................................................................................................... 3
29.1.72
EPC Product Survey (WBT) ............................................................................................................... 3
29.1.73
IPv6 Feature Training......................................................................................................................... 3
29.2
MBB Training Courses ............................................................................................................................... 3

29.2.1
Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile Internet .............................................................................. 3
29.2.2
Smart MBB Network Solution ............................................................................................................ 3
29.2.3
QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued Subscribers and Services .............................................................. 3
29.2.4
MBB Signaling Optimization for Smart Terminal ................................................................................ 3
29.2.5
MBB QoE Improvement Solution ....................................................................................................... 3
30
Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 3
31
Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Courses ............................................................................................................... 7

31.1
CSOFTX3000 Training ............................................................................................................................... 7

31.1.1
CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training ................................................................................... 7
- 22 -
31.1.2
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 7
31.1.3
CSOFTX3000 Delta Training ............................................................................................................. 7
31.1.4
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
31.1.5
CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 7
31.1.6
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training............................................................................................. 7
31.1.7
CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training .............................................................................. 7
31.2
UMG8900 Training ..................................................................................................................................... 7

31.2.1
CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 7
31.2.2
CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................... 7
31.3
CDMA MSC61 Training .............................................................................................................................. 7

31.3.1
32
33
CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 7
Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 7

32.1
WCDMA-CS Training Path ......................................................................................................................... 7
32.2
GSM-R Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 7
32.3
UGC Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 7
32.4
SmartCare Training Path ............................................................................................................................ 7
Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Courses ............................................................................................................... 7

33.1
WCDMA-CS Training Courses ................................................................................................................... 7

33.1.1
Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental Training ........................................................................................... 7
33.1.2
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System Training ............................................................................. 7
33.1.3
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Data Configuration Training ........................................................................... 7
33.1.4
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
33.1.5
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System Training ............................................................................ 7
33.1.6
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Data Configuration Training ........................................................................... 7
33.1.7
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training............................................................. 7
33.1.8
MSS Service Provision Training ......................................................................................................... 7
33.1.9
GU UMG8900 Hardware System Training ......................................................................................... 7
33.1.10
GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 7
33.1.11
UMG8900
33.1.12
GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow Training...................................................................................... 7
33.1.13
MSS Signaling Analysis Training........................................................................................................ 7
33.1.14
Number Translation Training .............................................................................................................. 7
33.1.15
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Design Training ..................................................................... 7
33.1.16
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Evaluation and Optimization Training .................................... 7
33.1.17
MSC POOL Training .......................................................................................................................... 7
33.1.18
MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta Training ..................................................................................... 7
33.1.19
MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI) ......................................................................................... 7
33.1.20
2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training .............................................................................................. 7
33.1.21
MSS IP Technology Training .............................................................................................................. 7
33.1.22
SmartCare Netview CoreTraining ...................................................................................................... 7
33.1.23
MSS Troubleshooting Training ........................................................................................................... 7
33.1.24
AoIP Training ..................................................................................................................................... 7
Data Configuration Training ........................................................................................... 7
- 23 -
33.1.25
MSS Common Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting Practice ................................................ 7
33.1.26
MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT) ........................................................................................................... 7
33.1.27
GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network Principle(WBT) ............................................................... 7
33.1.28
MSC POOL Principle(WBT) ............................................................................................................... 7
33.1.29
UMG8900 System Overview(WBT) ................................................................................................... 7
33.1.30
MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and Principle(WBT) ........................................................................... 7
33.1.31
GU CS Core Network Design Overview(WBT) .................................................................................. 7
33.2
GSM-R Training Courses ........................................................................................................................... 7

33.2.1
GTSOFTX3000 Product Training ....................................................................................................... 7
33.2.2
GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training................................................................................................... 7
33.2.3
GSM-R Feature Training .................................................................................................................... 7
33.3
UGC Training Courses ............................................................................................................................... 7

33.3.1
33.4
UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway Office) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 7

SmartCare Training Courses ...................................................................................................................... 7
33.4.1
34
35
SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ Analyst Operation and Maintenance Training ........................... 7
NGN&STP Training Path ............................................................................................................................................ 7

34.1
NGN Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 7
34.2
STP Training Path ...................................................................................................................................... 7
NGN&STP Training Courses....................................................................................................................................... 7

35.1
NGN Training Courses ............................................................................................................................... 7

35.1.1
NGN System Overview Training ........................................................................................................ 7
35.1.2
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 7
35.1.3
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 7
35.1.4
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
35.1.5
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 7
35.1.6
SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training........................................................................ 7
35.1.7
SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 7
35.1.8
SE2000 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 7
35.1.9
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 7
35.1.10
IAD Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................................................... 7
35.1.11
U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................................... 7
35.1.12
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 7
35.1.13
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 7
35.1.14
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 7
35.1.15
MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 7
35.1.16
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 7
35.1.17
SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 7
35.1.18
SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 7
35.1.19
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 7
35.2
STP Training Courses ................................................................................................................................ 7

35.2.1
STP Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................................... 7
35.2.2
DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 7
- 24 -
35.2.3
36
C&C08 Training Path .................................................................................................................................................. 7

36.1
37
C&C08 Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 7
C&C08 Training Courses ............................................................................................................................................ 7

37.1
38
C&C08 Training Courses............................................................................................................................ 7

37.1.1
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 7
37.1.2
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ................... 7
37.1.3
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 7
Core Network OSS Training Path ............................................................................................................................... 7

38.1
39
iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT) ............................................................................................ 7
iManager M2000 Training Path .................................................................................................................. 7
Core Network OSS Training Courses ......................................................................................................................... 7

39.1
iManager M2000 Training Courses ............................................................................................................ 7

39.1.1
iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring Engineer Training......................................................................... 7
39.1.2
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN) ................................................................................. 7
39.1.3
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP) .................................................................................... 7
39.1.4
iManager M2000 Service Feature Training ........................................................................................ 7
39.1.5
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN SingleServer) ............................ 7
39.1.6
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP SingleServer) ............................... 7
39.1.7
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN HA) ............................................ 7
39.1.8
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP HA) .............................................. 7
39.1.9
iManager M2000 PRS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
39.1.10
iManager M2000 Administrator Training - Europe Only ..................................................................... 7
39.1.11
iManager M2000 Delta Training ......................................................................................................... 7
39.1.12
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster)Training Path ............... 7
- 25 -
1 Huawei Training&Certification Service

1.1 ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution
With the constant development of the information and communications technology (ICT) industry, IP, IT, and CT
applications gradually converge. New technologies such as Internet of Things (IoT) and mobile broadband will bring
an infinite number of opportunities to the ICT industry. The growing convergence of ICT technologies will trigger
tremendous industry transformations, challenging the knowledge system and skills of those working in the industry,
"Knowledge convergence, cross-field skills, and standards evolution" have become new criteria for assessing
qualified ICT talents.
Huawei launches its training solution covering all ICT technical fields. Huawei developed this training solution by
leveraging its years of experience in developing ICT talent and its deep insight into industry trends. This solution fully
encompasses Huawei's Cloud-Pipe-Device convergence technology and covers IP, IT, CT, and ICT convergence
technologies. It is the only training program of its kind in the industry that covers all ICT technical fields. Additionally,
this training solution is a sophisticated training program that covers new technologies, new ideas, and new industry
trends, leading the way in ICT technical certification to help enterprises enhance the all-round development.
1.2 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei

products and solutions
Training services as an important part of Huawei solutions, relying on the platform of Huawei overall, focus on
human capacity development needs, to help customer improve their employees' professional skills, team capacity
and organizational performance, to be the most reliable partner for customer.
Huawei relying on a deep understanding of the ICT industry, based on the service lifecycle PDIOI (Plan, Design,
Implement, Operate and Improve) model, through a series of modular product training, technical topics, solution
training to meet government, power, financial, energy, transportation, health care, education and enterprise ICT
employee cultivation requirement, and help customers successfully deploy, operation and optimization of Huawei's
products and solutions.
Huawei training services provide customers with professional, practical, effectiveness learning and development
solutions; learning brings capacity development, the capacity development bring enterprise growth
Through a full range of product training to help customer quickly understand the product characteristics,
become competent in using;
Through the matching technical topic and product character, grasp the products and solutions deployment, and
operation and maintenance capability;
Through simulating real solutions scenarios training, fast, accurate, practical way to enhance customer.
The figure below shows that based on the service lifecycle PDIOI model, Huawei provide matching product and
knowledge training solution, including installation and commissioning, operation and maintenance, advanced
technical topic and planning and design training. Each stage in the full life cycle of PDIOI,Huawei has different kinds
of innovative patented tools and standard processes during each stage of full lifecycle, which can ensure we deliver
the service to you with high quality and efficiency and save your cost.
1.3 Learning Path

For beginners, it is recommended that you participate in technical fundamental training;
After you master general technology, you can select the corresponding product operation and maintenance training
base on specific product;
After you master the basic technical and familiar with the product characteristics, you can choose the advanced
technical training and planning&design training for further enhance.
Plan & Design

Planning and Design Training
XXX Design Training
Xd
Implement & Operate
Improve
Operation and Maintenance Training
Advanced Technology Training
XXX Product Installation and

Commissioning Training
Xd
XXX Product Basic Operation

and Maintenance Training
Xd
XXX Advanced Technology

Training
Xd
XXX Product Features

Training
Xd
XXX Product Operation and

Maintenance Training (Including
the Basic O/M Training)
Xd
Fast-Track
XXX Product Operation and
Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Xd
Technical Fundamental
Training
Xd
1.4 Training Instructors

Huawei instructor: More than 500 full time instructors, 70% of them are 10 years working experience on developing,
project management and excellent teaching skills.
Huawei Authorized Learning Partner (HALP) instructor: HALP refers to a professional training organization that is
authorized by Huawei to implement Huawei's product Training Courses under Huawei's supervision and
management after passing its assessment. The HCSI refers to an instructor who is certificated by Huawei and
employed by an HALP, Authorized Learning Partner information Query click
http://enterprise.huawei.com/en/training/join/search_training_agency/index.htm
1.5 Training Methods

For the convenience of customer, Huawei and HALP may offer on-site training, localize training, centralize training
and E-Learning;
On-site training: on-site face-to-face training focused on hardware installation, routine maintenance, practical
and targeted content.
Localize training: Localized face-to-face training in the partner lab, training courses should be partner demand
design, has a strong relevance and timeliness.
Centralized training: Face-to-face training in authorized training partner or in Huawei training center can be
more comprehensive, in-depth grasp of Huawei's products and technical knowledge and skills.
E-Learning Training: can get a quick, convenient learning service by the electronic platform
2 Enterprise IP Training Path

2.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path
HCIE-RS Huawei Certified Internetwork

Expert - Routing and Switching
Expert
Professional
15d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN
Implementing Enterprise
Routing Network
6d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN
Implementing Enterprise
Switching Network
4d
HCNA (HCDA)-HNTD
Huawei Networking
Technology and Device
8d
Associate
Elective Guide
Follow the paths to learn.
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP
Improving Enterprise
Network Performance
5d
2.2 WLAN Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
Associate
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to
Medium-sized Business WLAN
5d
Elective Guide
HCNA(HCDA) or the similar knowledge is recommended for HCNA-WLAN.
The Fast-Track training and certification is design for the audiences who have obtained the same level technical certificate in the
industry.
2.3 Huawei Routing and Switching Product Features Training (Routing and
Switching Field Engineer Training) Path
HCNA (HCDA)
Huawei Certified Network Associate
8d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)
Huawei Certified Network Professional

- Routing and Switching
15d
Huawei Routing and

Switching Field Engineer
Training
5d
Huawei Certified Routing and

Switching Field Engineer
Advanced Technology
Training
Routing and Switching Expert
25d
HCIE-RS
Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert

- Routing and Switching
15d
Elective Guide
HCNA(HCDA) is required and HCNP-RS(HCDP) is recommended for attending Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer
Training.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
2.4 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path

IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training
IP Network Technology
Fundamental Training
1d
Huawei VRP System
Training
1d
IP Technology Fundamentals
Training (Fast-Track)
5d
Enterprise LAN
Technology Training
Enterprise WAN
Technology Training
2d
5d
Enterprise Network Engineer
Enterprise IP Routing
Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
5d
Enterprise IP Multicast
Technologies Training
Enterprise IP VPN
5d
Enterprise IP Multicast
Technical Expert
Enterprise QoS
Enterprise MPLS VPN

5d
Enterprise IP VPN
Technical Expert
Enterprise MPLS TE
Enterprise HA
1d
Enterprise QoS
Technical Expert
3d
1d
Enterprise HA
Technical Expert
5d
Enterprise MPLS
Technical Expert
Enterprise IPv6
Technology Training
5d
Enterprise IPv6
Technical Expert
Elective Guide
HCNP-RS(HCDP) or the similar knowledge is required for attending Advanced Technology Training programs.
2.5 NE Routers Training Path
Plan & Design

Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Implement & Operate
Improve
NE Routers Installation and

Advanced Technology
Training
1d
1d
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
25d
NE Routers Basic Operation

1d
2d
2d
NE Routers Operation and

10d
Data Center Network Design

Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training
1d
Fast-Track
NE Routers Operation and
(Fast-Track)
5d
Campus Routers(NE/AR)
Operation and Maintenance
Training(Fast-Track)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
2.6 AR G3 Routers Training Path
Plan & Design

Outlines Training
Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
AR G3 Routers Installation and

1d
1d
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation

2d
2d
AR G3 Routers Operation and

10d

Design Training

Training

Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Fast-Track
AR G3 Routers Operation and
(Fast-Track)
5d
Campus Routers(NE/AR)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide
10
2.7 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path
Plan & Design

Outlines Training
1d
Implement & Operate
Improve
AR Series Industrial Routers

Training
5d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d

Design Training
1d
Training
2d
Training
1d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide
11
2.8 AR G3 Voice System Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Huawei AR G3 Voice System

Design

Installation and Commissioning
1d
Audio Record Technology
Session Border Controller

Technology
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic

Configuration and Operation
Fast-Track
Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR
G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System
Design (Fast-Track)
3d
2d
2d
3d
3d
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced
Configuration and Operation (including
Basic Configuration and Operation)
5d
Fast-Track
Audio Record and Session
Border Controller Technology
(Fast-Track)
3d

Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1d
Fast-Track
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation
and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
4d
Fast-Track
Fundamental of VoIP Technology
(Fast-Track)
3d
5d
Elective Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using AR G3 voice system.
Electing by customer: System Designer/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to System

Design/Configuration and Operation/Installation and Commissioning.
Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track).
For more voice courses, please refer to the UC training catalog.
12
2.9 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
Chassis Switches
(S97/S93/S77) Installation and
1d
1d
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)

Basic Operation and
2d
2d

Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
10d

Outlines Training

Design Training

Training

Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Fast-Track
5d
Campus Switches (S series)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide
13
2.10
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)

Training
1d
1d

Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d
2d

Training (Including the Basic
O/M Training)
5d

Outlines Training

Design Training

Training

Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Fast-Track
Campus Switches (S series)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide
14
2.11
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
1d
Data Center Switches

(CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation
and Commissioning Training
1d
1d
Data Center Switches (CE128/

CE68/CE58) Basic Operation
2d
2d

CE68/CE58) Operation and
10d

Outlines Training

Design Training

Training

Training
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Fast-Track
CE68/CE58) Operation and
(Fast-Track)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
Elective Guide
15
2.12
WLAN (AC/AP) Training Path
Plan & Design

WLAN Planning and Design
Training
Implement & Operate
Improve
WLAN Installation and

1d
5d
WLAN Basic Operation and
2d
WLAN Operation and
Maintenance Training(Including
5d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
WLAN Technology Basics

Training
2d
Elective Guide
16
2.13
MSCG(ME60) Training Path
ME60 Products 1st Line

2d
ME60 Products 1st Line

Maintenance Engineer
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance
ME60 Products IPTV Service
Training
Features Training
10d
ME60 Products 2nd Line
4d
ME60 Products 2nd
Line IPTV Service

ME60 Products Troubleshooting
Training
5d
ME60 Products 3rd

Line Maintenance
Engineer
Training Path
Target Audience
Elective Guide
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
17
2.14
PTN Product Training Path
Plan & Design

PTN Network Planning and

Design Training
3d
Implement & Operate
Improve
PTN Products Installation and

2d
PTN Products 3rd Line

5d
PTN Products 1st Line

2d
PTN Products 2nd Line

10d
Fast-Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
(Fast-Track)
14d
5d
18
2.15
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path

eSight Operation and Maintenance Training
eSight Basic Operation
eSight Operator
1d
Training Path
Target Audience
eSight Operation and

2d
eSight Operation and

eSight Advanced Feature Training

eSight WLAN
Management Training
0.5d
WLAN Administrator
eSight IPSec VPN
Management Training
0.5d
IPSec VPN Administrator

eSight Access
Management Training
0.5d
End User Administrator
eSight MPLS VPN

Management Training
0.5d
eSight SLA Management

Training
0.5d
MPLS VPN Administrator

eSight Smart Report
Management Training
0.5d
SLA Administrator
eSight NTA (Network Traffic
Analyzer) Management
Training
0.5d
Report Administrator
Network Monitor /
Traffic Analyzer
eSight Data Center

Management Training
0.5d
Data Center Administrator
eSight Product Expert
Elective Guide
eSight Basic Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operators.
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operation and maintenance engineer.
Choose eSight Advanced Feature Training programs according to the licenses purchased by the audience.
19
2.16
Enterprise Network Design Training Path
Enterprise Network
Design Outlines Training
Enterprise Network
Design Engineer
1d
Enterprise Campus
Network Design Training
1d
Enterprise Network
Design Expert
Enterprise MPLS VPN

Design Training
Data Center Network

Design Training
1d
WLAN Planning and

Design Training
2d
Enterprise MPLS
VPN Design Expert
Data Center Network

Design Expert
Training Path
Target Audience
Elective Guide
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training is designed for general audience.
20
5d
Enterprise WLAN
Design Expert
3 Enterprise IP Training Courses

Enterprise IP Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Certification Training Programs
6 ~ 12
15
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
Huawei VRP System Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise LAN Technology Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise WAN Technology Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
6 ~ 12
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track)
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise QoS Technology Training
6 ~ 12
HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training

HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional Routing and Switching Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing
Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching
Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network
Performance Training
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN
Training
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs
Advanced Technology Training Programs
21
Enterprise HA Technology Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training
6 ~ 12
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including

NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

(Including the Basic O/M Training)
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance
AR Series Industrial Router Training
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance
Training
AR G3 Voice System Training
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and
Operation
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and
Operation (including the Basic Configuration and Operation)
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance
(Fast-Track)
Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs
22
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WLAN Technology Basics Training
6 ~ 12
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance
Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
WLAN(AC/ACU/AR/AP) Training Programs
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the

Basic O/M Training)
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and
AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation and
23
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
10
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training
6 ~ 12
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training
6 ~ 12
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
10
6 ~ 12
PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training
4 ~ 12
PTN Network Planning and Design Training
4 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
eSight WLAN Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight MPLS VPN Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight SLA Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight IPSec VPN Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight Smart Report Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight Access Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
eSight Data Center Management Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WLAN Planning and Design Training

MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
PTN Products Training Programs
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs

eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance
Training
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs

Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training
24
Enterprise Campus Network Design Training
6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training
6 ~ 12
Data Center Network Design Training
6 ~ 12
Level Description: : Basic Course
: Intermediate Course
25
: Advanced Course
: Expert Course
3.1 Certification Training Programs

3.1.1
HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training
Training Path
Describe the knowledge of IP address , Mask

and Subnet address planning
HCNA (HCDA)-HNTD
Huawei Networking Technology and Device
OARS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe the principles, functions and relevant

knowledge of common network protocols
8d
Describe how routers, switches and firewalls
Target Audience
work
Configure VLAN,STP,VRRP, Static Route, RIP
Those who hope to become a network associate
Routing Protocol, OSPF Routing Protocol, PPP
Those who hope to obtain HCNA(HCDA)
and FR
certificate
Perform the common methods of network
Prerequisites
maintenance and troubleshooting
A general familiarity with PC operation system
Duration
Objectives
8 working days
On completion of this program, the participants will
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
List Huawei networking devices

Describe the technology of Ethernet
26
3.1.2
HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and
Switching Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
OPRS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
6d
Configure OSPF
Configure BGP
Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,

RSTP and MSTP
4d
Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and

QinQ
Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
Describe the basic principle of network security

5d
List the features of USG

Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
Target Audience
List High Availability technology

Duration
Those who hope to become a network

professional
15 working days
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-RS(HCDP)
Class Size
certificate
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
HCNA(HCDA) certification or the similar
knowledge
27
3.1.3
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
be able to:
6d
Configure OSPF
Configure BGP
Target Audience
Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
Duration
professional
6working days
certificate
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12

knowledge
28
3.1.4
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
be able to:
4d
Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,

RSTP and MSTP
Target Audience
Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and

QinQ
professional
Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
Duration
certificate
4 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
knowledge
29
3.1.5
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training
Training Path
Objectives
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
be able to:
5d
Describe the basic principle of network security

List the features of USG
Target Audience
Describe IP QoS end-to-end process

List High Availability technology
Duration
professional
5 working days
certificate
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
knowledge
30
3.1.6
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training
Training Path
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to Medium-sized
Business WLAN
OAWL1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11

Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
List Huawei WDS network mode
Describe mesh network mode
5d
Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
Target Audience
List the advantages of 802.11n
Those who hope to become a network associate of
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 physical
WLAN
layer
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN certificate
Describe spread spectrum technology of
Prerequisites
802.11
Describe DSSS technology
Describe OFDM technology
A basic understanding of computer technology
Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar
Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol
knowledge
Outline the general network mode of WLAN
Objectives
Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN

Differentiate different applications of VLAN in
be able to:
WLAN service
Describe what WLAN is
Describe WLAN business configuration
Describe the development process of WLAN
processes of Huawei AC6605
technology
Configure the basic attributes of AC
List typical application scenarios of WLAN
Describe the basic features of Huawei product
technology
List the key features of Huawei product
Describe the functions and roles of WLAN
Describe the basic concepts of roaming
standards organizations
Outline the basic principles of roaming
Describe the related basic knowledge of RF
List the application scenarios of roaming
List working principle and specific property of
Describe security threat of WLAN
RF
Describe the related concepts of WIDS and
Describe the working frequency band of WLAN
WIPS
and the basic concepts of channel
Describe the related concepts of AAA
Describe the rules of the working frequency
Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption
band and channel in each country
techniques
List other technologies related to WLAN
Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile
Describe the latest Huawei product information
Describe the frame format of 802.11
List the application scenarios of Huawei
Differentiate three frame types and functions of
product
802.11
Describe the power supply mode of Huawei
Describe 802.11 media access control
product
mechanism
Configure Huawei VRP basic command
Analyze media access process of WLAN
Configure AC basic attributes
Describe the concepts of QoS
Upgrade the software of AC and AP
Configure WMM-profile
31
Configure Traffic-profile
Configure the basic information of AC
Describe the definition and functions of
Configure AP online
antenna
Configure AP-profile
Describe the main performance indicates of
Configure radio-profile
antenna
Configure service-set
List some common passive device
Configure AP region
List the basic process of the WLAN network
Configure AP binding profile
planning
Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of
List basic interference factors of WLAN
WLAN service
Describe the basic load-balancing ways of
Describe WLAN commonly used fault
WLAN
troubleshooting
List the typical application scenarios of WLAN
Describe WLAN common diagnostic
Describe the network planning processes of
commands and tools
WLAN
Describe the cause of some common failures
Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN
of WLAN
network planning ways
Use troubleshooting tools and troubleshoot
Describe the functional features of Huawei
some common failures
WLAN planning tool
Duration
Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN
5 working days
network
Class Size
List some functions of eSight

Configure WLAN service
Min 6, Max 12
32
3.1.7
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training
(Fast-Track 3 days)
Training Path
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to Medium-sized
Business WLAN Fast-Track 3 days
OAWLA Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Differentiate different applications of VLAN in

WLAN service
Describe WLAN business configuration
processes of Huawei AC6605
3d
Configure the basic attributes of AC
Target Audience
Describe the basic features of Huawei product
Those who hope to become a network associate of
List the key features of Huawei product
WLAN
Describe the basic concepts of roaming
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN certificate
Outline the basic principles of roaming
Those who have obtained the same level technical
List the application scenarios of roaming
certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain
Describe security threat of WLAN
Huawei certificate
Describe the related concepts of WIDS and
Prerequisites
WIPS
Describe the related concepts of AAA
Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption
techniques
Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile
knowledge
List the basic process of the WLAN network
Obtained the same level technical certificate in
planning
the industry
List basic interference factors of WLAN
Objectives
Describe the basic load-balancing ways of

WLAN
be able to:
List the typical application scenarios of WLAN
Describe the network planning processes of
WLAN
technology
Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN
network planning ways
technology
Describe the functional features of Huawei
Describe the latest Huawei product information
WLAN planning tool
List the application scenarios of Huawei
Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN
product
network
Describe the power supply mode of Huawei
List some functions of eSight
product
Configure WLAN service
Configure Huawei VRP basic command
Configure the basic information of AC
Configure AC basic attributes
Configure AP online
Upgrade the software of AC and AP
Configure AP-profile
Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology
Configure radio-profile
Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol
Configure service-set
Outline the general network mode of WLAN
Configure AP region
Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN
33
Duration
Configure AP binding profile

Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of
3 working days
WLAN service
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
34
3.1.8
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
Training Path
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei

Chassis Switches Routers
Huawei Routing and Switching Field

Engineer Training
OSRS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei

5d
Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of
Target Audience
Huawei Chassis Switches Routers

Describe the Characteristics Huawei Chassis
Operators and Maintainers
Switches Routers
Prerequisites
Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei
Describe the Positioning of Huawei Box
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar
Switches Routers
knowledge
Objectives
Box Switches Routers

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Box
Switches Routers
be able to:
Describe the Positioning of Huawei NE Routers
Huawei Box Switches Routers
Describe the Characteristics of Huawei Box
NE Routers
Switches Routers
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei NE
Routers
Box Switches Routers
Describe Functions of Huawei eSight
Huawei NE Routers
Enterprise Network Management System
Describe the Characteristics of Huawei NE
Describe the Networking Architecture of
Routers
Huawei eSight
Describe the Technical Architecture of Huawei
NE Routers
eSight
Describe the Positioning of Huawei AR G3
Describe Specifications of Huawei eSight
Routers
Describe Basic Issues of Environment
Maintenance
AR G3 Routers
Describe Methods of Cleaning the Equipment
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei AR

G3 Routers
Describe Indicators of Huawei Devices
Describe Precautions of Parts Replacement
Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe Steps of Parts Replacement
Describe the Characteristics of Huawei AR G3
List Common Maintenance Commands
Routers
Backup and Restore Configuration Files
View Alarms and Logs of Huawei Devices
AR G3 Routers
Describe the Concepts of Emergency
Describe the Positioning of Huawei Chassis
Maintenance
Switches Routers
Describe Common Flows for Emergency
35
Maintenance
Describe Principles of ARP Attack Defense
Describe Flow for Handling Hardware Faults
Describe Principles of MFF
Describe Flow for Handling Service Faults
Describe the Differences Between Firewalls

and Routers / Switches
Describe Common Steps of Software Upgrade
Describe Firewall Features of Huawei AR G3
Describe Precautions of Software Upgrade
Routers
Describe Steps of Installing Patches
Describe Firewall Features of Huawei S7700
Describe Basic Operations on the Bootrom
SPU
Describe Principles of ISSU
Describe Domain-based User Management on
Describe Application Scenarios of ISSU
Huawei Devices
Describe Operational Processes of ISSU
Configure Telnet Server on Huawei Devices
Describe Principles of BFD
Configure FTP Server / Client on Huawei
Describe Application Scenarios of BFD
Devices
Configure BFD on Huawei Devices
Configure TFTP Client on Huawei Devices
Describe Principles of Smart-Link /
Configure SSH Server on Huawei Devices
Monitor-Link
Describe Principles of SNMP
Describe Application Scenarios of Smart-Link /
Configure SNMP on Huawei Devices
Monitor-Link
Describe Steps of Installing Huawei eSight
Configure Smart-Link / Monitor-Link on Huawei
Describe Basic Operations of Huawei eSight
Devices
Describe Principles of SEP
Describe Principles of Stacking and CSS
Describe Application Scenarios of SEP
Describe Application Scenarios of Stacking and

CSS
Configure SEP on Huawei Devices
Configure Stacking and CSS on Huawei
Describe Principles of DLDP
Devices
Describe Application Scenarios of DLDP
Describe Principles of LLDP
Configure DLDP on Huawei Devices
Describe Application Scenarios of LLDP
List the Security Features of Huawei Routers
Configure LLDP on Huawei Devices
and Switches
Duration
List the differences of Security Features

Between Huawei Routers and Switches
5 working days
Describe Application Scenarios of Huawei
Class Size
Routers and Switches
Min 6, Max 12
Describe Security Threats on the Network

Access Layer
36
3.2 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Programs

3.2.1
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
Training Path
Describe basic structure of IP network

Describe TCP/IP basis
IP Network Technology Fundamental

ORS11
Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe IP addressing and routing

Describe network layer protocols
1d
Describe transit layer protocols
Target Audience
Describe application layer protocols

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
37
3.2.2
Huawei VRP System Training
Training Path
be able to:
Describe the VRP architecture
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center
1d
Perform VRP operate files
Target Audience
Operate VRP upgrade software

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
38
3.2.3
Enterprise LAN Technology Training
Training Path
Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN
Ethernet Basic Principle

ORS31
Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
1d
Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN
VLAN Principle and Configuration
Describe the principle of Super-VLAN

ORS32
1d
Configure the Super-VLAN

Describe the GARP principle
Describe the GVRP principle
GVRP Principle and Configuration

ORS33
Configure GVRP
0.5d
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle

and Configuration
ORS34 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

0.5d

STP Principle and Configuration
Describe calculation process of spanning tree

ORS35
2d
Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Target Audience
Describe the flood process of topology change

information
Configure the STP function
Prerequisites
Describe RSTP basic calculation process

Describe RSTP port status transition
Describe the function of RST BPDU
A basic understanding of IP technology
Describe the flooding process of topology
Objectives
change notification
Configure the RSTP function

be able to:
Describe the basic concept of MSTP
Describe the development of Ethernet
Describe the calculation process of inter-zone of

MST
technology
List the standards of Ethernet
Describe the MSTP advanced configuration
Describe the working principle of HUB
Configure the MSTP function

Duration
Describe the working principle of L2 switch

Describe the working principle of L3 switch
5 working days
List the Ethernet port features
Class Size
Configure the Ethernet interface
Min 6, Max 12
39
3.2.4
Enterprise WAN Technology Training
Training Path
Describe PPP principles

Describe LCP principles
WAN Interfaces Introduction and

PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
ORS41
Describe NCP principles

Describe MP principles
1d
Configure PPP and MP

Configure PPP authentication
FR/POS/HDLC Principles and
Configuration
Describe FR principles
Configure FR
1d
Describe POS principles
Target Audience
Describe SDH frame structure and multiplexing

methods
Identify common optical interfaces
Prerequisites
Configure POS interface

Describe HDLC principles
Configure HDLC
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
List common WAN protocols

List common WAN interfaces
40
3.2.5
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
Training Path
route backup
Configure static route
IP Routing Basis
ORS51
Configure static default route

Describe the principles of distance-vector
0.5d
routing protocols
Describe the routing loop issues and apply loop
RIP Protocol Feature and

Configuration
avoidance solutions
Describe the principles of RIP protocols
0.5d
Identify the similarities and differences between

RIPv1 and RIPv2
Configure RIP in the network
OSPF Feature and Configuration

ORS53
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link
1d
state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
IS-IS Feature and Configuration

ORS54
Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor

1d
relationship
Describe the route calculation process of
OSPF
BGP Feature and Configuration

ORS55
Configure OSPF routing protocol

Describe the origin of IS-IS protocol
1d
Describe the principles of IS-IS protocol

Compare IS-IS and OSPF protocols
Route Selection and Control
Feature
Configure IS-IS protocol

Describe BGP basic concepts
1d
Describe BGP working principles
Target Audience
Describe the route selection process of BGP

Configure BGP protocol
Describe route selection tools
Prerequisites
Describe routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Compare routing policy and policy-based route
Configure routing policy
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Describe the IP routing process

Describe fields in the routing table
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the concepts of load balance and
41
3.2.6
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track)
Training Path
Describe network layer protocols

Describe transit layer protocols
IP Network Technology Fundamental

ORS11
Describe application layer protocols

1d

Describe the function of VRP info- center
Huawei VRP System
ORS21

1d

VLAN Principle and Configuration

ORS32
Describe the inter-VLAN communication

principle
1d

Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and

Configuration
ORS34

0.5d

IP Routing Basics
ORS51

0.5d

OSPF Feature and Configuration

ORS53
Describe the concepts of load balance and

route backup
1d
Target Audience

Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
Planners and Designers
Administrators
state algorithm
Prerequisites
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
Describe OSPF neighbor relationship

Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Objectives
Configure OSPF routing protocol
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Describe basic structure of IP network
Class Size
Describe TCP/IP basis

Describe IP addressing and routing
Min 6, Max 12
42
3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs

3.3.1
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training
Training Path
Differentiate the difference from IGMP versions

Configure the IGMP protocol
IP Multicast Technologies Basis

ORSA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Differentiate the classification of multicast

routing protocol
1d
List the features of common multicast routing

protocols
Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
IP Multicast Routing Technologies
Describe the join procedure of RPT and

2d
multicast source registration

Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT
to SPT
Inter-domain Multicast Technologies

Configure PIM-SM
List the key technologies of PIM SSM
2d
Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
Target Audience
Configure PIM SSM
Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
Administrators
Configure PIM-DM
Describe the basic principles of MSDP.
Prerequisites
Describe the RPF detection of MSDP.

Describe the
application of MSDP
Configure the MSDP
Describe the problems solved by the MBGP.

Describe the extensions of the MBGP.
knowledge
Describe the process that the MBGP transmit
Objectives
the IPv4 multicast routing table.
Configure the MBGP
be able to:
Duration
Describe the IP multicast concept
5 working days
Describe the IP multicast address architecture
Class Size
Describe the data forwarding procedure of IP

multicast
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the SPT and RPT concept

Describe the IGMP protocol principle
43
3.3.2
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training
Training Path
Describe IKE principles

Describe IPSec principles
IP VPN Technology Fundamentals

ORSB1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe IPSec application scenarios

Configure IPSec VPN
1.5d
Describe SSL principles

Describe SSL application scenarios
Configure SSL VPN
IP VPN Applications
Describe problems when deploy IPSec VPN
2d
Describe Huawei Efficient VPN solution

Configure Efficient VPN on Huawei AR G3
routers
Designing IP VPN
List Problems When Deploy VPNs

0.5d
Describe how NAT affects VPN deployment

and the solution
Describe how PMTU affects VPN deployment
Maintaining IP VPN
and the solution

Describe how VPN affects QoS deployment
1d
and the solution
Target Audience
Describe GRE over IPSec applications
Describe IPSec over GRE applications
Compare GRE over IPSec and IPSec over

GRE
Administrators
Configure GRE over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
Prerequisites
routers
Configure IPSec over GRE on Huawei AR G3
routers
Describe security risks of VPDN
knowledge
Describe common VPDN solutions
Objectives
Compare IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over
IPSec
be able to:
Configure IPSec over L2TP on Huawei AR G3
Describe concepts of IP VPN
routers
List common VPN technologies
Configure L2TP over IPSec on Huawei AR G3

routers
Describe GRE principles
Describe requirements when deploy VPN on
Describe GRE application scenarios
Hub-Spoke network
Configure GRE VPN

Describe concepts of LAC and LNS
Describe Huawei DSVPN solution
Describe L2TP principles
Describe DSVPN principles
Describe L2TP application scenarios
Configure DSVPN on Huawei AR G3 routers
Configure L2TP VPN
List Huawei IP VPN products
Describe IPSec technical architecture
Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei
44
routers
Choose appropriate devices and technology for

enterprise VPN

switches
Describe eSight VPN management features

Use eSight basic functions

firewalls
Use eSight VPN management functions
Describe Huawei eSight VPN management
Describe ideas when troubleshooting IP VPN
features
List common reasons of IP VPN failure
Describe Huawei VPN client features
List common commands when troubleshooting
Distinguish differences of IP VPN features of
IP VPN
different products
Analyze IP VPN Troubleshooting cases
Describe applications of different products in IP
Duration
VPN
5 working days
Describe methodology of network designing
Class Size
Analyze enterprise VPN requirements

Describe typical VPN application
Min 6, Max 12
45
3.3.3
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training
Training Path
Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism

Describe the process of LDP session
MPLS Technology and Configuration

ORSC1 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
establishment
Describe LDP label space
1d
Describe LDP label distribution mode

Describe LDP label control mode
Describe LDP label retention mode
MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration

ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
Describe the PHP

1d
List the methods of MPLS loop detection

Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
MPLS L2VPN Technologies and Configuration

ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
count
Configure MPLS
2d
Configure LDP
Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
MPLS L3VPN Extended Application

ORSD3 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
MPLS VPN
1d
Describe the mechanisms of the route and
Target Audience
label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the process of data forwarding of
BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
Administrators
configuration
Prerequisites
Describe the extended BGP attributes used by

MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on control plane
of MPLS BGP VPN
knowledge
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
Objectives
MPLS BGP VPN

Describe VPN Characteristics
Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN
be able to:
and L3 VPN
Analyze the process of IP forwarding
Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
encapsulation
Describe the basic principle of MPLS
Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
forwarding
List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific
List the applications of MPLS
scenario
Describe MPLS structure feature that contains
Describe CCC VLL Topology
two planes
Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
Describe MPLS label structure
Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC
Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
mode
46
Configure CCC in a simple network topology
MPLS VPN backbone
Describe Martini VLL Topology
Describe how to access the Internet via

different interfaces between CE and PE
Describe how public tunnel and VC connection

are established in Martini VLL
Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF

VPN
Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini

VLL
Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF

routing information
Describe the difference between Martini VLL

and SVC VLL
Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN
Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple
Analyze the application and configuration of
networking topology
Sham-link
Describe the features of VPLS
Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN

Inter-AS solutions
Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and

VC Label
Compare the three solutions processing in

control plane and data plane
Describe how does VPLS forward data and

avoid loop
Duration
Configure VPLS in a simple networking
5 working days
topology
Class Size
Configure VPLS
Min 6, Max 12
Describe how to access the Internet via the ISP

Describe how to access the Internet via the
47
3.3.4
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training
Training Path
Describe the basic and extension principle of

RSVP protocol
MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration

ORSE
Analyze the path setup process of MPLS TE

Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
3d
using static routes
Target 1Audience
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE

using automatic route
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS using
policy routing
Administrators
Describe the mode of traffic protection
Prerequisites
Describe the principle of path protection
Describe the principle of fast reroute
Describe DS-TE functions
Describe DS-TE applicable environment
knowledge
Describe the rationale of Tunnel Preemption
A general familiarity with MPLS
Describe the rationale of Tunnel
Objectives
Re-optimization
Describe the rationale of
Load Sharing
be able to:
Describe the rationale of Automatic Bandwidth

Adjustment
Describe detailed TE concepts and models
Describe the combining of MPLS TE with
Describe MPLS TE background and functional
MPLS VPN
modules
Configure MPLS TE in VRP system
Describe the content of MPLS TE information

distribution
List MPLS TE application
Describe the way of MPLS TE information
Design MPLS TE according to the requirement
flooding
Duration
Describe the process of MPLS TE information
3 working days
distribution
Class Size
Analyze the process of CSPF algorithm

Describe the other constrained conditions
Min 6, Max 12
which influence the process of path calculation

Describe the signaling protocol of MPLS TE
48
3.3.5
Enterprise QoS Technology Training
Training Path
Objectives
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1
be able to:
1d
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Target Audience
Describe Diff-Serv model

Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Prerequisites
Configure QoS
Duration

1 working day
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
49
3.3.6
Enterprise HA Technology Training
Training Path
be able to:
Describe the basic concept of HA
HA Technology
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
1d
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Target Audience
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Prerequisites
Configure BFD on VRP platform

Duration

1 working day
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
50
3.3.7
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training
Training Path
Compare protocol packet and LSA changes of

OSPFv3 with OSPFv2
IPv6 Technology
ORSH1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe OSPFv3 protocol operation

Configure OSPFv3
5d
Describe IS-IS extensions for IPv6
Target Audience
Describe IS-IS extensions for Multi-Topology
Configure IS-ISv6
Monitoring Staffs
Describe MP-BGP attributes
Administrators
Describe how the MP-BGP implements the IPv6

inter-domain routing
Prerequisites
Configure BGP+
Describe the function and basic principle of MLD
Differentiate between MLDv1 and MLDv2
Describe the function of SSM Mapping
knowledge
Configure MLD
Objectives
Describe the basic principle of IPv6 PIM-SM

Describe the address structure and working
be able to:
principle of Embedded-RP
Describe the reason for upgrading IPv4 to IPv6
Describe the working principle of PIM-SSM
Describe the IPv6 address structure and IPv6
Describe the typical application of IPv6 multicast
packet format
Configure PIMv6
Describe the packet types of ICMPv6
List classification of the ACL6
Describe the packet types of ICMPv6
Describe the application scenarios of ACL6
Describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process
Configure ACL6
Describe the working principle of IPv6 address
List roles of the transitional technologies of IPv6
auto configuration
Describe application situations of the transitional
Describe the working principle of IPv6 PMTU
technologies of IPv6
Describe the working principle of IPv6 DNS
Describe basic principles of the common
Configure IPv6 address
transitional technologies of IPv6
Configure IPv6 NDP
Configure common transitional technologies of
Configure IPv6 PMTU
IPv6
Configure IPv6 application
Describe the concept of the 6PE over MPLS
Describe the forwarding mechanism of IPv6
Describe the principle of 6PE over MPLS
unicast packets
Configure 6PE over MPLS
Describe the principle of RIPng
Duration
Differentiate between RIPng and RIPv2

5 working days
Describe the format and processing of RIPng
Class Size
packets
Configure RIPng
Min 6, Max 12
Differentiate between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2
51
3.4 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs

3.4.1
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
NE Series Routers Hardware Installation

ORT22
Lecture, Demonstration
be able to:
0.5d
Describe NE series routers installation process

List precautions when install NE series routers
Install NE series routers
Huawei VRP System

ORS21

0.5d
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
52
3.4.2
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe NE series routers hardware structure

Describe NE series routers board types and
NE Series Routers Introduction

ORT21
Lecture
functions
Identify NE series routers board
0.5d
Judge NE series routers board indicators and

functions
Describe NE series routers positioning and
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
application scenarios
1d
Describe NE series routers features Overview

NE20E-S Series Routers Routine

Maintenance
Lecture
ORT23

0.5d
Target Audience
List precautions for NE series routers routine

maintenance
Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
53
3.4.3
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
ORT21
be able to:
0.5d

functions
Huawei VRP System

ORS21

1d
functions
IP Routing Technologies
ORS5A Lecture, Hands-on exercise

3d

MPLS VPN Technologies

ORSDA Lecture, Hands-on exercise

3d
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

state algorithm
HA Technology
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
1d
Describe OSPF protocol packets

Configure OSPF protocol
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
1d
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT23
Lecture
IGP protocol
0.5d
Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Target Audience
Describe route selection tools and routing policy
Prerequisites
Analyze the process of IP forwarding

Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding
List the applications of MPLS

Describe MPLS structure
54
feature that contains
two planes
Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
Describe MPLS label structure
Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC

mode
Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding

Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
Configure CCC in a simple network topology
Describe the process of LDP session
Describe Martini VLL Topology
establishment
Describe how public tunnel and VC connection

are established in Martini VLL
Describe LDP label space
Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini
Describe LDP label distribution mode
VLL
Describe LDP label control mode
Describe the difference between Martini VLL and
Describe LDP label retention mode
SVC VLL
Describe the PHP
Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple
List the methods of MPLS loop detection
networking topology
Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
Describe the features of VPLS
Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and
count
VC Label
Configure MPLS
Describe how does VPLS forward data and avoid
Configure LDP
loop
Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
Configure VPLS in a simple networking topology
Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
Configure VPLS
MPLS VPN
Describe the mechanisms of the route and label
distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP
MPLS VPN
Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
configuration
Describe the extended BGP attributes used by

MPLS BGP VPN

Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of

MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
Configure QoS
Describe VPN Characteristics
Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN
maintenance
and L3 VPN
Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data
Duration
encapsulation
10 working days
Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
Class Size
List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific

scenario
Min 6, Max 12
Describe CCC VLL Topology
55
3.4.4
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path


Lecture
ORT21

0.5d

Huawei VRP System

ORS21
1d

state algorithm

3d


ORT23
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience

IGP protocol
Prerequisites
Objectives

maintenance
be able to:
Duration
5 working days
functions
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

functions
56
3.4.5
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe VRP8 platform new features

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction

ORT41
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
1d

Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup

3.5d


ORT43
Lecture
state algorithm
0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system

IGP protocol
Objectives

be able to:
Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware
structure
Describe NE20E-S series routers board types
List precautions for NE20E-S series routers
and functions
routine maintenance
Identify NE20E-S series routers board
Perform NE20E-S series routers routine
Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators
maintenance
and functions
Duration
Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning and

5 working days
Describe NE20E-S series routers features
Class Size
Overview
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the VRP development and history

Describe VRP platform features
57
3.4.6
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation

ORT12
be able to:
0.5d
Describe AR G3 router installation process

List precautions when install AR G3 routers
Install AR G3 routers
Huawei VRP System

ORS21

0.5d
Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
58
3.4.7
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
Describe AR G3 product positioning
AR G3 Product Introduction
Lecture
ORT11
Describe AR G3 hardware architecture

Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
0.5d
List AR G3 cards and modules

List AR G3 software features
Describe AR G3 application scenarios
Huawei VRP System

ORS21

1d

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT13
Lecture

0.5d
Describe the procedure and method for AR G3

router routine maintenance
Target Audience
List precautions for AR G3 router routine

Monitoring Staffs
maintenance
Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives
59
3.4.8
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs

ORT11
Lecture
0.5d
Administrators
Prerequisites
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
0.5d

Objectives
LAN Technologies
ORS3B Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
1.5d

WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP
Principle and Configuration
ORS41

1d

3d

HA Technology

1d

IP QoS Technology
ORSF1
1d

AR G3 Security Features
ORT14
information
1d
List common WAN protocols

List common WAN interfaces
ORT13
Lecture
Describe PPP principles

Describe LCP principles
0.5d
Describe NCP principles
60
Describe MP principles
Configure PPP and MP
Configure PPP authentication
state algorithm
Configure QoS
Describe NAT principles
List NAT features on AR G3 routers
Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
Describe NAT applications
Describe concepts of firewall
List common firewalls
List firewall features on AR G3 routers
IGP protocol
Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
maintenance
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
61
3.4.9
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path

ORT11
Lecture

0.5d

Huawei VRP System

ORS21
0.5d

state algorithm
1.5d

HA Technology

1d

AR G3 Security Features
ORT14

IGP protocol
1d

ORT13
Lecture

0.5d
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Describe NAT principles
Prerequisites
List NAT features on AR G3 routers
Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
Describe NAT applications
Describe concepts of firewall

List common firewalls
Objectives
List firewall features on AR G3 routers

Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
be able to:
62
Class Size
maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
Duration
5 working days
63
3.4.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)

Training Path

functions

Lecture
ORT21

0.5d
functions
Lecture
ORT11

0.5d

Huawei VRP System

ORS21

0.5d

2d

HA Technology

1d
state algorithm

ORT23
Lecture

0.25d


ORT23
Lecture

0.25d
IGP protocol
Target Audience
Prerequisites

Objectives
be able to:
64
maintenance
Duration
5 working days
Class Size

maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
65
3.5 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Programs

3.5.1
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Positioning
Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product
Architecture
Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution

ORT31
Lecture
List AR Series Industrial Router Modules and
1d
Cards
Outline AR Series Industrial Router Application
Scenarios
Huawei VRP System
Describe AR DCP Product Positioning

ORS21
0.5d
Describe AR DCP Product Functions

Outline AR DCP Product Application Scenarios
AR Industrial Router Routing & Switching

Features

ORT32
2d

HA Technology

1d

AR Series Industrial Routers Routine

Maintenance
Lecture
ORT33

0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Describe the concepts of load balance and route

backup
A basic understanding of IP network
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives

be able to:
state algorithm
Describe the Trend of IOT
Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router
Solution Scenarios
Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router
Solution Highlights
Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product
66
routine maintenance
Perform AR Series Industrial router routine

maintenance

Duration

5 working days
Class Size
Describe the procedure and method for AR

Min 6, Max 12
Series Industrial router routine maintenance

List precautions for Series Industrial router
67
3.6 AR G3 Voice System Training Programs

3.6.1
Training Path
Describe the classification of AR G3 voice

system
AR G3 Voice System Introduction and

Network Design
OUC41
Lecture
Perform the AR G3 voice system installation and

commissioning
0.5d
Describe the EGW system function

Describe the classification of EGW system
Perform the interconnection commissioning
AR G3 Voice System Installation and

Commissioning
OUC45 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
between AR G3 voice system and EGW

Describe the IAD function
1.5d
Describe the classification of IAD
Target Audience

between AR G3 voice system and IAD
Describe the IP phone function
Prerequisites
Describe the classification of IP phone

A general familiarity with network knowledge
between AR G3 voice system and IP phone
A general familiarity with communication theory
Duration
A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge

2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
be able to:
Describe the AR G3 voice system composition
Describe the AR G3 voice system function
68
3.6.2
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation
Training Path
system
Perform the AR G3 voice system configuration

Network Design
OUC41
Lecture

0.5d
Describe EGW system hardware architecture

Perform service configuration in the
interconnection configuration between AR G3
AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration

and Operation
OUC42
voice system and EGW

2.5d
Target Audience
Describe IAD hardware architecture

Prerequisites
voice system and IAD
Describe IP phone classification and function
voice system and IP phone
Objectives
Duration
3 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Min 6, max 16

69
3.6.3
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation
Training Path
system
Perform AR G3 voice system configuration

Network Design
OUC41
Lecture
Perform AR G3 voice system feature

configuration
0.5d
Perform AR G3 voice system advanced service

configuration
Perform AR G3 voice system maintenance

and Operation

2.5d

AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration

OUC43
2d

Target Audience

Prerequisites
Perform AR G3 voice system SBC configuration
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Min 6, max 16

70
3.6.4
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Training Path
Objectives
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
OUC44

be able to:
1d

system
Target Audience

List the fault handling process of AR G3 voice
Prerequisites
system
List the common fault of AR G3 voice system
Duration
1 working day

A general familiarity with AR G3 voice system
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
configuration
71
3.6.5
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Objectives
AR G3 Voice System Introduction

and Network Design
OUC41
Lecture

be able to:
0.5d


and Operation
system
2.5d

configuration
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance

and Troubleshooting
OUC44
between AR G3 system and other voice

devices
1d
Target Audience

system
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 16
72
3.7 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs

3.7.1
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives

Hardware Installation
OSW12

be able to:
0.5d
Describe Huawei chassis switch installation

process
List precautions when install chassis switch
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
Install Huawei chassis switch

0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
73
3.7.2
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
and modules
Describe Huawei chassis switch product data

Product Introduction
Lecture
OSW11
forwarding flows
Describe Huawei chassis switch product
0.5d
characteristic function
software features
Huawei VRP System

ORS21

1d

Routine Maintenance
OSW13
Lecture

0.5d
Target Audience
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei
Monitoring Staffs
chassis switch routine maintenance
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
Administrators
routine maintenance
Perform Huawei chassis switch routine
Prerequisites
maintenance
chassis switch parts replacement
Objectives
component replacement
Perform Huawei chassis switch component
replacement
be able to:
Duration

positioning
2 working days
Class Size
hardware architecture
Min 6, Max 12
Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards
74
3.7.3
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Target Audience

OSW11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Monitoring Staffs
0.5d
Administrators
Prerequisites
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
0.5d

Objectives
LAN Technologies
ORS3C Lecture, Hands-on exercise
2.5d
be able to:
positioning

3d
and modules
HA Technology

forwarding flows
1d

IP QoS Technology
software features
ORSF1
1d

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) ISSU

Features

0.5d

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) CSS
Features

0.5d

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine

Maintenance
Lecture
OSW13
0.5d

75
information
Configure QoS
Describe ISSU principles
List ISSU features on Huawei chassis switch
List ISSU features use restriction on Huawei
chassis switch
Use ISSU features upgrade chassis switch
Describe CSS principles
List CSS features on Huawei chassis switch
state algorithm
Differentiate mainborad CSS and linecard-direct
CSS
Configure Huawei chassis switch CSS features

routine maintenance
maintenance
IGP protocol
replacement

Duration

10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

76
3.7.4
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Training Path

and modules


forwarding flows
0.5d

Huawei VRP System

ORS21
software features
0.5d

LAN Technologies
1.5d


2d


Maintenance
OSW13
Lecture

0.5d
Target Audience
information
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
state algorithm
Prerequisites

Objectives

be able to:
IGP protocol
positioning
77
routine maintenance
replacement
Duration
maintenance
5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
78
3.7.5
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware

Installation
OSW22
be able to:
0.5d
Describe Huawei box switch installation process

List precautions when install Huawei box switch
Install Huawei box switch
Huawei VRP System

ORS21

0.5d
Target Audience

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
79
3.7.6
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules

Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27)

Lecture
OSW21
flows
List Huawei box switch characteristic function
0.5d
List Huawei box switch software features

Describe Huawei box switch application
scenarios
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
1d

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine

Maintenance
OSW23
Lecture

0.5d
Describe the contents and methods of routine

maintenance to Huawei box switches
Target Audience
List the notices of routine maintenance to box

Monitoring Staffs
switches
Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box
Administrators
switches
Prerequisites
Describe the methods and procedures of

replacing Huawei box switches components
Lists the matters needing attention of replacing
Huawei box switches components
Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches
Objectives
components
Duration
be able to:
2 working days
Describe Huawei box switch product positioning
Class Size
Describe Huawei box switch hardware

architecture
Min 6, Max 12
80
3.7.7
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product

Introduction
0.5d
Lecture
OSW21

architecture
flows
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
0.5d

scenarios
LAN Technologies

2d

VRRP Feature and Configuration

ORSGA Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security

Feature
1d


Maintenance
Lecture
0.5d
OSW23

Target Audience

information
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle
Configure VRRP protocol

List the security risks of network access layer
Prerequisites
List ACL types
List the application of ACL
Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
Objectives
Describe ARP security feature of Huawei

switches
81
Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches

List the defense of ARP attack
List the security features of Huawei switches
Configure the prevention of ARP attack
Configure MFF feature
components

Duration

5 working days
switches
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
switches
82
3.7.8
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Prerequisites

Lecture
OSW11
0.5d
Objectives
be able to:
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product

Introduction
Lecture
0.5d
OSW21

positioning
Huawei VRP System

ORS21
and modules
0.5d

forwarding flows
LAN Technologies
1.5d

software features
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security

Feature
1d
architecture
VRRP Feature and Configuration

0.5d
ORSGA Lecture, Hands-on exercise
flows

Maintenance
OSW13
Lecture

scenarios
0.25d


Maintenance
OSW23
Lecture
0.25d
Target Audience


83

maintenance
information
List the security risks of network access layer

List ACL types
List the application of ACL
switches
Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
switches
Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
switches
Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches
List the defense of ARP attack
List the security features of Huawei switches
Configure the prevention of ARP attack
components
Configure MFF feature
Duration
Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle

Configure VRRP protocol
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

routine maintenance
84
3.8 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs

3.8.1
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training Path
switch
List the precaution of hardware installation of CE
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58)

Hardware Installation
OSW34
series switch
Install CE series switch
0.5d

VRP8 Platform Introduction

0.5d
Target Audience
Configure the remote management function on

CE switch
Mange the configuration file on CE switch
Use the FTP function on CE switch
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
Describe the installation procedure of CE series
85
3.8.2
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path


OSW31
Lecture

0.5d

CE switch

1d
Describe the contents of maintenance of CE

series switch
Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE

Maintenance
OSW3A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
series switch
Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
0.5d
Describe the parts replacement of CE12800

Target Audience
series switch
Describe the procedure of system software
upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
Prerequisites
upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch

upgrade by FTP on
Objectives
CE12800 series switch

upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
Describe the ISSU software upgrade on
be able to:
CE12800 switch
Describe the hardware architecture of CE series

Duration
data center switch

Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE
2 working days
series data center switch
Class Size
List the features of CE series data center switch

Min 6, Max 12
Describe the application of CE series data center

switch
86
3.8.3
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

Training Path
Prerequisites

Lecture
OSW31
0.5d

knowledge
Objectives


0.5d
be able to:
data center switch
Huawei Data Center Network Solution

Lecture
OSW33

0.5d

switch
Data Center Network Key technologies


3.5d

LAN Technologies
ORS3D Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1.5d
CE switch
IP Multicast Routing Technologies

Describe the architecture of data center
2d
Describe the data center development

Describe Huawei data center network solution
Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1
Describe FCOE network basic architecture
1d
Describe the FCOE implementation of related

technologies
Describe DCB function technical principle

Maintenance
Describe the application in data center network

of FCOE
0.5d
Describe the background of TRILL
Target Audience
Describe the basic concept of TRILL

Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
87
Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
Describe the application of TRILL in modern
Describe the join procedure of RPT and multicast
network
source registration
Configure TRILL protocol
Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT

to SPT
Describe the principle of stack technology
Configure PIM-SM
Describe the stack technology realization on CE

switch
List the key technologies of PIM SSM

Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and

CE12800 switch
Configure PIM SSM
List the procedure of configuration of stack on
Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
TOR switch
Configure PIM-DM
CE12800 switch
Describe background of VS technology
Describe the realization of VS technology
Describe the principle of VS technology
Configure QoS
Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE
switch
series switch
Describe the background of VM virtual migration
Describe the technologies for VM virtual
series switch
migration
Describe the procedure of realization of VM
virtual migration
series switch
Describe the solution of Huawei data Center
network implementation
Describe STP functions
Describe STP implementation
Describe RSTP improvement compared with
STP
upgrade by FTP on
Describe MSTP calculation
Configure STP, RSTP, MSTP
CE12800 switch
Duration
10 working days
Differentiate the classification of multicast routing
Class Size
protocol
Min 6, Max 12
List the features of common multicast routing

protocols
88
3.8.4
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training Path


OSW31
Lecture

switch
0.5d


0.5d

CE switch
Huawei Data Center Network Solution

OSW33
Lecture

0.5d
Describe the architecture of data center

Describe the data center development
Describe Huawei data center network solution
Data Center Network Key technologies

Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
3d
Describe FCOE network basic architecture

Describe the FCOE implementation of related
technologies

Maintenance
Describe DCB function technical principle
Describe the application in data center network
0.5d
of FCOE
Target Audience
Describe the background of TRILL
Describe the basic concept of TRILL
Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
Prerequisites
Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network

Describe the application of TRILL in modern
network
Configure TRILL protocol
Describe the principle of stack technology
knowledge
Describe the stack technology realization on CE
Objectives
switch
Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and
be able to:
CE12800 switch
data center switch
TOR switch
89
CE12800 switch

series switch
Describe background of VS technology
Describe the realization of VS technology
Describe the principle of VS technology
Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE
switch
Describe the background of VM virtual migration
upgrade by FTP on
Describe the technologies for VM virtual
migration
Describe the procedure of realization of VM
virtual migration
CE12800 switch
Describe the solution of Huawei data center

Duration
network implementation
5 working days
series switch
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
series switch
90
3.9 WLAN(AC/AP) Training Programs

3.9.1
WLAN Technology Basics Training
Training Path
Know the mechanism and configuration of

communication between VLANs
WLAN Technology Basics

OWL0A Lecture, Hands-on exercise

2d
technology
Target Audience

technology
Describe the working frequency band of WLAN
Prerequisites
and the basic concepts of channel
Describe the rules of the working frequency
band and channel in each country
Objectives
List other technologies related to WLAN
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11
be able to:
Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
Describe IP route process
List Huawei WDS network mode
Describe the means of routing table
Describe mesh network mode
Differentiate the route load balance and route
Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
backup
List the advantages of 802.11n
Duration
Configure default route
2 working days
Know what VLAN is
Class Size
Know concepts about VLAN

Configure VLAN basic function
Min 6, Max 12
91
3.9.2
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Describe Huawei AC hardware features

Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture
WLAN Installation and Basic

OWL1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Install AC6605
Describe the models and usage scenarios of
1d
Huawei APs
Target Audience
Describe the basic installation of different types
APs
List the note during installation
Prerequisites
Complete different types APs installation
Describe the WLAN basic component
Use Huawei VRP basic command
Configure Basic Attributes of AC
knowledge
Upgrade AC and AP
Objectives
Duration
1 working day
be able to:
Class Size
Describe Huawei WLAN solution

Describe Huawei AC basic performance
Min 6, Max 12
List Huawei wireless AP
92
3.9.3
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel

Outline the typical Application of WLAN
WLAN Basic Operation and

OWL1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe the theory of operations when AC as

a L2 switch or gateway
3d
Describe the methods of AP management
Target Audience
Describe the AP boot sequence
Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
Prerequisites

Upgrade AC and AP
List the PoE components
Describe PoE budget
knowledge
Configure the equipment interface of POE
Objectives
Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the
AC
be able to:
Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
Huawei WLAN network
Configure the basic attribute of AC
List the encryption suites of WLAN
List the authentication methods of WLAN
Configure security-profile
Install AC6605
Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight
Configure WLAN business by wizard
Huawei APs
Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN
Duration
Aps
3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Differentiate the different between Fat AP and

Fit AP
93
3.9.4
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
Upgrade AC and AP
WLAN Operation and Maintenance

Training
OWL11
Describe PoE budget

5d
Target Audience
AC

Huawei WLAN network
Prerequisites
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives

be able to:
Describe the basic function of AC6605 LSW side
Configure the AC LSW's common functions
Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
List the method of WLAN reliability
Configure WLAN dual-link backup
Install AC6605
Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming
Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
Huawei APs
Configure WLAN roaming
Describe
Aps
the contents of user authority
management
Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist and
White list
Configure user group authorization
Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit
Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment
AP
scenarios
Describe the Fresnel Zone
Understand
Describe the theory of operations when AC as a
Radio Frequency Mathematics
Describe Huawei outdoor AP
L2 switch or gateway
List antennas characteristic
Describe how to select antennas
Describe WDS basic concept
List WDS application scenarios
Describe WDS setup
Configure WDS
94
Configure 802.11n basic
Describe the basic Characteristics of the WLAN

planner
Describe the principle of WLAN user load

balance
Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
Configure Huawei WLAN load balance
List the common fault of WLAN
Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the
Describe common fault troubleshooting of WLAN
AC6605
Duration
Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile
5 working days
Describe eSight WLAN management advance
Class Size
features
Use eSight batch operate AP
Min 6, Max 12
Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis
95
3.9.5
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path

Upgrade AC and AP
ACU Operation and Maintenance

Training
OWL21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe PoE budget
5d
Target Audience

AC
Prerequisites
Huawei WLAN network
knowledge
Objectives

be able to:
Describe the basic function of ACU LSW side
Configure the AC LSW's common functions
Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
Describe the ACU Concept and Function
List the method of WLAN reliability
Describe the ACU and S9300&S7700&S9700
Configure WLAN dual-link backup
Relationship
Describe the ACU Hardware Structure
Installing/Replacing ACU
Describe
Huawei APs
the contents of user authority
management
Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist
Aps
and White list
Configure user group authorization
Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN
deployment scenarios
Fit AP
Understand
Describe WDS basic concept
List WDS application scenarios
Describe WDS setup
Configure WDS
96
Describe the basic Characteristics of the

WLAN planner
Describe the principle of WLAN user load

balance
Configure Huawei WLAN load balance
Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the
Describe common fault troubleshooting of
ACU
WLAN
Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile
Duration
Describe eSight WLAN management advance
5 working days
features
Class Size
Use eSight batch operate AP
Min 6, Max 12
97
3.9.6
AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path

AC
AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation

OWL31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei WLAN network
3d
Configure the basic attribute of AR G3 WLAN

Target Audience

Prerequisites
Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN
knowledge
deployment scenarios
Objectives

Understand
be able to:
Describe MESH basic concept
List MESH application scenarios
Describe MESH setup
Configure WLAN MESH
Fit AP
Describe the basic Characteristics of the

WLAN planner
Describe common fault troubleshooting of

WLAN

Duration

Configure Basic Attributes of AR G3 WLAN
3 working days
Upgrade AR G3 WLAN and AP
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Describe PoE budget

98
3.9.7
WLAN Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Describe the development process of

encryption techniques
WLAN Planning and Design

OWL0E
Lecture, Hands-on exercise,

Case-study
Describe the development of authentication

techniques
5d
Use protocol analyzer software
Target Audience
Describe authentication architecture of WPA
Describe AAA basic principle
Administrators
Configure WPA dot1X(EAP-PEAP)

Configure Radius filter attribute and
Prerequisites
management authority between users
List extended security technology that Huawei
WLAN supports
HCNA-WLAN certification or similar knowledge
Configure various security authentication
Objectives
techniques in AC
Describe scenarios of Huawei outdoor WLAN
deployment
be able to:
List Huawei outdoor AP models and their
Describe the basic principles of WLAN
features
designing
Describe the basic process of WLAN designing
Describe dBi and antenna pattern
List Huawei WLAN devices
Choose the right outdoor antenna
Differentiate the application features of different
Describe the basic concepts of WDS

List the common applications of WDS
network modes
Use WLAN planner to design WLAN
Use WDS configuration command
Describe the application features of small and
List the basic protocols for wireless network

management
medium-sized enterprise WLAN
Use NTP protocol and syslog protocol to
List the common used WLAN deployment
configure time of AC
modes of small and medium-sized enterprise
Describe the principle of SNMP protocol
Plan the VLAN\route\channel of small and

medium-sized enterprise WLAN
Configure the SNMP parameters of AC
Describe the application features of large-scale
Use eSight to discover devices
enterprise WLAN
Use eSight wizard to configure WLAN
List the common used WLAN deployment
Use eSight to detect WLAN devices
modes of large-scale enterprise
Use eSight to manage AP
Design WLAN HA feature
Configure WLAN wireless service-set
Design WLAN voice
Design WLAN expandability feature
Duration
Design WLAN advanced security feature

5 working days
Design outdoor WLAN
Class Size
Estimate the advantages and disadvantages of

WLAN Network Design approach
Min 6, Max 12
List security threat types of WLAN
99
3.10
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
3.10.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
VRP System Operation
be able to:
Describe ME60 product hardware structure
ODA02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Describe ME60-X series products hardware

structure
Describe ME60 product feature
ME60 Product Introduction
Describe the VRP system structure

ODB01
Lecture, LVC
0.5d
Describe the basic configuration and

commands
Upgrade VRP system
ME60 Product Routine Maintenance

ODB04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Configure the VRP user logging authentication

Configure FTP service
1d
Describe basic troubleshooting process of VRP

system
Target Audience
Describe basic BRAS technologies
ME60 product 1st line maintenance engineer
Describe ME60 product routine maintenance
Prerequisites
Duration
A basic understanding of data communication
2 working days
A general understanding of telecom network
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
100
3.10.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path
A general understanding of routing basics

Objectives
ME60 Product Introduction

ODB01
Lecture, LVC

0.5d
be able to:
Describe ME60 product hardware structure
Describe ME60-X series products hardware
structure
ME60 Routing Features Operation and

Troubleshooting
ODB05
Describe ME60 product feature
1.5d
Describe BRAS OSPF routing protocol features

Describe BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
Configure BRAS OSPF routing protocol
ME60 BRAS Features Operation and

Troubleshooting
ODB06
features
Configure BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
4d
Describe RADIUS protocol principle

Describe DHCP protocol principle
Describe PPP and PPPoE protocol principle
ME60 L2TP Features Operation and

Troubleshooting
ODB07
Describe ME60 PPP service features and

1d
realization
Describe ME60 IP service features and
realization
ME60 Multicast Features Operation and

Troubleshooting
ODB08
Describe ME60 leased line service feature and

realization
1d
Describe ME60 BRAS service features

troubleshooting
Configure ME60 PPP service features
ME60 QoS Features Operation and

Troubleshooting
ODB09
Configure ME60 IP service features

1d
Configure ME60 leased line service feature

Describe ME60 L2TP features and realization
Configure ME60 L2TP feature
Describe ME60 QoS feature and realization
ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features

Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB17
Configure ME60 QoS feature
1d
Describe ME60 RUI feature and realization

Configure ME60 RUI feature
Target Audience
Duration
ME60 product 2nd line maintenance engineer
10 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
At least one year of experiences in the operation or
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance of data communication equipment

A general understanding of TCP/IP
101
3.10.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature and
ME60 IPTV Service Features

realization
Describe ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
4d
and realization
Describe ME60 MQE feature and realization
Target Audience
Describe ME60 IPTV solution features

Describe IPTV bear network multicast
ME60 product IPTV service maintenance engineer
deployment solutions
Prerequisites
Configure ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature
Attended ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance
Configure ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
Training
Duration
A good understanding of datacom network

protocols
4 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
102
3.10.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Objectives
ME60 Products Troubleshooting

be able to:
Perform ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting
5d
Perform ME60 IPoE features troubleshooting

Perform ME60 leased line features
Target Audience
troubleshooting
ME60 product 3rd line maintenance engineer or
Perform ME60 multicast features
expert from technical supporting team
troubleshooting
Prerequisites
Perform ME60 QoS troubleshooting

Duration
Attended ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance

Training
5 working days
A good understanding of datacom network
Class Size
protocols
Min 6, Max 12
103
3.10.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training

Training Path
Objectives
iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration

ODM06
be able to:
Describe the architecture and main features of
1d
U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000
List the main functions of U2000
U2000 System Introduction
Describe the basic concepts in alarm and

ONU01
0.5d
performance management of U2000

Perform the browse and setting operation for
alarm
U2000 Alarm and Performance

Management
ONU02
Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
Perform the basic response operation for

common alarm events
0.5d

performance events
Target Audience
Manage ME60 by using U2000
U2000 operator and maintainer
Deploy services on ME60 by using U2000
IP network routine monitor and maintainer
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Having the basic Knowledge of Huawei ME60
Class Size
product
Min 6, Max 12
104
3.11
PTN Products Training Programs
3.11.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path
Objectives
PTN Products Hardware Description

ODP03
be able to:
1d
ODP05
Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure
Describe PTN 3900&1900 Installation and the
1d
Describe PTN 950&910 Installation and the

precautions
Duration
2 working days
PTN series installation and commissioning engineer
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Having an overview of PTN products

applications
Target Audience
precautions
PTN Products Installation and

Commissioning
Having an overview of telecommunications
105
3.11.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

Lecture, Demo
ODP03
be able to:
1d
Describe PTN 3900&1900 On-Site

maintenance
PTN Products Field Maintenance

ODP06
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in

NOC
Describe 3900&1900 troubleshooting
Describe 950&910 troubleshooting
Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
Describe the tools and method of routine
Duration
Target Audience
2 working days
Class Size
PTN series 1st line /field maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12

applications
Describe PTN 950&910 On-Site maintenance
maintenance in NOC
ODP07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
106
3.11.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path
Prerequisites

ODP03
Lecture, Demo

applications
1d
Objectives
PTN Products Features Description
ODP04
Lecture
be able to:
1d
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in

NOC
ODP07
PTN Products Public Principle

ODP08
Lecture
2d
PTN Products Public Features

ODP09
Lecture, Demo
2d
PTN Products Basic Configuration

ODP10 Hands-on exercise, Demo
1d
PTN Products Service Configuration

2d
Describe TCP&IP basic concepts
Describe Ethernet basic principle
Describe basic IP routing protocol works
Describe MPLS basic concepts
Describe PTN 3900&1900 software feature
Describe PTN 950&910 software feature
Describe PTN products PWE3 technology
Describe PTN products control plane
Describe PTN products QoS technology
Describe PTN products protection technology
Describe PTN products packet clock technology
Configure PTN products basic parameters
Configure PTN products interfaces
Configure PTN products control plane
Configure PTN products MPLS tunnel
Configure PTN products CES service
Configure PTN products ATM service
Configure PTN products E-Line service
Configure PTN products E-LAN service
Configure PTN products E-AGGR service
Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
Describe the tools and method of routine

maintenance in NOC
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting

ODP13
Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting

process
Duration
10 working days
Target Audience
Class Size
PTN series 2nd Line maintenance engineer
Min 6, Max 12
107
3.11.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
PTN Products Advanced Configuration

be able to:
2d
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
Configure PTN products QoS features
Configure PTN products protection
Deploy PTN products integrated services
Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting

process
ODP13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Describe PTN products alarm and performance

analysis
PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting

ODP14
Lecture, Case-study
troubleshooting sase
2.5d
Locate and eliminate PTN products faults
Duration
Target Audience
5 working days
Class Size
PTN series 3rd Line maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Describe PTN products common
Min 4, Max 12
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance

Training
108
3.11.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training

Training Path
Plan the PTN network management and DCN
Plan the equipment types according to the

network requirement
PTN Network Planning and Design
Plan the PTN equipment boards
Plan the PTN network protections
Plan the PTN network synchronization
Plan the PTN network QoS
Design the PTN network layers
Design the PTN network slots allocation
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance
Design the PTN equipment parameters
training
Design the MPLS tunnel parameters
Design CES /ATM /Ethernet services
ODP15
Lecture, Case-study
3d
Target Audience
PTN series network planning and design engineer
Prerequisites
Objectives
parameters
Duration
be able to:
Describe the PTN network planning process
Collect the network requirements information
Plan the PTN network layers
Plan the PTN network services
3 working days
Class Size
Min 4, Max 12
109
3.12
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training
Programs
3.12.1 eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe the steps of accessing a resource

Describe about physical resource management
eSight Enterprise NM Junior Operation and

Maintenance
ONM1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise
functions
Use link resource management functions
1d
Use electronic label management features
Target Audience
Use about NE Explorer Describe
Describes the monitoring network alarm steps
Monitoring Staffs
Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
Administrators
Describes the setting alarm mask steps
Prerequisites
Describes the remote alarm notification

procedure
Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration
files
Describe common operations for managing NE
Objectives
configuration files
Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
files
be able to:
Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up
Describe the basic concepts of network
parameters
management
Duration
Describe the network management functions

Describe the network management component
1 working day
Describe the enterprise network overview
Class Size
Describe the basic functions of eSight
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the networking mode of eSight system

Describe eSight related indicators Describe
topology management
110
3.12.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the

Basic O/M Training)
Training Path
Describes the monitoring network alarm steps

Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and

Maintenance
ONM11
Describes the setting alarm mask steps

Describes the remote alarm notification
2d
procedure
Target Audience
Describes the basic concepts of performance
management
Monitoring Staffs
Describes the performance monitoring process
Administrators
Describes the ways to browsing performance

monitoring data
Prerequisites
Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration
files
Describe common operations for managing NE
configuration files
Objectives
Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration

files
Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up
be able to:
parameters
Describe the basic concepts of network
Describe an overview of the functions provided
management
by the smart configuration tool
Describe the network management functions
Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
Describe the network management component
template
Describe the enterprise network overview
Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
Describe the basic functions of eSight
plan sheet
Describe the networking mode of eSight system
Describe the functions of Deployment record
Describe eSight related indicators
management
Describe the installation profile
Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump
Master the eSight installation and uninstall steps
Describe querying logs
Master eSight license function and application
Describe Lower-Layer NMS
Describe the user authority control and managed
Describe licenses management
domain management of eSight
Describe backing up and restoring the database
Describe topology management
Describe NE packages management
Describe the steps of accessing a resource
Duration
Describe about physical resource management

functions
2 working days
Use link resource management functions
Class Size
Use electronic label management features

Min 6, Max 12
Use about NE Explorer
111
3.12.3 eSight WLAN Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
eSight WLAN Management

ONM1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
0.5d
Describe the basic functions of eSight WLAN

Describe configuration task of eSight WLAN
Target Audience
management
Describe maintenance routine task of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
WLAN
Administrators
Use eSight WLAN serve management to
Prerequisites
manage WLAN equipment

Duration

0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
112
3.12.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
eSight MPLS VPN Management

ONM1C Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
0.5d
Describe the basic concepts of BGP/MPLS VPN

Describe the process of BGP/MPLS VPN
Target Audience
Automatic Discovery of eSight
Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN Monitoring
Monitoring Staffs
Services of eSight
Administrators
Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
113
3.12.5 eSight SLA Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
eSight SLA Management
be able to:
ONM1D Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
Describe the functions and basic concepts of
Target Audience
SLA of eSight
Use the service management of SLA of eSight
Use the task management of SLA of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
Use the quick diagnosis of SLA of eSight
Administrators
Use the report of SLA of eSight
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
114
3.12.6 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
eSight IPSec VPN Management
be able to:
ONM1E Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
Describe the application scenarios of IPSec VPN
Target Audience
Describe eSight IPSec VPN management

features
Use eSight IPSec VPN management features
Monitoring Staffs
Duration
Administrators
Prerequisites
0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
115
3.12.7 eSight Smart Report Management Training

Training Path

Objectives
eSight Smart Report Management

ONM1F Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
be able to:
Target Audience
Describe the basic functions of eSight Report

Use eSight Report features
Duration
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
0.5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
116
3.12.8 eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer)

Management Training
ONM1G Lecture, Hands-on exercise

be able to:
0.5d
Describe the basic concepts of NTA

management
Target Audience
Use eSight NTA management features
Describe the application scenarios of eSight NTA
Monitoring Staffs
management
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
117
3.12.9 eSight Access Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
eSight Access Management

ONM1H Lecture, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
0.5d
Describe eSight access service management

features
Target Audience
Use eSight access service management features
Describe the application scenarios of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
access service management
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
118
3.12.10 eSight Data Center Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
eSight Data Center Management

ONM1I
be able to:
0.5d
Describe the needs of data center service

management
Target Audience
Use eSight data center service management
features
Monitoring Staffs
Describe the application scenarios of eSight data
Administrators
center service management
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
119
3.13
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
3.13.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe enterprise network design principles
Enterprise Network Design Outlines

ORS91
Lecture, Case-study
Describe enterprise network design basic

process
1d
Analyze general enterprise requirements for
Target Audience
network design
Describe best practices of enterprise network

design
Administrators
Describe Huawei enterprise network products
Design general enterprise network
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day

knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
120
3.13.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training

Training Path
Objectives
Designing Enterprise Campus Network

ORS92
Lecture, Case-study
be able to:
1d
Describe concepts of campus network

Describe Huawei OneNet campus network
Target Audience
solution
List common technologies in campus network
Administrators
Describe Huawei OneNet campus business
solution
Prerequisites
Choose appropriate products for campus

network

Duration

knowledge
1 working day
A general experience in network design
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
121
3.13.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training

Training Path
be able to:
Analyze of the general needs of enterprise
network construction
Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise

ORS93
Lecture, Case-study
Describe the architecture of the MPLS L3VPN
1d
Analyze of the key technologies in the MPLS
Target Audience
L3VPN architecture
Select the appropriate technology and solutions

for enterprise networking
Administrators
Choose the appropriate product for enterprise
networking
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
knowledge
A general familiarity with MPLS VPN technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
122
3.13.4 Data Center Network Design Training

Training Path
List Principles of Data Center Network Design

Design Data Center Network Architecture
Designing Data Center Network

ORS94
Lecture
Design Data Center Network Areas

Design Data Center Network Panels
2d
Design Data Center Network Services
Target Audience
Design Data Center Network Interconnection
Describe Data Center Load-balancing Solution
Administrators
Describe Data Center WAN Optimization
Solution
Prerequisites
Describe Data Center NetStream Solution

List Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center
Network
Describe Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center
knowledge
Network Solution
A basic understanding of data center applications
List Huawei CloudEngine Products
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Outline Data Center Network Overview

Outline Trend of Data Center Network
Min 6, Max 12
Outline Data Center Network Solution
123
4 Enterprise Security Training Path

4.1 Security Certification Training Path
HCIE-Security(to be)
Expert
Professiona
l
5d
HCNP-Security-CISN
Constructing Infrastructure
of Security Network
5d
HCNP-Security-CTSS
Constructing Terminal
Security System
5d
ssional
HCNA-Security-CBSN
Constructing Basic
Security Network
Associate
Elective Guide:
Follow the paths to learn
124
5d
HCNP-Security-CSSN
Constructing Service
Security Network
5d
4.2 Firewall Training Path
Plan / Design
Firewall Planning and Design
1d
Implement / Operate
Improve
Low-and-middle Firewall
Training
1d
Training (include
Installation and
Commissioning Training)
5d
Firewall Dual-system hot

backup Technology Training
2d
Firewall VPN Technical Topic
Training
3d
Firewall UTM Technical Topic
Training
High-end Firewall Installation

and Commissioning Training
3d
1d
High-end Firewall Operation
(include High-end Firewall
Installation and
5d
ASG Installation and

1d
ASG Operation and Maintenance
Training(include ASG Installation
and Commissioning Training)3d
Firewall Advanced Technology

Training
2d
Firewall IPV6 Technology
Training
SVN Installation and

1d
SVN Operation and
Maintenance Training (include
SVN Installation and
3d
Fast-Track
Firewall Operation and
(Fast-Track)
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Firewall Technology
Fundamentals Training
3d
VPN Technology
2d
Elective Guide:
125
3d
4.3 Security Management Software Training Path
Plan / Design
Implement / Operate
Improve
TSM Installation and

Terminal security Planning

and Design Training
Optimal Terminal Security

Practice Training
1d
1d
2d
TSM Operation and Maintenance

Training (include TSM Installation
DSM Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d
Fast-Track
TSM/DSM Operation and
(Fast-Track)
Technology Firewall Technology
Fundamentals Fundamentals Training
Training
2d
VPN Technology
2d
Terminal security Technology

3d
Elective Guide:
TSM training need to be familiar with Firewall Technology Fundamentals
126
1d
4.4 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path
Plan / Design
Implement / Operate
Improve
NIP Installation and

1d
NIP Operation and Maintenance
Training (include NIP Installation
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Intrusion Detection and

Prevention Technology
Elective Guide:
127
1d
4.5 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path
Plan / Design
Implement / Operate
Improve
Planning and Design

Training
Operation and
Advanced
Technology Training
DDoS Solution Operation and

3d
iSOC Solution Operation and
3d
UMA Solution Operation and
2d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Firewall Technology
2d
Elective Guide:
128
5 Enterprise Security Training Courses

Enterprise Security Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Security Certification Training Programs

HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training
6 ~ 12
VPN Technology Fundamentals Training
6 ~ 12
Terminal security Technology Fundamentals Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology Training
6 ~ 12
Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training
6 ~ 12
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training
6 ~ 12
Firewall Advanced Technology Training
6 ~ 12
Firewall IPV6 Technology Training
6 ~ 12
Optimal Terminal Security Practice Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Training
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security
Network Training
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security
System Training
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security
Network
Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology

Security Advanced Technology Training Programs
Firewall Training Programs

Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning
Training
Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and
129
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
DSM Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
TSM/DSM Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
Firewall Planning and Design Training
6 ~ 12
Terminal security Planning and Design Training
6 ~ 12
High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training

High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include High-end Firewall Installation and
Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN
Installation and Commissioning Training)
ASG Installation and Commissioning Training
ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG
Security Management Software Training Programs
TSM Installation and Commissioning Training
TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs

NIP Installation and Commissioning Training
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
Security Planning and Design Training Programs
130
: Advanced Course
: Expert Course
5.1 Security Certification Training Programs

5.1.1
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training
Training Path
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.

Understand key VPN technologies.
HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic

Security Network Training
HC11031 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Understand the classification and application of

VPN.
5d
Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.
Target Audience
Understand the principles of L2TP.
Understand the application scenarios of
Administrators
client-initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.

Grasp the configuration of L2TP.
Prerequisites
Grasp the principles and implementation of
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
GRE VPN.
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary
Grasp the security mechanism of GRE VPN.
knowledge
Grasp the typical application and configuration
Objectives
of GRE VPN.
Understand the principles of the IPSec
be able to:
technology.
Understand OSI model
Understand the AH and ESP technologies.
Understand TCP/IP principles
Understand the service process of IKE.
Understand TCP/IP security issues
Grasp the application scenarios and

configuration of IPSec VPN.
Understand Common attack means
Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
Understand the definition and classification of
technology.
firewalls.
Understand the Basic functions and features of
Understand firewall Main features and
the SVN product.
technologies.
Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN.
Understand the Data forwarding process and

basic configuration of firewalls.
Grasp firewall UTM basic technology
Understand the functions and classification of
Understand what terminal security is.
ACLs.
Grasp the components and deployment of the
Grasp firewall Security Policy and configuration
TSM system.
Grasp the principles of the NAT technology.
Understand the organizational management
Grasp the application of NAT.
and access control functions of the TSM
Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls.
system.
Grasp the security policy configuration of the
Grasp firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic
TSM system.
technology
Duration
Grasp firewall User Management

Grasp firewall VLAN//SA/E1/ADSL/WLAN/3G
5 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 2
technology
working days
131
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
132
5.1.2
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network
Training
Training Path
Understand advanced features and

HCNP-Security CISN Constructing

Infrastructure of Security Network
Understand advanced features and

configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
5d
Understand Scenarios of comprehensive VPN
Target Audience
applications.
Understand Basic network attack.
Understand Basic attack defense technologies
Prerequisites
on firewalls.
Be familiar with data communications network
Understand Application and configuration of
elementary knowledge
basic attack defense technologies.
Be familiar with network security elementary
Understand the damages and mechanisms of
knowledge
major DDoS attacks.
Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge
Understand the principle of the anti-DDoS
Has network security equipment operation and
solution.
maintenance experience
Learn about the networking of the anti-DDoS
Objectives
solution.
Learn about the installation and configuration
of the anti-DDoS solution.
be able to:
Troubleshooting of security policy.
Understand the implementation and
Troubleshooting of NAT technology.
configuration of firewall packet fragmentation.
Troubleshooting of attack defense.

configuration of firewall IP CAR.
Troubleshooting of IP-Car.
Troubleshooting of HA technology.
configuration of firewall DHCP Snooping.
Troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
Understand Dual-system hot backup principle
Troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.
and configuration.
Troubleshooting of GRE VPN.
Understand IP-link principle and configuration.
Troubleshooting of SSL VPN.
Understand Eth-Trunk principle and
Duration
configuration
Understand Link-group principle and
working days
configuration.
Class Size
Learn about the technology principles of virtual

firewall.
Min 6, Max 12
Master virtual firewall configuration methods.

Know virtual firewall technology applications.
133
5.1.3
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training
Training Path
Understand the authorization modes of several

types of service resources.
HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing

Terminal Security System
Learn about the terminal security solution

design.
5d
Learn about the functions of and collaboration
Target Audience
between the management layer, service layer,

control layer, and user layer.
Learn about how to complete the availability
Prerequisites
design of a solution.
Understand that terminal security is
service-oriented.
Learn about the importance of organization in
knowledge
the terminal security system.
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Learn about the relationship between terminal
Be familiar with OS.
security management and technology.
Be familiar with 802.1X access control
Understand the principles of maintaining the
tecnology.
terminal security system.
Objectives
Learn about how to maintain the terminal

security system.

be able to:
Describe the common fault in TSM system.
Understand the current situation of terminal
Perform success troubleshooting for Hardware

TSM system implementations.
security.
Utilize diagnoses tools for troubleshooting
Understand the background of terminal
security implementations.
security.
Understand the multidimensional defense
SACG implementations.
system as a terminal security solution.

Duration
Understand the relationship among the five

elements.
Understand the concepts and components of
working days
identity authentication.
Class Size
Understand the implementation mechanism of

Min 6, Max 12
security policies during authentication

Understand the implementation principles of
multiple access control devices.
134
5.1.4
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training
Training Path
tools for detecting viruses

Understand major antivirus technologies for
HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing

Service Security Network
gateways
Understand the application of antivirus
5d
technologies for gateways
Target Audience
Describe the basic knowledge of Web filtering

technology.
Describe common WEB risk.
Prerequisites
Understand the key technology of Web filtering.
Understand the Web filtering application
scenario.
Understand the basic concept of spam
knowledge
Understand the generation and harm of spam
Understand the mechanism of anti-spam
Has network security equipment operation and
Learn about the anti-spam solution of Huawei.
maintenance experience
Describe background of deep packet inspect.
Objectives
Understand the main DPI technology.

Understand the DPI application scenario.
be able to:
Troubleshooting of IPS
Understand the basic knowledge of information
Troubleshooting of AV
security.
Troubleshooting of URL filtering
Understand the background of content security
Troubleshooting of RBL filtering
products.
Troubleshooting of deep packet inspect.
Understand the main technologies used for
Duration
content security.
Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion
working days
prevention technology.
Class Size

prevention application scenario.
Min 6, Max 12
Understand the basic knowledge of viruses.

Learn about virus signatures and the common
135
5.2 Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs

5.2.1
Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training
Training
Path
ACLs.
Grasp Interface-based packet filtering scenario
Firewall Elementary Knowledge

FW01
and configuration
Grasp Interzone packet filtering scenario and
1d
configuration
Basic Firewall Technology
FW02
Grasp the application of NAT.

Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls.
1d
Grasp the basic VLAN technology.

Grasp SA and E1 WAN interfacing
Target Audience
technologies.
Grasp the basic ADSL technology.
Administrators
Grasp WLAN and 3G technologies.
Duration
Prerequisites
working days
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
136
5.2.2
VPN Technology Fundamentals Training
Training Path
Understand the application scenarios of

client-initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.
Basic VPN Technology

FW03
Grasp the configuration of L2TP.

Grasp the principles and implementation of GRE
3d
VPN.
Target Audience
Grasp the security mechanism of GRE VPN.
Grasp the typical application and configuration of

GRE VPN.
Administrators
Understand the principles of the IPSec
technology.
Prerequisites
Understand the AH and ESP technologies.
Understand the service process of IKE.
Grasp the application scenarios and configuration
knowledge
of IPSec VPN.
Objectives

technology.
Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN.
be able to:
Duration
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.

Understand key VPN technologies.
Understand the classification and application of
working days
VPN.
Class Size
Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.
Min 6, Max 12
Understand the principles of L2TP.
137
5.2.3
Terminal security Technology Fundamentals Training
Training Path

Objectives
Basic Terminal Security Technology

SS01
Lecture,
1d
be able to:
Understand the background of terminal security.
Target Audience
Understand TSM System Architecture
Understand TSM System Functions
Be familiar with the Typical Scenarios of TSM
Administrators
System Application
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working days
Class Size

knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
138
5.2.4
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology Fundamentals Training
Training Path
Objectives
Basic Intrusion Detection and Prevention

Technology
NI01
be able to:
1d
Understand the concept of Intrusion detection

and Intrusion prevention
Target Audience
Understand Intrusion detection technology
Understand Intrusion prevention technology
Understand the application of Intrusion detection
Administrators
technology
Prerequisites
Understand the application of Intrusion

prevention technology
Be familiar with PC operation system

Duration

1 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.3
working days
knowledge
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
139
5.3 Security Advanced Technology Training Programs

5.3.1
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology Training
Training Path
be able to:
Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology

FW0A
principle
Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
2d
Basic Networking and Configuration
Target Audience
Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot

Backup Typical Networking.
Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Prerequisites
Duration
working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
140
5.3.2
Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training
Training Path
Understand
Advanced features and

Firewall VPN Technical Topic
FW0B
Understand
Advanced features and
configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
3d
Understand Scenarios of comprehensive VPN
Target Audience
applications.
Troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
Troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.
Prerequisites
Troubleshooting of GRE VPN.

Duration

working days
Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
141
5.3.3
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training
Training Path
Understand major antivirus technologies for

gateways
Firewall UTM Technical Topic

FW0C
Understand the key technology of Web filtering.

Understand the mechanism of anti-spam
3d
Understand the main DPI technology.
Target Audience
Troubleshooting of IPS
Troubleshooting of AV
Prerequisites
Troubleshooting of URL filtering

Troubleshooting of RBL filtering
Troubleshooting of Internet behavior
management.
Duration
Objectives
working days
be able to:
Class Size
Describe the basic knowledge of UTM

Min 6, Max 12
prevention technology.
142
5.3.4
Firewall Advanced Technology Training
Training Path
Describe Advanced Firewall Security Features

Understand Firewall Reliability Technology
Advanced Firewall Security Features

FW0D
Understand Virtual Firewall Technology

Understand Basic Attack Defense
2d
Technologies on Firewall
Target Audience
Troubleshooting of attack defense.
Troubleshooting of IP-Car.
Prerequisites
Duration
working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
143
5.3.5
Firewall IPV6 Technology Training
Training Path
be able to:
Grasp IPV6 basic Technology
Firewall IPV6 Technology

FW0E
Understand Firewall IPv6 over IPv4/ 6RD

tunnel
2d
Understand Firewall ACL6 accelerate
Target Audience
/DHCPv6/IPv6 DNS features
Understand Firewall PPPoE Client

/NAT64/ND-RA/Policy6 features
Prerequisites
Duration
working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
144
5.3.6
Optimal Terminal Security Practice Training
Training Path
Understand the importance of organization in

the terminal security system.
Optimal Terminal Security Practice

SS03
Understand the relationship between terminal

security management and technology.
2d
Understand the principles of maintaining the
Target Audience
terminal security system.

Understand how to maintain the terminal
security system.
Prerequisites
Describe the common fault in TSM system.
TSM system implementations.
Utilize diagnoses tools for troubleshooting
knowledge
security implementations.
Be familiar with Terminal security elementary
SACG implementations.
knowledge
Duration
Be familiar with 802.1X elementary knowledge
working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Understand that terminal security is
service-oriented.
145
5.4 Firewall Training Programs

5.4.1
Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product

Overview
Lecture,
FW11
be able to:
0.5d
Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000

firewall
Describe the function and features of
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic

Installation and Configuration
FW12
USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the application scenario of
0.5d
Target Audience
Describe the hardware Installation and

maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the basic configuration of
Prerequisites
Describe the basic WEB management of
Duration
working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
146
5.4.2
Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include
Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Grasp the application of NAT
Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls

FW02
Grasp the basic VLAN technology
1d
Grasp SA and E1 WAN interfacing

technologies
Overview
Lecture,
FW11
Grasp the basic ADSL technology

Grasp WLAN and 3G technologies
0.5d
Describe the basic knowledge of


FW12
0.5d

Describe the hardware Installation and
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Operation

and Maintenance
FW13
maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the basic configuration of
3d
Target Audience
Describe the basic WEB management of

Prerequisites
Describe the upgrade method of

Understand the routine maintenance of
Describe the typical network configuration of
knowledge
Describe the networking and configuration of
USG2000/5000/UTM firewall
Objectives
Describe the troubleshooting method of
be able to:
Duration
5 working days,
ACLs.
working days
Class Size
and configuration
Min 6, Max 12
configuration
147
Including Hands-on exercise 2
5.4.3
High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives

Overview
Lecture,
FW14
be able to:
0.5d
Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's

high-end series firewall
Describe the software function of Huawei's

FW15

Describe the performance parameter of
0.5d
Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Target Audience
Master USG9300/9500 Hardware Installation
Master USG9300/9500 Basic Configuration
Duration
Prerequisites
working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

knowledge
148
5.4.4
High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include High-end
Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)

Training Path
ACLs.

FW02
and configuration
1d
configuration
Grasp the principles of the NAT technology
Grasp the application of NAT

Overview
Lecture,
FW14
Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls

0.5d


FW15

0.5d

Master USG9300/9500 Hardware Installation
USG9300/9500 Series Firewall Operation

and Maintenance
FW16
Master USG9300/9500 Basic Configuration

Master USG9300/9500 Basic Function
3d
Features and Configurations
Target Audience
Master USG9300/9500 Routine Maintenance

Master Basic Principles of USG9300/9500
Prerequisites
Maintenance
Master USG9300/9500 Information Collection
Master USG9300/9500 Troubleshooting Ability
Duration
knowledge
working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
149
5.4.5
Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path

Firewall Series Product Overview

Lecture,
FW17

1d

Describe the upgrade method of Firewall Series
Firewall Series Product Operation and

Maintenance
FW18
Product
2d
Describe the typical network configuration of

Target Audience
Describe the networking and configuration of
USG2000/5000/UTM firewall
Prerequisites
Master USG9300/9500 Basic Function Features

and Configurations
Master Basic Principles of Firewall Series
Product Maintenance
Master Firewall Series Product Information
Collection
knowledge
Master Firewall Series Product Troubleshooting
Ability
Objectives
Duration

be able to:
Describe the basic knowledge of
working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
150
5.4.6
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Understand the hardware architecture and

Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
SVN Product Overview

Lecture,
FW31
Understand the main hardware component of

SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
0.5d
Understand the software architecture of

SVN Product Basic Installation and

Configuration
FW32
Understand the application environment of

0.5d
Understand the application scenario of

Target Audience
Describe the hardware installation of
Understand the physical environment
Administrators
requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Prerequisites
Describe the basics configuration of


Duration

working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
151
5.4.7
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and
Training Path
Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the main hardware component of
SSL VPN Technology

FW05
Understand the software architecture of
1d
Understand the application environment of
SVN Product Overview

Lecture,
FW31
Understand the application scenario of

0.5d
Describe the hardware installation of
SVN Product Basic Installation and

Configuration
FW32
Understand the physical environment

requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
0.5d
Describe the basics configuration of

SVN Product Operation and Maintenance
FW33
Understand the Solution deployment

1d
Describe the high-level function configuration
Target Audience
of
Understand the System Status of
Prerequisites
Describe the SVN2000/SVN5000 login
Manage page
Understand the Common faults and positioning
method of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the troubleshooting method of
knowledge
Duration
Objectives
working days
be able to:
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
technology
Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN
Understand the hardware architecture and
152
5.4.8
ASG Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
be able to:
Describe Network Orientation of ASG
ASG Product Overview

Lecture,
FW41
Understand Hardware Structure of ASG

Understand Function Feature of ASG
0.5d
Know the Typical Application of ASG

Describe ASG login method
ASG Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
FW42
Describe ASG Initialization configuration

Describe ASG Installation Procedure
0.5d
Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG
Target Audience
Manager
Understand Overview of Updating the
signature database on ASG
Understand ASG Online Updating for the
Administrators
signature database
Prerequisites
Understand ASG Local Updating for the

signature database
Duration
working days
knowledge
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
153
5.4.9
ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and
Training Path
Understand Overview of Updating the

signature database on ASG
ASG Product Overview

Lecture,
FW41
Understand ASG Online Updating for the

signature database
0.5d
Understand ASG Local Updating for the

signature database
ASG Product Basic Installation and

Configuration
FW42
Describe the ASG product feature Introduction

and Implementation of ASG
0.5d
Describe the management module function of

ASG
Understand ASG Manager Function
ASG Product Operation and Maintenance

FW43
Configuration
2d
Describe the Alarm Management function of

ASG Manager
Target Audience
Describe the configuration of Alarm

Management function in ASG Manager
Prerequisites
Describe ASG Maintenance tool
Describe ASG Hardware Maintenance
Describe ASG Software Maintenance

Describe ASG Software Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager Routine
Maintenance and Main method
knowledge
Understand ASG Manager Software Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager fault
Objectives
finding in routine maintenance

Understand the basic troubleshooting
be able to:
knowledge
Describe Network Orientation of ASG
Describe ASG Manager Troubleshooting
Understand Hardware Structure of ASG
method
Understand Function Feature of ASG
Duration
Know the Typical Application of ASG

Describe ASG login method
working days
Describe ASG Initialization configuration
Class Size
Describe ASG Installation Procedure

Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG
Min 6, Max 12
Manager
154
5.5 Security Management Software Training Programs

5.5.1
TSM Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
TSM Product Overview
be able to:
Lecture,
SS11
0.5d
Describe the background of TSM system

Describe TSM system function and system
structure.
TSM Product Basic Installation and

Configuration
SS12
Describe the function of each component.

Understand Typical Scenarios of TSM System
0.5d
Application
Target Audience
Describe TSM System Performance index
Understand TSM Installation Planning and
Preparations
Administrators
Be familiar with TSM Installation Process
Prerequisites
Be familiar with TSM system Basic Operation

Duration

working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

knowledge
155
5.5.2
TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM Installation and
Training Path
Objectives
Basic Terminal Security Technology

Lecture,
SS01
be able to:
1d
Understand the background of terminal security.

Understand TSM System Architecture
Understand TSM System Functions
TSM Product Overview

Lecture,
SS11
Be familiar with the Typical Scenarios of TSM

System Application
0.5d
Describe the background of TSM system

Describe TSM system function and system
TSM Product Basic Installation and
Configuration
SS12
structure.
Describe the function of each component.
0.5d
Understand Typical Scenarios of TSM System

Application
Describe TSM System Performance index
TSM Product Operation and Maintenance

SS13
Understand TSM Installation Planning and
1d
Preparations
Be familiar with TSM Installation Process
Target Audience
Be familiar with TSM system Basic Operation
Understand Functional modules of TSM
Prerequisites
Understand TSM System Technology and

Application
Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of
TSM

Duration
knowledge
working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
156
5.5.3
DSM Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
DSM Product Overview

Lecture,
SS21
be able to:
0.5d
Describe the background of DSM system

Describe DSM system function and system
structure.
DSM Product Basic Installation and

Configuration
SS22
Describe Typical Scenarios of DSM System

Application
0.5d
Describe DSM System Performance index

Understand DSM Installation Planning and
Preparations
DSM Product Operation and Maintenance

SS23
Be familiar with DSM Installation Process
1d
Be familiar with DSM system Basic Operation

Understand Functional modules of DSM
Target Audience
Understand DSM System Technology and

Application
Administrators
DSM
Prerequisites
Duration
working days
knowledge
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Be familiar with document security elementary

knowledge
157
5.5.4
TSM/DSM Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path
knowledge
Objectives
TSM Product Operation and Maintenance

SS13

1d
be able to:
Understand Functional modules of TSM
Understand TSM System Technology and
DSM Product Operation and Maintenance

SS23
Application
1d
TSM
Target Audience
Understand Functional modules of DSM
Understand DSM System Technology and

Application
Prerequisites
DSM
Duration

knowledge

working days

knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Be familiar with 802.1X access control
Be familiar with document security elementary
158
5.6 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs

5.6.1
NIP Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS

Device
NIP Product Overview

Lecture,
NI11
Understand the hardware architecture of NIP

Device
0.5d
Understand the hardware specifications of NIP

Device
Understand the hardware main component of
NIP Product Basic Installation and

Configuration
NI12
NIP Device
0.5d
Understand the software architecture of NIP
Target Audience
Understand the software application scenario of

NIP Device
Understand the hardware installation of NIP
Device
Administrators
Understand the physical environment of NIP
Prerequisites
Device
Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device
Duration

knowledge
working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
159
5.6.2
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and
Training Path
Understand the hardware architecture of NIP

Device
NIP Product Overview

Lecture,
NI11
Understand the hardware specifications of NIP

Device
0.5d
Understand the hardware main component of

NIP Device
NIP Product Basic Installation and

Configuration
NI12
Understand the software architecture of NIP

Understand the software application scenario of
0.5d
NIP Device
Understand the hardware installation of NIP
Device
NIP Product Operation and Maintenance

NI13
Understand the physical environment of NIP

Device
2d
Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device

Target Audience
Grasp Application control of IPS Device

Grasp Application control of IDS Device
Grasp Threat Prevention of IPS Device
Prerequisites
Grasp Threat Prevention of IDS Device

Grasp Typical Application scene of IPS Device
Grasp Typical Application scene of IDS Device
knowledge
Grasp the maintenance operations of NIP Device
Grasp the software patches of NIP Device
Objectives
Grasp the Troubleshooting of NIP Device

Duration

be able to:
Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
working days
Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
Class Size
Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS
Min 6, Max 12
Device
160
5.7 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs

5.7.1
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe Principle of DDoS attack and DDoS

defense technology
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance

Training
SU11
Understand network Design of management

Center
3d
Understand network Design of Detecting Center
Target Audience
Understand network Design of Cleaning Center

Understand mirroring traffic, monitor network
traffic and redirection traffic in DDoS Solution
Prerequisites
Master basic configuration and system
management
Master DDoS Product Management and
Customer Management
Master DDoS Solution Report management and
knowledge
System maintenance
Duration
Objectives
working days
be able to:
Class Size
Describe Huawei DDos Product Component
Min 6, Max 12
Describe DDos Network Orientation and Typical

Application
161
5.7.2
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Master iSOC System architecture and system

component
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance

Training
SU31
Master iSOC main function feature

Know the iSOC Application Network
3d
Know the iSOC installation process
Target Audience
Master iSOC initial deployment

Master iSOC basic Function configuration
Know the Routine Maintenance task
Prerequisites
Master quick solve issue in iSoc system fault
Know the information collection in basic fault
Master Troubleshooting Process
Know Common fault in iSoc
Duration
knowledge
working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe iSOC Orientation and product value
162
5.7.3
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
Describe UMA orientation and product value
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance

Training
SU41
Master UMA system architecture and system

component
2d
Master UMA main function feature
Target Audience
Know the UMA application network

Master UMA initial configuration
Master UMA basic function configuration
Prerequisites
Know Common fault finding in UMA

Duration

working days
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
163
5.8 Security Planning and Design Training Programs

5.8.1
Firewall Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Objectives
Firewall Planning and Design

FW04
Lecture,
be able to:
1d
Understand Huawei Security Concept

Understand Huawei Security Competence
Target Audience
Center
Be familiar with Huawei Security Products
Describe Scenarios of Huawei Security
Prerequisites
Products Application and Solution

Duration

1 working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
164
5.8.2
Terminal security Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Understand the concepts and components of

identity authentication.
Terminal security Planning and Design

SS02
Lecture,
Understand the implementation mechanism of

security policies during authentication
1d
Understand the implementation principles of
Target Audience
multiple access control devices.

Understand the authorization modes of several
types of service resources.
Learn about the terminal security solution
Prerequisites
design.
Learn about the functions of and collaboration
between the management layer, service layer,
control layer, and user layer.
knowledge
Learn about how to complete the availability
design of a solution.
knowledge
Duration

1 working days
Class Size
Be familiar with 802.1X elementary knowledge

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
165
6 Enterprise IT Training Path

6.1 Storage Certification Training Path
HCIE-Storage(to be)
Expert
Professional
5d
HCNP-Storage-SSAM
SAN Storage Advanced
Management
5d
HCNA-Storage-BSSN
Building the Structure of
Storage Network
5d
Associate
Elective Guide
HCNP-Storage-CUSN
Constructing Unified
Storage Network
5d
Follow the path to learn.
166
HCNP-Storage-CDPS
Constructing Data
Protection System
5d
6.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Path
HCIE-Cloud(to be)
Expert
5d
HCNP-Cloud-BCCS
Building Cloud Computing
Solution Training
5d
Professional
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP
Building Cloud
Computing Platform
Associate
Elective Guide
Follow the path to learn
167
5d
6.3 Unified Storage Training Path
Plan & Design

Enterprise Storage Area
Network(SAN) Design Training
1d
Implement & Operate

Training
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training
4d
Improve
Storage Area Network(SAN)
1d
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)
2d
T SeriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T)
High-end Storage System
Deployment and Management
4d
Training
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage
System Deployment and
Management Training
4d
SNS Series (2120/5120) FC Switch
Product Deployment and
Management Training
1d
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage
2d
Management Training
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage
Gateway System Deployment and
Management Training
3d
Technology Foundation
Training
Storage Technology Foundation

Training
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include T series storage array HVS, SNS, Dorado, VIS6000T products and
technologies trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: centralized storage, backup, storage virtualization, disaster
recovery, cloud computing storage infrastructure and data center storage infrastructure.
Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.
168
6.4 NAS and Data Protection Training Path
Plan & Design

Enterprise Network Attached
Network (NAS) Design
Training
1d
Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
N9000 Storage System

Training
3d
N8500V2 Clustered NAS
Management Training
Enterprise Backup system

and Network Design Training
1d
Network Attached Storage (NAS)

1d
3d
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library

Management Training
3d
Backup Advanced Technology

Training
1d
HDP3500E Backup System

Training
3d
Training
Storage Technology
Foundation Training
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include N9000, N8500, VTL6900 and HDP3500E products and technologies
trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: file sharing, file-level data centralized storage and management,
unstructured data backup and management, file-level DST, file system backup and disaster recovery.
169
6.5 Cloud Storage Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud
Storage Deployment and
Management Training
4d
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud
Storage Deployment and
Management Training(Fast-Track)
2d
UDS Mass Storage
Training
4d
Training
Cloud Storage Technology

Foundation Training
1
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include cloud storage CSS, CSE, UDS products and technologies trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: mass data storage and backup solution, storage virtualization
solutions, data center cloud storage solutions.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background and no need of experiment.
170
6.6 Server Products Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Improve
Training
RH Series Rack Server

Training
1d
X6000 Series Server

Training
1d
E6000 Series Blade Server

Training
1d
E9000 Series Blade Server

Training
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include RH series, X6000, E6000 and E9000 products trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: the infrastructure of the data center, the cloud computing
infrastructure and IT infrastructure.
171
6.7 Cloud Computing Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
Mini VDI Deployment and
Management Training
2d
Desktop Cloud Solution

Training
5d
FusionCube Solution
Training
3d
FusionShpere Solution
Training
3d
Training
Cloud Computing Technologies

Training
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include Mini VDI, Desktop Cloud Solution, FusionCube and FusionShpere Solution
trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: small and medium-sized enterprises Mini (M1) desktop cloud,
large-scale integrated desktop cloud solution.
Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.
172
6.8 Data Center Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
Enterprise Data Center Network
Design Training
Enterprise Data Center

Architecture Training
Micro DC Deployment and

Management Training
1d
2d
Enterprise Data Center Security
Design Training
1d
ManageOne Solution
Training
2d
1d
Enterprise Data Center Disaster

Recovery and Backup Design
Training
2d
Technology
IP Technology Foundation
Foundation
(In
Training 13 IP Programs)
3d
Firewall Technology Foundation

Training (In13 Security
Programs)
2d
Storage Technology
Foundation Training
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include Data Center Solution products trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: Micro DC solution and large-scale data center solutions.
173
7 Enterprise IT Training Courses

Enterprise IT Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Storage Certification Training Programs
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
Storage Technology Foundation Training
6~12
Cloud Storage Technology Foundation Training
6~12
Cloud Computing Technology Foundation Training
6~12
6~12
Backup Advanced Technology Training
6~12
Cloud Computing Security Advanced Technology Training
6~12
Enterprise Data Center Architecture Training
6~12
6~12
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage

Network Training
HCNP-Storage-SSAM SAN Storage Advanced
Management Training
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage
Network Training
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System
Training
Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform
Training
HCNP-Cloud-BCCS Building Cloud Computing Solution
Training
IT Technology Foundation Training Programs
IT Advanced Technology Training Programs

Storage Area Network(SAN)Advanced Technology Training
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology
Training
6~12
Unified Storage Training Programs

T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array
174
Deployment and Management Training

T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array
Deployment and Management Training (Fast-Track)
T SeriesV2
(55T/56T/58T/68T) High-end Storage System

HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage System Deployment and
Management Training
SNS Series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product Deployment
and Management Training
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment
and Management Training
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
NAS and Data Protection Training Programs

N9000 Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and
Management Training
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and
Management Training
HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management
Training
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
Cloud Storage Training Programs

CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and
Management Training
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and
Management Training(Fast-Track)
UDS Mass Storage Deployment and Management Training
6~12
6~12
6~12
Server Training Programs

RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management
Training
X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management
Training
E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management
175
6~12
6~12
6~12
Training
E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management
6~12
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training
6~12
Enterprise Data Center Network Design Training
6~12
Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training
6~12
Training
Cloud Computing Training Programs
Mini VDI Deployment and Management Training
Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and Management
Training
FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management
Training
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management
Training
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
Data Center Training Programs

Micro DC Deployment and Management Training
ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management
Training
6~12
6~12
IT Design Training Programs

Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design
Training
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup

Design Training
176
: Advanced Course
6~12
6~12
6~12
: Expert Course
7.1 Storage Certification Training Programs
7.1.1
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training
Training Path
way, common RAID principle, feature and

different RAID application scenario
HCNA-BSSN Huawei Certified Network Associate-
Know FC-SAN and IP-SAN basal knowledge
Building the Structure of Storage Network)
and key technology
OHC11091 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo 5d
Know NAS system basal structure and concept
Target Audience
Master multipath technology and host

connection basal technology and application
Those who want to be storage engineer
Understand Huawei all series storage product
Those who want to achieve HCNA-Storage
feature and main application
certification
Master SAN storage array product
function,
hardware, interface, network and typical
Managers
application
Master storage array and mapping configuration
Prerequisites
on ISM
Master SAN storage product routine
Know basal network knowledge
maintenance and troubleshooting
Know computer basal knowledge
Be able to build FC-SAN or IP-SAN storage
Know OS basal knowledge
network; be able to manage and maintain SAN
Objectives
storage system and network

Duration

be able to:
5 working days
Know storage system and network basal
Class Size
concept, structure and component

Know RAID basal concept, data construction
Min 6, Max 12
177
7.1.2
HCNP-Storage-SSAM SAN Storage Advanced Management Training
Training Path
application
HCNP-SSAM Huawei Certified Network ProfessionalSAN Storage Advanced Management

OHC12091 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo 5d
Target Audience
Know storage data reliability and operation

continuity technology
Understand storage performance factor and
optimization
Know storage system management feature and
configuration
Enterprise ICT technology management
Know storage and main OS platform connection
personal and IT technology personal
and application
Those who hope to systemically learn and
Master storage network redundancy technology
master storage technology and application,

build information storage and data protection
solution ability Maintainers
and application
Master Virtual snapshot, LUN Copy, Replication
principle, plan, deployment and maintenance
Managers
Master SAN storage system and network typical
scenario fault diagnosis and disposal method
Prerequisites
Master storage system and network (SAN)

common technology and application; master
Know server basal knowledge and application
information storage system and SAN storage
Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology
solution plan, deployment, management and
Understand storage system basal operation and
maintenance ability
technology
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
On completion of this program, the
Class Size
participants will be able to:

Master SAN storage structure, component
Min 6, Max 12
Know storage data process and communication

protocol (SCSI, FC, iSCSI), principle and
178
7.1.3
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training
Training Path
Know NAS and cluster structure, components,
HCNP-CUSN Huawei Certified Network ProfessionalConstructing Unified Storage Network

OHC12092Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo
key technology and principle.

Know CIFS, NFS network share protocol
principle.
5d
Master cluster NAS system structure, network
Target Audience
plan, deployment and file system resource

configuration.
Enterprise ICT technology management personal
Master network storage virtualization system
and IT technology personal
structure, principle and deployment.
Those who hope to systemically learn and master
Master N8000 tiered storage, file replication,
storage technology and application, build
file backup principle and configuration.
information storage and data protection solution
Master cluster NAS system fault diagnosis and
ability Maintainers
disposal.
Managers
Master VIS system principle, planning,
deployment and heterogeneous resources
Prerequisites
management.
Master VIS fault diagnosis and disposal.
Master cluster NAS, storage virtualization

technology and application, be able to do
Understand main OS and DB operation and
cluster NAS and storage virtualization solution
technology
scheme plan, deploy, maintain and manage.
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Know storage virtualization technology

classification and unified storage
Min 6, Max 12
characteristics and value
179
7.1.4
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training
Training Path
Know backup and recovery system structure,

backup components, backup media, backup
HCNP-CDPS Huawei Certified Network
mode and strategy.
Professional- Constructing Data Protection System

OHC12093Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo
Know backup network, backup and recovery
5d
technology and application.
Target Audience
Master HDP, VTL backup system planning,

deployment and management.
Enterprise ICT technology management personal
Know deduplication, CDP etc. technology
and IT technology personal
principle, configuration and application.
Those who hope to systemically learn and master
Understand DR scheme, related technology and
storage technology and application, build information
scenarios.
storage and data protection solution ability
Master backup system and network fault
Maintainers
diagnose and disposal method.
Managers
Master backup and DR technology and
application; be able to plan, deploy and manage
Prerequisites
backup and recovery system and data protection

solution.

Duration

5 working days
technology
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
180
7.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs

7.2.1
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training
Training Path
Describe AD technology
Describe DNS technology
HCNA-BCCP Huawei Certified Network

Associate-Building Cloud Computing Platform
OHC1108
Lecture, hands-on exercise
Describe DHCP technology

Describe the features and concept of virtual
5d
machine
1
Target Audience

network
Those who hope to become Cloud Computing
engineers
storage
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-Cloud certificate

Describe the basic concept of storage
Administrators
Describe the RAID function of storage
Planners and designers
Describe the muti-path technology of storage

Describe Huawei Cloud Computing solution
Prerequisites
Describe the hardware structure of Huawei Cloud
Be familiar with datacom basic knowledge and
Computing solution
applications
Describe the software structure of Huawei Cloud
Be familiar with server basic knowledge and
Computing solution
applications
Describe the structure and configuration of
Be familiar with network security basic
servers
knowledge and applications
Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and
storage equipments
applications
Objectives
switches
Describe the configuration of TC
be able to:
Describe the structure and functions of

FusionCompute
Describe the evolution of Cloud Computing
Describe the basic concept and features of Cloud
FusionManager
Computing
Describe the values of Cloud Computing
FusionAccess
Describe the advantages of Cloud Computing
Master the creation of VM image
technology
Master the creation and assignment of VM
Describe the deployment mode of Cloud

Computing
Duration
Describe the business mode of Cloud Computing
5 working days
Describe switching and routing technology
Class Size
Describe VLAN technology
Min 6, max 12
Describe QoS technology

Describe cluster technology
181
7.2.2
HCNP-Cloud-BCCS Building Cloud Computing Solution Training
Training Path
HCNP-BCCS Huawei Certified Network
Professional-Building Cloud Computing
Solution
OHC12081 Lecture, hands-on exercise
technology
Describe the features of application virtualization
technology
Describe the features of application automatic
5d
deployment technology
Target Audience
Describe the features of elastic application

technology
Those who hope to become Cloud Computing
Describe the features of automatic thin
engineers
provisioning technology
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud certificate
Describe the features of elastic load balance
technology
Administrators
Describe the features of elastic cloud technology
Describe the features of virtualized private cloud
Prerequisites
technology
Be familiar with datacom basic knowledge and
Describe the features of cloud computing security
applications
structure
Be familiar with server basic knowledge and
Master the procedure of cloud computing project
applications
design
Be familiar with network security basic
Master the deployment of Huawei Cloud
knowledge and applications
Computing solution
Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and
Master the deployment and configuration of
applications
servers
Objectives

storage equipments
be able to:
switches
Describe Huawei Cloud Computing solution
Master the installation and deployment of
Describe the features of link clone technology
FusionComputer
Describe the features of memory multiplexing
technology
FusionManager
Describe the features of disaster recovery
technology
FusionAccess
Describe the features of VM snapshot technology
Describe the trouble-shooting procedure of
Describe the features of VM migration technology
Huawei Cloud Computing solution
Describe the features of resource online
Duration
scheduling technology
Describe the features of resource dynamic
5 working days, including 2.5 days of hands-on
scheduling technology
practice
Describe the features of FusionStorage
Class Size
distributed storage technology
Min 6, max 12
Describe the features of GPU passing through
182
7.3 IT Technology Foundation Training Programs

7.3.1
Storage Technology Foundation Training
Training Path
Know RAID basal concept, data constructing,

common RAID principle, feature and different
Storage Technology Foundation
OST01
Lecture
RAID application scenario

Know FC-SAN and IP-SAN basal knowledge and
1d
key technology
Target Audience
Know NAS system basal structure and concept

Master multipath technology and host connection
basal technology and application
Prerequisites
Understand Huawei all series storage product
feature and main application
Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Know storage system and network basal concept,

structure and component
183
7.3.2
Cloud Storage Technology Foundation Training
Training Path
Objectives
Cloud Storage Technology Foundation

be able to:
OST02
Lecture
1d
Know Cloud storage technology principle

Know Cloud storage data organization
Target Audience
Know Cloud storage architecture and principle
Know Cloud storage application scenario
Prerequisites
Duration
Know basal network knowledge
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Be familiar with storage technology
184
7.3.3
Cloud Computing Technology Foundation Training
Training Path
machine
Describe the concept and technologies of virtual
Cloud Computing Technology Foundation

OCL01
Lecture
network
1d
storage
Target Audience
Describe the protocols of storage
Administrators

Describe the backup and redundancy technology
Prerequisites
of storage
Know basic knowledge of IT and data network
Describe the hardware structure of
Objectives
SingleCLOUD
Describe the software structure of SingleCLOUD

be able to:
Duration
Describe the application scenario of cloud
1 working day
computing
Class Size
Describe the key features of cloud computing
Min 6, max 12
185
7.4 IT Advanced Technology Training Programs

7.4.1
Storage Area Network(SAN) Advanced Technology Training
Training Path
Know storage system development trend

Know storage system common protocol and
Storage Area Network (SAN) Advanced

Technology
OST0A
Lecture
development trend
Know SAN system reliability basal concept
1d
Know SAN reliability basal affecting factor
Target Audience
Know SAN reliability improvement basal factor

and method
Know storage system performance criterion and
Managers
meaning
Know storage system performance affecting
Prerequisites
factor
Know storage system performance improvement
method
Duration
technology
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Know storage system basal structure
186
7.4.2
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology Training
Training Path
Objectives
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced
Technology
be able to:
OST0B
Lecture
1d
Be familiar with NAS and Clustered architecture,

component, technology and principle
Target Audience
Be familiar with CIFS,NFS network file sharing

protocol
Managers
Command network storage virtual system
architecture ,principle and deployment
Prerequisites
Command N8000 DST, file replication, file

backup principle
Duration

1 working day
technology
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
187
7.4.3
Backup Advanced Technology Training
Training Path
be able to:
Be familiar with backup and recovery system
Backup Advanced Technology

OST0C
Lecture
architecture, backup component, backup media,

Backup mode and strategy
1d
Be familiar with backup network, backup and
Target Audience
recovery technology
Be familiar with Data deduplication, CDP
technology principle
Managers
Know DR solution, technology and application
scenario
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size

technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
188
7.4.4
Enterprise Data Center Architecture Training
Training Path
Describe DC solution overall architecture

Describe DC network subsystem concepts and
Enterprise Data Center Architecture

ODC0A
Lecture
related devices
Describe DC Computing and Storage subsystem
1d
concepts and related devices
Target Audience
Describe DC Security subsystem concepts and

related devices
Describe DC Disaster Recovery and Backup
Administrators
subsystem concepts and related devices
Describe DC SSMC management system
Prerequisites
Duration
Be familiar with DC
1 working day
Familiar with IT and general network knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
189
7.5 Unified Storage Training Programs

7.5.1
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Product Introduction
Lecture
OST11

be able to:
0.25d
Describe T series product position

Describe T series product structure
Describe T series product hardware configuration
Array Plan and Design
Lecture
OST12
and component
Describe T series product software structure and
0.25d
component
Describe T series product main features and
Array Installation and Configuration
OST13
typical application scenario

Understand T series storage plan and design
target
1d
Understand T series storage plan rule

Understand T series storage plan method
Array Routine Maintenance
OST14
Master storage system hardware installation

Master storage system device cabling
0.25d
Master storage system power on sequence

Master device configuration
Array Troubleshooting
OST15
Master basal operation configuration

Master T series product management
Master T series product license using
0.25d
Master T series product basal application

configuration
Array Advanced Function
Master T series product performance stat.

function using
OST16
2d
Master T series product upgrade
Target Audience
Know T series product common fault disposal

Master T series product fault disposal process
Describe UltraPath product request and product
Managers
position
Know UltraPath product main function feature
Prerequisites
Know UltraPath product application scenario and
Know PC OS
deployment scheme
Know basal computer knowledge
Know Snapshot definition, principle and

configuration process
Know basal storage technology
Know LUN Copy definition, principle,

190
using
Know Remote replication definition, principle,
Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature
application scenario
Know Smart Cache definition, principle,
Describe Dynamic RAID Group Expansion
principle, configuration
Describe Split Mirror definition, principle,
Duration
4 working days
Describe Thin Provisioning configuration feature
Class Size
request
Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature and
Min 6, Max 12
191
7.5.2
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)

Training Path
Objectives
Array Product Introduction
Lecture
OST11

be able to:
0.25d
Describe T series product position

Describe T series product structure
Describe T series product hardware configuration
Array Plan and Design
Lecture
OST12
and component
Describe T series product software structure and
0.25d
component
Describe T series product main features and
Array Installation and Configuration
OST13
typical application scenario

Master storage system hardware installation
1d
Master storage system device cabling

Master storage system power on sequence
Master device configuration
Array Routine Maintenance
OST14
Master basal operation configuration

Master T series product management
0.25d
Master T series product license using

Master T series product basal application
Array Troubleshooting
OST15
configuration
Master T series product performance stat.
function using
0.25d
Master T series product upgrade
Target Audience
Know T series product common fault disposal
Duration
Managers
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Know PC OS
Min 6, Max 12

192
7.5.3
T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) High-end Storage System Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path
Describe T series V2 product position

Describe T series V2 product structure
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array

Lecture
OST17
Describe T seriesV2 product hardware

configuration and component
0.25 d
Describe T series V2 product software structure

and component
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array Plan

and Design
Know T series V2 product hardware installation

plan
Lecture
OST18
0.25 d
Know T series V2 product deployment and

configuration plan
Master T series V2 product hardware installation

OST19
Master T series V2 product basal operation

configuration
1 d
Describe storage pool basal principle

Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial

Routine Maintenance
OST1A
reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction

Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
Reconstruction performance analysis
0.25 d
Storage pool configuration

Know T series V2 product maintenance tool

Troubleshooting
OST1B
using
Master T series V2 product routine maintenance
0.25 d
method
Know T series V2 product upgrade process and
precaution

Advanced Function
OST1C
Know T series V2 product common fault disposal

Master T series V2 product fault disposal process
2 d
Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,
Target Audience
deployment and configuration

Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
plan, deployment and configuration
Managers
Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,
Prerequisites
Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and

Know PC OS
Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
Objectives
Know Remote replication definition, principle and

Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and
be able to:
193
Duration
Describe clone principle, technology and
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
194
7.5.4
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
Training Path
Describe HVS(85T/88T) product position

Describe HVS(85T/88T) product structure
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Product

Introduction
Lecture
OST1D
Describe HVS(85T/88T) product hardware

configuration and component
0.25 d
Describe HVS(85T/88T) product software

structure and component
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Plan and

Design
Know HVS(85T/88T) product hardware

installation plan
Lecture
OST1E
0.25 d
Know HVS(85T/88T) product deployment and

configuration plan
Master HVS(85T/88T) product hardware
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Installation

and Configuration
OST1F
installation
Master HVS(85T/88T) product basal operation
1 d
configuration
Know HVS(85T/88T) product maintenance tool
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Routine

Maintenance
OST1G
Lecture
using
Master HVS(85T/88T) product routine
maintenance method
0.25 d
Know HVS(85T/88T) product upgrade process

and precaution
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage
Troubleshooting
Know HVS(85T/88T) product common fault

disposal
OST1H
Lecture
0.25 d
Master HVS(85T/88T) product fault disposal

process
Describe storage pool basal principle
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Advanced

Function
OST1I
Lecture
Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial

reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction
2 d
Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
Target Audience
Reconstruction performance analysis
Storage pool configuration
Managers
Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,

deployment and configuration
Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
Prerequisites
Know PC OS
Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,
Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and
Objectives
Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
be able to:
195
Duration
Know Remote replication definition, principle and

4 working days
Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Describe clone principle, technology and

196
7.5.5
SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product Deployment and Management
Training
Training Path

SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product

Introduction
OST1J
Lecture
Objectives
0.5d

be able to:
Master SNS2120/5120 hardware structure
SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch

Configuration
OST1K
Lecture, Demo
Master SNS2120/5120 software configuration

Duration
0.5d
1 working day
Target Audience
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
Know PC OS
197
7.5.6
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
Training Path
Objectives
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Product

Introduction
OST1L
Lecture

be able to:
0.25d
Describe Dorado2100 G2/5000 product position

Know Dorado2100 G2/5000 product
hardware/software structure component
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Installation

and Configuration
OST1M Lecture, Hands-on exercise
KnowDorado2100 G2/5000 product main

function feature
1.5d
Understand Dorado2100 G2/5000 product typical

application case
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage

OST1N
Lecture, Demo
Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product

hardware/software installation process
Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product basal
0.25d
configuration method
Know Dorado2100 G2 product routine
Target Audience
maintenance operation process
Know Dorado2100 G2 product upgrade process
Managers
Know Dorado2100 G2 product fault disposal
Prerequisites
operation
Duration
Know PC OS
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
198
7.5.7
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path
Describe VIS6000T product position

Know VIS6000T product software/hardware
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Product

Introduction
Lecture
OST1O
structure component
Know VIS6000Tproduct main function feature
0.25d
Understand VIS6000Tproduct typical application

case
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Plan and

Design
Know VIS6000T product hardware

installation/network plan
Lecture
OST1P
0.5d
Master VIS6000T product hardware/software

installation and deployment
Master VIS6000T product basal function
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Installation

and Configuration
OST1Q Lecture, Hands-on exercise
configuration
Know VIS6000Tproduct maintenance tool
0.75d
Know VIS6000Tproduct routine maintenance

method
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Routine

Maintenance
Lecture
OST1R
Master VIS6000T product common fault disposal

process
Know VIS6000T product fault disposal basal
0.25d
principle and method

Know VIS6000T product replication function
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway

Troubleshooting
principle, key technology, application plan,

network and connection
Lecture
OST1S
0.25d
Master VIS6000T product replication function

application deployment and configuration,
troubleshooting
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Advanced

Function
OST1T
Know VIS6000T product mirror function principle ,

key technology, application plan, network and
1d
connection
Target Audience
Master VIS6000T product mirror function

troubleshooting
Managers
Know VIS6000T product snapshot function
principle, key technology, application plan,
Prerequisites
network and connection

Master VIS6000T product snapshot function
Know PC OS
troubleshooting
Duration
Objectives
3 working days

be able to:
199
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
200
7.6 NAS and Data Protection Training Programs

7.6.1
N9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Know Windows, Linux OS operation

Know NAS system knowledge
N9000 product Introduction
Know cluster system foundation

OST25
Lecture
Objectives
0.25d

be able to:
N9000 System Technology
Describe N9000 product, position, main function,

OST26
Lecture
application scenario
0.5d
Describe N9000 user management,

AD/LDAP/NIS,NFS,CIFS, Dynamic storage tier
N9000 System Installation and Configuration
Planning
OST27
Lecture
principle
Be familiar with N9000 product hardware
0.25d
installation Planning
Be familiar with N9000 product deployment and
configuration Planning process and tools
N9000 System Installation and Configuration
Command N9000 product hardware installation

OST28
Command N9000 typical networking
0.5d
Command N9000 product file sharing

configuration
N9000 System Advanced Function Principle
and Deployment
OST29
Command N9000 wise link configuration and

application
1d
Command N9000 wise tier configuration and

application
Command N9000 wise qouta configuration and
N9000 System Routine Maintenance
application
OST2A
Be familiar with N9000 maintenance tool
0.25d
Command N9000 routine maintenance method

Be familiar with N9000 upgrade process and
N9000 System Troubleshooting
notice
Be familiar with N9000 troubleshooting method
OST2B
0.25d
Command N9000 troubleshooting case

Duration
Target Audience
3 working days
Class Size
Managers
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
Know storage foundation
201
7.6.2
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Know NAS system knowledge

Know cluster system foundation
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System

Introduction
OST2C
Lecture
Objectives
0.25d

be able to:
Describe N8500V2R1Clustered NAS product
N8500V2 Clustered NAS Technology

OST2D
Lecture
type, position, main function, application scenario

Describe N8500V2R1 clustered NAS NFS,CIFS,
0.25d
DST, replication technology principle

Be familiar with N8500 product hardware
N8500V2Clustered NAS System Installation

and Configuration Planning
OST2E
Lecture
installation planning
Be familiar with N8500 product deployment and
0.25d
configuration planning
Be familiar with network and bond mode
Command N8500V2R1 product hardware
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Installation

and Configuration
OST2F
installation
Command N8500V2R1 typical networking
0.5d
Command N8500V2R1 deployment tool

Command N8500V2R1 product file sharing basic
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Advanced

Function Principle and Deployment
OST2G Lecture, Hands-on exercise
operation configuration
Command N8500V2R1 Backup, DST
1d
configuration and application

Command N8500V2R1 file system snapshot ,
mirror image, replication principle, configuration
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Routine

Maintenance
OST2H
and application
Be familiar with N8500V2R1 maintenance tool
0.25d
method
Command N8500V2R1 routine maintenance
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System
Troubleshooting
OST2I
method
Be familiar with N8500V2R1 upgrade method
0.5d
Be familiar with N8500V2R1 product

troubleshooting method
Target Audience
Command N8500V2R1 typical fault case

Duration
Managers
3 working days
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12

202
7.6.3
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Know virtual tape library knowledge

Know cluster knowledge
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System

Introduction
OST35
Lecture
Objectives
0.25d
25.2
50.2
5
Installation and Configuration Planning
OST36
Lecture
be able to:
Describe VTL6900 positioning , architecture ,
features, application scenarios
Be
0.25d
familiar
with
VTL6900
Approaches
to
deploying and to planning VTL6900 deployment

and using configuration tools

OST37
Be familiar approaches and procedure for

installing the VTL6900 hardware
1d
Be familiar with Approaches to installing and

deploying the VTL6900
Be familiar with Approaches to using ISM
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Routine

Maintenance
OST38
ServiceTool to finish Daily maintenance tasks

Be familiar with Approaches to upgrading the
0.25d
VTL6900
Be familiar with Approaches to locating and

Troubleshooting
OST39
handling the VTL6900 faults

Command VTL6900 clustered mechanism
0.25d
Command VTL6900 data deduplication principle

and application
Command VTL6900 Tape Out principle and
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Advance

Function Principle and Application
OST3A
application
Command VTL6900 replication principle and
1d
application
Target Audience
Duration
3 working days
Managers
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
203
7.6.4
HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path

Know database knowledge and operation
HDP3500E Backup System Introduction
Objectives
OST3G
Lecture
0.25d
2
5
.
HDP3500E Backup System Installation
2 and
Configuration Planning
5
0 0.25d
Lecture
OST3H
.
2
5
and
HDP3500E Backup System Installation
Configuration
OST3I

be able to:
Describe HDP3500E the product requirement,
positioning ,software and hardware structure,
main functional characteristics
Be familiar with HDP3500E product hardware
Be familiar with HDP3500E product network,
deployment and configuration planning
1d
Command HDP3500E product hardware

installation
Command HDP3500E basic configuration
HDP3500E Backup System Routine

Maintenance
OST3J
Command HDP3500E Typical cases

Be familiar with HDP3500E maintenance tool
0.25d
method
Command HDP3500E routine maintenance
HDP3500E Backup System Troubleshooting
OST3K
method
Be familiar with HDP3500E upgrade process and
0.25d
notice
Be familiar with HDP3500E product
troubleshooting method
HDP3500E Backup System Common

Application Backup and Recovery
OST3L Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Know HDP3500E product fault case

Know BMR backup and recovery
1d
Command Database backup and recovery

Target Audience
Command Database backup and recovery

Know Database backup and recovery
Duration
Managers
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
204
7.7 Cloud Storage Training Programs

7.7.1
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Product Introduction

OST51
Lecture
Managers
0.25d

Prerequisites
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Deployment

Planning
OST52
Lecture
Know WindowsLinux OS knowledge
0. 5d
Know TCP/IP
Know storage virtualization knowledge
Objectives
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Installation

OST53

0.5d
be able to:
Describe CloudStor product type, position,
hardware, software, application scenario
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Management

Characteristics Configuration
OST54
Be familiar with CSS/CSE product hardware

0.5d
Be familiar with CSS/CSE product deployment

and configuration planning
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Service Characteristics

Configuration
OST55
Command CSS/CSE product hardware

installation
0. 5d
Command CSS/CSE typical networking

Command CSS/CSE system deployment
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Routine

Maintenance
OST56
tool
Command CSS/CSE basic operation
0. 25d
configuration
Command CSS/CSE management
characteristics
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Troubleshooting
Be familiar with CSS/CSE operation and

OST57
management
0.5d
Know CSS/CSE service characteristics

Command CSS/CSE service characteristics
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Advanced Technology

Application
OST58
configuration method and steps

Be familiar with CSS/CSE maintenance tool
0.75d
Command CSS/CSE routine maintenance

method
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Solution
Be familiar with CSS/CSE maintenance process

and notice
OST59
Know fault class, principle of fault location

205
Duration
Command fault location method, failure criteria

Be familiar with troubleshooting process
4 working days
Know CSS/CSE system principle
Class Size
Know CSS/CSE advanced technology
Min 6, Max 12
Describe CloudStor main solution

Be familiar with CloudStor solution
206
7.7.2
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management
Training Path
Objectives
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Product Introduction

be able to:
OST51
Lecture
0.25d

hardware and software components, application
scenario
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Installation

OST53
Lecture, demo
hardware, software, application scenario
0.5d
Be familiar with CSS/CSE product hardware

CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Management
OST54
Command CSS/CSE product hardware

installation
Lecture, demo
0.5d
Know CSS/CSE typical networking

Know CSS/CSE system deployment
tool
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Service Characteristics

Configuration
Know CSS/CSE basic operation configuration
Lecture, demo
Know CSS/CSE operation and management
OST55
Know CSS/CSE management characteristics
0.5d

CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Routine

Maintenance
OST56
Lecture, demo

Know CSS/CSE maintenance tool
0. 25d
Know CSS/CSE routine maintenance
Target Audience
method
Know CSS/CSE maintenance process and

notice

Duration
Managers
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

Know TCP/IP
Min 6, Max 12
207
7.7.3
UDS Mass Storage Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
UDS Mass Storage System Introduction

Managers
OST5A
Lecture
0.25d

Prerequisites
UDS Mass Storage System Deployment

Planning
OST5B
Lecture

Know TCP/IP
0.5d

Objectives
UDS Mass Storage System Installation

OST5C
be able to:
0.5d
Be familiar with UDS product hardware

installation Planning
UDS Mass Storage Management

OST5D
Be familiar with UDS product deployment and

configuration Planning
0.5d
Command UDS hardware installation

Command UDS typical networking
Command UDS system deployment tool
UDS Mass Storage Service Characteristics

Configuration
OST5E
Command UDS basic operation configuration

Command UDS management characteristics
0.5d
Be familiar with UDS operation management

Know UDS service characteristics
UDS Mass Storage System Routine

Maintenance
OST5F
Command UDS service characteristics
0.5d
Be familiar with UDS maintenance tool

Command UDS routine maintenance method
UDS Mass Storage System Troubleshooting
Be familiar with UDS maintenance process and

notice
OST5G Lecture, Hands-on exercise
0.5d
Know UDS fault class, principle of fault location

Command UDS fault location method, failure
UDS Mass Storage Advanced Technology

Application
OST5H
Lecture
criteria
Be familiar with UDS troubleshooting process
0.5d
Know UDS system principle

Know UDS advanced technology
Describe UDS Mass Storage main solution
UDS Mass Storage Solution

OST5I
Lecture
Be familiar with UDS Mass Storage solution

Duration
0.25d
4 working days
208
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
209
7.8 Server Products Training Programs

7.8.1
RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
RH Series Rack Server Introduction
be able to:
Lecture
OSV11
0.4 d
Describe the models, position, main functions

and application scenarios of RH series servers
Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
RH Series Rack Server OS Installation

Lecture, demo
OSV12
and hardware installation of RH series servers

Master BMC configuration of RH series servers
0.3 d
Master RAID plan and configuration of RH series

servers
Master OS installation method of RH series
RH Series Rack Server Routine Maintenance

and Troubleshooting
OSV13
servers
0.3 d
Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts

replacement of RH series servers
Target Audience
Master the methods of log collection of RH series
servers
Administrators
Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of
Prerequisites
RH series servers
Duration
Be familiar with Windows and Linux

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP
1 working day
Know basic knowledge of server
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
210
7.8.2
X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path

and application scenarios of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server Introduction

Lecture
OSV21
servers
Master the hardware structure, components,
0.4 d
views, modules, blade types and hardware

installation of X6000 series servers
Master BMC configuration of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server OS Installation
servers
Lecture, demo
OSV22
0.3 d
Master RAID plan and configuration of X6000

series servers
Master OS installation method of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server Routine Maintenance

and Troubleshooting
OSV23
servers
0.3 d
replacement of X6000 series servers
Target Audience
Master the methods of log collection of X6000

series servers
Administrators
X6000 series servers
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, max 12

be able to:
211
7.8.3
E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path

and application scenarios of E6000 series
E6000 Blade Server Introduction

Lecture
OSV31
servers
Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
0.4 d
and hardware installation of E6000 series

servers
Master iMana function, management and
E6000 Blade Server OS Installation
maintenance of E6000 blade server

Lecture, demo
OSV32
0.3 d
Master RAID plan and configuration of E6000

series servers
Master OS installation method of E6000 series
E6000 Blade Server Routine Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
OSV33
servers
0.3 d
replacement of E6000 series servers
Target Audience
Master the methods of log collection of E6000

series servers
Administrators
E6000 series servers
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, max 12

be able to:
212
7.8.4
E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Introduction
Lecture
OSV51
0.4 d
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade

Server OS Installation
Lecture, demo
OSV52
0.3 d
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server

Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting
OSV53
0.3 d
Target Audience
Administrators
Prerequisites
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the models, position, main functions and application scenarios of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
Blade Server
Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces and hardware installation of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
Blade Server
Master BMC function, management and maintenance of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Master RAID plan and configuration of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Master OS installation method of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts replacement of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Master the methods of log collection of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
213
7.9 Cloud Computing Training Programs

7.9.1
Mini VDI Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Describe the deployment process and method of

Mini VDI
Mini VDI Deployment and Management

OCL11
Describe the image creation requirements

Describe the image creation method
2d
Describe the data protection mechanism of Mini
Target Audience
VDI
Describe the basic troubleshooting methods of
Operators and maintainers
Mini VDI
Administrators
Prerequisites
GalaX8800
Be familiar with the basic knowledge of datacom
Be familiar with the basic knowledge of server
VDesktop6000
and Unix
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, max 12
Describe Mini VDI product
214
7.9.2
Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
of storage
Describe the security solution of Cloud
Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and
Computing
Management
OCL12
5d
SingleCLOUD
Target Audience
Describe the software structure of SingleCLOUD

E6000
Administrators
S3900
Prerequisites
Describe the structure of Galax8800

Be familiar with PC operating system
Describe the components and functions of
Know basic knowledge of datacom
Galax8800
Describe the installation of Galax8800
Know basic knowledge of storage
Describe the routine operations and
Objectives
maintenance of Galax8800
Describe the structure of VDesktop6000
Describe the components and functions of
be able to:
VDesktop6000
Describe the application scenario of Cloud
Describe the installation of VDesktop6000
Computing
Describe the routine operations and
Describe the key features of Cloud Computing
maintenance of VDesktop6000
Describe the concept and technology of virtual
Describe the image creation procedure
machine
Describe the creation and assignment of VM
Describe the configuration of TC
network
Duration

storage
5 working days
Class Size
Describe the protocol of storage

Min 6, max 12

Describe the backup and redundancy technology
215
7.9.3
FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Describe the feature of access control based on

roles
FusionCube Solution Deployment and

Management
OCL13
Describe the feature of memory multiplexing

Describe the feature of data backup and
3d
recovery
Target Audience
Describe the feature of integrated resource

management

Administrators
Describe the feature of VM snapshot
Describe the feature of elastic application

Describe the feature of application automatic
Prerequisites
deployment
Describe the feature of automatic thin
provisioning
Command FusionManager installation and
configuration
Objectives
Command FusionStorage installation and

configuration
Command FusionCube upgrade patch
be able to:
introduction
Describe FusionCube solution
Command FusionCube routine maintenance
Command FusionCube troubleshooting
FusionCube
Duration

FusionStorage
5 working days
Describe the security solution of FusionCube
Class Size
Describe the hardware structure of FusionCube

Min 6, max 12
Describe the feature of dynamic resource adjust

Describe the feature of distributed switches
216
7.9.4
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
feature
Describe FusionSphere virtualized storage
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and

Management
OCL14
feature
Describe FusionSphere virtualized network
3d
feature
Target Audience
Describe elastic load balance feature
Describe elastic computing feature
Administrators
Describe VPC feature
Describe data backup and recovery feature

Describe FusionCompute structure and
Prerequisites
functions
Describe FusionCompute routine operations
and maintenance
Describe FusionCompute upgrade procedure
Duration
Objectives
3 working days, including 1.5 days of hands-on
practice
be able to:
Class Size
Describe FusionSphere solution

Min 6, max 12
Describe FusionSphere installation procedure

Describe FusionSphere virtualized computing
217
7.10
Data Center Training Programs
7.10.1 Micro DC Deployment and Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
Micro DC Deployment and Management

be able to:
ODC11
1d
Describe the software and hardware of the Micro

DC
Target Audience
Master the installation and configuration of the
Micro DC
Administrators
Master the basic operations and functions of the
Micro DC
Prerequisites
Duration
Know basic computer knowledge
1 working days
Know basic IP technology and knowledge
Class Size
Know server knowledge

Min 6, Max 12
218
7.10.2 ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the overall architecture of the
ManageOne Solution Deployment and

Management
ODC12
ManageOne solution
Describe the installation and deployment of the
2d
ManageOne solution
Target Audience
Describe the basic features of the ManageOne

solution
Describe the operation and maintenance of
Administrators
ManageOne solution
Describe the business features and functions of
Prerequisites
ManageOne solution
Know about DC solution
Duration
Familiar with DC operation and maintenance

2 working days
knowledge
Class Size
Familiar with DC business knowledge

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
219
7.11
IT Design Training Programs
7.11.1 Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training

Training Path
Objectives
Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design

be able to:
OST61
Lecture
1d
Be familiar with SAN system

Be familiar with SAN system plan process
Target Audience
Be familiar with SAN system plan methods
Duration
Manager
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Know PC OS
Min 6, Max 12

220
7.11.2 Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design Training

Training Path
Objectives
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS)

Design
OST62
Lecture

be able to:
1d
Be familiar with NAS system

Be familiar with NAS system plan process
Target Audience
Be familiar with NAS system plan methods
Duration
Manager
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Know PC OS
Min 6, Max 12

221
7.11.3 Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training

Training Path
Objectives
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design

be able to:
OST63
Lecture
1d
Be familiar with backup network and system

Be familiar with backup solution plan process
Target Audience
Be familiar with backup solution plan methods
Duration
Manager
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Know PC OS
Min 6, Max 12

222
7.11.4 Enterprise Data Center Network Design Training

Training Path
Describe DC Network Layered Design

Describe DC Network Zoned Design
Enterprise Data Center Network Design

ODC21
Lecture
Describe DC Network Plane Design

Describe the Intercommunication of Multiple DC
2d
Design
Target Audience
Describe the DC Network Application

Acceleration Design
Describe the Cloud Computing DC Network
Manager
solution
Prerequisites
Describe DC Network products requirement and
Know IT and network basic knowledge
features, Cloud Engine Devices
Know basic security knowledge
Duration
Know network deployment experience

2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe DC Network Overall Architecture
223
7.11.5 Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training

Training Path
Describe DC Security Architecture Design

Principle
Enterprise Data Center Security Design

ODC22
Lecture
Describe DC Security Design Solution

Describe DC Security Threats and Protection
1d
Solution
Target Audience
Describe DC Infrastructure Security
Describe DC Network Layer Security
Manager
Describe DC Host and Application Security

Describe DC User Security Policy and Security
Prerequisites
Management
Familiar with DC Network basic knowledge
Describe DC Intrusion Detection Mechanism and
Familiar with Security Fundamental
Access Control Policy
Familiar with Security network deployment
Duration
experience
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
224
7.11.6 Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training
Training Path
basic concepts and related devices

Description of DC disaster recovery requirement
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery

and Backup Design
ODC23
Lecture
analysis
Description of DC disaster recovery solution
2d
design principles, processes and methods
Target Audience
Master DC disaster recovery design method,

case and key technology
Master of disaster recovery production center
Manager
design
Prerequisites
Master of disaster recovery backup center design

Familiar with the IT system architecture and the
Master of disaster recovery system link design
basic knowledge
Master of disaster recovery system service
Familiar with storage and SAN system
connection
technology
Master of principles, processes and methods of
Familiar with backup and disaster recovery basic
Huawei DR solution
knowledge and experience
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Description of DC disaster recovery subsystem
225
226
8 Enterprise UC&C Training Path

8.1 Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNP-UC-Hvoice
Implementing Huawei AR G3
Voice Solutions and QoS
5d
HCNP-UC-HIPT
Implementing Huawei IP
Telephony Solutions
5d
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing
Huawei Unified Communication
Administration
5d
Associate
Elective Guide:
Projects in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses
Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first
227
8.2 Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path (Fast-Track)
Expert
HCNP-UC Implementing
Solutions (Fast-Track)
5d
Professional
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing
Administration
5d
Associate
Elective Guide:
Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first
Customers with related equivalent voice certificate can attend HCNP-UC(Fast-Track) training and certification directly
228
8.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Path
Plan & Design

Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo
Voice System Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice

System Installation and Commissioning
4d
Fast-Track
Design (Fast-Track)
3d
3d
System Basic Configuration and
Operation
5d
System Advanced Configuration and
Operation (including Basic Configuration
and Operation)
8d
System Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
1d
HCNP-UC-Hvoice
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing
Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
5d
Fast-Track
Fast-Track
System Operation and Maintenance
(Fast-Track)
3d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei

Unified Communication Administration
5d
Elective Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U19XX/SoftCo voice system.

(Fast-Track).
229
5d
5d
8.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve

Design
HCNP-UC-Hvoice

1d
2d
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic

Fast-Track
Design (Fast-Track)
3d
5d
3d
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced

Configuration and Operation (including
Basic Configuration and Operation)
5d
Fast-Track

1d
Fast-Track
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation
and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
4d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training

5d
Elective Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using AR G3 voice system.

(Fast-Track).
230
5d
5d
8.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training

Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System

Design
3d

5d

Basic Configuration and Operation
Fast-Track
Design (Fast-Track)
3d
Improve
HCNP-UC-Hvoice
5d
5d
Fast-Track
Advanced Configuration and Operation
(including Basic Configuration and
Operation)
7d

Troubleshooting
1d
Fast-Track
(Fast-Track)
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
5d

5d
Elective Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC1.1 system.

5d
(Fast-Track).
231
5d
8.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system

Design (Small and Medium-sized
Enterprise: U29XX All in One
Solution)
1d

5d
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Basic

Design
4d
()
Fast-Track
Design (Fast-Track)
3d
Improve
HCNP-UC-Hvoice
7d
Advanced Configuration and Operation
(including Basic Configuration and
Operation)
10d
5d
Fast-Track
5d

Troubleshooting
1d
Huawei eSpace U29XX All in One
Solution
4d
Fast-Track
(Fast-Track)
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
5d

5d
Elective Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC2.0 system.

(Fast-Track).
232
5d
8.7 Contact Center Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement
Huawei Contact Center
Universal Access Platform
3d
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement
HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop
Huawei Contact Center CTI
Huawei IVR Advanced
Solution
Application
5d
3d
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing
Administration
5d
Associate
Elective Guide:
Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification
233
8.8 Contact Center Certification Training Fast-Track Path
Expert
Professional
HCNP-CC Implement
Large-scale Enterprise Contact
Center(Fast-Track)
5d
Associate
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing
Administration
5d
Elective Guide:
Programs in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses
Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification
234
8.9 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Training Path
Plan & Design

Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX
Gateway) Contact Center
Design
2d
VTM Solution Design
3d
Cloud Contact Center Design
3d
Implement & Operate

Improve

Management and Monitoring
3d
Gateway) Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction,
5d
Enterprise Contact Center

Advanced Routing Policy

Gateway) Outbound Contact
Center Service Introduction,
5d

Outbound Technology

Gateway) Multimedia Contact
Center Service Introduction,
(Including Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation)
7d
2d
IVR Process and Intelligent
Routing Development
3d
1d
Multimedia Technology
2d

5d
d
Troubleshooting
2d
d
Gateway) Contact Center Agent
Operation
1d
Fast-Track

Gateway) eSpace Contact
Center Solution Deployment
(Fast-Track)
3d
(Fast-Track)
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei

Contact Center Administration
5d
Elective-Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U29XX access gateway.
Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center/Outbound Contact Center/Multimedia Contact Center.
Electing by customer: Manager/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to Management and Monitoring/Service introduction,
configuration and operation/Installation and Commissioning.
Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification Training (Fast-Track).
235
8.10
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)
Contact Center Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Small and Medium-sized

Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100
Gateway) Contact Center Design
2d
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise

(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact
Center Management and Monitoring
3d

Advanced Routing Policy

(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction,
5d

IVR Process and Intelligent
Routing Development
VTM Solution Design

3d
Cloud Contact Center Design
3d

(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)
Outbound Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and
Operation
5d
Improve
2d
3d

Outbound Technology
1d
Multimedia Technology

(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice
2d
7d

(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact
Center Installation and Commissioning
5d
Contact Center Troubleshooting
Contact Center Agent Operation
2d
1d
Fast-Track
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) eSpace
Contact Center Solution Deployment
(Fast-Track)
3d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training

5d
Elective-Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U29XX access gateway.
Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center/Outbound Contact Center/Multimedia Contact Center.
Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification Training (Fast-Track).
236
8.11
Video Conference Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNP-VC-IHVCP
Introducing Huawei Video
Conference H.323 and
SIP Protocol
2d
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Introducing Huawei
Video Conference
Administration
Associate
Elective Guide
HCNP-VC-IHVP
Implementing Huawei
Advanced ViewPoint
System
5d
Follow the paths to learn.
237
5d
HCNP-VC-IHTP
Implementing Huawei
TelePrecese System
3d
8.12
Video Conference Certification Fast-Track Training Path
Expert
HCNP-VC
(Fast-Track)
Professional
5d
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Introducing Huawei
Video Conference
Administration
Associate
5d
Elective Guide
The Fast-Track trainings and certifications are design for the audiences who have obtained the same level technical certificate in
the industry.
Choose the different Fast-Track training programs according to the audiences technical level.
238
8.13
VC Product Training Path (ViewPoint/TelePresence)
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
ViewPoint Video Conference
9000 Series HD Terminal
System Planning and Design

2d
1d
Video Conference System(9000

Series HD Terminal/MCU/
SMC1.0) Operation and
5d
Maintenance

Series HD Terminal/MCU/
SMC2.0) Operation and
Maintenance
5d
Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)
Advanced Features Operation
and Maintenance
5d
TP/RP Series Product Operation

and Maintenance
2d
Fast-Track
Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)
(Fast-Track)
2d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Conference Administration
5d
Elective Guide
239
HCNP-VC-IHVCP
Conference H.323 and
SIP Protocol
2d
HCNP-VC-IHVP
Implementing Huawei
Advanced ViewPoint
System
5d
HCNP-VC-IHTP
Implementing Huawei
TelePrecese System
3d
HCNP-VC
(Fast-Track)
5d
8.14
Huawei eSpace IVS system Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
Huawei eSpace IVS system

installation and commissioning
2days
primary daily operation and
maintenance
3days
configuration and advanced
maintenance
3days
Fast -Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Elective-Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using Huawei eSpace IVS system.
240
9 Enterprise UC&C Training Courses

Enterprise UC&C Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Certification Training Programs

HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication
Administration
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony
Solutions
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3 Voice
Solutions and QoS
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Administration
HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise Contact
Center(Fast-Track)
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center
Universal Access Platform
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI
Solution
HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR Advanced
Application
HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video
Conference
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video
Conference
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video
Conference (Fast-Track)
Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Programs (Fast-Track)
HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions
(Fast-Track)
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and

Operation
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Advanced Configuration and

Operation (including Basic Configuration and Operation)
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs

Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Installation and
Commissioning
241
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16

(including Basic Configuration and Operation)
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Troubleshooting

Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice Operation and Maintenance
(Fast-Track)
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Programs
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Programs

Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Installation and Commissioning
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Basic Configuration and Operation
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Advanced Configuration and Operation

6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Troubleshooting
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Installation and Commissioning
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Basic Configuration and Operation
6 ~ 16
10
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Troubleshooting
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U29XX All in One Solution
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Design
6 ~ 16
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Design
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Design
6 ~ 16

(Small and Medium-sized Enterprise: U29XX All in One Solution)
6 ~ 16
6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Advanced Configuration and Operation

Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)

UC Planning and Design Training Programs
242
Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System Design

(Fast-Track)
6 ~ 16
CC Advanced Technology Training Programs
6~16
6~16
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Technology
6~16
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia Technology
6~16
Enterprise Contact Center Advanced Routing Policy

Enterprise Contact Center IVR Process and Intelligent Routing
Development
CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and Maintenance Training

Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center
Management and Monitoring
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Outbound Contact
Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact

Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
(Including Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation)
Troubleshooting
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent
Operation
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) eSpace Contact
Center Solution Deployment (Fast-Track)
CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)Operation and Maintenance Training

Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100
Gateway) Contact Center Management and Monitoring
6~16
6~16
6~16

Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,
Gateway) Outbound Contact Center Service Introduction,
243

Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
6~16
VTM Solution Design
6~16
Cloud Contact Center Solution Design
6~16
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center

Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Gateway) Contact Center Installation and Configuration
Gateway) Contact Center Troubleshooting
Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation
Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution
Deployment(Fast-Track)
CC Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway)Contact Center Design
Gateway) Contact Center Design
VC Operation and Maintenance Training Programs

9000 Series HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD
Terminal/MCU/SMC1.0) Operation and Maintenance
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD
Terminal/MCU/SMC2.0) Operation and Maintenance
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)
Advanced Features Operation and Maintenance
TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)
Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
VC Planning and Design Training Programs
ViewPoint Video Conference System Planning and Design
Huawei eSpace IVS system operation and maintenance training Programs

244
Huawei eSpace IVS system installation and commissioning

Training
Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily operation and
maintenance training
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced
Description: : Basic Course
245
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
: Advanced Course
: Expert Course
9.1 Certification Training Programs

9.1.1
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration
Training Path
and single products

Operate Huawei eSpace UC basic application
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified

Communication Administration
OUCE1
Describe Huawei eSpace UC installation and

commissioning
5d
Perform eSpace U19XX series gateway

Target Audience
operation
Those who hope to become a UC engineer
Describe call flows in eSpace U19XX system
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-UC
Perform the primary configuration in EMS

system
Prerequisites
Perform the primary configuration in EGW

Perform the primary configuration in IAD
Perform the primary configuration in IP phone
Perform the primary configuration in AR G3
Objectives
voice system
Describe call flows in AR G3 voice system
be able to:
Perform the primary maintenance in AR G3

voice system
Describe UC concept and development history

Duration
Describe VoIP concept

Distinguish VoIP and PSTN
5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
Describe VoIP key technology and protocol
working day
Describe UC basic application
Class Size
Describe Huawei eSpace UC solution
Min 6, max 16
Describe Huawei eSpace UC Architecture

Describe Huawei eSpace UC devices portfolio
246
9.1.2
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
Training Path
eSpace U19XX system

Perform the system data configuration in
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP

Telephony Solutions
OUCE3
eSpace U19XX system

Perform the user data configuration in eSpace
5d
U19XX system
Target Audience
Perform the office data configuration in eSpace

U19XX system
Those who hope to become an advanced Unified
Perform the application data configuration in
Communication engineer
eSpace U19XX system
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC
Design the call route in eSpace U19XX system
Prerequisites
Describe user registration flow in eSpace

U19XX system
Describe call flow in eSpace U19XX system
Describe call restriction in eSpace U19XX
HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge
system
Objectives
Describe the Voicemail application in eSpace

U1910/U1930
Perform the redundant application
be able to:
configuration in eSpace U1910/U1930
Describe VoIP protocol used in eSpace U19XX
Perform routine maintenance in eSpace
system
U19XX system
Describe eSpace U19XX system features
Perform troubleshooting in eSpace U19XX
Describe eSpace U19XX system function
system
Describe eSpace U19XX system parameters
Perform the fault location in eSpace U19XX
Distinguish the products in eSpace U19XX
system
system
Duration
Describe the typical networks in eSpace
U19XX system
working day
Describe the network design in eSpace U19XX
Class Size
system
Describe the boards and modules in eSpace
Min 6, max 16
U19XX system
Describe the boards and modules functions in
247
9.1.3
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3 Voice Solutions and QoS
Training Path
Describe the typical networks in AR G3 voice

system
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3

OUCE4
Describe the network design in AR G3 voice

system
5d
Describe the boards and modules in AR G3
Target Audience
voice system
Perform the system data configuration in AR
G3 voice system
Perform the user data configuration in AR G3
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC
voice system
Prerequisites
Perform the office data configuration in AR G3

voice system
Perform the application data configuration in
AR G3 voice system
HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge
Describe the two voice mode(SIPAG and PBX

mode) in AR G3 voice system
Objectives
Design the call route in AR G3 voice system
Describe user registration flow in AR G3 voice
be able to:
system
Describe development history of phone
Describe SBC application used in AR G3 voice
Describe PSTN concept and network
system
Describe the devices used in PSTN and
Describe user registration flow in AR G3 voice
network
system
Describe VoIP concept
Describe call flow in AR G3 voice system
Distinguish VoIP and PSTN
Perform routine maintenance in AR G3 voice
Describe VoIP key technology and protocol
system
Describe the codec used in VoIP network
Describe the QoS application used in AR G3
Describe the DSP used in AR G3 voice system
voice system
Describe AR G3 voice system features
Duration
Describe AR G3 voice system function

Describe AR G3 voice system parameters
working day
Distinguish the products in AR G3 voice system
Class Size
Identify the analog interface used in AR G3

voice system
Min 6, max 16
Identify the digital interface used in AR G3

voice system
248
9.1.4
HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions
(Fast-Track)
Training Path
Describe User Part of SS7 signaling, messaging

part of the message type code
HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified

Communication Solutions (Fast-Track)
OUCE2
Describe ISUP and TUP basic call flow in SS7

signaling
5d
Describe eSpace UC typical network scenarios
Target Audience
Mast eSpace UC network reliability
Master eSpace UC external network access
Master eSpace UC QoS planning
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC quickly
Configure Advanced business features of

eSpace U19XX system
Prerequisites
Make good use of the advanced features of
eSpace U19XX system
Analyze typical networking scenarios of eSpace
U19XX system
Obtain the same level voice NP certificate in the
Describe Huawei eSpace UC1000/UC3000
industry
solution architecture
Objectives
Describe Huawei eSpace UC1000/UC3000

installation and commissioning
List the Huawei eSpace UC1000/UC3000
be able to:
features
Describe the SIP protocol and SIP messages,
Describe the troubleshooting processes in
registration and call flow
eSpace UC system
Describe the basic concepts of the PRI protocol
Analyze the business operation of each module
Describe the second-tier message and format in
in eSpace UC system
PRI protocol
Manipulate the common fault in eSpace UC
Describe the communication between
system
second-tier and third-tier in PRI protocol
Implement the security reinforcement operation
Describe the third-tier messages and status in
in eSpace UC system
PRI protocol
Duration
Describe the basic call flow in PRI protocol

Describe the basic concepts of the R2 signaling
Describe the inter-register signaling of the R2
working day
signaling
Class Size
Describe the line signaling of the R2 signaling

Min 6, max 16
Describe the basic call flow in R2 signaling
249
9.1.5
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration
Training Path
Describe Huawei CTI principle

Implement agent service commissioning

OCCX1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe Huawei IVR principle

Implement automatic service commissioning
5d
Describe Huawei Multimedia Contact Center

Target Audience
function and principle
Those who hope to become a Contact Center
Describe Huawei Outbound system principle
engineer
Describe Huawei Outbound platform policy
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-CC
Describe Huawei Contact Center report system

architecture
Prerequisites
Describe flow of original data to database

Operate Huawei Contact Center report
Objectives
Describe Huawei Conference Recording

principle
Describe Huawei Soft Phone Recording
be able to:
principle
Describe enterprise communication concepts
rd
Describe Huawei 3 Party Recording
Describe contact center concepts and
integration principle
development history
Describe Huawei screen recording system
Describe Multimedia Contact Center services
principle
Describe Huawei eSpace Contact Center
Use Huawei Screen Recording System
Solution
Use Huawei WEB QC console
Use Huawei WEB monitoring console
architecture
Describe Contact Center development trend
and cloud Contact Center
devices portfolio and single products

Duration
Operation Huawei eSpace Contact Center

monitoring and QC
Analyze Contact Center network architecture
working day
Implement UAP series gateway operation and
Class Size
configuration
Min 6, max 16
Analyze Contact Center fundamental routing

policy
250
9.1.6
HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise Contact Center(Fast-Track)
Training Path
recovery methods
Describe Network Contact Center concepts,
HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise

Contact Center (Fast-Track)
features
Describe QC concepts, features
5d
Describe Network Contact Center function and

Target Audience
networking
Implement network Contact Center setting up

advanced engineer
Describe QC system main function
Implement QC system configuration
certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain
Describe QC system typical service flow
Huawei certificate
Describe IPCC system fault scenarios

Implement IPCC system troubleshooting
Prerequisites
Describe IVR process development principle
A general familiarity with PC Operation System
Describe IVR process troubleshooting flow
Computer and Communication basics
Implement IVR debug and log capture
Contact Center basics
Analyze IVR common problems and handling
Objectives
Describe IPCC Report System running

Principle

be able to:
Implement basic report commissioning
Describe eSpace U2990 product features and
Describe eSpace CC blade server products
functions
and features
Describe eSpace U2990 typical networking
Implement eSpace CC blade server installation

and commissioning
Describe eSpace U2990 boards and board

functions
Duration
Implement eSpace U2990 routine maintenance
operation
working day
Describe eSpace U2990 troubleshooting
Class Size
procedure
Implement eSpace U2990 troubleshooting
Min 6, max 16
eSpace U2990 emergent maintenance and
251
9.1.7
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal Access
Platform
Training Path
Analyze U2990 boards Configuration cases

Describe UAP Software System
HCNP-CC-HUAP
Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal
Access Platform
3d
Use UAP operation and maintenance tool

Describe UAP access function
Describe UAP resource function
Describe UAP agent function
Target Audience
Analyze UAP networking
Implement UAP capacity design
advanced engineer
Conclude PBX Fundamental knowledge
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-CC
Analyze differences between U2990 and
Prerequisites
UAP3300
Describe UAP installation flow
Describe UAP device data plan content
HCNA Contact Center knowledge
Implement U2990 device data configuration
Objectives
Implement U2990 office data configuration
Implement U2990 service data Configuration
be able to:
Use UAP playing voice
Describe Enterprise PBX Communication
Describe routine maintenance content of UAP
Principle
Implement routine maintenance operation
Describe the collaboration of UAP and
Use UAP maintenance and monitoring tool
application layer
Use capturing tool to do troubleshooting
Describe UAP interfaces
Use ICDDebug to do troubleshooting
Describe signaling and protocols supported by
Duration
UAP
Describe UAP stacking and cascading
Describe UAP technology indicators
working day
Class Size
DescribeUAP3300 frame and boards

Analyze UAP3300 MCU multiple-network-port
Min 6, max 16
Describe U2990 frame and boards
252
9.1.8
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Solution
Training Path
Analyze CTI fundamental routing policy

Analyze CTI layered services policy
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact

Center CTI Solution
Analyze CTI network routing policy

Analyze CTI outbound policy
5d
Implement CTI agent service commissioning

Implement CTI automatic agent service
Target Audience
Commissioning
Implement CTI multimedia contact Center
service commissioning
advanced engineer
Describe CTI mail, SMS, Fax call flow
Describe CTI network call flow
Prerequisites
Implement NIRC configuration
Describe CTI outbound flow
Implement outbound system configuration
Objectives
Describe CTI QC flow
Implement platform control policy configuration
be able to:
Describe CTI platform service monitoring
Describe the meaning of CTI technology
function
Analyze the position of CTI in different contact
Implement CTI platform Service monitoring
center solutions
configuration
Describe CTI function
Describe eSpace CC report solution
Describe technology indicators Huawei CTI
Implement data station installation

configuration
Describe CTI 4 layers logical structure
Implement iWeb installation configuration
Describe CTI 4 layers and functions of each

layer
Describe report secondary development

Principle
Use CT Communication matrix
Describe Huawei cloud terminal solution
Describe CTI network elements Monitoring and

the method
Describe Huawei cloud platform solution
Describe CTI common networking
Describe Huawei VTM solution
Implement eSpace CC one click installation
Describe Huawei social media access solution
Implement eSpace CC One or Two-Node
Process test
Cluster Configuration
Use IVR flow file
Describe CTI platform safety maintenance
Duration
content
Describe CTI platform safety reinforcing
working day
solution
Class Size
Describe CTI anti-virus solution

Implement CTI system monitoring
Min 6, max 16
253
9.1.9
HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR Advanced Application
Training Path
Describe intelligent concepts

Describe Huawei process file development tool
HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR

Advanced Application
Use Huawei process file development tool

Describe process file types and structures
3d
Describe process development procedure

Target Audience
Analyze Contact Center Automatic flow and

intelligent routing demands
Design automatic voice flow and intelligent
advanced engineer
routing flow file
Process development
Prerequisites
Process test
Use IVR flow file
Duration
Objectives
working day
be able to:
Class Size
Describe Huawei IVR Principle

Min 6, max 16
Describe Huawei IVR components and

modules
254
9.1.10 HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Conference

Training Path
Master SD terminal hardware installation

Master SD terminal software basic function
HCNA-VC-IHVCA Introducing Huawei Video

Conference Administration
OVCC1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Master HD series terminal hardware interface

Master HD series terminal hardware installation
5d
Master HD series terminal software basic
Target Audience
operations
Those who hope to become a video conference
Know MCU structure, function and feature
associate
Master MCU installation
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-VC certificate
Master MCU basic data configuration

Know vSwitch System basic function
Prerequisites
Master vSwitch System installation and
configuration
Master vSwitch System basic concept
Understand RM function
Objectives
Understand RM structure
Understand RM important concepts
be able to:
Master TP conference room deployment
Know video conference concept
requirements
Know video conference development history and
Master TP system hardware structure
tend
Master TP system conference control function
Master video conference system structure
Duration
Master video conference pivotal information
5 working days, including Hands-on exercise 2
compression technology
working days
Know video conference related framework
Class Size
protocol
Master SD terminal hardware interface
Min 6, Max 12
255
9.1.11 HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference

Training Path
Describe SEC2.0 ARQ against packets lost

feature
HCNP-VC-IHVCP Introducing Huawei Video

Conference H.323 and SIP Protocol
Master multi-channel cascading, multi-group

continuous presence
2d
Know video IVR feature

Master MCU backup mode
HCNP-VC-IHVP Implementing Huawei

Advanced ViewPoint System
Master MCU network cards ride mode

Describe feature
5d
Know firewall command

Know video conference service problems
under firewall
HCNP-VC-IHTP Implementing Huawei

TelePrecese System
OVCC4
Master video conference firewall traversal

3d
solution
Describe firewall routine cases analysis
Target Audience
Master video conference system
Those who hope to become a video conference
troubleshooting basic methods
professional
Master video conference system
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-VC
troubleshooting routine tool
Prerequisites
Master video conference system routine

command

Know Huawei TP basic feature
Know Huawei TP development and tend

Know Huawei TP series product
Objectives
Know Huawei TP product principle

Know Huawei TP product structure
be able to:
Describe Huawei TP application scenarios
Describe H.323 protocol stack structure
Master Huawei TP convene conference
Describe H.323 protocol registration flow
operation
Master video conference schedule signaling
Master Huawei TP conference control
flow
operation
Master routine signaling troubleshooting
Master Huawei TP conference troubleshooting
methods
Maintenance
Describe SIP protocol definition
Know Huawei TP series product software
Describe SIP message concept and structure
upgrade
Master SIP protocol call flow
Know TP product fault classification
Master SIP protocol typical application
Master TP product troubleshooting methods
scenarios
Describe TP product troubleshooting cases
Know optic basic knowledge
Duration
Know acoustic basic knowledge

Describe video conference decoration
working days
requirements
256
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
257
9.1.12 HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference

(Fast-Track)
Training Path
Master MCU installation configuration methods

Master MCU routine troubleshooting disposal
HCNP-VC Implementing Huawei Video

Conference System Advanced (Fast-Track)
methods
Know vSwitch System basic component function
5d
Master vSwitch System advanced operation
Target Audience
Master vSwitch System routine fault disposal
Those who hope to become a network professional
Master RM installation configuration
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-VC certificate
Master RM routine fault disposal
Know MCU advanced feature
certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain Huawei
Master MCU advanced feature operation
certificate
methods
Prerequisites
Master tri-screen TP system basic principle

Master tri-screen TP system troubleshooting
HCNA-VC certification or the similar knowledge
methods
Obtained the same level technical certificate in
Know video conference service firewall problem
the industry
Describe video conference service NAT
Objectives
Describe video conference firewall traversal

Duration
be able to:
Master video conference schedule signaling flow
working days
Master HD series terminal advanced settings
Class Size
Master HD series terminal software routine

function
Min 6, Max 12
Master HD series terminal routine Maintenance

Know MCU composing
and feature
258
9.2 Fundamental of VoIP Technology Training Programs

9.2.1
Training Path
Objectives
TDM and VoIP Network

Lecture
OUC01
be able to:
1d
Describe development history of telephone

network
Describe traditional TDM network architecture
Describe the integration between TDM and VoIP
MGCP/H.248 Protocol
OUC02
network
1d
Understand VoIP network architecture

Understand VoIP network principle
Describe MGCP/H.248 protocol
H.323 Protocol
OUC03
Understand the MGCP/H.248 protocol

architecture, messages and application
1d
Describe H.323 protocol

Understand the H.323 protocol architecture,
messages and application
SIP Protocol
OUC04
Describe SIP protocol

Understand the SIP protocol architecture,
1d
messages and application

Describe the reasons cause to voice quality in
the VoIP network
QoS Technology
OUC06
Understand QoS technology principle

Describe QoS technology application scenarios
1d
Duration
Target Audience
VoIP engineer
working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 16

259
9.2.2
Fundamental of VoIP Technology (Fast-Track)
Training Path


Lecture
OUC01
network
1d
Understand VoIP network principle

Describe MGCP/H.248 protocol
Understand the MGCP/H.248 protocol
VoIP Protocol
OUC05
architecture and application

Describe H.323 protocol
1d
Understand the H.323 protocol architecture and

application
Describe SIP protocol
QoS Technology
OUC06
Understand the SIP protocol architecture and

application
1d
Describe the reasons cause to voice quality in
Target Audience
the VoIP network

Understand QoS technology principle
VoIP engineer
Describe QoS technology application scenarios
Prerequisites
Duration

working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 16

be able to:
network
260
9.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs

9.3.1
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Installation and Commissioning
Training Path

Objectives
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction

Lecture
OUC11
0.5d
be able to:
Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system composition
Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system function
U19XX/SoftCo System Installation and

Commissioning
OUC12
Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo

system
0.5d
Perform the installation and commissioning of

U19XX/SoftCo system
EGW Introduction
OUC51

Lecture
0.5d
EGW system
IAD Introduction and Installation

OUC61
Perform the installation of IAD system

0.5d

Perform the installation and commissioning of IP
phone
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and

Configuration
OUC71
Describe the eSpace EMS system function

Describe the classification of eSpace EMS
0.5d
system
eSpace EMS system
eSpace EMS System Introduction

and Installation
OUC91
Duration
0.5d
Target Audience
working day
Class Size

Prerequisites
Min 6, max 16

261
9.3.2
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and
Operation
Training Path
Prerequisites

OUC11
Lecture

0.5d

A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo voice
U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration
system
OUC13
1d
Objectives
EGW Introduction
OUC51
be able to:
Lecture
0.5d

EGW Configuration and Maintenance

OUC52
system
Perform U19XX/SoftCo system configuration
0.5d



0.5d
Perform EGW system installation and

configuration
IAD Configuration and Maintenance

OUC62

0.5d

Perform IAD installation and configuration

Configuration
OUC71

Describe IP phone installation, upgrade and
0.5d
Configuration

and Installation
OUC91

system
0.5d
Perform eSpace EMS system installation

Perform eSpace EMS system configuration and
eSpace EMS System Configuration

and Maintenance
OUC9
2
Target Audience
Lecture, Hands-on
exercise
maintenance
Duration
0.5d

working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
262
9.3.3
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Advanced Configuration and
Operation
Training Path
Target Audience

Lecture
OUC11
Prerequisites
0.5d


OUC13
1d

Objectives
U19XX/SoftCo System Advanced Configuration

OUC14
1.5d
be able to:
U19XX/SoftCo System Maintenance

OUC15

0.5d
system
EGW Introduction
Perform U19XX/SoftCo system feature

Lecture
OUC51
0.5d
configuration
Perform U19XX/SoftCo system advanced
service configuration

OUC52
Perform U19XX/SoftCo system maintenance
0.5d



0.5d
configuration

OUC62
0.5d


Configuration

0.5d
Configuration
QoS Technology
OUC06

system
1d
Perform eSpace EMS system installation

Perform eSpace EMS system configuration and

and Installation
OUC91
maintenance
0.5d
Duration
8 working day, including hands-on exercise 3.5
eSpace EMS System Configuration

and Maintenance
working day
0.5d
263
Class Size
9.3.4
Min 6, max 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Troubleshooting
Training Path

system
U19XX/SoftCo System Troubleshooting

OUC17
1d
List the fault handling process of U19XX/SoftCo

system
Perform the fault location of U19XX/SoftCo
Target Audience
system
List the common fault of U19XX/SoftCo system
Prerequisites
Duration
working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo system

configuration
Objectives
be able to:
264
9.3.5
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
Training Path

configuration

OUC13
Objectives
1d

be able to:

OUC15

0.5d
system
configuration
OUC61
0.5d
OUC62

0.5d


Configuration
OUC71

Configuration
0.5d
Duration
Target Audience
working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 16

265
9.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Programs

9.4.1
Training Path

system

Network Design
OUC41
Lecture
Perform the AR G3 voice system installation and

commissioning
0.5d

AR G3 Voice System Installation and

Commissioning
between AR G3 voice system and EGW

1.5d
Target Audience

between AR G3 voice system and IAD
Prerequisites

between AR G3 voice system and IP phone
Duration

Objectives
working day
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, max 16

266
9.4.2
Training Path
Perform the AR G3 voice system configuration


Network Design
OUC41
Lecture

0.5d


and Operation
OUC42

2.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Duration
Objectives
working day
be able to:
Class Size
Min 6, max 16

system
267
9.4.3
Training Path


Network Design
OUC41
Lecture
configuration
Perform AR G3 voice system advanced service
0.5d
configuration

and Operation

2.5d

AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration

OUC43
2d

Target Audience

Prerequisites

Perform AR G3 voice system SBC configuration
Duration
Objectives
working day
be able to:
Class Size

Min 6, max 16

system
268
9.4.4
Training Path
Objectives
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
OUC44

be able to:
1d

system
Target Audience

Prerequisites
system
Duration

working day
Class Size
configuration
Min 6, max 16
269
9.4.5
Training Path
Objectives
AR G3 Voice System Introduction

and Network Design
OUC41
Lecture

be able to:
0.5d


and Operation
system
2.5d

configuration
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance

and Troubleshooting
OUC44
between AR G3 system and other voice

devices
1d
Target Audience

system
Prerequisites
Duration
working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
270
9.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System

Training Programs
9.5.1
Training Path
Target Audience
UC1.1 System Introduction

Lecture
OUC81
Prerequisites
0.5d


Lecture
OUC11
0.5d
Objectives

Commissioning
OUC12
be able to:
Describe the UC1.1 system composition
Describe the UC1.1 system function
Describe the classification of UC1.1 system
Perform the UC1.1 system installation and
commissioning
system
U19XX/SoftCo system
Describe the eSpace system function
Describe the classification of eSpace UMS
system
eSpace UMS system
EGW system
IAD
Perform the installation and commissioning of IP
phone
0.5d
UC1.1 System Installation and Commissioning

OUC82
1d
eSpace UMS System Installation, Operation

and Maintenance
OUCA1
0.5d
EGW Introduction
OUC51
Lecture
0.5d

OUC61
0.5d

OUC62
0.5d
Duration
Configuration
OUC71

working day
0.5d
271
Class Size
9.5.2
Min 6, max 16
Training Path
Prerequisites

OUC81
Lecture

0.5d

OUC11
Lecture
configuration
A general familiarity with UC1.1 system
0.5d
Objectives

OUC13
be able to:
1d

UC1.1 System Configuration and Maintenance

OUC83
Perform UC1.1 system configuration

0.5d

and Maintenance
OUCA1
system
0.5d
Describe the eSpace UMS system function

Perform eSpace UMS system installation and
eSpace UMS System Operation and

Maintenance
OUCA2
configuration
0.5d


OUC52
configuration
0.5d

OUC62
Perform IAD configuration

0.5d

Configuration

Configuration
OUC71
Duration
0.5d

working day
Target Audience
272
Class Size
9.5.3
Min 6, max 16

Configuration
Training Path

OUC81
Lecture
0.5d
Target Audience
0.5d

Prerequisites

OUC11
Lecture
0.5d


OUC13
1d

Objectives

OUC14
1.5d
be able to:
Describe the classification and function of UC1.1
system
OUC15
0.5d

Describe the call and data flows of UC1.1 system

OUC83
Describe the classification and function of
0.5d
U19XX/SoftCo system

and Maintenance
OUCA1
configuration
0.5d

Maintenance
OUCA2

0.5d

configuration
Describe the classification and function of EGW
system
OUC52
0.5d

configuration

OUC62
Describe the classification and function of IAD

0.5d

OUC71
Configuration
273
Duration
Class Size
Min 6, max 16

working day
9.5.4
Training Path
Objectives
UC1.1 System Troubleshooting
be able to:
OUC84
1d

Perform UC1.1 system maintenance
Target Audience
List the fault handling process of UC1.1 system
List the common fault of UC1.1 system
Prerequisites
List the fault handling process of U19XX/SoftCo

system
List the common fault between UC1.1 and
U19XX/SoftCo system

Duration

working day
configuration
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
274
9.5.5
Training Path
Prerequisites

OUC81
Lecture

0.5d


OUC11
Lecture
Objectives
0.5d
be able to:

OUC13

1d

Describe the call and data flows of UC1.1
OUC1
5
system
Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system
0.5d
composition

OUC83

system
0.5d


and Maintenance
OUCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
configuration
0.5d

configuration

Maintenance
OUCA2

0.5d


OUC62
0.5d
Configuration
Duration

Configuration
OUC71

0.5d
working day
Target Audience
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
275
9.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs

9.6.1
Training Path
Target Audience
UC2.0 system Introduction

Lecture
OUCB1
Prerequisites
0.5d
U29XX System Introduction

Lecture
OUC21

0.5d
Objectives
U29XX System Installation and Commissioning
OUC22

be able to:
0.5d


Commissioning

Perform the UC2.0 system installation and
0.5d
commissioning
Describe the U29XX system function
UC2.0 system Installation

OUCB2
Describe the classification of U29XX system

Perform the U29XX system installation and
0.5d
commissioning
eSpace EMS System Introduction and

Installation
OUC91

system
0.5d

U19XX/SoftCo system

and Maintenance
OUCA1

0.5d
system
Perform the eSpace EMS system installation
EGW Introduction
OUC51
and commissioning
Lecture
0.5d

system

OUC61

eSpace UMS system
0.5d


Configuration
OUC71

EGW system
0.5d

Perform the installation of IAD system
276
Duration

working day
IP phone
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
277
9.6.2
Training Path

UC2.0 system Introduction

OUCB1
Lecture
Objectives
0.5d
be able to:

OUC21
Lecture
0.5d

U29XX System Configuration

OUC23
Perform the UC2.0 system configuration
1d


OUC11
Lecture
Perform the U29XX system configuration

0.5d


OUC13
system
Perform the U19XX/SoftCo system
1d
configuration
U2.0 System Configuration

OUCB3
1d
system
Perform the eSpace EMS system configuration
eSpace EMS System Configuration and

Maintenance
0.5d
Maintenance

system
Perform the eSpace UMS system configuration
0.5d


OUC52
Perform the eSpace EGW system configuration

0.5d


OUC62

Configuration
0.5d

Perform IP phone installation and configuration
Duration
0.5d
Target Audience
working day
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, max 16
278
9.6.3
Training Path
Target Audience

OUCB2
Lecture
Prerequisites
0.5d

OUC21
Lecture
0.5d
Objectives

OUC23
Lecture, Hands-on
exercise
1d
On completion of this program, the participants will be

able to:
Describe the call and data flows of UC2.0
system
Describe the call flows of U29XX system
system
Perform the U19XX/SoftCo system
configuration
Describe the call flows of U19XX/SoftCo
system
system
Perform the eSpace EMS system configuration
system
Perform the eSpace UMS system configuration
Perform the eSpace EGW system
configuration
Perform IP phone installation and configuration

OUC11
Lecture
0.5d

1d

OUC14
1.5d
UC2.0 system Installation

OUCB1
Lecture
0.5d
UC2.0 system configuration

OUCB3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
1d
UC2.0 system Operation and Maintenance

1d
eSpace EMS System Configuration and

Maintenance
0.5d
Maintenance
0.5d

0.5d

OUC62

Configuration

0.5d
Duration
working day
0.5d
279
Class Size
9.6.4
Min 6, max 16
Training Path
Objectives
UC2.0 System Troubleshooting
be able to:
OUCB5
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d

Perform UC2.0 system maintenance
Target Audience
List the fault handling process of UC2.0 system

List the common fault of UC2.0 system
Prerequisites

Perform U29XX system maintenance
List the fault handling process of U29XX
system
List the common fault of U29XX system
Duration
A general familiarity with U29XX system

configuration
working day
configuration
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
280
9.6.5
Huawei U29XX All in One Solution
Training Path
Objectives
eSpace UC All in One System Introduction and

Network Design
OUC31
Lecture
be able to:
1d

eSpace UC All in One System Configuration

and Maintenance
OUC32

3d
Target Audience

Perform UC All in One system installation
Prerequisites
Perform UC All in One system configuration

Perform UC All in One system maintenance

Duration
working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
281
9.6.6
Training Path


OUCB1
Lecture

Objectives
0.5d

be able to:

1d



1d

UC2.0 system configuration

system
1d
Perform the U19XX/SoftCo system configuration

Describe the call flows of U19XX/SoftCo system
UC2.0 system Operation and Maintenance
1d

Duration
0.5d
working day
Target Audience
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
Prerequisites
282
9.7 UC Planning and Design Training

9.7.1
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Design
Training Path
A general familiarity with the products in

U19xx/SoftCo system and its capacity

OUC01
Lecture
Objectives
1d

be able to:
network
U19XX/SoftCo System Network Design

OUC16
Lecture
1d

network
EGW Introduction
OUC51
List the common protocols in VoIP network

Lecture
0.5d

system
IAD Network Design

OUC63
Lecture
Describe U19XX/SoftCo system capacity

Perform U19XX/SoftCo system network design
0.5d
Describe EGW/IAD function

Describe the classification of EGW/IAD
Describe EGW/IAD capacity
Audio Record System Introduction and

Network Design
OUCC1
Lecture
Perform EGW/IAD network design

Describe Audio Record/SBC system function
0.5d
Describe the classification of Audio Record/SBC

system
Describe Audio Record/SBC system capacity
SBC System Network Design
Perform Audio Record / SBC System Network

OUCD3
Lecture
Design
0.5d
Duration
Target Audience
4 working day
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, max 16

283
9.7.2
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Design
Training Path
Objectives

Network Design
OUC41
Lecture

be able to:
0.5d

system
IAD Network Design

OUC63
Lecture
Describe AR G3 system capacity
0.5d
Perform AR G3 system network design

Target Audience

Describe IAD capacity
Perform IAD network design
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
284
9.7.3
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
OUC01
Lecture
1d

network
Describe the integration between TDM and
UC1.1 System Planning and Design

OUC85
Lecture
VoIP network
0.5d

List the common protocols in VoIP network

OUC16
Lecture

1d
Describe UC1.1 system capacity

Perform UC1.1 system network design
IAD Network Design

OUC63
Lecture

system
0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Describe IAD capacity

Perform IAD network design
Duration

3 working day
A general familiarity with the products in
Class Size
U19xx/SoftCo system and its capacity

A general familiarity with the products in UC1.1
Min 6, max 16
system and its capacity
285
9.7.4
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design (Small and Medium-sized Enterprise:
U29XX All in One Solution)

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the UC All in One system composition
eSpace UC All in One System Introduction

and Network Design
OUC31
Lecture
Describe the UC All in One system function

Describe the UC All in One system capacity
1d
Describe the devices in the UC All in One

system
Target Audience
Describe the modules used in the UC All in

One system
Prerequisites
Understand the function of each module used

in All in One system
Perform the All in One system planning and
design
Duration
A general familiarity with U2980 and its

capacity
1 working day
A general familiarity with UC2.0 system and its
Class Size
capacity
Min 6, max 16
Objectives
286
9.7.5
Training Path
Prerequisites
UC2.0 System Network Design

OUCB6
Lecture

0.5d

A general familiarity with U29XX system and its
capacity
A general familiarity with UC2.0 system and its
U29XX System Network Design
capacity
OUC25
Lecture
0.5d
Objectives
be able to:

OUC16
Lecture
1d

Perform the UC2.0 System Network Design
SBC System Network Design

OUCD3
Lecture
0.5d
Perform U29XX system network design


and Maintenance
system
0.5d

Describe the SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD function
Describe the classification of
EGW Introduction
OUC51
SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD
Lecture
Describe the SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD capacity
0.5d
Perform the SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD network

design
Duration
IAD Network Design

OUC63
Lecture
0.5d
working day
Target Audience
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
287
9.7.6
Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System Design
(Fast-Track)
Training Path
UC2.0 system Network Design
OUCB6
Lecture
U29XX System Network Design

0.5d
Lecture
Lecture
0.5d
OUC16
Lecture

Network Design
OUC41
Lecture
0.5d
UC1.1 System Planning and Design

OUC85
OUC25
0.5d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with the products in U19xx/SoftCo system and its parameter
A general familiarity with U29XX system and its capacity
A general familiarity with the products in UC1.1 system and its capacity
A general familiarity with UC2.0 system and its capacity
288
1d
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Perform the UC2.0 system network design
Perform U29XX system network design
Describe UC1.1 system capacity
Perform UC1.1 system network design
Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo system
Describe the classification of AR G3 voice system
Describe AR G3 system capacity
Perform AR G3 system network design
Duration
3 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
289
9.8 CC Advanced Technology Training Programs

9.8.1
Enterprise Contact Center Advanced Routing Policy
Training Path
be able to:
Describe Contact Center skill concepts
Enterprise Contact Center Advanced

Routing Policy
OCC37
Describe Contact Center queue Concepts

Describe agent surplus scenario
2d
Describe Call surplus scenario

Describe layered services concepts
Target Audience
Describe Contact Center advanced routing policy

Implement Contact Center advanced routing
Managers
policy configuration

Duration

Prerequisites
working day
Class Size

Computer basics
Min 6, max 16
Objectives
290
9.8.2
Enterprise Contact Center IVR Process and Intelligent Routing Development
Training Path
Describe Huawei IVR components and modules

Describe intelligent routing concepts
IVR Process and Intelligent Routing

Development
OCC41
Describe Huawei process file development tool

Use Huawei process file development tool
3d
Describe process file types and structure

Describe process development procedure
Target Audience
Analyze Contact Center automatic flow and

intelligent routing demand
Design automatic voice process and intelligent
routing process
Developer
Development IVR scripts
Prerequisites
Test IVR process file

Use IVR process file
Duration
Computer basics
Objectives
working day
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, max 16
Describe Huawei IVR principle
291
9.8.3
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Technology
Training Path
be able to:
Describe Huawei outbound solution
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound

System Overview
Lecture
OCC61
Describe OBS system

Describe OBS system outbound policy
0.5d
Analyze predictive outgoing policy

Describe Huawei HPS
Enterprise Contact Center Platform
Configuration
OCC62
Describe HPS typical networking

Describe HPS typical application
0.5d
Describe HPS development interface

Describe HPS agent function
Implement HPS system installation
Target Audience
Create outbound policy
Create outbound campaign
Implement OBS configuration
Implement outbound
Developer
Implement OBS monitoring

Duration
Agents
Prerequisites

working day
Class Size
Computer basics
Min 6, max 16
Objectives
292
9.8.4
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia Technology
Training Path
Describe Huawei WECC application scenario

Describe Huawei Email call scenario
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia

Technology
OCC51
Describe Huawei Fax call scenario

Describe Huawei SMS call scenario
2d
Implement text chat service configuration

Implement click to dial service configuration
Target Audience
Implement call back request service

configuration
Implement escorted browsing service
configuration
Prerequisites
Duration
Computer basics
working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 16

be able to:
293
9.9 CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and

9.9.1
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Management and
Monitoring
Training Path
Objectives
IPCC System Overview

Lecture
OCC01
be able to:
0.5d

Describe IPCC concepts
Describe IPCC system architecture
Enterprise Contact Center Agent

Operation
OCCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe IVR function

Describe IPCC multimedia features
1d
Describe IPCC outbound function

Describe IPCC report function
Enterprise Contact Center Report
OCC71
Describe IPCC QC function

Describe IPCC monitoring function
0.5d
Describe IPCC agent function

Describe Huawei Contact Center agent concepts
Describe Huawei Contact Center voice terminals
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform

OCC81
Describe CCCBar agent function and application

0.5d
Describe JCccBar agent function and application

Describe agent server agent function and
application
Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring

Platform Operation
OCC91
Use CCCBar
Use customized agent interface
0.5d
Describe Huawei report solution

Describe the flow of original bill data to database
Target Audience
Describe report system structure
Describe report typical configuration
Use iWeb report
Service Managers
Use BIR report
Managers
Implement Datastation installation configuration

Prerequisites
Describe report secondary development principle

Describe Huawei contact center voice recording
Computer basics
system principle
294
Describe conference recording principle
Operate Huawei web QC system
Describe soft phone recording principle
Duration
Describe VOIP voice recording principle
rd
Describe Huawei 3 party voice recording
working day
platform integration principle
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
structure
295
9.9.2
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation

Training Path
Prerequisites
Computer basics
OCC01
Lecture
0.5d
Objectives
be able to:
U29XX Series Gateway Overview

OCC21
Lecture
0.5d

U29XX Series Gateway System Configuration

OCC23

1d

CTI Software System

OCC31
Lecture
0.5d
Describe U29XX series gateway system

structure and function
DescribeU29XX series gateway hardware
CTI Platform Service Commissioning
structure
OCC33
1d
DescribeU29XX series gateway software

structure
Describe U29XX series gateway interfaces and

OCC71
protocols
Describe U29XX series gateway function and
0.5d
specification
Analyze U29XX series gateway networking

OCC81
Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,

trunk circuit
0.5d
Implement U29XX series gateway basic

operation
Implement U29XX series gateway device data

Platform Operation
OCC91
configuration
Implement U29XX series gateway office data
0.5d
configuration
Implement U29XX series gateway service data
Target Audience
configuration
Describe CTI platform concepts
Describe Huawei CTI platform logical

296
rd
architecture

Describe CTI platform components function
Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine
structure
switchover
Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow
Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle
Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring

platform features
Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling
Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service
platform architecture
enabling
Describe Huawei system monitoring
Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC

components

Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
Use iWeb report
Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
Use BIR report
Use management system client to monitor

service

Duration

working day
system principle
Class Size
Min 6, max 16

297
9.9.3
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Outbound Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation

Training Path

Platform Operation

OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience

OCC21
Lecture

0.5d
Prerequisites
Computer basics

OCC23
Objectives
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System

OCC31
0.5d


System Overview
OCC61
Lecture

0.5d

Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Platform

Configuration
OCC62

0.5d

OCC71
structure
0.5d
structure
protocols

OCC81

specification
0.5d

trunk circuit
298
Use iWeb report

operation
Use BIR report
configuration
configuration
system principle
configuration
architecture
rd
switchover
structure
Describe OBS system
platform features
Describe Huawei HPS
components

service

Duration

Implement outbound
working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 16

299
9.9.4
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service

Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training Path

Platform Operation

OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience

OCC21
Lecture
0.5d
Prerequisites
Computer basics

OCC23
Objectives
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System

OCC31
Lecture

0.5d


OCC33

1d


Technology
OCC51

2d

structure
Enterprise Contact Center Report Configuration

and Operation
OCC71
0.5d
structure
protocols

OCC81

specification
0.5d

300
trunk circuit

Use iWeb report

operation
Use BIR report
configuration
configuration
system principle
configuration
architecture
rd
switchover
structure
platform features
enabling
components

service

configuration
Duration
configuration
working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
301
9.9.5
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Installation and
Commissioning
Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
OCC01
be able to:
0.5d

U29XX Series Gateway Installation and

Commissioning
OCC22

0.5d

OCC23

1d

DescribeU29XX series gateway typical
networking
CTI Software System

Lecture
OCC31
DescribeU29XX series gateway deployment

process flow
0.5d
Implement U29XX series gateway installation

Commission U29XX Series Gateway Service
CTI Platform Installation
OCC32

trunk circuit
0.5d

operation

OCC33
configuration
1d

configuration
CTI Platform Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
OCC34
configuration
1d

architecture
Target Audience

switchover
Implement eSpace CC box product one-click
Prerequisites
installation
Implement eSpace CC box product configuration
Computer basics
Describe eSpace CC safety solution

302
Operate eSpace CC monitoring system
Implement CTI platform emergency maintenance
Duration
working day
Class Size
enabling
Min 6, max 16
Implement CTI platform alarm handling

Implement CTI platform troubleshooting
303
9.9.6
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Troubleshooting
Training Path
Objectives
U29XX Series Gateway Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
OCC24
be able to:
1d
Describe U29XX series gateway routine

maintenance
Describe U29XX series gateway common faults

Troubleshooting
OCC34
Analysis U29XX troubleshooting examples

Use UAP series gateway troubleshooting tool
1d

Target Audience

Duration

Prerequisites
working day
Class Size

Computer basics
Min 6, max 16
304
9.9.7
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation
Training Path
be able to:
Enterprise Contact Center Agent Operation


1d

application
Target Audience
Use CCCBar
Agents
Duration
Prerequisites
working day
Computer basics
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
305
9.9.8
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution
Deployment(Fast-Track)
Training Path


Lecture
OCC01

0.5d


Lecture
OCC21

0.5d
structure
structure
CTI Software System

Lecture
OCC31

protocols
0.5d

specification

OCC33

1d

architecture
CTI Network Design

OCC35
Lecture

switchover
0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
enabling
Describe Huawei eSpace CC Box product series
Computer basics
Describe CTI two-cluster machine principle

Describe NIRC principle
Objectives
Describe IPCC centralized networking and

distributed networking
be able to:
Duration

working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 16
306
9.10
CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100
Gateway)Operation and Maintenance Training

9.10.1 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact
Center Management and Monitoring
Training Path


Lecture
OCC01

0.5d

Enterprise Contact Center Agent Operation

1d


OCC71

0.5d


OCC81
application
Use CCCBar
0.5d

Platform Operation
OCC91

0.5d

Use iWeb report
Use BIR report
Target Audience
Service Managers
Managers
system principle
Prerequisites
Computer basics

rd
Objectives
be able to:
structure
307
working day
Duration
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
9.10.2 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice

Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training Path

Platform Operation

OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience
UAP Series Gateway Overview

OCC11
Lecture
0.5d
Prerequisites
Computer basics
UAP Series Gateway System Configuration

OCC13
Objectives
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System

OCC31
Lecture

0.5d


OCC33

1d


OCC71

Describe UAP series gateway system structure
0.5d
and function
Describe UAP series gateway hardware structure

OCC81
Describe UAP series gateway protocols and

interfaces
0.5d
Analyze UAP series gateway networking

trunk circuit
Implement UAP series gateway basic operation
Implement UAP series gateway agent data
308
configuration
system principle
Implement terminal data configuration
Implement UAP series gateway trunk data
configuration

rd
Implement UAP series gateway service data
configuration

structure

architecture

platform features

switchover

components

enabling

service

Duration

Use iWeb report
Use BIR report
working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 16

309
9.10.3 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Outbound

Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training Path

Platform Operation

OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience

OCC11
Lecture

0.5d
Prerequisites
Computer basics

OCC13
Objectives
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System

OCC31
Lecture
0.5d

Enterprise Contact Center Outbound System

Overview
OCC61
Lecture
0.5d


Platform Configuration
OCC62

0.5d
and function
OCC71

interfaces
0.5d

trunk circuit

OCC81

0.5d

configuration
310
configuration


configuration

system principle

architecture
switchover
rd
Describe OBS system
structure
Describe Huawei HPS

platform features


components

Implement outbound

service

Duration

working day
Class Size
Use iWeb report
Min 6, max 16
Use BIR report
311
9.10.4 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia

Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training Path
Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring Platform

Operation

OCC01
Lecture
OCC91
0.5d
0.5d
Target Audience

OCC11
Lecture
0.5d
Prerequisites
Computer basics

OCC13
Objectives
1d
be able to:
CTI Software System

OCC31
Lecture

0.5d


OCC33

1d


Technology
OCC51

2d
and function
Enterprise Contact Center Report Configuration

and Operation
OCC71

interfaces
0.5d

trunk circuit

OCC81

0.5d
configuration
312

configuration
configuration
system principle
architecture
rd
switchover
structure
enabling
platform features

components

configuration

service

configuration
Duration
working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
Use iWeb report

Use BIR report
313

Center Installation and Commissioning
Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
OCC01
be able to:
0.5d

UAP Series Gateway Installation and

Commissioning
OCC12

0.5d


OCC13
1d

Describe UAP series gateway typical networking
Describe UAP series gateway deployment
CTI Software System

Lecture
OCC31
process
0.5d
Implement UAP series gateway installation

Commission UAP series gateway service
CTI Platform Installation

OCC32
trunk circuit
0.5d

configuration

OCC33
1d
configuration
configuration

Troubleshooting
OCC34

1d
architecture
Target Audience
switchover
Implement eSpace CC box product one-click

installation
Prerequisites
Implement eSpace CC box product configuration
Describe eSpace CC safety solution
Computer basics
Operate eSpace CC monitoring system

314
Duration
working day
enabling
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
315

Center Trouble shooting
Training Path
Objectives
UAP Series Gateway Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
OCC14
be able to:
1d
Describe UAP series gateway emergency

maintenance
Describe UAP series gateway common faults

Troubleshooting
OCC34
Implement UAP series gateway emergency

maintenance
1d
Use UAP series gateway troubleshooting tool

Target Audience

Duration

Prerequisites

working day
Class Size
Computer basics
Min 6, max 16
316

Center Agent Operation
Training Path
be able to:
Enterprise Contact Center Agent

Operation

1d

application
Target Audience
Use CCCBar
Agents
Duration
Prerequisites
working day
Computer basics
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
317
9.10.8 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) eSpace

Contact Center Solution Deployment(Fast-Track)
Training Path


Lecture
OCC01

0.5d


Lecture
OCC11
and function
0.5d

interfaces
CTI Software System

Lecture
OCC31

0.5d

architecture

OCC33
1d
switchover
CTI Network Design

OCC35
Lecture

0.5d

enabling
Target Audience
Describe Huawei eSpace CC Box product series
Prerequisites


Duration
Computer basics
Objectives

working day
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, max 16

318
9.11
CC Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
9.11.1 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Design

Training Path


OCC01
Lecture

0.5d


OCC21
Lecture
0.5d

structure
Large-scale Enterprise Contact Center

Gateway Networking
OCC25
Lecture

structure
0.5d

protocols
CTI Network Design

OCC35
Lecture
specification
0.5d

DescribeU29XX series gateway function
DescribeU29XX series gateway networking
Target Audience
Implement U29XX series gateway capacity
design
Describe Huawei eSpace CC Box product
series
Prerequisites
Computer basics

Communication basics
Duration
Objectives
2 working day
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, max 16

319

Center Design
Training Path


OCC01
Lecture

0.5d


OCC11
Lecture
0.5d

and function
Describe UAP series gateway hardware
Small-and-medium-sized Enterprise Contact

Center Gateway Networking
OCC15
Lecture
structure
0.5d
interfaces
Describe UAP series gateway function
CTI Network Design

OCC35
Lecture
Describe UAP series gateway networking
0.5d
Implement UAP series gateway capacity

design
Target Audience

series
Prerequisites


Duration
Computer basics
Communication basics
2 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
be able to:
320
9.11.3 VTM Solution Design

Training Path
be able to:
Describe VTM system orientation
VTM System Overview

OCCC1
Lecture
Describe VTM system architecture

Describe VTM system networking
0.5d
Describe VTM virtual counter system function

Describe VTC subsystem function
Describe VTA subsystem function
CTI Software System

OCC31
Lecture
0.5d

architecture
CTI Network Design

OCC35
Lecture

switchover
0.5d

series
VTM Platform Installation and Commissioning
OCCC2
Lecture

0.5d

Describe VTM platform installation
VTM Platform Operation and Maintenance

OCCC3
Lecture
prerequisites
1d
Describe VTM platform installation flow

Implement VTM single parts installation
Target Audience
Implement VTM solution commissioning
Implement VTM administrator operation
Implement VTM QC inspector operation
Implement Quick Teller operation

Duration
Prerequisites
3 working day

Computer basics
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
321
9.11.4 Cloud Contact Center Solution Design

Training Path

Cloud Contact Center Overview

OCCB1
Lecture
architecture
0.5d

switchover
CTI Software System

OCC31
Lecture
series
0.5d

CTI Network Design

OCC35
Lecture
Describe the content of Cloud desktop plan
0.5d
Implement Cloud Agent commissioning

Implement Cloud Contact Center management
Cloud Contact Center Platform Installation and
Commissioning
OCCB2
Lecture
Describe Cloud CC routine maintenance

Implement Cloud CC management system
0.5d
server maintenance
Implement Cloud CC database maintenance
Duration
Cloud Contact Center Platform Operation and

Maintenance
OCCB3
Lecture
3 working day
1d
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Computer basics
Objectives
be able to:
Describe Huawei cloud terminal concepts
Describe Huawei cloud desktop solution
Describe Huawei Citrix XenDesktop5 solution
Describe cloud Contact Center solution
Describe the differences between cloud
Contact center and traditional Contact Center
322
9.12
VC Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
9.12.1 9000 Series HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance

Training Path
terminal related component

Master 9000series HD video conference
9000 Series HD Terminal

Introduction
Lecture
OVC11
terminal hardware connection

0.5d
terminal basic settings

9000 Series HD Terminal Operation

and Maintenance
OVC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
terminal point-to-point conference operation

0.5d
terminal multi-sites conference operation

Target Audience
terminal conference control
Administrators
terminal advanced settings
Prerequisites

terminal system troubleshooting methods
terminal software upgrade
Know 9000series HD video conference
Objectives
terminal fault disposal typical cases

Duration
be able to:
1 working day, including Hands-on exercise 0.25
Describe 9000series HD video conference
working days
terminal function feature
Class Size

terminal principle
Min 6, Max 12
Know 9000series HD video conference
323
9.12.2 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC1.0) Operation

and Maintenance
Training Path
SMC1.0 Installation and Basic

Configuration
Video Conference System

Overview
Lecture
OVC01
0.5d
0.5d
SMC1.0 Operation and Maintenance
H.323 Protocol
OVC33
Lecture
OVC06
0.5d
Target Audience
0.5d
Monitoring Staffs
9000 Series HD Terminal Introduction

Lecture
OVC11
Administrators
0.5d

Prerequisites

and Maintenance

0.5d

Objectives
MCU Introduction
be able to:
OVC21
Lecture
0.5d
Know video conference communication basic

knowledge
Know video conference development process
MCU Conference Data Configuration

OVC22
and tend
Describe Huawei Video Conference System
0.5d
Overview
Describe Huawei video conference technology
innovation
MCU Operation and Maintenance

OVC23
Describe Huawei video conference solution

0.5d

Describe H.323 protocol structure
SMC1.0 System Introduction

OVC31
Lecture

0.5d
Master routine signaling fault localization

analysis methods
Master 9000series HD video conference terminal
324
principle
Master MCU outside GK scenario conference

configuration
Know 9000series HD video conference terminal

related component
Master MCU built-in GK scenario conference

configuration
Know MCU Web advanced settings
hardware connection
Master MCU software upgrade
basic settings
Master MCU fault disposal flow
Master MCU fault disposal routine methods
point-to-point conference operation
Master MCU routine fault disposal methods
Know SMC1.0basic concept
multi-sites conference operation
Describe SMC1.0system structure
Master SMC1.0principle
conference control
Master SMC1.0main function
Master SMC1.0system software installation
advanced settings
Master SMC1.0system initiation configuration
Master SMC1.0 conference schedule
system troubleshooting methods
Master SMC1.0 conference control
Master SMC1.0 routine Maintenance
software upgrade
Master SMC1.0 routine fault disposal
Duration
fault disposal typical cases

Know MCU structure composing
5 working days, including Hands-on exercise 1.25
Know MCU basic feature
working days
Class Size
Know MCU boards and subboards

Know MCU typical
Min 6, Max 12
Master MCU Web basic configuration
325
9.12.3 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC2.0) Operation

and Maintenance
Training Path
Target Audience

Overview
Monitoring Staffs
Lecture
OVC01
0.5d
Administrators
Prerequisites
H.323 Protocol
Lecture
OVC06
0.5d

Objectives
9000 Series HD Terminal Introduction

Lecture
OVC11
0.5d
be able to:

and Maintenance
knowledge
0.5d
and tend
Overview
MCU Introduction
OVC21

Lecture
innovation
0.5d

Describe H.323 protocol structure

OVC22
0.5d

Master routine signaling fault localization

OVC23
analysis methods
0.5d

principle
SMC2.0 system introduction

OVC34
Lecture
0.5d
related component
hardware connection

OVC35

basic settings
1d
326
configuration

point-to-point conference operation
Master MCU software upgrade
multi-sites conference operation
Master MCU fault disposal flow
Master MCU fault disposal routine methods
conference control
Master MCU routine fault disposal methods
Know SMC2.0definition
advanced settings
Describe SMC2.0 functions of Huawei video
conference
system troubleshooting methods
Master SMC2.0 system structure
Master SMC2.0 system main function
software upgrade
Master SMC2.0 routine operation
Master SMC2.0 routine Maintenance
fault disposal typical cases
Master SMC2.0 routine fault and exclude
methods
Duration

Know MCU typical
working days
Class Size

configuration
Min 6, Max 12
327
9.12.4 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced

Features Operation and Maintenance
Training Path
be able to:
Describe SIP protocol definition
SIP Protocol
OVC07
Describe SIP message concept and structure
Master SIP protocol call flow
1.5d
Master SIP protocol typical application scenarios

Video Conference Room Integration

Lecture
OVC04
0.5d
requirements
Describe SEC2.0ARQagainst packet lost feature
Master multi-channel cascading, continuous
Video Conference Advanced Features

OVC02
presence
1d
Know video IVR feature

Master MCU backup mode
Master MCU two network cards ride mode
Video Conference Firewall Traversal
Describe Multicast feature
Solutions
Lecture
OVC03
Know firewall basis
1d
Describe video conference service firewall

problem
Video Conference Troubleshooting
Master video conference firewall traversal

solution
OVC05
1d
Master video conference system troubleshooting

basic methods
Target Audience
Master video conference system troubleshooting

routine tool
Monitoring Staffs
configuration video conference system routine

command
Administrators
Duration

Prerequisites

working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
328
9.12.5 TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance

Training Path
Prerequisites
TP/RP System Introduction

Lecture
OVC41
0.25d

Objectives
TP/RP Operation and Upgrade
be able to:
OVC42
0.25d
Know Huawei TP basic feature

Know Huawei TP development and tend
Know Huawei TP series product
TP/RP Routine Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
Lecture
OVC43
Know Huawei TP product principle

Know Huawei TP product structure
0.25d
Describe Huawei TP application scenarios

Master Huawei TP convene conference
MCU Introduction
operation
Lecture
OVC21
Master Huawei TP conference control operation
0.25d
Master Huawei TP conference troubleshooting

Know Huawei TP series product software
upgrade

OVC22
0.25d


OVC23

0.25d
Duration
2 working days

OVC35
Class Size
0.5d
Min 6, Max 12
Target Audience
Administrators
Note: HQ can only provide lecture training on TP&RP. If the customer require TP/RP practice training please
select On-Site training.
329
9.12.6 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Operation and

Maintenance (Fast-Track)
Training Path


and Maintenance

principle
0.5d

related component
hardware connection
OVC22
0.5d

SMC1.0 System Introduction

OVC31
Lecture
Know MCU typical

0.5d

configuration
SMC1.0 Installation and Basic
Configuration

configuration
0.5d

Know SMC1.0 basic concept
Target Audience
Describe SMC1.0 system structure
Master SMC1.0 principle
Administrators
Master SMC1.0 main function
Prerequisites
Duration
working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
330
9.13
VC Planning and Design Training Programs
9.13.1 ViewPoint Video Conference System Planning and Design

Training Path

knowledge

Overview
Lecture
OVC01

and tend
0.5d

Overview
Video Conference Room Integration

Lecture
OVC04
innovation
0.5d

Video Conference Typical Networks

OVC53

requirements
1d
Know video conference system routine
Target Audience
networking solution
Describe video conference system and SoftCo

merging networking solution
Administrators
Describe video conference system and Microsoft
MSUC merging solution
Prerequisites
Duration

working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
331
9.14
9.14.1 Huawei eSpace IVS system installation and commissioning Training

Training Path
Objectives
Huawei small-sized eSpace IVS installation

OVS10
be able to:
0.5day
Describe the function of iDeploy tools

Perform operation of iDeploy tools
Describe the function of PCG
Huawei medium and large-sized Space IVS

installation
OVS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5day
Describe the function of SCU

Describe the function of DCG
Describe the function of MDU
Describe the function of MRU
Describe the function of MTU
Huawei eSpace IVS deployment setup and

configuration
1day
OVS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe the function of MAU

Describe the function of SMU
Describe the function of OMU
Target Audience
Perform installation of eSpace IVS system
Perform installation eSpace IPC
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working daysincluding hands-on exercise 1
working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
332
9.14.2 Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily operation and maintenance training
Training Path
Describe the function of eSpace IVS client

Describe the components of eSpace IVS client
Huawei eSpace IVS system overview

Lecture
OVS13
Describe the system architecture of eSpace IVS

Outline the function of eSpace IVS CS client
0.5day
Outline the function of eSpace IVS BS client

Perform login operation of eSpace IVS CS client
Perform live operation of eSpace IVS CS client
Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily

operation and maintenance(C/S)
1day
OVS14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Perform map operation of eSpace IVS CS client

Perform record operation of eSpace IVS CS
client
Perform alarm operation of eSpace IVS CS client
Huawei eSpace IVS primary daily operation

and maintenance training (B/S)
OVS15
Perform other operation of eSpace IVS CS client

Perform login operation of eSpace IVS BS client
0.5day
Perform live operation of eSpace IVS BS client

Perform map operation of eSpace IVS BS client
Huawei eSpace IPC primary daily operation
and maintenance
OVS20
Perform record operation of eSpace IVS BS

client
0.5day
Perform alarm operation of eSpace IVS BS client

Perform other operation of eSpace IVS BS client
Perform live operation of eSpace IPC
Huawei eSpace codec primary daily operation

and maintenance
OVS30
Perform alarm operation of eSpace IPC
0.5day
Perform playback operation of eSpace IPC

Perform live operation of eSpace codec
Target Audience
Perform alarm operation of eSpace codec

Perform playback operation of eSpace codec
Administrators
Duration

Prerequisites
3 working daysincluding hands-on exercise 1.5

working days
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
333
9.14.3 Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced maintenance training
Training Path
Objectives
Huawei eSpace IVS system overview and

network design
Lecture
0.5day
OVS16
be able to:
Describe the media flow of eSpace IVS system
Describe the control flow of eSpace IVS system
Describe the network solution of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and

advanced maintenance
OVS17 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5days
system
Perform configuration of eSpace IVS system
Perform business realization of eSpace IVS
system
Describe advanced features of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace IPC configuration and

system
Perform configuration of eSpace IVS system
advanced features
Perform business realization of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace codec configuration and

system advanced features

Perform hardware installation of eSpace IPC
Perform docking platform of eSpace IPC
Target Audience
Perform an upgrade of eSpace IPC
Perform hardware installation of eSpace codec
Perform docking platform of eSpace codec
Prerequisites
Perform an upgrade of eSpace codec

Duration

3 working daysincluding hands-on exercise 1.5
A basic understanding of Huawei eSpace IVS
working days
system primary daily operation and maintenance
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
334
10 Network Energy Training Path

10.1
Power Supply Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
Minishelter Operation and
1d
Power3000 Operation and

4d
PowerCube 500 Operation and
2d
PowerCube1000 Operation
4d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include Minishelter, Power3000, PowerCube500, PowerCube1000 products
trainings.
335
10.2
Data Center Facility Training Path
Plan & Design

Plan and design training
Implement & Operate

Operation and maintenance
training
Improve
Advanced technical
training
IDS1000 Cluster Container

Data Center Operation and
4d
IDS1000 All in one Container
Data Center Operation and
3d
IDS2000 Medium and Large

Modular DC Operation and
5d
IDS2000 Small Modular Data
Center Operation and
2d
Precision Air Conditioner

2d
Precision Air Conditioner
Training
3d
NetEco Management System

Training
3d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include IDS1000, IDS2000, air condition and NetEco products trainings.
336
10.3
UPS Training Path
Plan & Design

Implement & Operate
Improve
Training
UPS Operation and
5d
UPS Operation and Maintenance

2d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include UPS2000, UPS5000, UPS8000 products trainings.
337
11 Network Energy Training Courses

Enterprise Network Energy Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Power Supply Product Training Programs

Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training
6~12
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
6~12
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training
6~12
PowerCube1000 Operation and Maintenance Training
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
6~12
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training
6~12
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
6~12
Data Center Facility Product Training Programs

IDS1000 Cluster Container Data Center Operation and
IDS1000 All in one Container Data Center Operation and
IDS2000 Medium and Large Modular Data Center
IDS2000 Small Modular Data Center Operation and
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance
Training
NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance
Training
UPS Product Training Programs
338
: Advanced Course
: Expert Course
11.1
Power Supply Training Programs
11.1.1 Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Master the principle, functional of Minishelter

Master functions and parameters of the various
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance
components about Minishelter

OPS11
Lecture
Master the installation of Minishelter
1d
Master the routine operation of Minishelter
Target Audience
Master the routine maintenance of Minishelter

Describe common faults of Minishelter
Prerequisites
Dispose common faults of Minishelter

Duration
Have a basic knowledge of Minishelter

Objectives
1 working day
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Understand the basic structure of the Minishelter
339
11.1.2 Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
supply system
Understand the load capacity of Power3000
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance
power supply system

OPS12
Master the installation of Power3000 power
4d
supply system, could complete some replace
Target Audience
operation
Master the routine operation of Power3000

power supply system
Prerequisites
Master the routine maintenance of Power3000
Have a basic knowledge of power supply
power supply system
Objectives
Describe common faults of Power3000 power

supply system

be able to:
Dispose common faults of Power3000 power

supply system
Describe the function of Power3000 power

supply system
Duration
Describe the hardware structure of Power3000
4 working days
power supply system
Class Size
Understand functions and parameters of the

various components about Power3000 power
Min 6, Max 12
340
11.1.3 PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
system
Understand the load capacity of PowerCube500
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance
system
OPS13
Master the installation of PowerCube500 system,
2d
could complete some replace operation
Target Audience
Master the routine operation of PowerCube500
system
Prerequisites
Master the routine maintenance of

PowerCube500 system
Describe common faults of PowerCube500
Objectives
system
Dispose common faults of PowerCube500
be able to:
system
Describe the function of PowerCube500 system
Duration
2 working days
PowerCube500 system
Class Size

various components about PowerCube500
Min 6, Max 12
341
11.1.4 PowerCube1000 system operation and maintenance training

Training Path
system
Understand the load capacity of PowerCube1000
PowerCube1000 Operation and Maintenance
system
OPS14
Master the installation of PowerCube1000
4d
system, could complete some replace operation
Target Audience
Master the routine operation of PowerCube1000
system
Prerequisites
Master the routine maintenance of

PowerCube1000 system
Describe common faults of PowerCube1000
Objectives
system
Dispose common faults of PowerCube1000
be able to:
system
Describe the function of PowerCube1000 system
Duration
4 working days
PowerCube1000 system
Class Size

various components about PowerCube1000
Min 6, Max 12
342
11.2
Data Center Facility Training Programs
11.2.1 IDS1000 Cluster Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe the installation tools of the container

DC
IDS1000 Cluster Container Data

Center Operation and Maintenance
OIDS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Describe the installation precautions of the

container DC
4d
Describe fastness and combination
Target Audience
Describe the interconnect pipes of the container
DC
Prerequisites
Describe the interconnect cables of the container

DC
None
Describe the System commission with power
Objectives
supply
Describe the Inspections and checks of the
be able to:
container DC
Describe the basic architecture of the container
Describe the cooling system troubleshooting
DC solution
methods
Describe the basic concepts and features of the
Describe the power supply system
container DC
troubleshooting methods
Describe the typical configurations of the
Describe the fire protection system
container DC
Describe the values for consumer of the
Describe the room management system alarm
container DC
processing methods
Describe the technical advantages of the
Duration
container DC
4 working days
Describe the application scenarios of the
Class Size
container DC
Perform the engineering surveys of the container
Min 6, Max 12
DC
343
11.2.2 IDS1000 All in one Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training path
Performing engineering surveys of the All in one

DC
IDS1000 All in one Container Data

Describe the installation tools of the All in one DC

Describe the installation considerations of the All
3d
in one DC
Target Audience
Describe the lifting of the All in one DC

Describe the interconnect cables of the All in one
DC
Prerequisites
Describe the system commissions of the All in
None
one DC
Objectives
Describe the routine inspections of the All in one

DC
Describe the troubleshooting methods of cooling
be able to:
system
Describe the basic architecture of the All in one
Describe the troubleshooting methods of power
DC
system
Describe the basic concepts and features of the
Describe the troubleshooting methods of fire
All in one DC
protection system
Describe the typical configurations of the All in
Describe the troubleshooting methods of
one DC
Management system
Describe the customer values of the All in one

Duration
DC
Describe the technology advantages of the All in
3 working days
one DC
Class Size
Describe the typical scenarios of the All in one
Min 6, Max12
DC
344
11.2.3 IDS2000 Medium and Large Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training path
IDS2000 Medium and Large
Modular Data Center Operation and
Maintenance
technical specification
Survey for modular data center
Description modular data center installation tool
Description modular data center installation
5d
notes
Target Audience
Description cabinet system installation
Description power supply and distribution system

installation
Prerequisites
Description cooling system installation
None
Description NetEco system installation
Objectives
Description fire system installation
On completion of this course, the participants will be
Description cabling system
able to:
Description system power on debugging
Description medium and large modular DC
Description data center inspection
solution basic components
Description cooling system fault handle method
Description medium and large modular DC basic
Description power system fault handle method
concept
Description fire system fault handle method
Description data center management system
typical configuration
alarm handle method
Description medium and large modular DC value
Duration
for consumer
5 working days
Class size
technical advantage
Min 6, Max 12
application scene
345
11.2.4 IDS2000 Small Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Training path
Description small modular DC installation tool

Description small modular DC installation notes
IDS2000 Small Modular Data

Description small modular DC combined cabinet

Description small modular DC fan installation
2d
Description small modular DC UPS and UPS
Target Audience
battery installation
Description small modular DC cable connection
Prerequisites
Description small modular DC system power on

debugging
None
Description small modular DC inspection
Objectives
Description small modular DC UPS fault handle

method

able to:
Description small modular DC fan fault handle

method
Description small modular DC solution basic

components
Description management system alarm handle

method
Description small modular DC basic concept

Description small modular DC typical
Duration
configuration
2 working days
Description small modular DC value for
Class size
consumer
Description small modular DC application scene
Min 6, Max 12
346
11.2.5 Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)

Training path
Precision Air Conditioner Operation
and Maintenance
technology
Description precision air conditioner cooling
principle
Description Huawei main precision air
2d
conditioner products
Target Audience
Description precision air conditioner main
technical parameters
Prerequisites
Description precision air conditioner installation

and debugging
Have the basic technology of data center facility
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class size
able to:
Description precision air conditioner basic
Min 6, Max 12
347
11.2.6 Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training

Training path

and debugging
Precision Air Conditioner Operation

Precision air conditioner different type, cooling

type, feature, and application scene
3d
Precision air conditioner different air supply
Target Audience
method, feature, and application scene
Description precision air conditioner type

selection and configuration method
Prerequisites
Precision air conditioner design and heat load
calculation
Objectives

and debugging

able to:
Description precision air conditioner on-site fault

handle
Description precision air conditioner basic

technology
Description precision air conditioner routine

maintenance
Description precision air conditioner cooling

principle
Duration
Description Huawei main precision air
3 working days
conditioner products
Class size
Description precision air conditioner main

technical parameters
Min 6, Max 12
348
11.2.7 NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
NetEco Management System
Training
Description of the NetEco networking mode

Description of the NetEco function
Description of the NetEco highlight
Description of the NetEco data base installation
3d
Description of the NetEco software package
Target Audience
installation
Description of the NetEco configuration
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
349
11.3
UPS Training Programs
11.3.1 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Master the installation and debugging points, site

work content, attention matters of UPS product
UPS Operation and Maintenance
and Storage battery

OUPS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Master the basic Fault determination method and
5d
thought of UPS product and Storage battery
Target Audience
Master the trouble diagnosis and treatment

methods of UPS product
Master the log analysis capabilities of UPS
Prerequisites
Master the commonly testing tools usage of UPS
Have a basic knowledge of electrician
Master the commonly faulty judgment and
Objectives
processing of storage battery
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Master the application scenarios and basic
Class Size
working principle of UPS product

Master the Structure and components function of
Min 6, Max 12
UPS product and Storage battery
350
11.3.2 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)

Training Path
UPS Operation and Maintenance(Fast-Track)
OUPS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
2d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Have a basic knowledge of electrician
Objectives
be able to:
Master the application scenarios and basic
working principle of UPS product
Master the Structure and components function of
UPS product and Storage battery
Master the installation and debugging points, site
work content, attention matters of UPS product
and Storage battery
Master the basic Fault determination method and
thought of UPS product and Storage battery
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
351
12 GSM Training Path

12.1
GSM RNP&RNO Training Path

GSM Radio Network
Design and Planning
Training
4D
GSM Indoor Coverage

Training
2D
BSC6000 GSM Radio

Network Optimization
Training
10D
BSC6900 GSM Radio
Network Optimization
Training
10D
GSM RNP Engineer
GSM to UMTS/LTE
Radio Network
Interoperability
Training
GSM Radio Network
Analysis Training
2D
GSM Highway and

High-speed Railway
Solution Training
1D
1D
GSM Indoor Coverage

Training
2D
GSM BSS14.0 Feature

Delta Training
352
1D
GSM RNO Engineer
12.2
GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training Path

BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio
Network Planning and
Optimization Training
5D
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio
Network Planning and
GPRS/EDGE Radio
Network Analysis
Training
GPRS EDGE Signaling

Training
2D
GRPS/EDGE RNP&RNO Engineer
Evolved EDGE
Training
1D
1D
5D
353
12.3
GSM BSS Product Training Path

GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and
Training
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration
Training
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting

Training
GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0 Delta Training
PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation

GSM BSS9.0 BTS Operation and
GSM BSS9.0 BSS
GSM BSS9.0 BSS
Reconfiguration Training
Configuration Training

Training
354
GSM BSS12.0 BSS
Training

Training
GSM BSS12.0 - BSS13.0 Delta

Training
GSM BSS13.0 BSS
Training
GSM IPRAN Application
Training
Training
GSM IPRAN Reconstruction
GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta
Training
Training
355
GSM BSS14.0 BSS
Training
GSM IPRAN Application
Training
Training
GSM IPRAN Reconstruction

Training
GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade

Training
GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and

Feeder Maintenance
Training
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency
356
12.4
GSMR BSS Product Training Path

GSMR BTS Operation and
GSMR BSS Operation and
(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
GSMR BSS Configuration Training

(BSC6000V900R008C15)
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting

Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
GSMR BTS Operation and
GSMR BSS Operation and
(BSC6000 V901R008)
(BSC6000 V901R008)
GSMR BSS Configuration

Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting

357
13 GSM Training Courses

GSM Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training
6 ~ 12
BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
10
6 ~ 12
BSC6900 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
10
6 ~ 12
GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training
6 ~ 12
GSM Indoor Coverage Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training
6 ~ 12
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training
6 ~ 12
GSM Radio Network Analysis Training
6 ~ 12
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization

Training
6 ~ 12
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization

Training
6 ~ 12
GPRS EDGE Signaling Training
6 ~ 12
Evolved EDGE Training
6 ~ 12
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
GSM RNP&RNO Training Courses
GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training Courses
GSM BSS Product Training Courses
358
6 ~ 12
PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade Training
6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
GSM IPRAN Application Training
6 ~ 12
GSM IPRAN Reconstruction Training
6 ~ 12
GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

V900R008C15)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

V900R008C15)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

V901R008)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

V901R008)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Product Training Courses
359
360
13.1
GSM RNP&RNO Training
13.1.1 GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training

Training Path
Implement selecting the suitable antenna type

Outline the key specifications of antenna
Implement GSM radio network coverage
GSM Antenna Basics
planning
OMP00
Lecture
0.5d
Explain the link budget model and its
ecture
application
Explain the advance technology for improving
GSM Radio Network Planning

OMP01
Lecture
coverage
Implement GSM radio network traffic capacity
3.5d
planning on TCHF/TCHH/SDCCH
Target Audience
Explain the capacity enhancement technology
GSM Radio Network Planning Engineers
Describe the paging ability of radio network
Prerequisites
Explain GSM frequency resource, C/I
Basic knowledge of mobile communications
conception, frequency reuse definition, and
Objectives
frequency tighten reuse technology and its

application

Duration
be able to:
Describe the theory of radio signal propagation
4 working days
Describe the radio signal propagation model
Class Size
Interpret the structure of the antenna
Min 6, max 12
equipments
Interpret the features of the antenna
equipments
361
13.1.2 BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training

Training Path
Analysis the messages on A interface and Abis

interface
Explain the important message parameters
BSC6000 GSM Air Interface

OMA00
Lecture, Hand-on exercise

exercise exercise
Identify the fault by the method of analyzing the
2.5d
signaling flow
List the MS behaviors in idle mode
Describe the parameters associated with MS
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network Functionality

OMO00
behaviors in idle mode
2.25d
List the types of frequency hopping

Describe the functions of frequency hopping
algorithm
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network Features

OMO02
Describe the parameters of frequency hopping

Describe the general flow of GSM power
control algorithm
Interpret Huawei power control algorithm II
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network
Performance Management
Lecture
OMO04
Interpret Huawei power control algorithm III

Describe the other features about power
0.5d
control
Describe the general flow of GSM handover
Target Audience
algorithm
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers
Interpret Huawei handover algorithm I/II
Prerequisites
Describe the enhanced full rate algorithm
Describe the half rate algorithm
At least 1 year working experience in GSM
Describe the adaptive multiple rate algorithm

Describe the GSM radio channel allocation
wireless network optimization
algorithm II
Objectives
Describe the operations about performance
management based on M2000
be able to:
Interpret the general analysis procedure of
Describe the function of each kind of logical
traffic analysis
channel
Interpret the functions of some typical counters
Describe the general radio signal process on
Duration
Um interface
10 working days
State the techniques used on Um interface
Class Size
Describe typical GSM communication flow

Perform the operation for interface message
Min 6, max 12
trace
Identify the messages on A interface and Abis
interface
362
13.1.3 BSC6900 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training

Training Path
Analysis the messages on A interface and Abis

interface
Explain the important message parameters
BSC6900 GSM Air Interface

OMA01

exercise exercise
Identify the fault by the method of analyzing the
2.5d
signaling flow
List the MS behaviors in idle mode
Describe the parameters associated with MS
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio

Network Functionality
OMO01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
behaviors in idle mode

2.25d
List the types of frequency hopping

Describe the functions of frequency hopping
algorithm
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio
Describe the parameters of frequency hopping
Network Features
OMO03
Describe the general flow of GSM power

control algorithm
Interpret Huawei power control algorithm II
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio

Network Performance Management
Lecture
OMO05
Interpret Huawei power control algorithm III

Describe the other features about power
0.5d
control
Describe the general flow of GSM handover
Target Audience
algorithm
Interpret Huawei handover algorithm I/II
Prerequisites
Describe the enhanced full rate algorithm
Describe the half rate algorithm
Describe the adaptive multiple rate algorithm

Describe the GSM radio channel allocation
algorithm II
Objectives

be able to:
Interpret the general analysis procedure of
traffic analysis
channel
Interpret the functions of some typical counters
Describe the general radio signal process on
Duration
Um interface
10 working days
State the techniques used on Um interface
Class Size
Describe typical GSM communication flow

Perform the operation for interface message
Min 6, max 12
trace
Identify the messages on A interface and Abis
interface
363
13.1.4 GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training

Training Path
Objectives
GSM 2G/3G/4G Interoperability
be able to:
OMO10
Lecture
Target Audience
Describe the inter-RAT CS cell reselection
1d
conditions
ecture
Describe the inter-RAT PS cell reselection

conditions
Describe the inter-RAT handover algorithm
Prerequisites
Describe the signaling flow of inter-RAT

Completion of the following program(s):
handover
GSM BSC6000 Radio Network Optimization
Duration
Training,
1 working day
OR GSM BSC6900 Radio Network
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
364
13.1.5 GSM Indoor Coverage Training

Training Path
List the types of common components for

indoor coverage
Common Components for Indoor
Describe the functions of common
Coverage and Repeater Introduction

OMP03
Lecture
components for indoor coverage

0.5d
Describe the functions of repeaters

Describe the method of GSM indoor coverage
planning
GSM Indoor Coverage Planning and

Optimization
OMP04
Describe the method of GSM indoor coverage

Lecture
1.25d
optimization
Describe the method of indoor and outdoor
inter-operation
GSM Indoor Coverage Solution

OMO12
Lecture
Describe the stadium coverage solution

Describe the metro coverage solution
0.25d
Describe the airport coverage solution

Target Audience
Describe the resident location coverage

solution
Describe the commercial building coverage
solution
Prerequisites
Describe the campus coverage solution
Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12

be able to:
365
13.1.6 GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training

Training Path
Objectives
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta
be able to:
OMO15
Lecture
Target Audience
Describe the enhanced part in handover
1d
algorithm I
ecture
Describe the enhanced part in handover

algorithm II
Describe the feature of VAMOS
Prerequisites
Describe the feature of PS power control

Describe the feature of HSCSD
Describe the feature of smart pipe
Training,
Duration

1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
366
13.1.7 GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training

Training Path
Describe highway and high-speed railway

solution
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway
Describe the networking strategy of highway
Solution
OMO11
Target Audience
and high-speed railway

Lecture
1d
Describe the feature and equipment of highway
ecture

Describe the scenario solutions of highway and
high-speed railway
Describe the optimization method of highway
Prerequisites

Duration

GSM Radio Network Design and Planning
1 working day
Training
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12

be able to:
367
13.1.8 GSM Radio Network Analysis Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the key KPIs of TCH/SDCCH call
BSC6900 GSM Radio Network
drop
Optimization
OMO14
Summarize the typical problems of call drop in

Lecture, Case-study
Target Audience
2d
realistic network
ecture
Analyze the main reasons of call drop

Describe the key KPIs of handover
Summarize the typical problems of handover
Prerequisites
failure in realistic network
Analyze the main reasons of handover failure
Study the cases

Duration
Training,
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
368
13.2
GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training
13.2.1 BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training

Training Path
channel
Describe the typical application scenarios of
different logical channel
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Air Interface

OMA02
Describer the multiple timeslot ability of
2d
GPRS/EDGE MS
exeWCDMA Radio
Describe GPRS/EDGE channel setup flow
Network Performance
GSM BSS8.1 GPRS/EDGE Radio
Management Training
Network Features
(RAN10/RAN11/RAN12
OMO06 Lecture, Hand-on exercise
1.5d
)
rcise exercise
Describe GPRS/EDGE channel release flow

List the typical parameters for GPRS/EDGE
radio network optimization
Interpret the typical parameters for
GPRS/EDGE radio network optimization
GSM BSS8.1 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network

Lecture
OMO08
Describe GPRS/EDGE power control algorithm

Describe GPRS/EDGE cell reselection
1d
conditions
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning
OMP00
Lecture

Interpret the functions of typical counters
0.5d
List the typical KPIs

Interpret the definition and measurement points
of typical KPIs
Target Audience
Describe the work flow of GPRS/EDGE radio
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and
network planning
Optimization Engineers
Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network traffic
Prerequisites
capacity planning
Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network
coverage planning
At least 1 year working experience in
GPRS/EDGE wireless network planning and
frequency planning
optimization
Describe the influence to the GSM network
Objectives
Duration

be able to:
5 working days
Outline the GPRS/EDGE network structure and
Class Size
functions of entities in GPRS network
Min 6, max 12
Describe the GPRS/EDGE frame structure of

Um interface
369
13.2.2 BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training

Training Path
channel
Describe the typical application scenarios of
different logical channel
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Air Interface

OMA03
Describer the multiple timeslot ability of
2d
GPRS/EDGE MS
exeWCDMA Radio
Describe GPRS/EDGE channel setup flow
Network Performance
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0
Management Training
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Features
(RAN10/RAN11/RAN12
OMO07 Lecture, Hand-on exercise
1.5d
)
rcise exercise
Describe GPRS/EDGE channel release flow

List the typical parameters for GPRS/EDGE
radio network optimization
Interpret the typical parameters for
GPRS/EDGE radio network optimization
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 GPRS/EDGE
Describe GPRS/EDGE power control algorithm
Radio Network Performance Management

Lecture
1d
OMO09
Describe GPRS/EDGE cell reselection

conditions
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning

OMP00
Lecture

Interpret the functions of typical counters
0.5d
List the typical KPIs

Interpret the definition and measurement points
of typical KPIs
Target Audience
Describe the work flow of GPRS/EDGE radio
network planning
Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network traffic
Prerequisites
capacity planning
coverage planning
GPRS/EDGE wireless network planning and
frequency planning
optimization
Describe the influence to the GSM network
Objectives
Duration

be able to:
5 working days
Outline the GPRS/EDGE network structure and
Class Size
functions of entities in GPRS network
Min 6, max 12
Describe the GPRS/EDGE frame structure of

Um interface
370
13.2.3 GPRS EDGE Signaling Training

Training Path
Describe the layer3 of Um interface and

relative signaling flows
GPRS EDGE Signaling

OMA05
Target Audience
Lecture
2d
ecture

Describe the Gb interface and relative signaling
flows
Describe the Gn/Gp interface and relative
Prerequisites
signaling flows
Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
371
13.2.4 Evolved EDGE Training

Training Path
Objectives
Evolved EDGE
be able to:
OMA04
Target Audience
Lecture
Describe the principle of evolved EDGE
1d
List the feature set
ecture
Describe the EGPRS2 resource allocation and

operation

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 12
372
13.2.5 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training

Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network
be able to:
Optimization
OMO16
Lecture, Case-study
Target Audience
Describe the general analysis method of TBF
1d
setup success rate problem
ecture
Introduce the detailed solution of TBF setup

success rate problem
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers,
Describe the general analysis method of
WCDMA Radio Network Optimization Engineers
download speed problem
Prerequisites
Introduce the detailed solution of download

speed problem
GSM BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network
Study the cases
Optimization Training,
Duration
OR GSM BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio

1 working day
Network Optimization Training
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
373
13.3
GSM BSS Product Training
13.3.1 GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Explain the BTS signal flow.

Check the hardware structure of the BTS, such
as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Product Description

OMB11
Lecture
exercise exercise
Describe site maintenance objects.
1d
Describe the concepts of BTS3900

management status.
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Operation and
Describe the concepts of BTS3900 operation
Maintenance
OMB16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
status.
1d
Describe BTS3900 routine operation and

maintenance procedure.
Explain how to use BTS3900 remote
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Data

Configuration
OMB14
maintenance console.
Describe the steps to configure BTS3900
1d
online.
Describe the structure of BTS3900 data
configuration.
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Commissioning

OMB12
Explain how to add and delete site/cell/board.
1d
Explain how to define the ARFCN of carriers.

Explain how to modify the relevant parameters.
Describe the procedure of checking the BTS
BTS&DBS3900 GSM V3R8

Troubleshooting
OMB17
Lecture
transmission.
Implement the connection of Transmission
1d
Devices.
Target Audience
Master the loading procedure of BTS, and

check the current version to ensure the loading
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and
step.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
Identify the way to check the different alarm of
Prerequisites
BTS.
Understand BTS safety precautions of
maintenance.
wireless network operation and maintenance
Describe the BTS troubleshooting flow.
Objectives
Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for

common BTS faults.
Locate the troubleshooting cases for common
be able to:
BTS faults.
Describe the features of Huawei BTS3900
Analyze the troubleshooting cases for common
products.
BTS faults.
Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900.

Describe the function of boards of BTS3900.
374
Duration
Class Size
5 working days
Min 6, max 12
375
13.3.2 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
State the system structure and functions of

modules of BSC6000.
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Product Description

Lecture
OMC16

products.
1d


Lecture
OMB11

1d

Describe the work flow of BSC6000
maintenance.
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Operation and

Maintenance
OMC17
Describe important parameters in BSC6000

maintenance.
2d
Operate on the BSC6000 maintenance

console.
exercise exercise
Perform the routine maintenance for BSC6000.
Maintenance

1d

management status.
Target Audience
status.
Prerequisites


Duration

5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
State the structure and functions of important
boards of BSC6000.
376
13.3.3 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration Training

Training Path
Describe the function of BSC6000 data

configuration system function.
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Data Configuration

OMC18
Configure BSC6000 by data configuration

console independently.
2d
Describe the configuration of important

parameters of BSS system.
Check the data configuration correctness and
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Data Configuration

OMB14
validity.
1d

online.
configuration.
BTS&DBS3900 GSM V3R8 Troubleshooting

OMB17

Lecture
1d

exercise exercise
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 TOP10 Alarm Processing
maintenance.
OMC25
Lecture
1d

common BTS faults.
Target Audience

BTS faults.
Prerequisites
BTS faults.
Describe the BSC6000 TOP10 alarm
troubleshooting procedure.
common BSC6000 faults.
Successful completion of the following

Duration
program(s):
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance
5 working days
Training
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
377
13.3.4 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Objectives
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Advanced

Troubleshooting
OMC24
be able to:
Describe the BSC6000 and BTS
5d
Target Audience

common BSC6000 and BTS faults.
Locate, analyze and eliminate the
troubleshooting cases for common BSC6000
Prerequisites
and MBTS faults.
Analyze the signaling message for

troubleshooting.

Duration
5 working days
program(s):
Class Size

Training
Min 6, max 12
378

Training Path


OMB00
Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web

LMT and MML).
Lecture
exercise exercise
1d
Describe the concepts of BTS3900(GSM Only)

management status.

Maintenance
OMB01
operation status.
0.5d
Describe BTS3900(GSM Only) routine

operation and maintenance procedure.
Explain how to use BTS3900(GSM Only)

OMB02
remote maintenance console.
Outline the user interface of Web LMT
2d
configuration tool.
Illustrate the data configuration procedure.
MBTS GO V1R2 Installation and

Commissioning
OMB03
Explain key parameters in each step during

data configuration procedure.
1d
Implement the data configuration with template

file.
Perform initial data configuration and dynamic
BTS&DBS3900 GO V1R2 Troubleshooting

OMB31
Lecture
modification.
0.5d
configuration tool.
Target Audience

Prerequisites
file.
modification.
Objectives
maintenance.
be able to:
common BTS faults.
Describe the features of BTS3900(GSM Only)
products.
BTS faults.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
BTS faults.
Describe the function of boards of

BTS3900(GSM Only) .
379
Duration
Class Size
5 working days
Min 6, max 12
380

Training Path
subrack of
BSC6900(GSM Only).
State the performance features of

OMC00
Lecture
BSC6900(GSM Only).
1d
products.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .

OMB00
Lecture

1d
BTS3900(GSM Only) .

Maintenance
OMC01

exercise exercise

2d
maintenance.
maintenanceWeb LMT and MML.

Maintenance
OMB01

1d
console.
Target Audience
LMT and MML).

management status.
Prerequisites

operation status.
Objectives

Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Class Size
boards of BSC6900(GSM Only).

Min 6, max 12
modules of BSC6900(GSM Only).

381

Training Path
Describe the loading procedure of data

configuration.

OMC02
Configure BSC6900 by CME independently.

3d
parameters of GSM BSS system.

validity.

OMB02

2d
configuration.
configuration tool.
BSC6900 GSM V9R11 Installation and

Commissioning
OMC03

exercise exercise

1d

file.

Commissioning
OMB03

1d
modification.
Describe BSC6900 commissioning procedure
Outline OMU software functions
Target Audience
Complete BSC6900 commissioning
Complete BSC6900 application software
installation
Prerequisites
Describe the alarm and server verification after

commissioning
configuration tool.

program(s):


Training

file.
Objectives
modification.
be able to:
Duration
Configure BSC6900 by Web LMT

independently.
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12

validity.
382

Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V9R11 Troubleshooting

OMC04
be able to:
5d
Understand BSC6900(GSM Only) safety

precautions of maintenance.
4
Target Audience
Describe the BSC6900(GSM Only)

troubleshooting flow.
common BSC6900(GSM Only) faults.
Prerequisites
BSC6900 (GSM Only) faults.
Perform the troubleshooting for common
program(s):
BSC6900(GSM Only) faults.
Duration
Training
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
383

Training Path
subrack of
BSC6900(GSM Only).

OMC05
Lecture
BSC6900(GSM Only).
1d
maintenance.

OMB04
Lecture

1d
console.

Maintenance
OMC06

exercise exercise
products.
2d
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
BTS3900(GSM Only) .

Maintenance
OMB05

1d

Target Audience
LMT and MML).

management status.
Prerequisites

operation status.
Objectives

Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

384

Training Path

configuration.

OMC07

3d

validity.

OMB06

2d
configuration.
configuration tool.

Commissioning
OMC08

exercise exercise

1d

file.
BTS&DBS3900 GO V1R3 Installation and

Commissioning
OMB07

1d
modification.
Describe the installation procedure
Describe the software commissioning
Target Audience
procedures in different scenarios

Describe the different commissioning mode
according to different scenarios
Prerequisites
step.
BTS.

program(s):

Objectives
installation
Duration
be able to:
7 working days

independently.
Class Size
Min 6, max 12

validity.
385

Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V9R12 Troubleshooting

OMC09
be able to:
5d
Understand BSC6900 (GSM Only) safety

precautions of maintenance.
Describe the BSC6900 (GSM Only)

Target Audience
troubleshooting flow.
common BSC6900 (GSM Only) faults.
Prerequisites

program(s):
Duration

5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
386
13.3.12 GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0 Delta Training

Training Path

Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V9R8-V9R11 Delta

OMC15
2d

be able to:
Describe BSC6900 evolution overview
Target Audience
Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900,

including cabinet, subrack and boards.
Describe the software changing in BSC6900,
including OMU board software and OM
Prerequisites
software
Describe the typical configuration
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
program(s):
Min 6, max 12
Training
387

Training Path

Objectives

OMC14
2d

be able to:
Describe BSC6900 evolution overview
Target Audience
Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900,

including cabinet, subrack and boards.
Describe the software changing in BSC6900,
including OMU board software and OM
Prerequisites
software
Describe the typical configuration
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
program(s):
Min 6, max 12
Training
388
13.3.14 PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
of PCU6000.
Outline the PCU6000 board features.
PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and
Implement PCU6000 data configuration,
Maintenance
OMC22
parameters setting, data modification,
5d
restoration and back-up.

Perform the PCU6000 routine operation and
maintenance via MML and GUI console.
Target Audience
Operate and maintain the alarms management

via MML and GUI console.
Operate and maintain the performance
Prerequisites
management via MML and GUI console.

Locate, analyze and eliminate the common
faults of PCU6000.

Duration

Objectives
5 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, max 12
Outline the GPRS principle.

Outline the function, architecture and structure
389

Training Path

BTS3900 GSM V1R3 Product

Description
OMB04

LMT and MML).
Lecture
exercise exercise
1d

management status.

Maintenance
OMB05
operation status.
0.5d

BTS3900 GSM V1R3 Data

Configuration
OMB06
2d
configuration tool.
BTS GSM V1R3 Installation and

Commissioning
OMB07

1d

file.
BTS&DBS3900 GO V1R3 Troubleshooting

OMB32
Lecture
modification.
0.5d

Target Audience

Prerequisites
step.
BTS.
Objectives

maintenance.
be able to:
common BTS faults.
products.
BTS faults.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
BTS faults.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
390
Duration
Class Size
5 working days
Min 6, max 12
391

Training Path
Check the hardware structure of the MBTS,

such as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Product Description

OMB33

LMT and MML).
Lecture
exercise exercise
1d
Describe the concepts of MBTS(GSM Only)

management status.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Operation and

Maintenance
OMB34
operation status.
0.5d
Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation

and maintenance procedure.
Explain how to use MBTS(GSM Only) remote
MBTS GSM V1R4 Data Configuration

OMB35
2d
configuration tool.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Installation and

Commissioning
OMB36

1d

file.
Perform initial data configuration via CME and
MBTS GO V1R4 Troubleshooting

OMB37
Lecture
LMT.
0.5d

Target Audience

Perform local commissioning via SMT and
Prerequisites
USB.
Perform remote commissioning via M2000 and
Web LMT.
Objectives

step.
be able to:
BTS.
Describe the features of MBTS(GSM Only)
products.
maintenance.
Describe the hardware structure of MBTS(GSM
Only) .
Describe the function of boards of MBTS(GSM
common BTS faults.
Only) .
Explain the MBTS signal flow.

392
Duration
BTS faults.
5 working days
BTS faults.
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
393

Training Path
subrack of
BSC6900(GSM Only).
BSC6900 GSM V9R13 Product

Description
OMC50
Lecture
BSC6900(GSM Only).
1d
products.
Only) .

OMB33
Lecture

1d
Only) .
Check the hardware structure of the MBTS,

Maintenance
OMC51

exercise exercise
such as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.

2d
maintenance.

Maintenance
OMB34

1d
console.
Target Audience
LMT and MML).

management status.
Prerequisites

operation status.
Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation
and maintenance procedure.
Objectives
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

394

Training Path

configuration.
BSC6900 GSM V9R13 Data

Configuration
OMC52

3d

validity.

OMB35

2d
configuration via CME.

configuration tool.

Commissioning
OMC53

exercise exercise

1d


Commissioning
OMB36
file.
Perform initial data configuration via CME and
1d
LMT.
Target Audience
installation
Prerequisites


program(s):
Perform local commissioning via SMT and

USB.


Web LMT.
Objectives
be able to:
step.
independently.
BTS.
Duration
7 working days

validity.
395
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
396

Training Path

Objectives
BSC6900 GSM Fault Information

Collecting
OMC85

0.5d
be able to:
Describe the OMU Maintenance and Operation
Know how to collect the fault information for CS
BSC6900 CS Troubleshooting
OMC86
and PS fault
Describe where is the different file in OMU.
1.5d
Describe the functions of different files

Describe the CS Fault Troubleshooting flow
Know how to do Single pass and no voice
BSC6900 PS Troubleshooting
OMC86
Troubleshooting
1d
Know how to do Cross pass Troubleshooting

Know how to do Noise Troubleshooting
BSC6900 IP Transmission
Troubleshooting
OMC87
Know how to do Echo Troubleshooting

Describe the PS Fault Troubleshooting flow
1.5d
Know how to do PS Data rate Troubleshooting

Know how to do PS Access Troubleshooting
Know how to Anylase PS KPI
BSC6900 Clock Troubleshooting

OMC89
Understand typical IP transmission

0.5d
troubleshooting cases
Understand fault isolation in case of
Target Audience
emergencies in IP transmission mode

Understand how to analyze typical IP
transmission troubleshooting cases
Describe Clock Fault Troubleshooting Flow
Prerequisites
Know how to do Clock troubleshooting

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

program(s):
Min 6, max 12

397

Training Path

Objectives

OMC56

1d
be able to:
Describe BSC6900 GSM evolution overview
Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900
Target Audience
GSM and MBTS GSM, including cabinet,

subrack and boards.
Describe the software changing in
BSC6900GSM, including OMU board software
Prerequisites
and OM software
Describe the new features of BSC6900GSM
and MBTS GSM.
Duration

1 working day
program(s):
Class Size

Min 6, max 12
398
13.3.21 GSM BSS9.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training

Training Path
Objectives

Reconfiguration
OMC58
be able to:
3d
Describe the procedure of adjusting the BSC

Describe the modification of OPC and DPC
Perform the way to adding/removing subracks
MBTS GSM V100R002 Data

Reconfiguration
OMB39
and boards
expand the transmission resource in A, GB and
2d
Abis interface.
Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on A, Gb
Target Audience
and Abis interface.

Adjust the cell processing in DPU board
Describe the procedure of MBTS dynamic data
Prerequisites
adjustment
Adjust the Global/Device/Transmission Data
Adjust the Cells/TRXs/Channels Data

Adjust the BTS Data
Reparent BTSs
Duration
program(s):
5 working days
Training
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
399

Training Path
Objectives

Reconfiguration
OMC59
be able to:
3d


Reconfiguration
OMB40
and boards
2d
Abis interface.
Target Audience
and Abis interface.

Prerequisites
adjustment

Adjust the BTS Data
Reparent BTSs
Duration
program(s):
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
400

Training Path
Objectives

Reconfiguration
OMC57
able to:
1.5d

Perform the way to adding/removing subracks and
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 Migration

OMB66
boards
0.5d
Abis interface.
and Abis interface.
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 Expanding

OMB67

0.5d
Describe the
procedures of expanding the BTS
capacity
Perform how to add BSC board

Reconfiguration
OMB46
Perform how to add BSC Subrack

1.5d
Detail the scenarios of BSC migration

Detail the procedure of BSC migration
Perform the BSC migration
MBTS GSM V100R004 Expanding

OMB47

adjustment
0.5d

MBTS GSM V100R004 Migration

OMB48
Adjust the BTS Data

Reparent BTSs
0.5d
Describe the
capacity
Target Audience
Perform how to add BTS Cells
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and
Perform how to add BTS TRXs
Detail the scenarios of BTS migration
Prerequisites
Detail the procedure of BTS migration
Perform the BTS migration
At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless Duration

network operation and maintenance
5 working days
Successful completion of the following program(s):
Class Size
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 BSS Operation and
Min 6, max 12
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 BSS Configuration

Training
401

Training Path
Check the hardware structure of the MBTS, such

Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web LMT

OMB41
Lecture
exercise exercise
1d
and MML).
management status.

Maintenance
OMB42

operation status.
0.5d
Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation and


OMB43

2d

configuration tool.
MBTS GSM V1R7 Installation and

Commissioning
OMB44

Explain key parameters in each step during data
1d
configuration procedure.
Implement the data configuration with template file.
Perform initial data configuration via CME and LMT.
MBTS GO V1R7 Troubleshooting

OMB45
Lecture
Describe the software commissioning procedures
0.5d
in different scenarios
Target Audience
Perform local commissioning via SMT and USB.
Prerequisites
Web LMT.
Master the loading procedure of BTS, and check
the current version to ensure the loading step.
At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless
Identify the way to check the different alarm of BTS.
Objectives
Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for TOP
BTS faults.
able to:
Locate the troubleshooting cases for TOP BTS
faults.
products.
Analyze the troubleshooting cases for TOP BTS

Only) .
faults.
Duration
Only) .
5 working days
402
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
403

Training Path
State the system structure and functions of subrack

of
BSC6900 GSM V9R14 Product

Description
OMC61
Lecture
BSC6900(GSM Only).
State the performance features of BSC6900(GSM

Only).
1d

products.

OMB41
Lecture
Only) .
1d

Only) .

Maintenance
OMC62

exercise exercise
Check the hardware structure of the MBTS, such

2d
Describe the work flow of BSC6900 maintenance.


Maintenance
OMB42

Operate on the BSC6900 maintenance console.
1d

Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web LMT
and MML).
Target Audience
management status.
Prerequisites
operation status.
Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation and
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
able to:
Class Size
Min 6, max 12

404

Training Path

configuration.

OMC63

Describe the configuration of important parameters
3d
of GSM BSS system.

validity.

OMB43

2d
configuration via CME.


Commissioning
OMC64

exercise exercise

1d
installation

Commissioning
OMB44
configuration tool.
1d
Explain key parameters in each step during data

configuration procedure.
Implement the data configuration with template file.
Target Audience
Perform initial data configuration via CME and LMT.
Describe the software commissioning procedures
Prerequisites
in different scenarios
Perform local commissioning via SMT and USB.
Web LMT.
Master the loading procedure of BTS, and check
Objectives
the current version to ensure the loading step.

able to:
Identify the way to check the different alarm of BTS.

Duration
Configure BSC6900 by Web LMT independently.
7 working days
Describe the configuration of important parameters Class Size

of GSM BSS system.
Min 6, max 12
validity.
405

Training Path
Objectives

Reconfiguration
OMC57
able to:
1.5d

Perform the way to adding/removing subracks and
BSC6900 GSM V900R014 Migration

OMB66
boards
0.5d
Abis interface.
and Abis interface.
BSC6900 GSM V900R014 Expanding

OMB67

0.5d
Describe the
capacity
Perform how to add BSC board
MBTS GSM V100R007 Data Reconfiguration

OMB46
Perform how to add BSC Subrack
1.5d
Detail the scenarios of BSC migration

Detail the procedure of BSC migration
MBTS GSM V100R007 Expanding

OMB47

adjustment
0.5d

MBTS GSM V100R007 Migration
OMB48
Adjust the BTS Data

Reparent BTSs
0.5d
Describe the
capacity
Target Audience
Detail the scenarios of BTS migration
Prerequisites
Detail the procedure of BTS migration
Perform the BTS migration

5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12

Training
406

Training Path
Training
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM Fault Information Collecting

OMC85
0.5d
able to:
Describe the OMU Maintenance and Operation
Know how to collect the fault information for CS
BSC6900 CS Troubleshooting
OMC86
and PS fault
Describe where is the different file in OMU.
1.5d
Describe the functions of different files

Describe the CS Fault Troubleshooting flow
Know how to do Single pass and no voice
BSC6900 PS Troubleshooting
OMC86
Troubleshooting
1d
Know how to do Cross pass Troubleshooting

Know how to do Noise Troubleshooting
Know how to do Echo Troubleshooting
BSC6900 IP Transmission Troubleshooting
Describe the PS Fault Troubleshooting flow

OMC87
1.5d
Know how to do PS Data rate Troubleshooting

Know how to do PS Access Troubleshooting
Know how to analyze PS KPI
BSC6900 Clock Troubleshooting

OMC89
Understand typical IP transmission troubleshooting

0.5d
cases
Understand fault isolation in case of emergencies
Target Audience
in IP transmission mode
Understand how to analyze typical IP transmission
Describe Clock Fault Troubleshooting Flow
Prerequisites
Know how to do Clock troubleshooting

Duration

5 working days
Successful completion of the following program(s): Class Size

Min 6, max 12
407
13.3.29 GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta Training

Training Path
Training
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 - V900R014 Delta

OMC69
1d
able to:
Describe BSC6900 GSM evolution overview
Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900 GSM
Target Audience
and MBTS GSM, including cabinet, subrack and

boards.
Describe the software changing in BSC6900GSM,
including OMU board software and OM software
Prerequisites
Describe the new features of BSC6900GSM and

MBTS GSM.
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
408
13.3.30 GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training

Training Path

Training
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance

OMC83
Lecture
Objectives
0.5d

able to:
Understand the Basic Symptoms About the
GSM BSS14.0 Precautions and Emergency

Maintenance for Large Traffic
OMC84
Lecture
Accident
Know how to collect the related information
0.5d
Execute the quick emergency handling methods.

Understand Precautions and Emergency
Target Audience
Maintenance for Large Traffic

Know how to adjust BSC parameters before large
traffic
Prerequisites
Execute emergency maintenance for large traffic

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

409
13.3.31 GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade Training

Training Path

Training
BSC6900 GSM V900R013-V900R014

Upgrade
OMC78
Lecture Hands-on exercise
Objectives
1d

able to:
Describe the software installation and upgrade flow
MBTS GSM V100R004 - V100R007

Upgrade
OMC79
Outline the backup and restore operations

Complete the installation and upgrade tasks
1d
Grasp the OMU routine maintenance commands

Understand the modification of MBTS GSM
Target Audience
upgrade from R1 to R7comparing to earlier

upgrades, learn about the upgrade procedure, and
complete an upgrade by referring to the Upgrade
Prerequisites
Guide.
Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

410
13.3.32 GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder

Maintenance
OMB49
able to:
1d
Describe Antenna and Feeder hardware structure.

Describe Antenna and Feeder maintenance
Describe the Antenna and Feeder troubleshooting
Target Audience
flow.
Analyze the Antenna and Feeder fault reasons.
Master the Antenna and Feeder troubleshooting.
Prerequisites
Duration

1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
411
13.3.33 GSM IPRAN Application Training

Training Path
able to:
Learn about IP protocol specifications and common
RFC standards
GSM IPRAN Fundamental

OMC71
Learn about common IP RAN concepts such as the

MSTP and PTN
0.5d
Lecture
Understand the TCP/IP protocol structure, and

learn common technologies such as the VLAN and
GSM IPRAN PTN/MSTP Networking

OMC72
DSCP
Lecture
Learn the protocol stack composition on IP RAN
1d
interfaces
Learn the IP components, and understand the data
GSM IPRAN Networking Planning

OMC73
exchange process
Lecture Discussion
Practice
Be familiar with common IP RAN devices and
1d
maintenance applications
Learn about differences among the IP, ATM, and
GSM IPRAN Feature Application

OMC74
TDM technologies, and problems caused by

IP-based networking
1.5d
Learn about the evolution of IP RANs

Understand IP RAN concepts and advantages
GSM IPRAN Maintenance and Monitoring

OMC75
Understand changes in IP RAN networking

Learn about feature requirements for IP RAN
0.5d
networking
Learn the implementation of key features for IP
GSM IPRAN Troubleshooting
RAN MSTP networking
OMC76 Lecture Hands-on exercise
Understand differences between the layer 2
0.5d
networking and layer 3 networking

Target Audience
Learn about the concepts and advantages of IP

RAN
Understand IP RAN networking variations
Learn data exchanges and encapsulation in the
Prerequisites
packet transport network (PTN)
Understand implementation of the key features

Understand the differences between the Layer 2

BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14 BSS
networking and Layer 3 networking

Learn about the basic IP RAN resource planning

BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14
using PTN networking for the IP RAN
Learn principles of IP address allocation and

BSS
internal limitation of the RAN equipment
Plan and configure the IP addresses for interface
Objectives
boards

412
Learn principles of planning VLAN and how to
process VLAN tags
Describe the procedures of implementing QoS in IP

RAN end to end (E2E) services
Understand data transmission between the

protocol layer and the RAN equipment
Learn different QoS configuration and applications
Understand the IP RAN reliability-ensuring
in different protocol and networking scenarios
implementation mechanism
Understand changes in maintenance modes due to

introduction of the IP radio access network (RAN)
Understand the principles and application of the

reliability detection mechanism
Learn the active monitoring scheme and

implementation process for the IP RAN
Know how to configure IP RAN reliability-ensuring
transmission
parameters
Learn detailed parameter configuration for IP RAN
Learn about the differences in reliability guarantee
check
in different networking scenarios
Monitor IP RAN transmission links, analyze and
Master the application schemes of the
locate the faults
reliability-ensuring mechanism in different

scenarios
Learn the monitoring points for locating common

faults
Know how to handle faults that occur in

reliability-ensuring application in different scenarios
Understand theories for IP active detection

Learn procedures for detecting IP faults
Describe the requirements of the IP RAN for clock

synchronization
Learn methods for locating IP faults
Know the differences between clock
Learn about packet capturing tool for IP RANs
synchronization and phase synchronization
Learn methods for using packet capturing tool for
Learn about the typical IP RAN clock solution
IP networks
Describe the architecture of an IP RAN clock
Learn about the process of analyzing packets and
network
locating faults
Learn about the differences between IP RAN clock
Understand the IP transmission troubleshooting
networking applications
roadmap
Understand the differences between the IEEE
Understand typical IP transmission troubleshooting
1588v2 technology and synchronous Ethernet
cases
technology
Understand fault isolation in case of emergencies
Learn the concept of IP Quality of Service (QoS)
in IP transmission mode
Learn about radio services' QoS requirements for
Understand how to analyze typical IP transmission
IP RANs
Understand the QoS implementation at each layer Duration

from the perspective of transmission protocols
Learn the QoS configuration and application in IP
RANs
5 working days
Class Size
Learn the parameters and commands used to
Min 6, max 12
ensure the QoS of IP RANs
413
13.3.34 GSM IPRAN Reconstruction Training

Training Path

BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14
GSM IPRAN A over IP Reconstruction

OMC80
BSS
Objectives
1d

be able to:
GSM IPRAN Gb over IP Reconstruction

OMC81
Understand A over IP Networking, Hardware

and IP design
1d
Prepare A over IP reconstruction script

verify the A over IP reconstruction
GSM IPRAN Abis over IP

Reconstruction
OMC82
Understand Gb over IP Networking, Hardware

and IP design
1d
Prepare Gb over IP reconstruction script

verify the Gb over IP reconstruction
Target Audience
Understand Abis over IP Networking, Hardware

and IP design
Prepare Abis over IP reconstruction script
Prerequisites
verify the Abis over IP reconstruction

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12
program(s):
BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14 BSS
414
13.4
GSMR BSS Product Training
13.4.1 GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)

Training Path
Target Audience
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Product Description

OMB19
Lecture
exercise exercise

Prerequisites
0.5d

DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Product Description

Lecture
OMB20
0
0.5d
Objectives
be able to:
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration

OMB22
0.5d
products.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration

OMB23

0.5d
Explain the configuration principle of BTS

hardware.
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Operation and
products.
Maintenance
OMB24

0.5d

DB3900 GSMR V3R8 Operation and

Maintenance
OMB25

0.5d
online.
configuration.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Commissioning

OMB21
1d

DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Troubleshooting

OMB26
online.
1d

configuration.
415
Devices.
management status.

step.

status.

BTS.


maintenance.


common BTS faults.

management status.

BTS faults.

status.

BTS faults.

Duration
5 working days
Class Size

transmission.
Min 6, max 12
416
13.4.2 GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)

Training Path
boards of BSC6000.
modules of BSC6000.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 Product Description

Lecture
OMC27
1d
products.
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Product Description

OMB19
Lecture
exercise exercise
0.5d
Explain the configuration principle of BTS

hardware.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Product Description

Lecture
OMB20
0
products.
0.5d

BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 Operation and
Maintenance
OMC28
2d

management status.
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Operation and
Maintenance
OMB24
0.5d
status.
DB3900 GSMR V3R8 Operation and

Maintenance
OMB25

0.5d

Target Audience
management status.
status.
Prerequisites
Objectives
maintenance.
maintenance.
be able to:
console.
417
Class Size

Duration
Min 6, max 12
5 working days
418
13.4.3 GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the function of BSC6000 data
configuration system function.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 Data Configuration

OMC29

exercise exercise
Configure BSC6000 by data configuration
3d
console independently.
parameters of BSS system.
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration

OMB22

validity.
0.5d

online.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration

OMB23
configuration.
0.5d

BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 TOP10 Alarm
Processing
OMC25
Lecture
online.
1d

configuration.
Target Audience

Describe the BSC6000 TOP10 alarm
Prerequisites
Duration

5 working days
program(s):
Class Size
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance

Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
419
13.4.4 GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)

Training Path
GSMR BSS Configuration

Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8C15 BSS Signaling
Objectives
Flow and Analysis

OMC31

exercise exercise
1d
be able to:
Describe the BSS signaling flow.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8C15 HSCSD
Analysis the BSS signaling message.
Introduction
OMC32
Lecture
Describe the principle and application of
0.5d
HSCSD
Describe the BSC6000 and BTS
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8C15 Troubleshooting

OMC33
Lecture
1.5d
common BSC6000 and BTS faults.

Locate, analyze and eliminate the
Target Audience
troubleshooting cases for common BSC6000

and MBTS faults.
Analyze the signaling message for
troubleshooting.
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12
program(s):
Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
420
13.4.5 GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008)

Training Path
Check the hardware structure of the DBS, such

DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Product
LMT and MML).
Description
OMB27
Lecture
exercise exercise
Describe the concepts of DBS3900
1d
management status.
Describe the concepts of DBS3900 operation
status.
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Operation
Describe DBS3900 routine operation and
and Maintenance
OMB28
1d
Explain how to use DBS3900 remote

DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Data
Configuration
OMB29
configuration tool.
2d

DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 installation
and commissioning
OMB30
file.
1d

modification.
Target Audience

transmission.
Devices.
Prerequisites
step.

BTS.
Objectives
Duration

be able to:
5 working days
Describe the features of DBS3900 products.
Class Size
Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900.
Min 6, max 12
Describe the function of boards of DBS3900.

Explain the DBS signal flow.
421
13.4.6 GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008)

Training Path
modules of BSC6000 GSMR.

subrack of
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Product Description

Lecture
OMC34
BSC6000 GSMR.
State the performance features of BSC6000
1d
GSMR.
maintenance.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Operation and
Maintenance
OMC35
2d

console.
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Product

Description
OMB27
Lecture
exercise exercise
Describe the features of DBS3900 products.

Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900.
1d
Describe the function of boards of DBS3900.

Explain the DBS signal flow.
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Operation and

Maintenance
OMB28
Check the hardware structure of the DBS, such

1d

LMT and MML).
Target Audience
Describe the concepts of DBS3900

management status.
Describe the concepts of DBS3900 operation
status.
Prerequisites
Describe DBS3900 routine operation and

Explain how to use DBS3900 remote
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size

Min 6, max 12
boards of BSC6000 GSMR.

422
13.4.7 GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000 V901R008)

Training Path

configuration.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Data
Configuration
Lecture
OMC36
3d

validity.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Installation and
Commissioning
OMC37
configuration.
1d

DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Data

Configuration
OMB29

Lecture
exercise exercise
installation
2d
Describe the alarm and server verification after

commissioning
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Installation and

Commissioning
OMB30

configuration tool.
1d

Target Audience

file.
Prerequisites
modification.
transmission.
Devices.
program(s):
step.
Objectives

BTS.

Duration
be able to:
7 working days
independently.
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

validity.
423
13.4.8 GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000 V901R008)

Training Path
GSMR BSS Configuration Training

(BSC6000V901R008)
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 BSS Signaling

Flow and Analysis
OMC39
Objectives
1.5d

be able to:
Understand BSC6000 safety precautions of
maintenance.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 HSCSD
Describe the BSC6000 troubleshooting flow.
Introduction
OMC40
Lecture
0.5d

BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Troubleshooting
BSC6000 faults.
OMB38
Lecture
exercise exercise
1d
BSC6000 faults.
BSC6000 faults.
Target Audience
Describe the BSS signaling flow.
Analysis the BSS signaling message.
Describe the principle and application of
Prerequisites
HSCSD
Duration
3 working days
Class Size

program(s):
Min 6, max 12

Training (BSC6000 V901R008)
424
14 WCDMA Training Path

14.1
Principle Training Path
WCDMA RAN Overview Training
WCDMA RAN Principle Training
1D
5D
WCDMA RAN System Overview

Training
WCDMA HSPA+ Feature Training
2D
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS
2D
3D
425
14.2
RNP&RNO Training Path
WCDMA Multi-Band and MultiCarrier Solution Training
1D
WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14 Radio
Network Design and Planning
UMTS 900M Coverage Solution

Training
3D
RNP
1D
WCDMA Indoor Coverage
Training
WCDMA RF Optimization
Training
2D
Network Features and Algorithms
Training
WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14
HSPA/HSPA+ Radio Network
2D
3D
Optimization/
Performance/
QoS

Network Optimization Advanced
Training
5D
5D
WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone
Features
1D
WCDMA RAN11-RAN12 Delta
Features Traing

Features Training
1D
2D
426

Features Training
2D
Delta Training
14.3
Product Training Path
uBro Training
Upgrading Training
WCDMA uBro Network Operation

Training
uBro2.0/3.0/3.1
5D
Delta Training
WCDMA RAN Upgrade Training
RAN14
2D
WCDMA RAN Product Delta

Training
RAN12/13 1D
RAN14 1.5D
Special Training
WCDMA RAN Troubleshooting
Training
RAN11/11.1/12/13/14
Basic Training
WCDMA RNC Operation Training
RAN/11/11.1/12
RAN13/14
3D
4D
WCDMA NodeB Training
RAN11/11.1/12/13/14
5D
WCDMA RAN Reconfiguration

Training
RAN11.1/12/13/14
WCDMA RNC Configuration

Training
RAN11/11.1/12/13/14
5D
5D
WCDMA IPRAN Application

Training
5D
7D
WCDMA RAN Emergency
Legend:
Red: New
Blue : Modify
Black: No change
RAN14
427
1D
15 WCDMA Training Courses

WCDMA Product Technical Training Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training
6 ~ 12
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA Radio Network Design and Planning Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution Training
6 ~ 12
UMTS 900M Coverage Solution Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA Indoor Coverage Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RF Optimization Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features and Algorithms Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Advanced Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN11 Radio Network Optimization

Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 - RAN12 Delta Features Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
Principle Training Courses
RNP&RNO Training Courses
428
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA uBro Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 NodeB Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 RNC Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 RAN Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 RAN Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN12 RAN Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA uBro2.0 Network Operation Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN13 RAN Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN13 RAN Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA uBro3.0 Network Operation Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
1.5
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Upgrade Training
6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
Product Training Courses
Troubleshooting Training
429
WCDMA IPRAN Application Training
430
6 ~ 12
15.1
Principle Training
15.1.1 WCDMA RAN System Overview

Training Path
services in WCDMA system

Describe the scrambling code of WCDMA
Describe the modulation methods used in

OWX00
Lecture
WCDMA system
2d
Explain the usage of transmit diversity and

Target Audience
RAKE receiver in WCDMA system

List all the members of RAN product family.
All Technical and non-Technical People
Describe the hardware, logical structure and
Prerequisites
typical configurations of RAN product.

Summarize different functions of RAN
Objectives
products.
List key advantages of RAN products.
be able to:
List technical specifications of RAN products.

Duration
Outline the development of 3G

Describe the architecture of WCDMA system
2 working days
Describe the key features and technologies of
Class Size
WCDMA
Min 6,max 12
Describe the voice coding of WCDMA

Outline the channel coding of WCDMA
Describe the spreading code of different
431
15.1.2 WCDMA RAN Overview Training

Training Path
Describe the voice coding of WCDMA

Outline the channel coding of WCDMA
WCDMA RAN Overview

OWA00
Lecture
Describe the spreading code of different

services in WCDMA system
1d
Describe the scrambling code of WCDMA

Target Audience
Describe the modulation methods used in

WCDMA system
All Technical People
Explain the usage of transmit diversity and
Prerequisites
RAKE receiver in WCDMA system

HSPA
Objectives
Duration

be able to:
1 working day
Outline the development of 3G
Class Size
Describe the architecture of WCDMA system
Min 6, max 12

WCDMA
432
15.1.3 WCDMA RAN Principle Training

Training Path
Outline WCDMA RAN physical layer

procedures
WCDMA Air Interface

OWA01
Lecture
Describe the WCDMA terrestrial interface

protocol architecture
3d
Describe the WCDMA RAN signaling

procedures: paging, call process, handover, etc
Describe the UTRAN basic RRM methods
WCDMA HSPA Principles

OWA20
Lecture
(power control, handover, load control, etc)

Describe WCDMA and HSDPA evolution and
2d
standards
Describe HSDPA key technologies
Target Audience
Describe HSDPA physical channels

Network Deployment Engineers
Describe HSDPA Network and UE protocol
stack architecture
System Technicians
Describe WCDMA and HSUPA evolution and
System Engineers
standards
Prerequisites
Describe HSUPA key technologies

Describe HSUPA physical channels
Describe HSUPA Network and UE protocol
program(s):
stack architecture
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Describe the WCDMA radio interface protocol
Min 6, max 12
architecture
Describe the WCDMA RAN channel structure
433
15.1.4 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training

Training Path
Objectives
WCDMA HSPA+ Principles

OWA21
Lecture
be able to:
2d
Describe HSPA+ evolution and standards

Describe HSPA+ key technologies realized in
Target Audience
HSPA+ Phase1, such as DL MIMO, DL 64QAM,

etc.
System Technicians
HSPA+ Phase2, such as DL MIMO+64QAM,
System Engineers
DL DC-HSDPA, UL 16QAM, etc.

Prerequisites
HPSA+ Phase 3, include DC-HSDPA+MIMO,

E-DPCCH Boosting, DC-HSUPA, etc
program(s):
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
434
15.1.5 QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training

Training Path
HSPA network
Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for LTE

OWA22
Lecture
network
Describe QoS negotiation procedure
3d
Describe Radio QoS

Target Audience
Outline general QoS handling on radio

interfaces
Describe HSPA Radio Bearers and Radio links
Describe LTE Radio Bearers
System Technicians
Outline QoS in IP Backhaul
System Engineers
Outline L1/L2 technologies
Prerequisites
Outline topology and dimensioning
Outline DiffServ architecture with DSCP, SLA,
program(s):
PHB, Assured Forwarding (AF), Expedited

Forwarding (EF), etc
Outline MPLS architecture, header, LER, LSR,
LSP,FEC, Label distribution, etc
Outline QoS in Core Networks
Objectives
Outline QoS handling and solutions in PS core
network
be able to:
Outline SGSN and GGSN QoS related info and
Describe GBR and non-GBR bearers
handling
Outline Bearer Setup modes
Outline Roaming Scenarios; QoS in GRX/IPX
Describe QoS definition in HSPA:
Describe QoS Mapping
Conversational, Streaming, Interactive and
Outline QoS Mapping in SGSN
background
Outline QoS Mapping in GGSN
Describe QoS definition in GPRS/EPS: MBR,
Outline QoS Mapping in PGW
GBR, ARP, THI and QCI
Outline QoS Mapping for access network
Outline TFTs and its usage
Describe QoS Mapping for Air interface
Outline some real-life scenarios
Duration
Outline subscriber data/profile in HLR/HSS

Outline QoS related info in Subscriber profiles
3 working days
Describe usage of QoS info in subscriber data
Class Size
for ensuring QoS

Min 6, max 12
Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for
435
15.2
RNP&RNO Training
15.2.1 WCDMA Radio Network Design and Planning Training

Training Path
planning
Explain the difference between WCDMA and
WCDMA Radio Network Planning

OWP0
0
Lecture
GSM radio network planning

Explain the principle of WCDMA coverage
2d
planning
Describe the traffic model of WCDMA
Analyze the WCDMA uplink and downlink radio
WCDMA HSPA&HSPA+ Planning and

Deployment
OWP13
Lecture
capacity
Analyze the WCDMA CE capacity
1d
Describe HSDPA dimensioning principle,

including link budget, capacity dimensioning,
Target Audience
channel element dimensioning

Describe HSUPA dimensioning principle,
System Technicians
including link budget, capacity dimensioning,
System Engineers
channel element dimensioning
Prerequisites
Describe impacts of HSPA+ features on

dimensioning, including DL 64QAM , MIMO,
CPC,DC-HSDPA, 64QAM+MIMO, UL16QAM,
program(s):
DC-MIMO, DC-HSUPA, etc

Describe HSPA+ Deployment
Duration
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, max 12
Describe the principle of radio network
436
15.2.2 WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution Training

Training Path
Features and Algorithms Training

Objectives
WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution

OWP20
Lecture
1d
be able to:
Target Audience
multi-band and multi-carrier solution
Describe the main solutions in various

scenarios
System Technicians
Describe the main parameters in various
System Engineers
scenarios
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
program(s):
WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14 Radio Network
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
437
15.2.3 UMTS 900M Coverage Solution Training

Training Path

UMTS 900M Coverage Solution
OWP21
Lecture
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Target Audience

UMTS 900M coverage solution
System Technicians
Describe UMTS 900M Refarming Solution
System Engineers
Describe UMTS 900M Deployment

Describe UMTS 900M Application Cases
Prerequisites
Duration

program(s):
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
438
15.2.4 WCDMA Indoor Coverage Training

Training Path
Objectives
Common Components for Indoor Coverage

and Repeater Introduction
OWP2
2
List the types of common components for
Lecture
be able to:
0.5 d
indoor coverage
Describe the functions of common
WCDMA Indoor Coverage Planning

and Optimization
OWP23
Lecture
components for indoor coverage

Describe the functions of repeaters
1.25d
Describe the method of WCDMA indoor

coverage planning
Describe the method of WCDMA indoor
coverage optimization
WCDMA Indoor Coverage Solution
Describe the method of indoor and outdoor

OWP24
Lecture
0.25 d
inter-operation
Describe the stadium coverage solution
Target Audience
Describe the metro coverage solution

Describe the airport coverage solution
System Technicians
Describe the resident location coverage
System Engineers
solution
Prerequisites
Describe the commercial building coverage

solution
Describe the campus coverage solution
program(s):
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
439
15.2.5 WCDMA RF Optimization Training

Training Path
Describe WCDMA Radio Network Optimization

Flow
WCDMA Radio Network Tuning

OWO00
Lecture
Describe the steps of single site verification

Describe how to do single site verification
2d
Describe how to solve the ordinary problems in

Target Audience
single site verification

Describe how to solve the neighbor list related
problems in RF optimization
System Technicians
Describe how to analyze coverage problem
System Engineers
and solve it
Prerequisites
Describe how to improve coverage capability

Locate the resource of abnormal interference

program(s):
Describe how to solve abnormal interference

problem
Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
440
15.2.6 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path
Describe WCDMA RAN11 open loop power

control algorithm and list the main parameters
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network

Features and Algorithms
OWO20
Lecture
Describe WCDMA RAN11 closed loop power

5d
Describe WCDMA RAN11 intra-frequency

handover algorithm and list the main
Target Audience
parameters
Describe WCDMA RAN11 inter-frequency
System Technicians
System Engineers
parameters
Prerequisites
Describe WCDMA RAN11 inter-RAT handover

algorithm and list the main parameters
Describe WCDMA RAN11 admission control
program(s):
algorithms and list the main parameters

Describe WCDMA RAN11 load control
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Describe WCDMA RAN11 Idle Mode Behaviors
Min 6, max 12
(including cell selection and reselection, paging,

access etc) and list the main parameters
441

Training Path


OWO21
Lecture

5d

Target Audience
parameters
System Technicians
System Engineers
parameters
Prerequisites

program(s):

Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, max 12

442

Training Path


OWO22
Lecture

5d

Target Audience
parameters
System Technicians
System Engineers
parameters
Prerequisites

program(s):

Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, max 12

443

Training Path


OWO23
Lecture

5d

Target Audience
parameters
System Technicians
System Engineers
parameters
Prerequisites

program(s):

Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, max 12

444
15.2.10 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Advanced Training

Training Path
relative counters
Describe WCDMA RAN11 call drop KPI and

OWO30
Lecture
relative counters
Describe WCDMA RAN11 mobility KPI and
2d
relative counters
Describe WCDMA RAN11 traffic KPI and
relative counters
WCDMA Radio Network Optimization

OWO01
Lecture
Describe WCDMA RAN11 cell algorithm KPI

and relative counters, such as load control,
3d
DCCC
List the main items of RNC trace and
Target Audience
monitoring
Execute signaling trace and real-time
System Technicians
monitoring and collect data
System Engineers
Describe the signaling of type procedures
Prerequisites
Describe the drive test and performance

statistic optimization flow
Evaluate the network access performance
program(s):
Locate and solve common access problems
Evaluate the network paging performance
Locate and solve paging problem
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features
Evaluate the network handover performance

Locate and solve handover problem
and Algorithms Training
Evaluate the network retention performance
Objectives
Locate and solve call drop problem
Duration
be able to:
Master the concept related to Performance
5 working days
Management
Class Size
Master how to collect counters and KPIs with
Min 6, max 12
M2000
Describe WCDMA RAN11 access KPI and
445

Training Path
relative counters

OWO31
Lecture
relative counters
2d
relative counters
relative counters

OWO01
Lecture

3d
DCCC
Target Audience
monitoring
System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites

program(s):

Objectives
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Management
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
M2000
446

Training Path
relative counters

OWO32
Lecture
relative counters
2d
relative counters
relative counters

OWO01
Lecture

3d
DCCC
Target Audience
monitoring
System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites

program(s):

Objectives
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Management
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
M2000
447

Training Path
relative counters

OWO33
Lecture
relative counters
2d
relative counters
relative counters

OWO01
Lecture

3d
DCCC
Target Audience
monitoring
System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites

program(s):

Objectives
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Management
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
M2000
448
15.2.14 WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Training

Training Path
Objectives
WCDMA HSPA RAN11 Radio

Resource Management
OWO40
Lecture
be able to:
Describe HSDPA RAN11 Radio Resource
2d
Algorithm (RRM) such as channel type

mapping, code resource allocation, power
allocation, HSDPA mobility management,
WCDMA HSPA&HSPA+ RAN11

Throughput Troubleshooting
OWO44
Lecture
scheduling, etc.
Describe HSUPA RAN11 Radio Resource
1d

mapping, DCCC, power allocation, HSUPA
Target Audience
mobility management, scheduling, etc.

Describe the troubleshooting process for
HSDPA throughput problems
System Technicians
System Engineers
HSUPA throughput problems
Prerequisites

HSPA+ throughput problems

Duration
program(s):
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
449

Training Path
Objectives

Resource Management
OWO41
Lecture
be able to:
2d


OWO45
Lecture
scheduling, etc.
1d

Target Audience

System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites


Duration
program(s):
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
450

Training Path
Objectives

Resource Management
OWO42
Lecture
be able to:
2d


OWO46
Lecture
scheduling, etc.
1d

Target Audience

System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites


Duration
program(s):
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
451

Training Path
Objectives

Resource Management
OWO43
Lecture
be able to:
2d


OWO47
Lecture
scheduling, etc.
1d

Target Audience

System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites


Duration
program(s):
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
452
15.2.18 WCDMA RAN11 - RAN12 Delta Features Training

Training Path
Implementation
Describe DC-HSDPA Feature in RAN12
WCDMA RAN11 RAN12 Delta Features

OWO50
Lecture
version
Describe MIMO + DL64QAM Feature in RAN12
1d
version
Target Audience
Describe FDE Feature in RAN12 version

Describe HSUPA Dynamic TTI Feature in
System Technicians
RAN12 version
System Engineers
Describe Interference Cancellation Feature in
Prerequisites
RAN12 version
Describe UL 16QAM Feature in RAN12 version

program(s):
Describe UL Enhanced L2 Feature in RAN12

version
Describe Periodic Directed Retry (HSDPA DRD)
in RAN12 version
Duration
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
Describe RAN12 HSPA+ Principle and
453

Training Path
Describe P2P Downloading Rate Control

during Busy Hour Feature

OWO51
Lecture
Describe Web Page Access Acceleration

Feature
2d
Describe Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on

QoS Feature
Target Audience
Describe HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at
UE Power Limitation Feature
Describe Adaptive Configuration of Data
System Technicians
Channel Power Offset for HSUPA Feature
System Engineers
Describe Optimization of R99 and HSUPA
Prerequisites
Users Fairness Feature

Describe Traffic-Based Activation and
Deactivation of Secondary Carrier in
program(s):
Dual-Carrier HSDPA Feature

Describe Anti-Interference Scheduling for
HSUPA Feature
Describe Dual-Threshold Scheduling with
HSUPA Interference Cancellation Feature
Describe Fast Dormancy Feature Description
Objectives
Feature
Describe MBTS V1R4 GU 2.0MHZ Central
be able to:
Frequency Spacing(U3.8MHZ) Feature
Outline the important new features realized in
Duration
RAN13 version
2 working days
Describe DC-HSDPA+MIMO Feature
Class Size
Describe Enhanced Uplink CELL FACH

Feature
Min 6, max 12
Describe E-DPCCH Boosting Feature

Describe Deep Packet Inspection Feature
454

Training Path
Describe Service-Based PS Handover from

UMTS to LTE Feature

OWO52
Lecture
Describe Layered Paging in URA_PCH

Feature
2d
Describe Control Channel Parallel Interference

Cancellation Phase2 Feature
Target Audience
Describe Dynamical HSDPA CQI Feedback
Period Feature
Describe Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small
System Technicians
Target Retransmissions Feature
System Engineers
Describe Intelligent Access Class Control
Prerequisites
Feature
Describe Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment
Feature
program(s):
Describe Inter-Frequency Load Balance Based

on Configurable Load Threshold Feature
Describe Inter-frequency Load Handover
based CE Congestion Feature
Describe CE Overbooking Feature
Describe Load-based Uplink Target BLER
Objectives
Configuration Feature
Describe HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE
be able to:
Location Feature
Outline the important new features realized in
Duration
RAN13 version
2 working days
Describe Multi Sector Solution Feature
Class Size
Describe HSPA+ DC-HSUPA Feature Feature

Describe Voice Service Experience
Min 6, max 12
Improvement for Weak Reception UEs Feature
455
15.2.21 WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features Training

Training Path
Describe Enhanced Fast Dormancy Feature

Describe Deep Packet Inspection Feature
WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features

OWO53
Lecture
Describe P2P Rate Restriction During Busy

Hours Feature
1d
Describe Web Page Access Acceleration

Target Audience
Feature
Describe Layered Paging in URA_PCH
Feature
Describe Control Channel Parallel Interference
System Technicians
Cancellation Phase2 Feature
System Engineers
Describe Dynamical HSDPA CQI Feedback
Prerequisites
Period Feature
Describe Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small
Target Retransmissions Feature
program(s):
Describe Intelligent Access Class Control

Feature
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
456
15.2.22 WCDMA uBro Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training

Training Path
Describe the applications scenario of Huawei

AP products
WCDMA uBro RAN Planning

OWP80
Lecture
Describe the basic planning of Femto network

such as PLMN planning, LAC/RAC/SAC
1d
planning, frequency planning, scrambling code

planning and etc.
Describe the camp and handover policy in
Femto network
WCDMA uBro RAN Optimization

OWO80
Lecture
Describe the deployment of the typical case
1d
Describe interference test cases for typical

networking scenarios
Target Audience
Describe interference mitigation methods for
uBro Optimization Engineers
typical networking scenarios
uBro Technicians
Describe the basic signaling procedure in

Femto network
System Technicians
Describe the handover procedure and related
System Engineers
parameters in Femto network
Prerequisites
Describe the admission control procedure and
related parameters in Femto network
Duration
course(s):
OWA00 WCDMA RAN Overview
OWA01 WCDMA Air Interface
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12

be able to:
457
15.3
Product Training
15.3.1 WCDMA RAN11 NodeB Training

Training Path
Detail the functions of different subsystems and

boards of BTS3900
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Product

Description
OWB00
Lecture
Describe the cables connection of BTS3900

Describe the expansion and networking of
1d
BTS3900
Explain the architecture of hardware and
software components of NodeB operation and
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Operation

and Maintenance
OWB01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
maintenance system
Get to know how to use NodeB operation and
2d
maintenance tool - LMT

Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on NodeB
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Installation

and Commissioning
Manage alarms and faults handling

Manage data, for example: backuping system
1d
data, executing MML commands

Manage equipment, for example: checking
board status and versions
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Data

Configuration
Manage tracing message, for example:

creating a tracing task, checking tracing result,
1d
saving result
Manage real-time monitoring, for example:
Target Audience
creating a monitoring task, checking and

saving monitoring result
Field engineer
Outline the main operation and maintenance
System engineer
tasks for one day, one week and one month
Site maintainer
Install LMT software
Prerequisites
Describe the procedure of NodeB

commissioning
At least 1 year working experience in WCDMA
Check the compatibility of NodeB software
version
Objectives
Load NodeB software and configuration file

Verify local cell status

be able to:
Measure RTWP
Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900
Monitor output power
Outline the user interface of CME

configuration tool
boards of DBS3900
Illustrate the data configuration procedure
Describe the typical hardware configurations of
DBS3900
data configuration procedure
Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900

458
Duration

file
5 working days
Class Size
modification
Min 6, max 12
459
15.3.2 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation Training

Training Path
configuration rules, and calculate the numbers

and types of boards in a typical network
BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011 Product

Description
OWC00
Lecture
Explain the architecture of RAN Operation and

Maintenance system, hardware and software
1d
components of the system

maintenance on RNC
BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011 Operation and

Maintenance
OWC01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Manage BAM server, for example: checking its

running status and version
2d
Get to know how to use RNC operation and

Target Audience
Manage authorities of users
Field engineer
System engineer

board status and version
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
Manage Logs, for example: querying logs,
saving logs
Objectives

saving result
be able to:
Describe the RNC system functions, structures
and key characteristics
Describe the functions, indicators, ports and
working mode of each board

Duration
Explain the types and application situations of

different fibers and cables
3 working days
Describe the signal processing flows of radio
Class Size
and terrestrial interfaces in RNC system
Min 6, max 12
Explain the typical RAN networking types and

each networking types characters
Explain the RNC system hardware
460
15.3.3 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Configuration Training

Training Path
Install BAM software

BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011

Describe the procedure of RNC

Commissioning.
1d
Load RNC host software and data file

Verify RNC interfaces and services
Integrate RNC to M2000
BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011 Data

Configuration
Describe the RNC data configuration method

and procedure
6d
Compile transport network data files, including

global data, equipment data and Iub, Iu , Iur
Target Audience
interfaces data
Field engineer
Compile the radio network data files for cells
System engineer
Explain the configuration procedure for HSDPA
Site maintainer
services
Prerequisites
Generate the initial data configuration file with

LMT software or CME software
Check the data configuration files integrity and
program(s):
validity
BSC6900 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation
Load the date configuration file to RNC
Training
Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Describe the structure of RNC operation and
Min 6, max 12
maintenance subsystem
461
15.3.4 WCDMA RAN11 RAN Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Describe system information broadcast

signaling procedure

Troubleshooting
Describe paging signaling procedure

Describe call process signaling procedure
4d
Describe handover signaling procedure

Describe RAN troubleshooting process
Handling Transport Faults
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Troubleshooting

Handling O&M Faults

Handling Interface Faults
1d
Handling Service Faults

Handling Abnormal RTWP
Target Audience
Handling Abnormal Downlink Power
Field engineer
Handling Failure to Deliver the License of the

NodeB Through M2000
System engineer
Handling Failure to Install the LMT
Site maintainer
Handling Failure to Establish Cells
Prerequisites
Handling High Frequency Deviation (E1) of
Successful completion of the following courses:
Clock
Handling Intermittent Interruption of CPRI Link
Handling Sleeping Cell
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Overview UTRAN Network
Min 6, max 12
Explain Basic Concepts about UTRAN
462
15.3.5 WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training

Training Path
Describe the cables connection of BTS3900

MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Product

Description
OWB05
Lecture
BTS3900
Explain the architecture of hardware and
1d
software components of NodeB operation and

maintenance system
Get to know how to use NodeB operation and
MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Operation

and Maintenance

2d
maintenance on NodeB
MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Installation

and Commissioning

1d
board status and versions

MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Data

Configuration
saving result
1d

Target Audience

Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer
Describe the procedure of NodeB

commissioning
Prerequisites
Check the compatibility of NodeB software

version
Load NodeB software and configuration file
Verify local cell status
Objectives
Measure RTWP
Monitor output power
be able to:
Outline the user interface of CME
Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900
configuration tool
Illustrate the data configuration procedure

boards of DBS3900
data configuration procedure
Describe the typical hardware configurations of
DBS3900
file
Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900
modification
boards of BTS3900
463
Duration
Class Size
5 working days
Min 6, max 12
464
15.3.6 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation Training

Training Path
Objectives

Description
OWC05
Lecture
be able to:
1d
Detail the system structure of BSC6900

Detail the functions of the components of
BSC6900
Detail the signal flows in BSC6900

List the typical hardware configuration of

2d
BSC6900
Detail the structure of operation and
Target Audience
Perform the RNC routine operation
Field engineer
Perform the RNC routine maintenance
System engineer
Duration
Site maintainer
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size

Min 6, max 12
465
15.3.7 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration Training

Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
1d


Configuration
installation
6d
Detail the Procedure of BSC6900 Data

Configuration
Perform Global Data Configuration
Target Audience
Perform Equipment Data Configuration

Perform Interface Configuration
Field engineer
Perform Cell Configuration
System engineer
Outline RNC data configuration procedure
Site maintainer
based on CME and LMT
Prerequisites
Complete RNC data configuration based on
CME and LMT
program(s):
Duration
BSC6900 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation
7 working days
Training
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
466
15.3.8 WCDMA RAN11.1 Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Objectives

Troubleshooting
be able to:
4d

Handling Transmission Faults
Handling Equipments Faults
Handling O&M Faults
MBTS3900 WCDMA V100R002

Troubleshooting
Handling Basic Service Faults

1d
Handling NodeB Abnormal RTWP

Target Audience
NodeB Through M2000
Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration
Class Size
Training
Min 6, max 12
467
15.3.9 WCDMA RAN11.1 RAN Reconfiguration Training

Training Path
Describe the
procedure of expanding the
RNC capacity
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R11 RNC
Expanding
Perform how to add an RNC board

Perform how to add an EPS
1d
Upon completion of this course, you will be

WCDMA RAN11.1 Dynamic Data
Reconfiguration
able to:
Perform how to Increase Frequencies on the
1d
UMTS Network
Perform how to Reconfigure the Parameters of
Physical NodeBs
BTS3900 WCDMA V100R002 NodeB

Migration Data Reconfiguration
Perform how to Reconfigure the Data of Cells

and Neighboring Cells in Batches
1.5 d
Perform how to Reconfigure Cell Algorithm

Parameters
Describe the procedure of the RNC migration

data reconfiguration
1.5 d
Perform the RNC migration data

reconfiguration
Target Audience

Field engineer
able to:
System engineer
Detail the scenarios of NodeB migration data
Site maintainer
reconfiguration
Prerequisites
Detail the procedure of NodeB migration data

reconfiguration
Perform the NodeB migration data
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration
reconfiguration
Training
Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, max 12
468

Training Path

3900 Series WCDMA NodeB

V200R012 Product Description
OWB11
Lecture
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Describe the hardware structure and
application scenario of NodeB
BTS3900 WCDMA V200R012


2d
boards of NodeB
Describe the cables connection of NodeB
NodeB

Describe the structure of operation and

1d
maintenance system
Detail routine operation of NodeB
Detail routine maintenance of NodeB
Detail the scenarios of NodeB commissioning
BTS3900 WCDMA V200R012 Data

Configuration
Perform NodeB Remote commissioning

1d
Perform NodeB Local commissioning

Outline NodeB data configuration procedure
based on CME
Target Audience
Complete NodeB data configuration
Field engineer
Duration
System engineer
Site maintainer
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
469

Training Path
Objectives

Description
OWC13
Lecture
be able to:
1d

BSC6900
Detail the signal flows in

BSC6900

2d
BSC6900
Target Audience
Perform the RNC routine operation
Field engineer
Perform the RNC routine maintenance
System engineer
Duration
Site maintainer
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size

Min 6, max 12
470

Training Path
be able to:


1d

installation

Configuration
Configuration
6d

Target Audience

Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
CME and LMT

Duration

program(s):
7 working days
Class Size
Training
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
471
15.3.13 WCDMA RAN12 Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Objectives

Troubleshooting
be able to:
4d

Handling O&M Faults

Troubleshooting

1d

Handling Hardware Faults
Target Audience
NodeB Through M2000
Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer
Handling OMCH Fault
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
472
15.3.14 WCDMA RAN12 RAN Reconfiguration Training

Training Path
Describe the
RNC capacity
Expanding

1d

able to:
WCDMA RAN12 Dynamic Data
Reconfiguration

UMTS Network
1d

Physical NodeBs


1.5 d
Parameters
1.5 d
reconfiguration
Target Audience
able to:
Field engineer
System engineer
reconfiguration
Site maintainer

reconfiguration
Prerequisites
reconfiguration
Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
473
15.3.15 WCDMA RAN11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta Training

Training Path
Objectives
WCDMA R11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta

OWC21
Lecture
be able to:
1d
Describe New hardware

Describe some important new features
Describe some new O&M functions
Target Audience
Understand the values and benefit of the
Field engineer
features
System engineer
Duration
Site maintainer
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
474
15.3.16 WCDMA uBro2.0 Network Operation Training

Training Path
Perform the IPCLK1000 routine operation and

maintenance, commissioning and data
WCDMA uBro2.0 RAN Operation

Maintenance
OWF00 Lecture, Hand-on exercise
configuration.
Introduce the AHR basic functions and
5d
interfaces.
Describe the AHR network architecture.
Target Audience
Describe the AHR hardware structure and
Field engineer
typical configuration.
System engineer
Describe the AHR software structure and
Site maintainer
functions.
Prerequisites
Describe the AHR client routine operation and

maintenance functions.
Basic knowledge of UMTS network principle
Introduce the APM basic functions and
Objectives
interfaces.
Describe the APM network architecture.
be able to:
Describe the APM hardware structure and
Describe interface and network architecture for
WCDMA system uBro solution.
Describe the APM software structure and
Describe the basic principles for WCDMA
functions.
system.
Perform the APM routine operation and
Introduce the network architecture and
maintenance on AP with client.
structure of uBro solution.
Introduce M2000 basic functions.
Describe the AP basic functions and interfaces.
Describe the M2000 system architecture and
Describe the types of AP and hardware
functions.
structure.
Introduce the M2000 network for uBro solution.
Describe the accessing way and procedure of
Perform M2000 routine operation and
AP.
Perform the AP commissioning and data
Duration
configuration.
5 working days
Introduce the IPCLK1000 working principle and

features.
Class Size
Describe the IPCLK1000 network structure.
Min 6, max 12
Describe the IPCLK1000 hardware structure.
475

Training Path
Objectives

OMB17
Lecture
be able to:
1d
Describe the hardware structure of 3900 series

NodeB

boards of NodeB
2d

NodeB

maintenance system
1d


Configuration

1d

Outline MBTS data configuration procedure
Target Audience
based on CME
Complete MBTS data configuration
Field engineer
Duration
System engineer
Site maintainer
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 12

476

Training Path
Set the alarm collection template,and collect

the alarm by the template.

Description
OWC22
Set the KPI collection template,and collect the

KPI by the template.
1d
Lecture
Collect the counters of board and link load by

m2000, check the RNC load according to the
specific threshold.

Collect the counters of SPU subsystem by

m2000
3d
check the SPU subsystem performance.

master the transmission detection methods and
Target Audience
their operation
detect the transmission performance and
Field engineer
connectivity by the transimission methods.
System engineer
master the signaling tracing operation, collect
Site maintainer
the interface and link signaling message.
Prerequisites
master the procedure of handling the TOPN
alarms
handle the common alarms according to the
procedures.
Objectives
master the procedure of Backing Up and

Restoring Data
perform the restoration of data correctly when
be able to:
OMU board is damaged, OMU database
collapses, or the OMU upgrade fails.

Duration
BSC6900
BSC6900
4 working days
Class Size
BSC6900
Min 6, max 12
master board replacement procedure

replace the faulty board correctly and ensure
RNC work normally.
477

Training Path
be able to:


1d

installation

Configuration
Configuration
6d

Target Audience

Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
CME and LMT

Duration

program(s):
7 working days
Class Size
Training
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
478
15.3.20 WCDMA RAN13 RAN Reconfiguration Training

Training Path
Describe the
RNC capacity
Expanding

1d

able to:
Reconfiguration

UMTS Network
1d

Physical NodeBs


1.5 d
Parameters
1.5 d
reconfiguration
able to:
Target Audience
Field engineer
reconfiguration
System engineer

reconfiguration
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
reconfiguration
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12

be able to:
479
15.3.21 WCDMA RAN13 RAN Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Objectives

Troubleshooting
be able to:
4d

Handling O&M Faults

Troubleshooting

1d

Handling Hardware Faults
Target Audience
Field engineer
NodeB Through M2000
System engineer
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
Handling OMCH Fault

Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
480

Training Path
Objectives
WCDMA R12.0-RAN13.0 Product Delta

OWC30
Lecture
be able to:
1d
Describe New hardware

Target Audience
Field engineer
System engineer
features
Site maintainer
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
481
15.3.23 WCDMA uBro3.0 Network Operation Training

Training Path
Perform the IPCLK1000 routine operation and

maintenance, commissioning and data
WCDMA uBro3.0 RAN Operation

Maintenance
OWF01 Lecture, Hand-on exercise
configuration.
Introduce the AHR basic functions and
5d
interfaces.
Describe the AHR network architecture.
Target Audience
Describe the AHR hardware structure and
Field engineer
System engineer
Describe the AHR software structure and
Site maintainer
functions.
Prerequisites
Describe the AHR client routine operation and

maintenance functions.
Basic knowledge of UMTS network principle
Introduce the APM basic functions and
Objectives
interfaces.
Describe the APM network architecture.
be able to:
Describe the APM hardware structure and
Describe interface and network architecture for
WCDMA system uBro solution.
Describe the APM software structure and
Describe the basic principles for WCDMA
functions.
system.
Perform the APM routine operation and
Introduce the network architecture and
structure of uBro solution.
Introduce M2000 basic functions.
Describe the AP basic functions and interfaces.
Describe the M2000 system architecture and
Describe the types of AP and hardware
functions.
structure.
Introduce the M2000 network for uBro solution.
Describe the accessing way and procedure of
Perform M2000 routine operation and
AP.
Perform the AP commissioning and data
Duration
configuration.
5 working days
Introduce the IPCLK1000 working principle and

features.
Class Size
Describe the IPCLK1000 network structure.
Min 6, max 12
Describe the IPCLK1000 hardware structure.
482
15.3.24 WCDMA RAN14.0 NodeB Training

Training Path

Objectives

OMB23
Lecture

1d
be able to:
Describe the hardware structure of 3900 series
NodeB


boards of NodeB
2d

NodeB


1d
maintenance system

Configuration

1d
Target Audience
Outline NodeB data configuration procedure

based on CME
Field engineer
Complete NodeB data configuration
System engineer
Duration
Site maintainer
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
483
15.3.25 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation Training

Training Path
Set the alarm collection template,and collect

the alarm by the template.

Description
OWC31
Set the KPI collection template,and collect the

KPI by the template.
1d
Lecture
Collect the counters of board and link load by

m2000, check the RNC load according to the
specific threshold.

Collect the counters of SPU subsystem by

m2000
3d
check the SPU subsystem performance.

master the transmission detection methods and
Target Audience
their operation
detect the transmission performance and
Field engineer
connectivity by the transimission methods.
System engineer
master the signaling tracing operation, collect
Site maintainer
the interface and link signaling message.
Prerequisites
master the procedure of handling the TOPN
alarms
handle the common alarms according to the
procedures.
Objectives
master the procedure of Backing Up and

Restoring Data
perform the restoration of data correctly when
be able to:
OMU board is damaged, OMU database
collapses, or the OMU upgrade fails.

Duration
BSC6900
BSC6900
4 working days
Class Size
BSC6900
Min 6, max 12
master board replacement procedure

replace the faulty board correctly and ensure
RNC work normally.
484
15.3.26 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Configuration Training

Training Path
be able to:


1d

installation

Configuration
Configuration
6d

Target Audience

Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
CME and LMT

Duration

program(s):
7 working days
Class Size
Training
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
485
15.3.27 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Reconfiguration Training

Training Path
Describe the
RNC capacity
Expanding

0.7 d

able to:
BTS900 WCDMA V200R14 RNC

Expanding
UMTS Network
0.3 d

Physical NodeBs

Reconfiguration

1d
Parameters


1.5 d
reconfiguration
Perform how to add WBBP Board
Perform how to add RF Unit


able to:
1.5 d

reconfiguration
Target Audience
Field engineer
reconfiguration
System engineer
Site maintainer
reconfiguration
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
be able to:
486
15.3.28 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
be able to:

Troubleshooting

4d
Handling O&M Faults

MBTS WCDMA V200R0014

Troubleshooting

1d
NodeB Through M2000

Handling Failure to Install the NodeB LMT
Target Audience
Handling High Frequency Deviation (E1) of

Clock
Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer

Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
487

Training Path
Prerequisites
WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 Delta for

Hardware
OWC41
Lecture
0.3 d
Objectives
WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 for O&M
OWC42
Lecture

be able to:
0.3 d
Describe New hardware and the functions

WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 Delta for

New Feature
OWC43
Lecture

features
0.9 d
Duration
Target Audience
1.5 working days
Field engineer
Class Size
System engineer
Min 6, max 12
Site maintainer
488
15.3.30 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Upgrade Training

Training Path
Objectives
be able to:

Upgrading
OWB27
Describe the upgrade procedure
1d
Describe the preparations before upgrade

Perform how to upgrade the RNC

Upgrading
OWC35
Describe the verification operations after

upgrade.
1d
Describe how to roll the version back to the one

before upgrade.
Target Audience
Field engineer
Describe the upgrade of NodeB
System engineer
Site maintainer
upgrade.
Prerequisites

before upgrade

Duration
program(s):
BSC6900 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation
2 working days
Training
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
489
15.3.31 WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency

Maintenance
OWC40
be able to:
1d
Describe Brief Guide to Emergent Accidents
Target Audience
implement Emergency Measures in

Emergency Situations
Field engineer
Describe Preparations and the Suggestions on
System engineer
the Parameter Value Change Before a Holiday
Site maintainer
implement Emergency Measures in Heavy
Prerequisites
Traffic Situations
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
490
15.3.32 WCDMA IPRAN Application Training

Training Path
Learn about common IP RAN concepts such as

the MSTP and PTN
Understand the TCP/IP protocol structure, and
Wireless IP Basic Principle

YI00
Lecture
learn common technologies such as the VLAN

and DSCP
1d
Learn the protocol stack composition on IP

RAN interfaces
WCDMA IPRAN Networking

Introduction
Lecture
WI00
Learn the IP components, and understand the

data exchange process
0.5d
Be familiar with common IP RAN devices and

maintenance applications
WCDMA IPRAN Networking and

Planning
Lecture
WI01
Learn about differences among the IP, ATM,

and TDM technologies, and problems caused
1d
by IP-based networking
Learn about the evolution of IP RANs
WCDMA IPRAN Feature

Application
WI02
Understand IP RAN concepts and advantages

Understand changes in IP RAN networking
1d
Learn about feature requirements for IP RAN

networking
WCDMA IPRAN Monitoring and
Learn the detail of IP RAN MSTP networking
Maintenance
WI03
Solution
0.5d
Learn the detail of IP RAN PTN networking

Solution
WCDMA IPRAN Troubleshooting

WI04
Understand differences between the layer 2

networking and layer 3 networking
1d
Learn about the basic IP RAN resource

planning.
Target Audience
Learn principles of IP address allocation and

Field engineer
internal limitation of the RAN equipment.
System engineer
Plan and configure the IP addresses for
Site maintainer
interface boards.
Prerequisites
Learn principles of planning VLAN and how to

process VLAN tags.
Understand data transmission between the

protocol layer and the RAN equipment.
Understand the IP RAN reliability-ensuring
Objectives
implementation mechanism
Understand the principles and application of
be able to:
the reliability detection mechanism
Learn about IP protocol release specifications
Know how to configure IP RAN
and common RFC standards
reliability-ensuring parameters
491
Learn about the differences in reliability
due to introduction of the IP radio access
guarantee in different networking scenarios
network (RAN)
Master the application schemes of the
Learn the active monitoring scheme and
reliability-ensuring mechanism in different
implementation process for the IP RAN
scenarios
transmission
Learn the concept of IP Quality of Service
Learn detailed parameter configuration for IP
(QoS)
RAN fault detect
Learn about radio services' QoS requirements
Monitor IP RAN transmission links, analyze and
for IP RANs
locate the faults

Understand theories for IP active detection
Understand the QoS implementation at each

layer from the perspective of transmission
Learn procedures for detecting IP faults
protocols
Learn methods for locating IP faults
Learn the QoS configuration and application in
Learn about packet capturing tool for IP RANs
IP RANs
Understand the IP transmission
Describe the procedures of implementing QoS
processing
Understand typical IP transmission
in IP RAN end to end (E2E) services
Describe the requirements of the IP RAN for
Understand fault isolation in case of
clock synchronization
emergencies in IP transmission mode
Know the differences between clock
Understand how to analyze typical IP
synchronization and phase synchronization
transmission troubleshooting cases
Learn about the typical IP RAN clock solution
Duration
Describe the architecture of an IP RAN clock

5 working days
network
Class Size
Learn about the differences between IP RAN

clock networking applications
Min 6, max 12
Understand changes in maintenance modes
492
16 CDMA Training Path

16.1
CDMA Training Path

cdma2000 1X Radio Network
Design and Planning Training
7D
5D
Network Deployment Engineer
Optimization Engineer
&
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio
Network Design and Planning
Network Optimization Training
Training
4D
4D

5D
CDMA BTS/DBS3900
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900
Installation and Testing Training
Field O&M Training
5D
For Field/1st line Engineer
5D
For Field/1st line Engineer

CDMA BSS Data Configuration
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System
Training
Commissioning
5D
For NMC/2nd line Engineer

CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900
Advanced Training
5D
For Target Audience
Training Upgrade Path
cdma2000 1X/1xEV-DO Radio Access Network Training
493
2D
17 CDMA Training Courses

CDMA Product Technology Training Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training
6 ~ 12
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning

Training
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training
6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training
6 ~ 12
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
CDMA Training Courses
494
17.1
CDMA Training
17.1.1 CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training

Training Path
Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A networking

List 1xEV-DO Rev.A new technology
BTS/DBS3900 CDMA Installation and Testing

ORB01
Describe Structure of the BTS3900

Describe Modules Functions
5d
Describe Application Scenario

Describe Antenna
Target Audience
Describe Key Technologies

BTS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and
Complete Antenna Installation
Complete Measuring VSWR
Prerequisites
Complete Locating Antenna-Feeder Fault

Describe Precautions and FAQ
Complete Operation of Analog PowerMeter
Objectives
Complete Operation of Digital PowerMeter
Complete BTS Data Configuration
be able to:
Complete BTS Commissioning
Describe various wireless communication
Describe Operation & Maintenance System
protocol and evolution of cdma2000
Complete Routine Operation & Maintenance
Describe Long code, Short code and Walsh

code application
Duration
Describe the reverse and forward Radio

Configurations and their correspondence
5 working days
Describe Rake receiver, power control, soft and
Class Size
softer handoffs
Min 6max 12
List feature and specifications of 1xEV-DO

Rev.A
List Basic Concept of 1xEV-DO Rev.A
495
17.1.2 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
List Basic Concept of 1xEV-DO Rev.A

Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A networking
cdma2000 1X & EV-DO Rev.A System
List 1xEV-DO Rev.A new technology
Overview
Outline BSC6680 features
ORA02
Lecture
1d
Describe the structure of BSC6680

Describe the functions of all boards
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS6.0 Product
Know the signaling flow in BSC6680
Description
Describe BSC6680 typical configurations
ORC02
Lecture
2d
Describe types of 3900 series BTS

Outline functions of modules
Find typical application scenarios
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA Operation
Describe Antenna Functions
and Maintenance
ORC05
Describe Antenna Technologies
2d
Describe Antenna Installation

Target Audience
Know about the basic knowledge about

ATM&IP
Outline the structure of operation and
maintenance system
Prerequisites
Describe IP address in CBSS
Describe the networking of the O&M system
Objectives
Describe the software structure of BSS

List the file structure of
BSC6680 BAM
Perform LMT main operation
be able to:
Describe the routine maintenance tasks
Describe various wireless communication
Fulfill BSC6680 routine maintenance tasks
protocol and evolution of cdma2000
Outline the O&M system of BTS3900
Describe Long code, Short code and Walsh
Manage the routine maintenance operation of
code application
BTS3900
Describe the reverse and forward Radio

Duration
Configurations and their correspondence

Describe Rake receiver, power control, soft and
5 working days
softer handoffs
Class Size
List feature and specifications of 1xEV-DO

Min 6max 12
Rev.A
496
17.1.3 CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training

Training Path
configuration
Make the initial configuration script of BSC6680
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS6.0 Data
Implement the data loading and checking of
Configuration
ORC06
BSC6680
3d
Describe the principle and process of BTS data

configuration
Complete BTS data configuration and
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA Troubleshooting

ORC08
commissioning
List the basic process of BSC6680
2d
troubleshooting
Describe the treatment of typical emergency
Target Audience
fault
BSS Field Technicians, Second Line Operation
Outline the procedure of the emergency
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
maintenance
Prerequisites
Understand the processing of troubleshooting

Handle the common faults and troubles of
CDMA BSS

program(s):
Duration
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Field Operation

5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6max 12
be able to:
Describe the procedure of BSC6680
497

Training Path
configuration
Configuration
ORC07
BSC6680
3d

configuration
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA Troubleshooting

ORC08
commissioning
2d
troubleshooting
Target Audience
fault
maintenance
Prerequisites

CDMA BSS

Duration
program(s):
5 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12
be able to:
498

Training Path

configuration
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS8.0
Troubleshooting

BSC6680
Configuration
ORC13

3d
configuration
commissioning
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS8.0
Troubleshooting
ORC12
troubleshooting
2d

fault
Target Audience
maintenance
Prerequisites

CDMA BSS

Duration

program(s):
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6max 12
Objectives
be able to:
499
17.1.6 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training

Training Path
Objectives
CDMA-LTE System Overview

ORA04
Lecture
be able to:
Describe LTE development and features
0.5d
Outline LTE network architecture

Explain LTE key technologies
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training
Describe LTE protocol and channel

Describe LTE deployment
ORC09
4.5d
Describe CDMA-LTE solution

Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 CDMA
Target Audience
Expansion
Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 Interface
Optimization Engineers, System Technicians,
Reconstruction
System Engineers
Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 Software
Prerequisites
Upgrade
At least 2 years working experience in CDMA
Understand CDMA EV-DO Troubleshooting
Understand CDMA interface Troubleshooting
Duration

program(s):
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6max 12
500
17.1.7 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training

Training Path
Describe BSC6680 Hardware Function

Describe BSC6680 Typical Configuration
cdma2000 1X System Principle
List the typical type of 3900 series BTS

Describe the system structure of 3900 series
ORA01
Lecture
1d
BTS
State the function of each module
Outline application scenarios
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS6.0 Product
Master the basic knowledge of Radio
Overview
ORC01
Lecture
Propagation
1d
Describe some typical Propagation Models and

their applicability
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and
Planning
ORP02
Comprehend the key parameters and

calculation methods of Link Budget
3d
Know about the basic principle of Site, Antenna

& Feeder Selection
Target Audience
Understand interference analysis method
Network Deployment Engineers, System
Describe the relative factors for capacity
Technicians, System Engineers
Implement the capacity planning

List Paging Channel Construction
Prerequisites
Describe LAC Planning
Implement Paging Optimization
At least 1 year working experience in CDMA
Describe the basic method for PN offset
planning in the CDMA network
Objectives
Outline the basic principle for Neighbor

planning in the CDMA network
Describe
be able to:
the precautions when planning the
PN and the Neighbor cells
Describe the development of mobile system

Duration
List the structure of cdma2000 1X network

State the signal process flow of cdma2000 1X
5 working days
State the key technology of cdma2000 1X
Class Size
Describe the air interface of cdma2000 1X

Min 6max 12
Describe the numbers in cdma2000 1X

Describe BSC6680 System Architecture
501
17.1.8 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training

Training Path
State the significance of power control in

CDMA
Analyze reverse power control algorithm
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization
Analyze forward power control algorithm

ORO01
Lecture
7d
Optimize power control parameter

Describe function and classification
Target Audience
Explain some conception related with handoff
Apply different handoff algorithm
System Engineers
Optimize handoff parameters

Describe Registration Process
Prerequisites
Describe Voice Call Flow
Describe Handoff Flow
Describe Data Call Flow
Describe Huawei performance system
program(s):
structure
Know the meaning of performance indexes
Planning Training
Analyze abnormal performance indexes
Objectives
Describe process of network optimization

Solve typical problems of network
be able to:
Duration
Describe the function of the cdma2000 1X

7 working days
configuration message
Class Size
Explain the important elements of the

cdma2000 1X configuration message
Min 6max 12
Modify the parameters of configuration

message
502
17.1.9 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Training Path
Objectives
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A System Principle

ORA03
Lecture
be able to:
List basic conceptions of 1xEV-DO Rev.A
1d
Outline 1xEV-DO Rev.A Air interface

Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A key technologies
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network
Coverage Planning Process
Design and Planning

ORP03
Lectureworkshop
Link Budget and Propagation Model

3d
Balance between Forward and Reverse Link

Describe capacity planning procedure
Target Audience
Describe the principle of capacity planning
Network Deployment Engineers, System
Outline feature of 1X EV_DO capacity planning
Technicians, System Engineers
Describe Subnet Capacity
Prerequisites
Complete Subnet and Color Code Planning

Duration

4 working days
Class Size
program(s):
Min 6max 12

Planning Training
503
17.1.10 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training

Training Path
Explain the important elements of 1xEV-DO

Rev.A configuration message
Modify the parameters of configuration
Optimization
ORO03
message
Lectureworkshop
4d
Describe
the significance of power control in
CDMA
Target Audience
List reverse power control algorithm
List power control data configuration
System Engineers
List the handoff algorithm command

Apply different handoff algorithms
Prerequisites
Optimize 1xEV-DO Rev.A handoff parameters

Describe signaling procedure of EVDO
networking
Outline key and messages and parameters
program(s):
Describe rules and methods of EV-DO
Performance analysis
Planning Training
Understand meaning, statistic and optimization
of KPI
Duration
Objectives
4 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6max 12
Describe the function of 1xEV-DO Rev.A

configuration message
504
17.1.11 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training

Training Path
Complete Main RRM Tasks

Describe Main RRM Algorithms

Optimization
Describe Traffic Balance

Describe Idle State Standby Policy
Describe Access State Assignment Policy
Describe Service State Inter-frequency Hard
Handoff Policy
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics

Optimization
RO02
Lecturework
Describe Multi-carrier Networking Instances

Describe Multi-carrier Optimization Policy
5d
Describe Traffic Balance

Describe Idle State Standby Policy
Target Audience
DescribeAccess State Assignment Policy
Describe Service State Inter-frequency Hard
System Engineers
Handoff Policy
Prerequisites
Describe Multi-carrier Networking Instances

Describe Multi-carrier Optimization Policy

Describe Call Drop Mechanism and Statistic

Analysis

program(s):
Describe Analysis and Solutions for Common

Types of Call Drop
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization

Training
Describe Network Access Protocols
Objectives
Describe Cause Analysis of Network Access

Failures
Describe Analysis of and Solutions to a
be able to:
Common Network Access Failure
Describe Search Windows
Duration
Complete Neighboring Cell Configuration and

Optimization
5 working days
Complete Soft Handoff Optimization
Class Size
Complete Hard Handoff Optimization
Min 6max 12
Complete Coverage Optimization

Describe Capacity Expansion
505
17.1.12 CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning

Training Path
Difference between EV-DO Rev.B and EV-DO

Rev.A
New Feature of EV-DO Rev.B
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Principle
Key Technology of EV-DO Rev.B

ORA04
Lecture
1d
Describe the evolution of
EV-DO version
Describe the difference of EV-DO Rev.B and

Rev.A
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System
Describe the feature of EV-DO Rev.B system
Commissioning
ORC10
Describe the key technology of EV-DO Rev.B
1d
system
Target Audience
Describe the structure and principle of EV-DO

Rev.B system
Describe the data configuration procedure of
System Engineers
EV-DO Rev.B feature
Prerequisites
Complete the data configuration of EV-DO

Rev.B

Duration
program(s):
2 working days
CDMA BSS7.0 Product Training
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6Max 12

be able to:
EV-DO Evalution
506
18 LTE Training Path

LTE Essentials Training
Business Aspects
1D
LTE Network Design and
Network Design
Dimensioning Training
LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training
2D
2D
Training
3D
LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and

Algorithms Training
LTE Interoperability Training
1D
3D
LTE Protocols and Procedures
Training
LTE Air Interface Training
3D
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and

Algorithms Training
3.5D
2D
LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific

0.5D
LTE eRAN3.0 Performance

Improving Features and
Algorithms Training
2D
LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and
Algorithms Training
0.5D
LTE Radio Network Optimize
Training
2D
Optimization
& Performance Management
LTE Performance Management

Training
1D
LTE Tuning Training
1D
TCP/IP in the Mobile World

Training
LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission

2D
LTE System Overview Training
1D
1D
LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration
Training
LTE eRAN3.0 Operation &

3D
1D
LTE eRAN3.0 Field Maintenance

Training
LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting

Training
Operation,
Configuration,
Troubleshooting
& Tuning
1D
Field Maintenance
2D
507
19 LTE Training Courses

LTE Product Technical Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
LTE System Overview Training
6 ~ 12
LTE Air Interface Training
6 ~ 12
LTE Protocols and Procedures Training
6 ~ 12
TCP/IP in the Mobile World Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
LTE Interoperability Training
6 ~ 12
LTE Essentials Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.1 Field Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.1 Network Operation Training
3.5
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.2 Network Operation Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Operation and Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and Algorithms Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.2 Features and Algorithms Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms Training
3.5
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and Algorithms Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving Features and Algorithms

Training
6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
LTE Tuning Training
6 ~ 12
LTE Network Design and Dimensioning Training
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
Principle Training Courses
Product Training Courses
RNP&RNO Training Courses
508
LTE Performance Management Training
6 ~ 12
LTE Radio Network Optimize Training
6 ~ 12
509
19.1
Principle Training
19.1.1 LTE System Overview Training

Training Path
Describe the S1, X2 and radio-interface and

their protocol stacks
Describe the radio interface techniques used in
LTE System Overview

OEA03
Lecture
uplink and downlink

1d
Describe the channel structure of the radio

interface
Describe the time-domain structure in the radio
Target Audience
interface in UL and DL for both FDD and TDD
Field Technician
mode
Service Technician
Describe the Frequency-domain structure in
System Technician
the radio interface in UL and DL for both FDD
and TDD mode
Service Engineer
Have a good understanding of the OFDM
Service Design Engineer
principle, signal generation and processing
Service Planning Engineer
Detail the reference symbols in DL
System Engineer
Describe MIMO technology
Prerequisites
Outline MBMS for LTE

Have a good understanding of the SC-FDMA
A general knowledge in cellular systems and
radio technology
Describe Huawei eNodeB Family
Objectives
Describe Huawei LTE products and application

scenarios
be able to:
Describe Huawei LTE products Operation and
Describe the evolution of cellular networks
Maintenance System
Summarize the evolution of 3GPP releases,
Duration
from release 99 to release 10

1 working day
Explain the logical architecture of EPS
Class Size
(E-UTRAN and EPC)

Give an overview of the interfaces in EPS
Min 6max 12
Describe the Evolved Packet Core (EPC)

Describe the role of the MME and the S-GW
510
19.1.2 LTE Air Interface Training

Training Path
Detail the downlink transmission technique

Have a good understanding of the OFDM
LTE Air Interface
Detail the reference symbols in DL

OEA04
Lecture
3d
Detail the DL control signaling and formats

Detail the paging procedures
Target Audience
Explain HARQ
Explain the cell search procedure
Service Engineer
Detail the uplink transmission technique
Have a good understanding of the SC-FDMA
Network Design Engineer
Prerequisites
Explain the pros and cons with OFDM and

Attendees should have a general knowledge in
SC-FDMA
cellular systems and radio technology. An
Detail the UL control signaling and formats
in-depth knowledge in WCDMA, HSPA and/or
Detail the random access procedure
GSM radio interface is profitable
Describe the Power Control in UL
Objectives
Describe the concepts of layers, channel rank,
spatial multiplexing, open and closed loop
be able to:
spatial multiplexing, TX diversity, beamforming,
Describe the evolution of cellular networks
SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO

Describe UL and DL Scheduling principles and
Summarize the evolution of 3GPP releases,
signaling
from release 99 to release 10
Explain the scheduler interactions with other
Describe the radio interface techniques
functions
Explain the difference between the FDD and
Explain the concepts of dynamic and
TDD mode
semi-persistent scheduling
Describe the flexible spectrum usage
Describe intra-RAT mobility in
Outline the concepts of channel coding and
ECM-CONNECTED and ECM-IDLE mode
FEC (Forward Error Correction)
Explain the concept of event triggered
Describe the principle for OFDM
periodical reporting
Detail the channel structure of the radio
Describe the mobility measurements
interface
Duration
Describe the physical signals in UL and DL

Detail the radio interface protocols
3 working days
Detail the time-domain structure in the radio
Class Size
interface in UL and DL for both FDD and TDD
Min 6max 12
mode
511
19.1.3 LTE Protocols and Procedures Training

Training Path
List the different attributes of the eUTRA Radio

Bearer and explain how they are used
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
Explain the interaction between RRC and the

Lecture
lower layers in the control plane
3d
Prerequisites
Explain the RRC layer structure

Explain the RRC Service States and the
difference between connected and idle mode

OEA05
Lecture
Explain the functions and services of RRC such

2d
as System Information Broadcast, Paging, Cell

Selection and Mobility
Target Audience
Explain the PDCP functions and services such

as header compression and ciphering
Service Engineer
Explain the RLC functions.
List the different modes of RLC (transparent,
unacknowledged and acknowledged mode)
Prerequisites
and explain the structure of the PDU involved

in these cases.
The participants should be familiar with radio

interface solution for LTE or successful
Explain the MAC functions such scheduling,
completion of the following course:
HARQ
LTE Air Interface
Explain the MAC architecture, its entities and

their usage for the mapping of transport
Objectives
channels.
List the contents of the MAC Packet Data Unit
be able to:
(PDU).
State the main functions of the network
Explain the main functions and procedures of
elements
X2AP signaling protocol.
List the interfaces in EPS
Explain how signaling takes place between the
S1AP signaling protocol.
UE and the EPC
State the main functions of Radio Resource
the user plane protocols GTP.
Control (RRC), Packet Data Convergence
Describe X2 Handover
Protocol (PDCP) Radio Link Control (RLC),
Describe S1 Handover
Medium Access Control (MAC), the physical
Duration
layer and their relations

Explain the interaction of the eUTRAN
2 working days
protocols and the mapping of logical, transport
Class Size
and physical channels

Min 6max 12
Explain the purpose of EPS Bearer Services

and eUTRA Radio Bearer
512
19.1.4 TCP/IP in the Mobile World Training

Training Path
List description of some application level

protocols with relevant traffic cases: DHCP,
TCP/IP in the Mobile World

OEA07
00
Lecture
DHCPv6, DNS, etc

Outline services provided by Internet Service
2d
Providers with a focus on which of these the

mobile operators need to support in their
Target Audience
networks
System Engineer
Describe address translation, NAT (IPv4 and
Service Engineer
IPv6)
Outline IP-based application providing user
services: email, web browsing, ftp, etc
Outline Multimedia over IP (MoIP)
Prerequisites
Draw network architectures for SIP-domain

Outline SIP, SDP, RTP and RTCP protocols
functions and usage that enable end-to-end
radio technology
multimedia sessions (e.g. VoIP)
Objectives
Outline interworking between SIP-based

networks and the PSTN/ISDN networks
be able to:
Describe IP in GPRS/UMTS/EPS
Draw general mobile networks architecture and
Explain remote access and login procedures
usage of IP
for mobile users
Compare PS and CS networks
List user profile, APN, QoS, etc for the IP
List Identities (e.164, e.212, FQDN, etc)
connectivity of a UE
List Codecs (AMR, PCM, G.711, etc) and
Outline local breakout vs Home Routed Traffic
transcoding
for roaming users
Outline redundancy and multi-homing
Outline the GTP-U/GPP-C protocols
Describe Internet Protocol, IP
Describe Quality of Service
Draw IP address structure for IPv4 and IPv6
Describe definition of QoS in UMTS and
Describe Private addresses in IPv4 and IPv6
LTE/EPS and its implications on an IP network
Describe IP routing principles and routing
Describe general functions for a router to
tables (IPv4 and IPv6)
manage QoS, Packet Marking, Packet
Compare IPv4 and IPv6 functionalities
Dropping, etc
Outline routing protocols, RIP, OSPF and BGP
Describe QoS provisioning: Diffserv and MPLS
Describe Transport Protocols: TCP, SCTP and
Describe network security
UDP
Describe security requirements faced by
Describe functions of transport protocols and
modern telecom networks
usage of port numbers
Outline security algorithms and keys providing
Explain client-server model
encryption and electronic signatures
Outline UDP, TCP and SCTP protocols
Outline IPsec as a method to ensure security
comparison of functionalities
for IP networks
Describe Applications
513
Duration
Class Size
Min 6max 12
2 working days
514
19.1.5 QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training

Training Path
Management models
Describe story cases used during the course
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
Describe IP QoS in general

Lecture
Describe QoS support in the IP header
3d
Describe IP QoS concepts: Classification,

Queuing, Scheduling, Shaping, Filtering,
Dropping, Admission Control, etc

OEA05
Outline Leaky Bucket and Token Bucket
2d
Lecture
Prerequisites
Outline traffic engineering and planning

Describe Policy and Charging Control PCC
Draw 3GPP model for dynamic policy control

OEA08
Lecture
Draw PCC architecture and nodes

Outline PCC rules
3d
Outline QoS authorization and enforcement

Describe End-to-End QoS Concept and
Target Audience
Architecture in UMTS
System Engineer
Outline PDP context/PDN connection
Service Engineer
Outline Bearers: Primary/Secondary PDP

Context vs Default/Dedicated Bearer

Describe GBR and non-GBR bearers
Outline Bearer Setup modes

Describe QoS definition in HSPA:
Prerequisites
Conversational, Streaming, Interactive and

LTE Air Interface
background
Describe QoS definition in GPRS/EPS: MBR,
GBR, ARP, THI and QCI
Objectives
Outline TFTs and its usage
Outline some real-life scenarios
be able to:
Outline subscriber data/profile in HLR/HSS
Draw mobile network architecture
Outline QoS related info in Subscriber profiles
Draw UMTS/HSPA nodes and interfaces
Describe usage of QoS info in subscriber data

for ensuring QoS
Draw LTE/EPS nodes and interfaces
Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for
(E-UTRAN and EPC)
HSPA network
Describe basic terminology and concepts:
Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for LTE
Sessions, PDN Connections, PDP Contexts,
network
EPS Bearers, Service Data Flows, RAB, RB
Describe QoS negotiation procedure
etc
Describe QoS definition
Describe Radio QoS
Describe Service Setup Scenarios
Outline general QoS handling on radio

interfaces
Describe QoS handling and Bearer

515
Describe HSPA Radio Bearers and Radio links
handling
Describe LTE Radio Bearers
Outline Roaming Scenarios; QoS in GRX/IPX
Outline QoS in IP Backhaul
Describe QoS Mapping
Outline L1/L2 technologies
Outline QoS Mapping in SGSN
Outline topology and dimensioning
Outline QoS Mapping in GGSN
Outline DiffServ architecture with DSCP, SLA,
Outline QoS Mapping in PGW
PHB, Assured Forwarding (AF), Expedited
Outline QoS Mapping for access network
Forwarding (EF), etc
Describe QoS Mapping for Air interface
Outline MPLS architecture, header, LER, LSR,
Duration
LSP,FEC, Label distribution, etc

3 working days
Outline QoS in Core Networks
Class Size
Outline QoS handling and solutions in PS core

network
Min 6max 12
Outline SGSN and GGSN QoS related info and
516
19.1.6 LTE Interoperability Training

Training Path
Describe cell reselection.

Describe priority based Inter-RAT cell
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
reselection.
Lecture
Describe SPID (Subscriber Profile ID) for
3d
RAT/frequency priority.
Describe DCCH controlled cell reselection.
Compare EMM and MM/GMM.
Describe Inter-RAT mobility - RA and TA

OEA05
2d
Lecture
Prerequisites
updates.
Outline MME and SGSN interaction.
Outline security interworking.
LTE Interoperability
OEA09
Outline ISR (Idle mode Signalling Reduction).

Lecture
Describe Identity mapping.
3d
Describe PS interworking
Describe configuration of measurement
Target Audience
reporting.
System Engineer
Describe Inter-RAT reporting options.
Service Engineer
Outline feature froup indicators.
Describe PS handover between LTE and

2G/3G.
Outline network assisted cell change operation.
List data forwarding options.
Prerequisites
Draw QoS mapping

LTE Air Interface
Outline Non-3GPP interworking

Outline GSM association - IR.88: LTE roaming
guidelines
Objectives
Describe CS interworking
Describe combined EPS/CS attach.
be able to:
Describe CSFB (Circuit Switched Fallback).
Draw EPS Nodes and Interfaces.
Describe SMS using CSFB.
Draw 2G/3G Nodes and Interfaces.
Outline the SGs interface and operation.
Describe IMS and its role in Interworking
Outline SRVCC (Single Radio Voice Call

Continuity )
Outline interworking interfaces for 2G/3G and
Outline the Sv interface and operation.
LTE.
Draw 2G/3G protocols.
Outline IMS procedures.
Draw EPS protocol and EPS Bearers.
Outline VoLTE - GSM association IR.92:

Voice and SMS over LTE.
Describe PLMN selection process.
Outline GSM association - IR.58: IMS Profile
Describe initial cell selection process.
for Voice over HSPA
Recap 2G initial attach procedure.
Outline GSM association - IR.88: LTE Roaming
Describe LTE initial attach procedure.

517
Duration
Guidelines
Outline GSM association - IR.65: IMS Roaming
3 working days
& Interworking Guidelines
Class Size
Min 6max 12
518
19.1.7 LTE Essentials Training

Training Path
Describe the evaluation from 3G to 4G

Describe designed for Mobile Broadband
Describe what will 4G networks look like
LTE Essentials
Describe migrating from todays 3G network to

OEA06
Lecture
1d
a 4G network
List 4G spectrum
Target Audience
List the 4G network numbers, Capex and Opex

Describe LTE-A in a Nutshell
Business Developer
Outline the LTE-A network structure
Prerequisites
Outline the LTE-A Interworking

Outline the WiMAX
radio technology
Outline emerging markets
Objectives
Describe how to selling 4G and all it has to

Offer

be able to:
List 4G service
Outline mobile broadband
Analysis LTE-A from the drawing board to the

high street
Describe traffic trends

Duration
Describe network costs

Describe what does a real mobile network look
1 working day
like
Class Size
State costs controlling

Min 6max 12
Outline IMT Advanced

Outline 3GPP LTE-A timelines, aims, rationale
and performance
519
19.2
Product Training
19.2.1 LTE eRAN2.1 Field Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB.
LTE System Overview

OEA03
00
Lecture
Describe the logical structure of eNodeB.

Describe the working principle and functions of
1d
Prerequisite
s
eNodeB boards.
Describe the procedure of eNodeB
commissioning
eNodeB V100R003 Product Description
Describe the related concept of eNodeB

Lecture
OEB30
0.5 d
software and configuration file

Querying the current version of eNodeB
Use USB disk to commission the eNodeB
eNodeB V100R003 Software Installation and

Commissioning
LectureHand on Practice
OEB31
Commission the eNodeB through M2000

Commission the eNodeB through LMT
1d
Verify commissioning result

Explain the Hedex structure of the eNodeB
eNodeB V100R003 Field Maintenance

OEB32
Find information in the Hedex with use of

regular expression
0.5 d
Find operational instructions and maintain the

eNodeB according to the instructions
Target Audience
Power up/down the eNodeB and connect up
System Technician
LMT to the node
Service Technician
Find the alarm list of eNodeB
System Engineer

maintenance on eNodeB
Service Engineer
Find faulty hardware units and replace them
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
LTE System Overview
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12
520
19.2.2 LTE eRAN2.1 Network Operation Training

Training Path
eNodeB operation and maintenance system

LTE System Overview

OEA0
3
00
Lecture
Install M2000 client software

Use LMT login eNodeB
1d
Prerequisite
s
Use M2000 client Login M2000 server and

eNodeB
Execute MML in single mode
Execute MML in batch mode

Lecture
OEB30
0.5 d
Manage alarms of eNodeB

Manage device, such as querying board states,
blocking board and unblocking board
eNodeB V100R003 Operation

OEB33
Manage software, such as querying current

software version and backup configuration file
1d
Manage transport data, such as querying IP

address of Ethernet port and querying IP route
eNodeB V100R003 Data Configuration
OEB34
Manage radio data, such as querying cell

states and querying neighbor cell
1d

saving result
eNodeB V100R003 Troubleshooting

OEB35
1d

Target Audience
Outline the procedure of eNodeB data

configuration
System Technician
Describe the main table of external template
Service Technician
Describe the meaning of the external template
System Engineer
Use LTE Configuration System to create
Service Engineer
project
Prerequisites
Use LTE Configuration System to import
external template
LTE System Overview
Use LTE Configuration System to query data

configuration and modify data
Objectives
Use LTE Configuration System to check up
data
be able to:
Use LTE Configuration System to export data
Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB.
Outline the procedure of eNodeB
Describe the logical structure of eNodeB.
troubleshooting flow
Perform the alarm management and analysis
eNodeB boards.
Perform the log collection
Explain the architecture and components of
Handle with the main faults of device level

521
Class Size
Handle with the main faults of transport level

Handle with the main faults of radio level
Min 6max 12
Duration
3.5 working days
522

Training Path
Objectives
LTE System Overview

OEA03
00
Lecture
be able to:
1d
Prerequisite
s
Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB

Describe the logical structure of eNodeB

Lecture
OEB40
eNodeB boards
0.5 d
LMT to the node

eNodeB V100R004 Local Commissioning
OEB41
1d

commissioning

OEB42
0.5 d

Target Audience
System Technician
Service Technician
Duration
System Engineer
2 working days
Service Engineer
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6max 12
LTE System Overview
523
19.2.4 LTE eRAN2.2 Network Operation Training

Training Path

LTE System Overview

OEA03
00
Lecture
eNodeB boards
1d
Prerequisite
s
commissioning

Lecture
OEB40
0.5 d


OEB44
1d

OEB45
eNodeB
1d

eNodeB V100R004 Remote Commissioning

OEB43
0.5 d


OEB46

1d

Target Audience
System Technician
Service Technician
saving result
System Engineer
Service Engineer
Prerequisites

configuration
LTE System Overview
Describe the main table of "eNodeB Summary
Objectives
Data"
be able to:
project

524
external template


data
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6max 12
525

Training Path
Objectives
LTE System Overview

OEA03
00
Lecture
be able to:
1d
Prerequisite
s


Lecture
OEB50
eNodeB boards
0.5 d
commissioning
eNodeB V100R005 Local Commissioning

OEB51
1d


OEB52
0.5 d
LMT to the node

Target Audience
Field Technician
System Technician
Duration
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6max 12
LTE System Overview
526
19.2.6 LTE eRAN3.0 Operation and Configuration Training

Training Path

LTE System Overview

OEA03
00
Lecture

1d
Prerequisite
s

eNodeB

Lecture
OEB50
0.5 d


OEB54
1d

eNodeB V100R005 Initial Configuration
OEB55
1d

saving result
eNodeB V100R005 Remote Commissioning

OEB53
0.5 d

Target Audience
commissioning
System Engineer
Service Engineer
Prerequisites

configuration
LTE System Overview
Describe the main table of "eNodeB Summary
Objectives
Data"
be able to:
project

external template
eNodeB boards

527
Class Size
data
Min 6max 12
Duration
3 working days
528
19.2.7 LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration Training

Training Path
eNodeB LTE V100R005 Product Description
Objectives
LTE System Overview
OEA03
00

1d
Lecture
be able to:
Outline CME/MML operation
Perform capacity expansion
Perform changing the cell bandwidth
0.5 d
Lecture
OEB50
Perform adding an FDD cell
Prerequisite
s
Perform adding an MME Connection

Perform adding an S-GW Connection
Perform network reconstruction
eNodeB V100R005 Reconfiguration

OEB57
Perform changing the cell EARFCNs
1d
Perform changing the Cell PCI

Perform changing the Cell ID
Target Audience
Perform relocating an MME

Perform relocating an S-GW
System Engineer
Duration
Service Engineer
1 working day
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6max 12
LTE System Overview
529
19.2.8 LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
LTE System Overview

OEA03
00
LTE System Overview
eNodeB LTE V100R005 Product Description
eNodeB LTE V100R005 Reconfiguration
Objectives
1d
Lecture

be able to:
0.5 d
Lecture
OEB50

Draw hardware fault handling procedure
eNodeB V100R005 Reconfiguration

OEB57
1d
Draw transport fault handling procedure
Prerequisite
s

Draw radio fault diagnosis process

OEB56
Check the eNodeB radio configuration

1d
Check quality on the air interface

Check the EPC configuration
Target Audience

Duration
System Engineer
Service Engineer
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
Prerequisites
530
19.2.9 LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path
Describe S1-Flex principle

Deploy S1-Flex
Outline LTE synchronization

OEB55
Describe frequency and time synchronization
1d
Prerequisites
List synchronization sources

Describe working modes of clocks
Perform synchronization configuration
LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and
Outline Co-Transmission
Algorithms
OEO58
Lecture
1d
Describe IP-based Co-Transmission on the

MBSC side
Target Audience
Describe Co-Transmission on the MBTS side
System Engineer
Deploy Co-Transmission
Service Engineer
Outline IPv6
Describe IPv6 addresses
Describe IPv6 header format
Describe IPv6 networking

Describe IPv4/IPv6 dual stack and networking
Prerequisites
Outline IPSec over IPv6
Outline IEEE 1588v2 over IPv6
Deploy IPv6
Objectives
Duration
1 working day
be able to:
Class Size
Outline S1-Flex
Describe concepts related to S1-Flex
Min 6max 12
531
19.3
RNP&RNO Training
19.3.1 LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path
Describe data radio bearer management

Outline power control
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
Describe downlink power control

Describe uplink power control
3d
Lecture
Describe downlink scheduling

Describe uplink scheduling
Describe scheduling deployment strategy
Outline load control

OEA05
Lecture
2d
Prerequisites
Describe load monitoring

Describe admission Control
Describe load balance
LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms

OEO02
Lecture
Describe congestion control

Outline mobility management
4d
Describe Intra-frequency handover

Describe Inter-frequency handover
Target Audience
Describe Inter-RAT handover
System Technician
Outline ICIC
Service Technician
Describe downlink ICIC
System Engineer
Describe uplink ICIC
Service Engineer
Describe ICIC deployment strategy
Prerequisites
Outline MIMO feature

Describe Multiple-Antenna reception MIMO
LTE Air Interface
Describe Multiple-Antenna transmission MIMO

Describe Adaptive mode selection and
switching
Objectives
Outline ANR
Describe Intra-RAT ANR management
be able to:
Describe Inter-RAT ANR management
Outline idle mode
Outline MRO processing flow
Describe PLMN selection
Describe classification of Intra-RAT MRO
Describe cell selection & cell reselection
Describe Intra-RAT MRO Management
Describe system information reception
Describe Inter-RAT MRO Management
Describe tracking area registration
Duration
Describe paging monitoring procedure

4 working days
Outline connection management
Class Size
Describe random access

Describe signaling connection management
Min 6max 12
532
19.3.2 LTE eRAN2.2 Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path

LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00

3d
Lecture
Outline load control

Describe load monitoring
Describe admission Control
Describe load balance

OEA05
Lecture
2d
Prerequisites

Describe Intra-frequency handover

OEO04
Lecture
Describe Inter-frequency handover

Describe Inter-RAT handover
5d
Outline ICIC
Target Audience
System Technician
Service Technician
System Engineer
Describe Multiple-Antenna reception MIMO
Service Engineer
Describe Multiple-Antenna transmission MIMO
Prerequisites
Describe Adaptive mode selection and

switching
LTE Air Interface
Outline ANR
Describe Intra-RAT ANR management
Describe Inter-RAT ANR management
Objectives
Describe classification of Intra-RAT MRO
be able to:
Describe Intra-RAT MRO Management
Outline idle mode
Describe Inter-RAT MRO Management
Describe Beamforming-Related concepts
Describe Beamforming principles and
techniques
List Beamforming feature application scenarios
Describe beamforming deployment strategy
Describe concepts of Sector, Cell and TDD
subframe configuration
Describe TDD frame structure
Describe Uplink-Downlink subframe
configurations
Describe configurations of special subframes

533
Describe when to use subframe configuration
List when to use QoS management
Outline End-to-End certificate management
Duration
Outline transmission security mechanisms
5 working days
List when to use transmission security
Class Size
Describe basic principles of QoS management
Min 6max 12
Describe QoS management policies

Describe QoS management methods
534
19.3.3 LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training

Training Path
Objectives
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00

3d
Lecture
be able to:
Describe LMT delta functions
Describe M2000 client delta functions
Outline CS Fallback
2d
Lecture
OEA05
Outline LTE voice solutions

Describe CS Fallback procedure
Draw network architecture for CS Fallback to
UTRAN/GERAN

Lecture
OEB34
Describe CS Fallback to UTRAN

1d
Describe CS Fallback to GERAN

Select CS Fallback mechanisms
Perform configuration on eNodeB for CS
Fallback
Outline ROHC
4d
Lecture
OEO02
Describe Principles and Framework of ROHC
Prerequisites
Describe ROHC Procedure

Outline LTE synchronization
LTE eRAN3.0 O&M Enhancement
OES50
Describe frequency and time synchronization

0.5 d
List synchronization sources

Describe working modes of clocks
Perform synchronization configuration
Outline PCI conflict detection&
LTE eRAN3.0 New Features

OES51
Lecture
self-optimization
1.5 d
Describe PCI conflict detection

Describe PCI self-optimization in M2000
Target Audience
Observe PCI conflict information
System Engineer
Set PCI conflict detection
Service Engineer
Outline RACH optimization
Describe prerequisites for RACH optimization
Describe zero correlation zone configuration
Describe contention-based vs. contention-free
Prerequisites
random access
Describe RACH resource adjustment
LTE Air Interface
Perform MML to deploy RACH optimization

Describe impact of RACH optimization
Outline cell outage detection
Describe sleeping cell detection techniques
535
Describe cell outage detection techniques
Deploy high speed mobility
Deploy cell outage detection
Duration
Outline high speed mobility
2 working days
Describe when to use high speed mobility
Class Size
Perform network planning for high speed
Min 6max 12
mobility
536
19.3.4 LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path

LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00

3d
Lecture
Config random access preamble format

Select root sequence

OEA05
Lecture
2d
Prerequisites

LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms

OEO51
Lecture
Set initial power

Outline scheduling
3.5 d

Target Audience

System Engineer
Service Engineer
Describe intra-frequency handover
Describe inter-frequency handover
Describe inter-rat handover
Set measurement configuration
Prerequisites
Set handover related parameters
LTE Air Interface
Describe multiple-antenna reception MIMO
Describe multiple-antenna transmission MIMO
Objectives
Describe adaptive mode selection and

switching
Set adaptive MIMO
be able to:
Duration
Outline idle mode

3.5 working days
Class Size
Config cell selection
Min 6max 12
Config cell reselection measurement

Config SIB
537
19.3.5 LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path
Outline ANR overview

Describe intra-RAT ANR management
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
Describe inter-RAT ANR management

Switch on ANR
3d
Lecture
Set ANR related parameters

List classification of intra-RAT MRO
Describe intra-RAT MRO management

OEA05
2d
Lecture
Describe inter-RAT MRO management

Set MRO to optimize handover
Outline PCI conflict detection&

OEO51
Lecture
self-optimization overview
Describe PCI conflict detection
3.5 d
Prerequisites
Describe PCI self-optimization in M2000

Observe PCI conflict information
Set PCI conflict detection
LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms

OEO52
Lecture
Outline RACH optimization

1d
Describe prerequisites for RACH optimization

Describe zero correlation zone configuration
Target Audience
Describe contention-based vs. contention-free

random access
System Engineer
Service Engineer
Describe RACH resource adjustment
Perform MML to deploy RACH optimization
Describe impact of RACH optimization
Outline cell outage detection

Describe sleeping cell detection techniques
Prerequisites
Describe cell outage detection techniques

LTE Air Interface
Deploy cell outage detection

Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12

be able to:
538
19.3.6 LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
LTE Air Interface
Objectives
3d
Lecture

be able to:

OEA05
Outline beamforming
Describe beamforming-related concepts
2d
Lecture
Describe beamforming principles and

techniques
Describe beamforming feature application

OEO51
Lecture
scenarios
3.5 d
Prerequisites
Deploy beamforming
Describe concept of sector, cell and TDD
subframe configuration
LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and
Draw TDD frame structure
Algorithms
OEO53
Lecture
Describe uplink-downlink subframe
0.5 d
configurations
Describe configurations of special subframes
Target Audience
Describe when to use subframe configuration
System Engineer
Perform subframe configuration
Service Engineer
Duration
0.5 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
Prerequisites
539
19.3.7 LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path
Describe related features of UL CoMP

Deploy UL CoMP
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
Outline ICIC
3d
Lecture

Deploy ICIC
Outline load monitoring

OEA05
2d
Lecture
Describe admission control

Set admission control

OEO51
Lecture
Outline load balance

Describe intrafrequency load balance
3.5 d
Prerequisites
Describe inter-frequency load balance

Describe inter-RAT load balance
LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving
Outline high speed mobility

OEO54
Lecture
Describe when to use high speed mobility
2d
Perform network planning for high speed

mobility
Target Audience
Deploy high speed mobility
System Engineer
Outline compact bandwidth
Service Engineer
Describe key technologies of compact

bandwidth
Describe related physical resource
management
Deploy compact bandwidth
Prerequisites
Outline RAN Sharing

Describe RAN Sharing with Common Carriers
LTE Air Interface
Describe RAN Sharing with Dedicated Carriers
Deploy RAN Sharing
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6max 12
Outline UL CoMP
Describe application scenarios of UL CoMP
Describe key techniques for UL CoMP
540
19.3.8 LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms Training

Training Path
Prerequisites
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
3d
Lecture
LTE Air Interface
Objectives
OEA05
Lecture
2d
be able to:
Outline LTE voice solutions
Outline CS Fallback
Describe CS Fallback procedure

OEO51
Lecture
Draw network architecture for CS Fallback to
3.5 d
Prerequisites
UTRAN/GERAN
Describe CS Fallback to UTRAN
Describe CS Fallback to GERAN
LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms

OEO55
Lecture
Select CS Fallback mechanisms
0.5 d
Perform configuration on eNodeB for CS

Fallback
Target Audience
Outline ROHC
Describe principles and framework of ROHC
System Engineer
Describe ROHC procedure
Service Engineer
Duration

0.5 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
541
19.3.9 LTE Tuning Training

Training Path
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
LTE Air Interface
Objectives
3d
Lecture

be able to:
Describe basic process of RF optimization

OEA05
Lecture
Make test preparations

Collect data collection for tuning
2d
Prerequisites
List factors affecting coverage

List solutions for weak coverage
List solutions for cross coverage
LTE Network Tuning
List solutions for lack of dominant cell

OEO01
Lecture
1d
Perform basic coverage problem analysis

List main handover problems during network
tuning
Target Audience
Perform basic handover problem analysis
System Technician
Perform basic RF adjustment
Service Technician
Duration
System Engineer
1 working day
Service Engineer
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6max 12
542
19.3.10 LTE Network Design and Dimensioning Training

Training Path
Outline LTE radio network planning

Describe LTE radio network planning Process
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
Describe differences between 2G/3G and LTE

Dimensioning
3d
Lecture
Perform LTE radio network coverage

dimensioning
Perform LTE link budget

OEA05
Describe propagation model

2d
Lecture
Perform site number dimensioning
Prerequisites
Outline capacity dimensioning procedure

Describe traffic model and parameters
LTE Radio Network Design

OEP01
Lecture
Perform radio network throughput calculation

Analysis DL Throughput
1.5 d
Analysis UL Throughput
Perform throughput per cell(IP) dimensioning
Perform capacity dimensioning
LTE Access Transport Network Dimensioning
Outline frequency planning

OEP02
Lecture
0.5 d
Outline TA planning
Outline PCI planning
Target Audience
Outline PRACH planning
Describe the LTE transport networking
Describe the S1 and X2 interface protocol
Explain IP functionality, such as VLAN, IP sec

etc.
Prerequisites
Perform transport network dimensioning
LTE Air Interface
Perform eNodeB hardware dimensioning

Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6max 12
be able to:
543
19.3.11 LTE Performance Management Training

Training Path
Objectives
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
be able to:
3d
Lecture
Describe the structure of LTE performance

measurement system
List classification of KPI
counters of it
2d
Lecture
OEA05
Describe accessibility KPI and detail the

Describe retainability KPIs and detail the
counters of them
Describe mobility KPIs and detail the counters
LTE eRAN2.1/2.2/3.0 Features and Algorithms

OEO02/04/51
Lecture
of them
Describe service integrity
4/5/3.5 d
Prerequisites
Describe utilization KPIs and detail the

counters of them
Describe availability KPIs and detail the
LTE Performance Management

OEO03
counters of them
1d
Describe traffic KPI and detail the counters of

them
Target Audience
Describe performance management basic

concepts
System Technician
Describe measurement management
Service Technician
Implement performance measurement
System Engineer
operations on M2000
Service Engineer
Implement custom counter management
Prerequisites
Query performance result
LTE Air Interface
LTE Features and Algorithms
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
544
19.3.12 LTE Radio Network Optimize Training

Training Path
Objectives
LTE Air Interface

OEA04
00
be able to:
Lecture
3d
Outline handover procedure

Perform handover fault analysis
Describe typical case of handover fault

OEA05
Lecture
Describe basic principle of access

Describe fault diagnosis process
2d
Perform operations of fault diagnosis

Perform checking hardware connections
Perform checking version mapping
LTE eRAN2.1/2.2/3.0 Features and Algorithms

OEO02/04/51
Perform checking the eNodeB configuration
4/5/3.5 d
Lecture
Prerequisites
Perform checking quality on the air interface

Perform checking the EPC configuration
Describe time and frequency resources and
LTE Radio Network Optimize

OEO06
Lecture
throughput calculation
Describe throughput fault diagnosis procedures
2d
and methods
Describe processes of data transmission fault
Target Audience
diagnosis
System Engineer
Describe basic requirements for fault diagnosis
Service Engineer
Perform diagnosis for locating downlink data
transmission faults
Perform diagnosis for uplink problems
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
LTE Air Interface
LTE Features and Algorithms
Class Size
Min 6max 12
545
20 SingleRAN Training Path

20.1
SingleRAN Training Path
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC

7days

4days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0
BSC Configuration Training
8days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS

5days

7days

4days
8days

5days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training

3days
546

7days

4days
8days

7days

5days
SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training
2days
547

7days

4days
7days
8days
Upgrade Training
5days
3days
Emergency Maintenance Training
2days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 SingleRAN7.0 Product Delta Training

2days
548
21 SingleRAN Training Courses

Wireless Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 - SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 - SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12

Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 SingleRAN7.0 Product Delta

Training
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Upgrade Training
6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Emergency Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
SingleRAN Training Courses
549
550
21.1
SingleRAN Training
21.1.1 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Outline BTS3900 product functions
Detail the hardware structure of BTS3900
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Product Description
Detail the functions of different modules

Lecture
OMB99
1d
Perform hardware configuration and cables

connection
Perform GSM BTS remote operation by web
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Operation and

Maintenance
OMB98
LMT
2d
Perform GSM BTS local operation by SMT

Perform UMTS NodeB routine operation by
LMT
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Data Configuration

OMB97
Outline MBTS data configuration procedure

based on CME
2d
Complete MBTS data configuration

Outline MBTS Cascading data configuration
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Installation and

Commissioning
OMB96
principle
Complete MBTS Cascading data configuration
1d
Detail the scenarios of multi-mode base station

commissioning
Perform multi-mode base station Remote
commissioning
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Troubleshooting

OMB90
Lecture
Perform multi-mode base station Local
1d
commissioning
Know how to find the fault in BTS
Target Audience
Know the common fault types

Grasp BTS fault disposal method
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and
Know how to prevent the fault
Maintenance Technician and Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size

GSM/UMTS wireless network operation and
Min 6max 12
maintenance
Objectives
551
21.1.2 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Product Description

Lecture
OMC99
be able to:
1d

BSC6900
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Operation and
Maintenance
OMB98
BSC6900
3d
BSC6900
Target Audience
Perform the BSC6900 routine operation
Perform the BSC6900 routine maintenance
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6max 12
maintenance
552
21.1.3 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration Training

Training Path
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation

Objectives


be able to:
Prerequisites

Configuration
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Data Configuration
OMC97

7d

BSC6900 GU V9R11 Installation and

Commissioning
OMC96
Outline MBSC data configuration procedure

based on CME
1d
Complete MBSC data configuration

Target Audience

Prerequisites
installation
Duration

8 working days
Class Size
maintenance
Min 6max 12

Training(s):
553
21.1.4 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training

Training Path

GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration
Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
Grasp BSC6900 common fault disposal
method
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Troubleshooting

OMC95
Understand general procedure of fault
5d
judgment and location
Target Audience
Master the way to prevent BSC6900 fault

Analyze and handle some typical cases
Prerequisites

Duration

5 working days
maintenance
Class Size

Training(s):
Min 6max 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation

554

Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
OMB94
be able to:
1d

Maintenance
OMB93

connection
2d

LMT

OMB92

2d
LMT
Outline the procedure of MBTS data
configuration

Commissioning
OMB91
Complete the MBTS initial data configuration

based on CME
1d
Describe the meaning of some important

parameters
Understand the MBTS installation procedure.

OMB89
Lecture
Describe the steps of MBTS commissioning.

Master the commissioning of MBTS
1d

Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size

Min 6max 12

maintenance
555

Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
OMC94
be able to:
1d

BSC6900
Maintenance
OMB93
BSC6900
3d
BSC6900
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6max 12
maintenance
556

Training Path

Objectives


be able to:
Prerequisites

Configuration
OMC92

7d


Commissioning
OMC91

based on CME
1d

Export and activate the configuration data
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Duration
8 working days
Class Size

Min 6max 12
maintenance
Training(s):
557

Training Path

Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
BSC6900 GU V9R12 Troubleshooting

OMC90
method
5d

Target Audience

Prerequisites

Duration

maintenance
5 working days
Class Size
Training(s):
Min 6max 12

558
21.1.9 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 - SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe BSC6900 Evolution
BSC6900 GU BSC6000V9R8 &
Outline New Hardware of BSC6900
BSC6810V9R11 - V9R12 Delta for Equipment

1d
Lecture
OMC89
Master
the different O&M methods of
BSC6900
Describe the features of Web LMT
BSC6900 GU BSC6000V9R8 &
Outline the different concepts between
BSC6810V9R11 - V9R12 Delta for LMT

OMC85
Lecture
GSM/UMTS LMT and Web LMT

1d
Outline the different OM functions between

GSM/UMTS LMT and Web LMT
Outline the changing of some MML commands
CEM V1R5-V2R10 Delta

OMC86
Lecture
Describe Changes and advantage of CME

V2R10
1d
Outline Concept of the Current Area, Planned

Area of CME
Target Audience
Outline CME GUI configuration interface
Enhancement
Know about new functions of the CME
Prerequisites
V200R010
Duration

3 working days
BSC6000 or UMTS 6810 wireless network
Class Size
operation and maintenance

Min 6max 12
Objectives
559

Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
OMB88
be able to:
1d

Maintenance
OMB87

connection
2d

LMT

OMB86

2d
LMT
configuration

Commissioning
OMB85

based on CME
1d

parameters

OMB84
Lecture

Master the commissioning of MBTS.
1d

Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size

Min 6max 12

maintenance
560

Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
OMC84
be able to:
1d

BSC6900
Maintenance
OMB83
BSC6900
3d
BSC6900
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days

GSM/UMTS
Class Size
wireless network operation and
Min 6max 12
maintenance
561

Training Path

Objectives


be able to:
Prerequisites

Configuration
OMC92

7d


Commissioning
OMC91

based on CME
1d

Target Audience

Prerequisites
Duration
8 working days

GSM/UMTS
Class Size

Min 6max 12
maintenance
Training(s):
562
21.1.13 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training

Training Path

and boards
expand the transmission resoure in A, GB and
Abis interface
Prerequisites

and Abis interface
BSC6900 GU V9R13 Data Reconfiguration

OMC77
4d
UMTS Network
Physical NodeBs
MBTS GU V1R4 Data Reconfiguration

OMB83

3d

Parameters
Target Audience
Perform the RNC migration reconfiguration
Prerequisites
adjustment
GSM/UMTS
Adjust the BTS Data
maintenance
Reparent BTSs
Detail the scenarios of NodeB migration
Training(s):
Detail the procedure of NodeB migration
Perform the NodeB migration
Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6max 12
563

Training Path

Objectives


be able to:
Prerequisites

method
GBSS13.0 BSS Troubleshooting

OMC80
2.5d

RAN13.0 RAN Troubleshooting

OMC78

2d

SingleRAN6.0 Troubleshooting
OMB84
0.5d

Target Audience
Know how to handle the GU fault
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
Class Size

GSM/UMTS
Min 6max 12
maintenance
Training(s):
564
21.1.15 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 - SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training

Training Path
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 BSC Operation and

GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 Training
Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
Describe BSC6900 Evolution
BSC6900 GU V900R012 - V900R013 Delta

OMC79
Outline New Hardware of BSC6900 and MBTS
2d
Master
the different O&M methods of
BSC6900
Target Audience
Outline CME New features

Master BSC6900 New features
Master BSC6900 New Maintainability and
Prerequisites
Testability Features
Duration

2 working days
Class Size
maintenance
Min 6max 12

Training(s):
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 BTS Operation and
565

Training Path
Objectives
MBTS GU V1R7 Product Description
be able to:
1d
Lecture
OMT99

MBTS GU V1R7 Operation and
Maintenance
OMT98

connection
1.5d

LMT
MBTS GU V1R7 Data Configuration

OMT97

2d
LMT
configuration
MBTS GU V1R7 Installation and

Commissioning
OMT96
based on CME
2d

parameters
MBTS GU V1R7 Troubleshooting

OMT95
Lecture

Master the commissioning of MBTS.
0.5d

Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size

Min 6max 12

maintenance
566

Training Path
Objectives

Lecture
OMS99
be able to:
1d

BSC6900
Detail the signal flows in BSC6900
Maintenance
OMS98
3d
BSC6900
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days

GSM/UMTS
Class Size
Min 6max 12
maintenance
567

Training Path

Objectives


be able to:
Prerequisites

Configuration
OMS97

7d


Commissioning
OMS96

based on CME
1d

Target Audience

Prerequisites
Duration
8 working days

GSM/UMTS
Class Size

Min 6max 12
maintenance
Training(s):
568
21.1.19 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training

Training Path
GSM/UMTS
maintenance
Training(s):
Prerequisites

Objectives
BSC6900 GU V9R14 Data Reconfiguration

OMS91

be able to:
2d

BSC6900 GU V900R014 Migration
and boards
OMS90
1d
Expand the transmission resoure in A, GB and

Abis interface.
BSC6900 GU V900R014 Expanding

OMS89
and Abis interface.

0.5d

UMTS Network
MBTS GU V1R7 Data Reconfiguration

OMT94
Physical NodeBs
2d

MBTS GU V1R7 Migration

OMT93
Parameters
Describe what is BSC migration
1d
Describe the procedure of the BSC migration

Describe the
MBTS GU V1R7 Expanding

OMT92
BSC/RNC capacity
0.5d
Perform how to add a BSC/RNC board

Perform how to add an EPS/RNC of BSC
Target Audience

adjustment
Prerequisites
Adjust the BTS Data

Reparent BTSs
Detail the scenarios of BTS/NodeB migration

569
Detail the procedure of
BTS/NodeB migration
Perform how to add RF Unit
Perform the BTS/NodeB migration

Describe the
Duration
procedures of expanding the
7 working days
BTS capacity
Class Size
Min 6max 12

Perform how to add WBBP Board
570

Training Path
Grasp BSC6900 GSM common fault disposal

method
Master the way to prevent BSC6900 GSM fault

Prerequisites

Know how to find the fault in GSM BTS
GBSS14.0 BSS Troubleshooting

OMS95
Grasp GSM BTS fault disposal method

1.5d

Describe UMTS RAN troubleshooting process
Handling UMTS Transmission Faults
Handling UMTS Equipments Faults
RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting

OMS94
Handling UMTS O&M Faults
2.5d
Handling UMTS Basic Service Faults

Handling Failure to Install the NodeB LMT
Handling NodeB High Frequency Deviation
SingleRAN7.0 Troubleshooting
OMS93
NodeB (E1) of Clock

1d
Handling NodeB Intermittent Interruption of

CPRI Link
Target Audience
Handling NodeB Sleeping Cell
Grasp BSC6900 GU common fault disposal
method
Prerequisites
Analyze and handle some BSC6900 GU typical

cases
Know how to locate the fault in MBTS

GSM/UMTS
Know how to locate the causes of a fault
Know how to solve a fault in MBTS
maintenance
Collect and analyze cases to improve the
troubleshooting capability
Training(s):
Duration

5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6max 12
be able to:
method
571
21.1.21 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 SingleRAN7.0 Delta Training

Training Path

Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
Describe BSC6900 GU evolution overview
BSC6900 GU V900R013 - V900R014 Delta

OMS92
Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900
2d
GU and MBTS GU, including cabinet, subrack

and boards.
Target Audience
Describe the software changing in BSC6900
GU, including OMU board software and OM
software
Prerequisites
Describe the new features of BSC6900 GU and

MBTS GU.
Duration

2 working days
maintenance
Class Size
Min 6max 12
Training(s):
572
21.1.22 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Upgrade Training

Training Path


Prerequisites
Training
Objectives
BSC6900 GU V900R013-V900R014
Upgrade
OMS88 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

be able to:
1d
Describe the software installation and upgrade

flow
Outline the backup and restore operations
MBTS GU V100R004 - V100R007 Upgrade
OMT91
Complete the installation and upgrade tasks

Grasp the OMU routine maintenance
2d
commands
Target Audience
Describe the upgrade of MBTS

upgrade.
Prerequisites

before upgrade

Duration

UMTS wireless network operation and
3 working days
maintenance
Class Size
Min 6max 12
program(s):
573
21.1.23 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Emergency Maintenance TrainingTraining Path


Prerequisites

Training
Objectives
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance

OMC83
1d
be able to:
Understand the Basic Symptoms About the
Accident
WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance
OWC40
Know how to collect the related information
2d
1d
Execute the quick emergency handling methods.

Describe Brief Guide to Emergent Accidents
Target Audience
Implement Emergency Measures in Emergency

Situations
Describe Preparations and the Suggestions on
the Parameter Value Change Before a Holiday
Prerequisites
Implement Emergency Measures in Heavy

Traffic Situations

Duration

UMTS wireless network operation and
2 working days
maintenance
Class Size

program(s):
Min 6max 12
574
22 Wireless OSS Training Path

Probe
M2000
PRS
iManager M2000 V2
System Administration
Training (SUN)
Nastar
iManager PRS/Nastar
System Administrator
Training (HP)
4.5D
1D
iManager M2000 V2
System Administration
Training (ATAE Cluster)
System
Administration
iManager PRS/Nastar
System Administrator
Training (ATAE)
3D
1D
iManager M2000
V200R011 to V200R012
Delta Training
1D
Network Element
Maintenance
iManager M2000
V200R012 Client
Operation & Maintenance
Training
2.5D
iManager Nastar GSM

Performance Analysis
System Application
Training
GENEX Probe GSM

Operation Training
1D
GENEX Probe WCDMA
Operation Training
2D
iManager PRS Client
Application Training
1D
1D
iManager Nastar
WCDMA Performance
Analysis System
Application Training
2D
GENEX Probe LTE

Operation Training
1D
575
Optimization,
Performance
Management
23 Wireless OSS Training Courses

Wireless OSS Training Courses are designed as follows:
Training Courses
Level
Duration
(working
days)
Training
Location
Class
Size
M2000 Training Courses

iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration TrainingSun
4.5
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE

Cluster)
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R012 Client Operation and Maintenance

Training
2.5
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R012 New Features Training
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration TrainingSun
4.5
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R011System Administration Training (ATAE

Cluster)
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R011 Client Operation and Maintenance

Training
2.5
6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R011 New Features Training
6 ~ 12
iManager PRS V100R006 Client Application
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM Performance Analysis System

Application
6 ~ 12
iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA Performance Analysis

System Application
6 ~ 12

Application
6 ~ 12

System Application
6 ~ 12

Application
6 ~ 12

System Application
6 ~ 12
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (HP)
6 ~ 12
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (ATAE)
6 ~ 12
PRS Training Courses
Nastar Training Courses
PRS/Nastar Administrator Training Courses
Probe Training Courses

576
GENEX Probe V200R003 GSM Operation
6 ~ 12
GENEX Probe V200R003 WCDMA Operation
6 ~ 12
GENEX Probe V200R003 LTE Operation
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
577
23.1
M2000 Training
23.1.1 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration TrainingSun

Training Path
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R012 OSS Solution SUN
ONW22
Describe the basic concept of M2000
Lecture
be able to:
0.5d
Describe the system reliability of the M2000

iManager M2000V200R012 Northbound
Interface Introduction
ONW29
Lecture
system from the aspects of system security.

Describe the performance specifications of the
0.3d
M2000 system, including system capacity,

bandwidth, storage capacity, processing
Operation System Management

Lecture
ONW11
capability, and client number.

Describe the structure of M2000 system
0.3d
Describe the commands in UNIX system.

Describe the UNIX hard disk management.
Database Management
Lecture
ONW12
Describe the UNIX network configuration

management.
0.3d
Describe the UNIX backup and restoration.

Initialize and drop devices in database.
iManager M2000V200R012 System
Administration
ONW25
Define the database parameters.

Perform database security administration.
1d
Perform database backup and restore.

Describe topology management function and
perform topology management.
iManager M2000V200R012 Server Operation

and Maintenance - SUN
Perform M2000V2 system user administration.
ONW26
Collect and browse logs from M2000.
1.5d
Implement the routine maintenance items of

M2000V2 such as checking the disk space
iManager M2000V200R012 Troubleshooting

ONW27
Lecture
usage, querying the log information and

checking software version.
0.6d
Manage the M2000V2 and database

processes.
Target Audience
Perform M2000V2 data backup and

restoration.
All wireless engineer

M2000 system administration engineer
Install the M2000V2 system license.
M2000 server administration engineer
Install and upgrade the NE mediation software.

Describe the strictly prohibited operations.
Describe the method to eliminate faults in
Prerequisites
M2000V2 system.
Having basic knowledge in telecommunication
Collect files and logs for M2000V2 problem
and mobile communication

578

Duration
locating.
Perform basic troubleshooting to M2000V2
4.5 working days
application, database and operating system.
Class Size
Min 6max 12
579
23.1.2 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster)

Training Path
be able to:
Describe ATAE platform
iManager M2000V200R012 System Overview

- ATAE Cluster
ONW21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
Describe the basic concept and structure of

ATAE Cluster
0.5d
Describe the networking and technology

solution of ATAE Cluster
ONW29
Lecture
Describe the system structure and basic

function of OSMU
0.3d
Describe the system management of OSMU

Describe the equipment management, service
management, software management, general
iManager M2000V200R012 ATAE Cluster

Server Operation and Maintenance
ONW28
maintenance OSMU
Describe the method to backup and restore the
1.2d
different data types of ATAE Cluster

The types of M2000 northbound interfaces and
their suitable scenarios

Administration
ONW25
The functions of M2000 northbound interfaces

How to configure M2000 northbound interfaces
1d
How to use and maintenance M2000

northbound interfaces
Target Audience


Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Having basic knowledge in telecommunication and

mobile communication
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12
580
23.1.3 iManager M2000V200R012 Client Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

iManager M2000V200R012 System Overview SUN

Lecture
ONW20

0.5d
Describe the alarm categories and levels in

M2000V2 system.
iManager M2000V200R012 Client Monitor and
Maintenance
ONW23
Describe the alarm processing ability

supported by the M2000V2 server.
1.2d
Browse and query the current alarms in

M2000V2 clients.
Manage the alarm level and name in M2000V2
iManager M2000V200R012 Client

Performance and Maintenance
ONW24
and NE.
Describe the performance counter and object
0.8d
categories in M2000V2 system.

Query the performance result by the setting
Target Audience
conditions.
Export the performance result files.
M2000V2 Alarm Operation and Maintenance
Check the performance task status.
Technician and Engineer
Query the NE configuration data from

M2000V2 client.
M2000V2 Performance Operation and
Configure data to NE from M2000V2 client.
Describe the performance counter categories

and the difference between them.
Prerequisites
Describe the performance object categories.

conditions.
Objectives
Export the performance result file.
Define the performance query template.
be able to:
Describe the overall architecture, hardware

architecture, software architecture, typical
Duration
configuration and interfaces of the M2000V2.
2.5 working days
Describe the software structure of the
Class Size
M2000V2 equipment, the functions of different

parts.
Min 6max 12

581
23.1.4 iManager M2000V200R012 New Features Training

Training Path

Objectives
iManager M2000V200R012 New Features

Training
ONW40
1d
be able to:
List the new function of M2000V2R12
Target Audience
List the changes of functions of M2000 GUI
between M2000V2R11 and R12 version
Duration
1 working day
Class Size

Prerequisites
Min 6max 12
582
23.1.5 iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration TrainingSun

Training Path
Describe the basic concept of M2000

iManager M2000V200R011 OSS Solution SUN

ONW32
Lecture

0.5d


ONW39
Lecture

Describe the structure of M2000 system
0.3d
Describe the commands in UNIX system.

Describe the UNIX hard disk management.
Operation System Management
Describe the UNIX network configuration

ONW11
Lecture
0.3d
management.
Describe the UNIX backup and restoration.
Initialize and drop devices in database.
Database Management
Lecture
ONW12
Define the database parameters.
0.3d
Perform database security administration.

Perform database backup and restore.

Administration
ONW35

1d

iManager M2000V200R011 Server Operation and

Maintenance - SUN
ONW36
Lecture
Implement the routine maintenance items of

M2000V2 such as checking the disk space
1.5d
usage, querying the log information and

checking software version.
iManager M2000V200R011 Trouble shooting

ONW37
Lecture
Manage the M2000V2 and database

processes.
0.6d
Perform M2000V2 data backup and

restoration.
Target Audience
Install the M2000V2 system license.
Install and upgrade the NE mediation software.
Describe the strictly prohibited operations.
Describe the method to eliminate faults in

M2000V2 system.
Collect files and logs for M2000V2 problem
Prerequisites
locating.
Perform basic troubleshooting to M2000V2
application, database and operating system.
Objectives
Duration
4.5 working days
be able to:
583

Class Size
Min 6max 12
584
23.1.6 iManager M2000V200R011System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster)

Training Path

Describe the basic concept and structure of

- ATAE Cluster
ONW21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
ATAE Cluster
Describe the networking and technology
0.5d
solution of ATAE Cluster


ONW29
Lecture
function of OSMU
Describe the system management of OSMU
0.3d
Describe the equipment management, service


ONW28
maintenance OSMU
Describe the method to backup and restore the
1.2d

The types of M2000 northbound interfaces and

Administration
ONW25
their suitable scenarios

The functions of M2000 northbound interfaces
1d
How to configure M2000 northbound interfaces

How to use and maintenance M2000
Target Audience
northbound interfaces

Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days

Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12

be able to:
585
23.1.7 iManager M2000V200R011 Client Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

iManager M2000V200R011 System Overview SUN

Lecture
ONW20
0.5d

Describe the alarm categories and levels in
M2000V2 system.
iManager M2000V200R011 Client Monitor and

Maintenance
ONW23
Describe the alarm processing ability

supported by the M2000V2 server.
1.2d
Browse and query the current alarms in

M2000V2 clients.
iManager M2000V200R011 Client

Performance and Maintenance
ONW24
Manage the alarm level and name in M2000V2

and NE.
0.8d
Describe the performance counter and object

categories in M2000V2 system.
Target Audience
conditions.
Export the performance result files.
Query the NE configuration data from
M2000V2 client.
Configure data to NE from M2000V2 client.

Describe the performance counter categories
Prerequisites
and the difference between them.

Describe the performance object categories.
conditions.
Objectives
Export the performance result file.
Define the performance query template.
be able to:

Duration
configuration and interfaces of the M2000V2.

Describe the software structure of the
2.5 working days
M2000V2 equipment, the functions of different
Class Size
parts.
Min 6max 12

586
23.1.8 iManager M2000V200R011 New Features Training

Training Path

Objectives
iManager M2000V200R011 New Features

Training
ONW41

be able to:
1d
List the new function of M2000V2R11
Target Audience
List the changes of functions of M2000 GUI

between M2000V2R10 and R11 version
Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Prerequisites
Min 6max 12
587
23.2
PRS Training
23.2.1 iManager PRS V100R006 Client Application

Training Path
Objectives
iManager PRS V100R006 Client
be able to:
Application
ONR11
Describe the structure and data processing
1d
procedure of PRS V100R006 system

Describe the functions and features of PRS
V100R006 system
Target Audience
Perform routine PRS client operations such as

Radio Network Optimization Engineers
KPI management, performance report

management and etc
Prerequisites
Duration
Having basic knowledge in wireless network
1 working day
performance management
Class Size
Min 6max 12
588

Training Path
Objectives
Application
be able to:
ONR21
1d

V100R007 system
Target Audience


management and etc
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
589

Training Path
Objectives
Application
be able to:
ONR31
1d

V100R008 system
Target Audience


management and etc
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
590
23.3
Nastar Training
23.3.1 iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM Performance Analysis System Application

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the structure and the data collection
iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM
procedure of iManager Nastar V600R008
Performance Analysis System Application

ONO11
Describe the network optimization procedure

2d
with Nastar
Perform routine operations with Nastar client
Perform different GSM analysis tasks such as
Target Audience
GSM MR analysis, GSM neighboring cell
analysis, GSM frequency analysis and etc

Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Having basic knowledge in GSM radio network
Class Size
optimization
Min 6max 12
Objectives
591
23.3.2 iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA Performance Analysis System

Application
Training Path
Describe the structure and and the data

collection procedure of iManager Nastar
iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA
V600R008

ONO12

2d
with Nastar
Perform different UMTS analysis tasks such as
Target Audience
Coverage Analysis, Uplink Interference

Analysis, Intra-frequency Neighboring Cell
Analysis, Pilot Pollution Analysis and etc

Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Having basic knowledge in WCDMA radio
Class Size
network optimization
Objectives
Min 6max 12

be able to:
592

Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
ONO21
2d

Target Audience
with Nastar

GSM MR analysis, GSM
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
optimization
Class Size
Min 6max 12
593

Application
Training Path

V600R009

ONO22

2d
with Nastar
Target Audience


Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12

be able to:
594

Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
ONO31
2d

Target Audience
with Nastar

GSM MR analysis, GSM
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
optimization
Class Size
Min 6max 12
595

Application
Training Path

V600R010

ONO32

2d
with Nastar
Target Audience


Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12

be able to:
596
23.4
PRS/Nastar Administrator Training
23.4.1 iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (HP)

Training Path
Objectives
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator
be able to:
Training (HP)
ONR32
Lecture
1d

Describe the security management of
Target Audience
PRS/Nastar system.
Perform PRS/Nastar system user
PRS System Administrator
administration.
Collect and browse logs from PRS/Nastar.
Prerequisites
Duration
Be familiar with Linux operating system
1 working day
Be familiar with Database database system
Class Size
Min 6max 12
597
23.4.2 iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (ATAE)

Training Path
Objectives
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator
Training (ATAE)
be able to:
ONR33
Lecture
1d

Describe the security management of
Target Audience
PRS/Nastar system.
Perform PRS/Nastar system user
PRS System Administrator
administration.
Collect and browse logs from PRS/Nastar.
Prerequisites
Duration
Be familiar with Windows operating system
1 working day
Be familiar with Database database system
Class Size
Min 6max 12
598
23.5
Probe Training
23.5.1 GENEX Probe V200R003 GSM Operation

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the operation process of GENEX
Probe
Perform GSM drive test with GENEX Probe

ONP11
Lecture, demo
1d
List basic test parameters in GSM drive test

Analysis simple Drive Test problem with
GENEX probe, such as over coverage, wrong
Target Audience
connection of antenna, missing neighboring
cells and handover failure.

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
optimization
Min 6max 12
Objectives
599
23.5.2 GENEX Probe V200R003 WCDMA Operation

Training Path
be able to:
Probe
Perform WCDMA drive test with GENEX Probe

ONP12
Lecture, demo
1d
List basic test parameters in WCDMA drive test

Target Audience

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
Objectives
600
23.5.3 GENEX Probe V200R003 LTE Operation

Training Path
be able to:
Probe
Perform LTE drive test with GENEX Probe

ONP13
Lecture, demo
1d
List basic test parameters in LTE drive test

Target Audience
LTE Radio Network Optimization Engineers

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Having basic knowledge in LTE radio network
Class Size
optimization
Min 6max 12
Objectives
601
23.5.4 GENEX Probe V300R005 GSM Operation

Training Path
be able to:
Probe
Perform GSM drive test with GENEX Probe

ONP21
Lecture, demo
1d
List basic test parameters in GSM drive test

Target Audience

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
optimization
Min 6max 12
Objectives
602
23.5.5 GENEX Probe V300R005 WCDMA Operation

Training Path
be able to:
Probe
Perform WCDMA drive test with GENEX Probe

ONP22
Lecture, demo
1d
List basic test parameters in WCDMA drive test

Target Audience

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6max 12
Objectives
603
23.5.6 GENEX Probe V300R005 LTE Operation

Training Path
be able to:
Probe
Perform LTE drive test with GENEX Probe

ONP23
Lecture, demo
1d
List basic test parameters in LTE drive test

Target Audience
LTE Radio Network Optimization Engineers

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Having basic knowledge in LTE radio network
Class Size
optimization
Min 6max 12
Objectives
604
24 Access Network Training Path

24.1
Access Network Related IP

Technology Fundamental
Training
5d
Access Network Related

Transmission Technology
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
GPON Fundamental Training

0.5d
605
1d
24.2
FTTx PON Products Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
FTTx Network Overview

Training
GPON Hardware Installation

Training
0.5d
2d
Improve
GPON Advanced Operation
10d
GPON Commissioning
Training
ODN Overview Training
5d
0.5d
NGPON Overview Training
GPON Field Maintenance

Training
0.5d
xDSL Access Network

Overview Training
0.5d
3d
GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios)

10d
Training
GPON (FTTH Scenarios)
Training
7d
FTTx PON+EoC Solution

Training
0.5d
Planning&Design
GPON Planning Training
3d
GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios)

Training
7d
iODN Network Operation and
5d
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and

7d
Principl
e
Training

Training
5d

VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
606
1d
24.3
DSLAM MA5600T Sereis Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T

Series Planning Training
3d

Series Hardware Installation
Training
2d

Series Advanced Operation
and Maintenance Training 10d

Series Commissioning
Training
5d
Series Field Maintenance
Training
2d
Series Operation and
7d
Principl
e
Training

Training
5d

VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
607
1d
24.4
DSLAM MA5100 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100

Training
4d
5d
Principl
e
Training

Training
5d

VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
608
1d
24.5
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve

Training
4d
5d
Principl
e
Training

Training
5d

VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
609
1d
24.6
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve

Training
5d

Series Advanced Operation

7d
Principl
e
Training

Training
5d

VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
610
1d
24.7
MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Series Training Path
Plan & Design
MSAN SmartAX
MA5600T(VoIP) Series
Planning Training
Implement & Operate
2d
MSAN SmartAX
Operation and Maintenance 3d
Training
MSAN SmartAX
Principl
e
Training
Improve

Training
5d
2d

611
1d
24.8
MSAN UA5000 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
MSAN UA5000 Planning

Training
MSAN UA5000 Hardware

Installation Training
3d
2d
Improve
MSAN UA5000 Advanced
Training
10d
MSAN UA5000
6d
MSAN UA5000 Field
2d
MSAN UA5000 Operation
10d
Principl
e
Training

Training
5d

VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
612
1d
24.9
HONET Series Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate

HONET V6 MD5500 and
UA5000 Operation and
Principl
e
Training

Training
5d
8d

VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
613
Improve
1d
24.10 BITS Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate

SYNLOCK V3 Operation and
3d
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and
2d
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation

3d
614
Improve
24.11 OSS U2000 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate

iManager U2000 Monitoring
Training (Access Network)
2d
iManager U2000 MSAN
UA5000 Operation and
3d
iManager U2000 MSAN

MA5600T(VoIP) Operation
2d
iManager U2000 DSALM

MA5600T Series Operation
iManager U2000 GPON
Training
5d
615
Improve
24.12 OSS N2000 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate

iManager N2000 BMS
Administration Training
3d
iManager N2000 BMS
Advanced Operation and
5d
iManager N2000 BMS

Operation Training (GPON)
3d
iManager N2000 BMS

Operation Training (DSLAM)
3d
iManager N2000 BMS

Operation Training (MSAN)
3d
616
Improve
24.13 OSS N2510 Training Path
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate

iManager N2510 Software
Test Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510 Hardware
Test Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510 OLS

Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510
3d
617
Improve
25 Access Network Training Courses

Access Network For this project, the whole training solution is designed into the following programs. List of Training
Program(s) for Access Network Project:
Duration
Training Programs
Level
(working
days)
Training
Class
Location
Size
Principle
Access Network Related IP Technology Fundamental
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
VDSL2 Fundamental Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
GPON Fundamental Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
FTTx Network Overview Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
ODN Overview Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
NGPON Overview Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
xDSL Access Network Overview Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
GPON Planning Training
6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training
6 ~ 12
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Planning Training
6 ~ 12
GPON Hardware Installation Training
6 ~ 12
GPON Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
GPON Field Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
Training
Access Network Related Transmission Technology
Evolution and Trends
Planning
FTTx PON Products
GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance

Training
618
GPON (FTTH Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GPON Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
10
6 ~ 12
iODN Network Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
Training
GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance
Training
iManager U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance

Training
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training
DSLAM Products
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Hardware Installation
Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Commissioning Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Field Maintenance
Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Operation and
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Advanced Operation and
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced Operation and
MSAN Products
619
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Operation and
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training
10
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Access Network)
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)
6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training
6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training
6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training
6 ~ 12
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning
Training
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Training
HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 Operation and
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance
Training
BITS
OSS
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and

620
iManager N2510 Administration Training
Level Description::Basic Course
621
:Advanced Course
6 ~ 12
: Expert Course
25.1
Principle Training Programs Description
25.1.1 Access Network Related IP Technology Fundamental Training

Training Path
Objectives
IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
Broadband Service Protocols

OBA02
Lectures
1.5d
Describe the functions of TCP/IP layers
Describe routing process
Describe the function and process of ARP
Describe VLAN forwarding process
Describe function and message of PPP and

PPPoE Protocol
protocol
MPLS/PWE3 Fundamental
OBA03
Lectures
Describe function and message of RADIUS
1d
Describe function and message of DHCP
Describe MPLS service implementation process
Describe PWE3 service implementation

process
IP Multicast Technologies
OBA04
Lectures
1d
Describe Multicast definition and application
Describe Multicast network structure
Describe Multicast service implementation

process
Voice Service Protocols

OBA05
Lectures
protocol
1d
Target Audience
Technical Support Engineers
Describe SIP function and position in network
Describe SIP typical call flow
Describe H.248 function and position in network
Describe H.248 message structure and typical

call flow
Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration
Prerequisites
Describe function and message of IGMP
5 working days
A basic understanding of telecommunication
Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
622
25.1.2 Access Network Related Transmission Technology Fundamental Training

Training Path
Calculation of the optical fiber optical power

attenuation
Access Network Related Transmission

OBA01
Lectures
1d
Describe a variety of fiber optic connectors and
Description of the fiber optic cable related

knowledge

Prerequisites
Description of SDH features and functions
List SDH network protection
Describe WDM principle and OTN frame

structure

Duration
network
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size

be able to:
Calculation of the sub-optical power attenuation

passive optical devices
Target Audience
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the structure of optical fiber
623
25.1.3 VDSL2 Fundamental Training

Training Path
Objectives
VDSL2 Fundamental
Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking
Describe VDSL2 modulation mode
Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles
Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
OBA21
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
Target Audience
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day

network
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
624
25.1.4 GPON Fundamental Training

Training Path
Describe the upstream and downstream

technology
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lectures
Describe the key performance parameters on

distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,
0.5d
received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
Target Audience
Describe important concepts about GEM port

and T-CONT
multiplexing measures
Prerequisites
network
0.5 working day
Class Size
be able to:
Describe the functions and specifications of
Describe ONT management measures
Duration
Objectives
Describe GPON typical application scenarios
Describe the QoS and security solution in

GPON
Describe service encapsulation and
Min 6, Max 12
GPON components
625
25.2
Evolution and Trends Training Programs Description
25.2.1 FTTx Network Overview Training

Training Path
Describe FTTx features and orientation
Describe FTTx network solution for
FTTx Network Overview

OBA10
Lectures
FTTH/B/C/O/M scenarios
0.5d
Describe FTTx service solution, such as high

speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,
enterprise private line services, mobile back
Target Audience
haul services, etc.

Technical Manager
Prerequisites
Describe FTTx OAM solution
Duration
0.5 working day
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
626
25.2.2 ODN Overview Training

Training Path
Objectives
ODN Overview
OBA11
be able to:
Lectures
0.5d
Target Audience
Technical Manager
Describe ODN network solution
Describe ODN typical equipment
Describe ODN maintenance instrument
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day

Class Size

network
Min 6, Max 12
627
25.2.3 NGPON Overview Training

Training Path
Objectives
NGPON Overview
OBA12
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
Target Audience
Technical Manager
Describe NGPON features
Describe NGPON implementation principle
Describe NGPON network solution
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day

Class Size

network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
628
25.2.4 xDSL Access Network Overview Training

Training Path
xDSL Network Overview

OBA13
Lectures
Describe XDSL network solution
Describe XDSL service solution
Describe function of components in XDSL

network
0.5d
Target Audience
Technical Manager
Describe XDSL modulation mode
Describe XDSL band plans and profiles
Describe XDSL service encapsulation process
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
629
25.2.5 FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training

Training Path
Describe traditional cable network Introduction
Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview

OBA14
Lectures
network
0.5d
Describe PON+EOC solution overview
Outline the difference between CMTS and

xPON
Target Audience
Training Content
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
630
25.3
Planning Training Programs Description
25.3.1 GPON Planning Training

Training Path
specification
GPON Planning
Outline OLT/ONU hardware architecture and

specification
Design GPON network for multiple services
Design hardware system
Plan bandwidth for internet service
Plan bandwidth for leased line service
Plan bandwidth for VoIP service
Plan bandwidth for IPTV service
Be familiar with basic knowledge about
Plan VLAN, IP and site name
telecommunications and data communications
Plan QoS
Be familiar with GPON technology
Design security and protection solution
At least 1 years experience in
Design OAM solution
OBG10
Lectures
3d
Target Audience
Planning Engineers
Prerequisites
telecommunication network planning
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Describe GPON network architecture
Describe GPON network design background
Outline OLT/ONU product functions and
Min 6, Max 12
631
25.3.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training

Training Path
Objectives
SmartAX MA5600T(DSLAM) Planning

OBL10
Lectures
be able to:
3d
Design DSLAM MA5600T network to carry

multiple service
Target Audience
Planning Engineers
Prerequisites

Be familiar with DSLAM technology
Plan DSLAM MA5600T hardware system
Plan DSLAM MA5600T service bandwidth
Plan DSLAM MA5600T QoS and security
Plan OAM solution for DSLAM MA5600T
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
632
25.3.3 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Planning Training

Training Path
be able to:
SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP)Series Planning

OBM10
Lectures
service
2d
Target Audience
Planning Engineers
Prerequisites
Design MA5600T(VoIP) network to carry VoIP
Plan MA5600T(VoIP) hardware system
Plan MA5600T(VoIP) service bandwidth
Plan VoIP interface parameters
Plan MA5600T(VoIP) QoS and security
Plan OAM solution for MA5600T(VoIP)
Duration
Be familiar with VoIP technology
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
633
25.3.4 MSAN UA5000 Planning Training

Training Path
Objectives
MSAN UA5000 Planning

OBU10
Lectures
be able to:
3d
Target Audience
Planning Engineers
Describe system structure
Describe service implementation and solution
Plan hardware system
Plan bandwidth for internet service, VoIP

service, and multicast service
Prerequisites

Be familiar with MSAN technology
Plan VLAN, PVC,IP and site name
Plan V5 or MG Interface
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
634
25.4
FTTx PON Products Training Programs Description
25.4.1 GPON Hardware Installation Training

Training Path
be able to:
GPON FTTx System Overview

OBG00
Lectures
Lectures
Introduce FTTx network
Describe the function and structure of cabinet,

frames, boards and cables
0.5d
GPON FTTx Hardware Installation

OBG20
Describe FTTH/B/C/O solutions
Install FTTx cabinet, frame and board properly
Perform FTTx cable routing and termination

properly
1.5d
Identify the cautions and facts which may affect

FTTx system running due to improperly
Target Audience
installation
Duration
Installation technician
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

equipment installation
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
635
25.4.2 GPON Commissioning Training

Training Path

GPON components
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lectures

technology
0.5d


OBG00
Lectures

and T-CONT
0.5d

OBG30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d
GPON
GPON Service Commissioning
Establish the connection and login to the

system
Target Audience
System and service Commissioning Technicians
and restore data, system name change and

alarm query etc.
and data communication
Perform the common basic operation, such as

query status of hardware and software, backup
Prerequisites
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and

Maintenance
Perform the hardware commissioning,
At least 1 year operation and maintenance
stand-alone commissioning, network
experience of the telecommunication equipment
commissioning and service commissioning
Objectives
Perform the commissioning verification
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
636
25.4.3 GPON Field Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:

OBG00
Lectures

0.5d

system
GPON FTTx Field Maintenance

OBG31 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
1d

alarm query etc.

Maintenance
Describe the general methods of field

maintenance
1d
Perform the alarm query and running status

query by indications of the LED
ODN Overview
OBA11
to field situation and daily maintenance

Lectures
0.5d
Target Audience
Field Technicians
Perform component replacement
Describe ODN network solution
Describe ODN typical equipment
Describe ODN maintenance instrument
Duration
Prerequisites
Perform simple OLT/ONT diagnose according
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
637
25.4.4 GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lectures
0.5d


OBG00
Lectures
0.5d

GPON components
technology

Maintenance
1d

GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation

and Maintenance

and T-CONT


GPON
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service


system
GPON FTTx Troubleshooting
OBG60 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d
alarm query etc.
Target Audience
Describe GPON FTTH service implementation

process
Perform GPON FTTH HSI service configuration,

maintenance and verification.
Prerequisites
Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service

configuration, maintenance and verification
Completion of Access Network Related IP
Technology Fundamental Training or having
Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service

equivalent knowledge
638
Describe GPON FTTB/C networking
Troubleshooting internet access service
Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service
Troubleshooting multicast service
Troubleshooting voice service
Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service
Duration
10 working days
Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service
Class Size
Troubleshooting hardware and software system
Troubleshooting ONU
Min 6, Max 12
639
25.4.5 GPON (FTTH Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

OBA00
Lectures
0.5d

GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lectures
0.5d

GPON components
technology

OBG00
Lectures
0.5d


Maintenance

and T-CONT
1d


GPON
GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation

and Maintenance

system

OBG60

Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d
alarm query etc.
Target Audience
Describe GPON FTTH service implementation

process
Perform GPON FTTH HSI service configuration,

maintenance and verification.
Prerequisites
Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service

Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service

Troubleshooting ONU
be able to:
Objectives

640
Duration
Class Size
7 working days
Min 6, Max 12
641
25.4.6 GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

OBA00
Lectures
0.5d

GPON Fundamental
OBA22
Lectures
0.5d

GPON components
technology

OBG00
Lectures
0.5d


Maintenance
and T-CONT
1d


GPON
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service

3d

system

OBG60 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d
alarm query etc.
Target Audience
Describe GPON FTTB/C networking
Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service

Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service

Prerequisites
Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service

Troubleshooting ONU
be able to:
Objectives

642
Duration
Class Size
7 working days
Min 6, Max 12
643
25.4.7 GPON Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
GPON Theory In-depth

OBG81
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
Describe VLAN and QoS solution for FTTH and

FTTB
GPON Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
8.5d
GPON Advanced Troubleshooting
Describe OAM solution
Describe VPN solution for FTTO and FTTM
Describe and provision Layer2 features
Describe and provision QoS features
Describe and provision multicast features
Describe and provision network protection

features
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Describe and provision security features
Troubleshooting hardware and software System
Troubleshooting ONU
Duration
Completion of GPON Operation and
10 working days
Maintenance Training or having equivalent
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
644
25.4.8 iODN Network Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
iODN Operation and Maintenance

be able to:
2d
Target Audience
Describe iODN networking and hardware
Describe iODN solution
Outline the benefits of iODN solution
Perform iODN operation
Perform iODN management
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Be familiar with basic knowledge about ODN
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
645
25.4.9 iManager U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

ONU01
Lectures
0.5d
U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance

(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lectures
Login to U2000 server via client
Add a map and device
Deal with the alarm
Backup and auto save the configuration
Add a management user
Perform GPON service pre-deployment via

U2000
Perform GPON FTTB service configuration via

U2000
U2000
U2000 GPON Service Provisioning

OBH50 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
2.5d
Understand U2000 FTTx Network Operation

and Maintenance Solution
Describe U2000 FTTx Network Deployment

Solution
U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance

OBH60
Lectures
Perform Save, Backup, Upgrade FTTx Network

Element
1.5d
Describe FTTx Alarm types
Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Analysis
Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Management
perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance
Target Audience
Monitoring
Prerequisites
General understanding of telecommunication
Perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance

Management
network and GPON
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12

U2000
646
25.4.10 FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Target Audience

OBA00
Lectures

0.5d
Prerequisites
PON+EOC Principle
OBG56
Lectures
Completion of GPON Operation and

knowledge
Objectives
1d

be able to:
FTTx EOC System Overview
OBG57
Lectures
0.5d
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview

OBA14
Lectures
0.5d

Maintenance
Describe EOC concepts
Describe EOC technologies
Describe FTTx basic concepts and applications
Describe FTTx EOC product architecture
Describe FTTx EOC MA563x features
Describe how to integrate EOC product in CATV

network
Describe traditional cable network Introduction
Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS

network
FTTx EOC Operation and Maintenance

2d
Describe PON+EOC solution overview
Outline the difference between CMTS and

xPON
iManager U2000 Service Provision (EOC)

system

alarm query etc.
FTTx EOC Troubleshooting

OBG60
Lectures
0.5d
Finish the ONU adding and check the ONU

status
Describe FTTx EOC HSI service configuration

procedure
Finish FTTx EOC HSI service configuration

correctly based on data planning
647
Duration
Finish the FTTx EOC service provisioning on

U2000
7 working days
Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx EOC
Class Size
common faults and deal with emergencies in

Min 6, Max 12
services and functions
648
25.5
DSLAM Products Training Programs Description
25.5.1 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Hardware Installation Training

Training Path
networking
MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview

OBL00
Lectures
0.5d
MA5600T (DSLAM) Installation

OBL20 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d
Outline MA5600T product functions
Describe MA5600T system features
List device management method
Describe MA5600T cabinet
Outline MA5600T shelf
Describe MA5600T functions of boards
Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection
Install DSALM MA5600T cabinet, frames and

boards properly
Target Audience
termination properly
improperly installation
2 working days
equipment installation
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
Describe the cautions and facts which may

affect DSALM MA5600T system running due to
Prerequisites
Perform DSALM MA5600T cables routing and
Describe MA5600T product positioning and
649
25.5.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Commissioning Training

Training Path
be able to:

OBA00
Lectures
0.5d
xDSL Technology Fundamental

OBA20
Lectures
1d
Describe XDSL service process

networking

OBL00
Lectures
0.5d
MA5600T (DSLAM) Basic Operation and

Maintenance
OBL30
Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d

system
MA5600T (DSLAM) Service

Commissioning
OBL33

and restore data, system name change, alarm
query, etc.
Target Audience

commissioning, service commissioning and the
System Commissioning Technicians
commissioning verification
Service Commissioning Technicians

Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
650
25.5.3 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Field Maintenance Training

Training Path

OBL00
Lectures
0.5d

Maintenance
OBL30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d

system

query, etc.
MA5600T (DSLAM) Field Maintenance

OBL31
Lectures
0.5d

maintenance
Target Audience

Field Technicians
Prerequisites
situation and daily maintenance
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12

networking
Duration
Perform simple diagnose according to field
651
25.5.4 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

OBA00
Lectures
0.5d
Lectures
1d

OBL00
Lectures
Describe XDSL service process

networking
xDSL Technology Fundamental

OBA20
0.5d

system

Maintenance

query, etc.
MA5600T (DSLAM) Service Configuration
Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service

implementation in MA5600T
OBL50 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
3d
Describe multicast service implementation

MA5600T
MA5600T (DSLAM) Troubleshooting

OBL60
Lectures
1d
Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile
Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service configuration
Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and

maintenance
Target Audience
Complete multicast service configuration
Perform multicast service operation and

maintenance

Prerequisites

Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
652
25.5.5 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path

PPPoE Protocol

OBA02
Lectures
protocol
1.5d
xDSL Technology In-depth

OBA80
Lectures
0.5d
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced Operation

and Maintenance
Deal with noise of XDSL line
Describe XDSL packet transfer mode
Describe triple-play solution introduction
Complete triple-play service configuration
Describe and provision xDSL features
Describe and provision layer2 features
Describe and provision QoS features
Describe and provision network protection

features
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced

Troubleshooting
OBL90
Describe and provision user security features
Describe and provision multicast features
Troubleshoot complex faults in hardware and

software system
Target Audience
Troubleshoot complex faults in the Internet

access service
Prerequisites
Troubleshoot complex faults in the multicast

service
Duration
Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T

Series Operation and Maintenance Training or
10 working days
having equivalent knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
653
25.5.6 iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path
be able to:
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series

OBH51
Hands-on Exercise
U2000
2d

(Access)
OBH30
Lectures
0.5d
Target Audience
Deal with the alarm
Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via

U2000
Perform VDSL2 service configuration via U2000
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Good knowledge of U2000 and DSLAM is
Class Size
required for these people
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
654
25.5.7 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning

OBC22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3.5d

Target Audience
Duration

4 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
655

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d

OBJ22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
3.5d

Target Audience
Duration

4 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
656

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d

OBK22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
4.5d

Target Audience
Duration

5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
657
25.5.10 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d

OBC22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3.5d
SmartAX MA5100 Series Troubleshooting

OBC21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
1d
Target Audience
Describe System Overview
Describe Hardware Architecture
Describe Functional Features
Describe Networking Applications
Introduce CLI
Perform System Maintenance
Perform ATM-DSLAM Service Configuration
Perform IP-DSLAM Service Configuration
Troubleshooting ADSL service
Troubleshooting LAN service
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
658

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
SmartAX MA5300 Series Operation and

Maintenance
OBJ20

OBJ21
Target Audience
Describe product positioning and networking
Describe hardware architecture
Describe functional features
Describe networking applications
Perform service configuration and maintenance
Perform system maintenance
Duration
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
659

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
SmartAX MA5600 Series Operation and

Maintenance
OBK20

OBK21
Target Audience
Describe system networking and positioning
Describe hardware architecture
Describe functional features
Describe networking applications
Perform system daily maintenance
Perform service configuration and maintenance
Troubleshooting hardware and software
Troubleshooting Multicast service
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
660
25.5.13 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path

PPPoE Protocol

OBA02
Lectures
protocol
1.5d

OBA80
Lectures
0.5d
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced

OBK70 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
7d
Describe and provision QinQ VLAN features
Describe and provision VLAN Stacking features
Describe and provision PITP features
Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE

features
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced

Troubleshooting
OBK61
Describe and provision Triple-play service
Troubleshooting complex faults in MA5600

system
Target Audience
Troubleshooting complex faults in ADSL service
Troubleshooting complex faults in internet

access service
Prerequisites
Troubleshooting complex faults in multicast

service
Duration
Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series

Operation and Maintenance Training or having
10 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
661
25.6
MSAN Products Training Programs Description
25.6.1 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
H.248 or SIP Protocol

OBA06
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System

Overview
OBM00
Lectures
0.5d
Describe SIP message and message flow
Describe H.248 message structure and call flow
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,

function and networking application
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Series Basic

OBM30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including

cabinet, shelves, boards and cables

system
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Series Service

Configuration
OBM50
Lectures
0.5d
query, etc.
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Series

Troubleshooting
OBM60
Lectures
Describe VoIP service implementation process
Complete VoIP service configuration
Perform VoIP service operation and

maintenance
0.5d
Target Audience
Troubleshooting hardware
Troubleshooting software
Troubleshooting VoIP service
Duration

Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
662
25.6.2 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training

Training Path
Objectives
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System

Overview
0.5d
OBM00
Lectures
be able to:
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,

function and networking application
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Service

Commissioning
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including

cabinet, shelves, boards and cables
OBM33 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d

Target Audience


Duration

Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
663
25.6.3 iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

ONU01
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d

U2000

(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lectures
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP)

1d
OBH53
Hands-on Exercise
Deal with the alarm
Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration

via U2000
Target Audience
U2000
Perform MSAN multicast service configuration

via U2000

Duration
Prerequisites
Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via
2 working days
Good knowledge of U2000 and MSAN is
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
664
25.6.4 MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training

Training Path
MSAN UA5000 System Overview

OBU00
Lectures
0.5d
Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning
Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions
Describe MSAN UA5000 system features
Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and

ports
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation

OBU20 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
Install UA5000 cabinet, frame and board

properly
1.5d
Perform UA5000 cable routing and termination

properly
Target Audience
Identify the cautions and facts which may affect

UA5000 system running due to improperly
installation
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
665
25.6.5 MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training

Training Path
be able to:

OBA00
Lectures
0.5d
Lectures

ports

OBU00
0.5d

system

MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and

Maintenance
query, etc.
OBU30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d
Check the equipment running conditions, such

as power connections, fiber connections,
mounted boards, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service

Commissioning
Perform the broadband system commissioning,

network commissioning, XDSL service
commissioning
Eliminate the fault during the commissioning

process
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service

Commissioning
2d
commissioning, voice service commissioning
Target Audience

process
Duration
6 working days
Prerequisites
Perform the narrowband system commissioning,
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Objectives
666
25.6.6 MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance Training

Training Path

OBU00
Lectures
0.5d

ports
system

Maintenance
1d

query, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance

maintenance
0.5d

Target Audience
situation and daily maintenance
Field Technicians
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
Perform simple diagnose according to field
667
25.6.7 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

OBA00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d

OBU00
Lectures
0.5d

ports

system

Maintenance


query, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service

Configuration
Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service

implementation process
3d
Describe multicast service implementation

process
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service

Configuration
3d
Lectures, Case Study
Lectures, Case Study
1.5d
Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service configuration
Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and
Complete multicast service configuration
Perform multicast service operation and
Describe Voice service implementation process
Complete Voice service configuration
Perform Voice service operation and

maintenance
0.5d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
maintenance
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband

Troubleshooting
OBU61
Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile
maintenance
MSAN UA5000 Broadband

Troubleshooting
OBU60
Troubleshooting IPM System
Troubleshooting Ethernet port
Troubleshooting PVM System
Troubleshooting Voice service
Troubleshooting E1 port
Duration
10 working days
668
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
669
25.6.8 MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
PPPoE Protocol

OBA02
Lectures
protocol
1.5d

OBA80
Lectures
0.5d

OBA05
Lectures

call flow
1d
Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE

features
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation

5d
Describe and provision VLAN features
Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
Describe and provision DHCP multicast

features
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Troubleshooting

2d
Describe triple play service solution
Complete Triple-play service configuration
Describe and provision hairpin connection and

self-switching
Target Audience
Describe line test networking and device

requirement
Troubleshooting system
Troubleshooting Internet Access Service
Troubleshooting Multicast Service
Troubleshooting VoIP service
Prerequisites
Completion of MSAN UA5000 Operation and
Duration

knowledge
10 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
670
25.6.9 HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

OBA00
Lectures
0.5d

OBA05

call flow
1d
Describe provision xDSL service
Describe provision IMA service
Describe provision Ethernet service
Describe provision CES service
Perform V5 interface configuration
Perform PV8/RSP frame configuration
Perform user configuration
Perform POTS service configuration
Perform ISDN service configuration
Perform daily operation and maintenance
Lectures
HONET V6 Operation and Maintenance

OBU54 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 6.5d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration
8 working days
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
671
25.6.10 iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

ONU01
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d

U2000

(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lectures
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation

and Maintenance
2d
OBH52
Hands-on Exercise
Deal with the alarm

via U2000
Target Audience
U2000

via U2000

Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Good knowledge of U2000 and MSAN is
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
672
25.7
BITS Training Programs Description
25.7.1 SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
network
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance

OSU01 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
SYNLOCK V3
3d
Target Audience
Outline main functions of boards
Configure different levels of clock source
Configure SYNLOCK V3 hardware
Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V3 network

management system
Objectives
Understand basic concepts of synchronization

network
Analyze the typical faults
Duration
Describe the composition of synchronization
3 working days
network
Class Size
Describe the applications of synchronization

network
Describe the common analysis methods of fault

locating
be able to:
Complete the maintenance records of

SYNLOCK V3
Perform the basic maintenance operations of

SYNLOCK V3
network
Perform SYNLOCK V3 network management

system maintenance
Prerequisites
Describe system structure and features of
Min 6, Max 12
673
25.7.2 SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
network
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance

OSU02
Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
SYNLOCK V5
2d
Target Audience
Outline main functions of boards
Configure different levels of clock source
Configure SYNLOCK V5hardware
Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V5 network

management system
Objectives
Understand basic concepts of synchronization

network
Analyze the typical faults
Duration
Describe the composition of synchronization
2 working days
network
Class Size

network
Describe the common analysis methods of fault

locating
be able to:
Complete the maintenance records of

SYNLOCK V5

SYNLOCK V5
network
Perform SYNLOCK V5 network management

system maintenance
Prerequisites
Describe system structure and features of
Min 6, Max 12
674
25.7.3 SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Query the device status and alarm via

SYNLOCK V3
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and

Maintenance
OSU03
Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
Describe the network structure and function of

SYNLOCK V3
3d
Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system

configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
Target Audience
Query the device status and alarm via

SYNLOCK V3

Prerequisites
Explain the meaning of network synchronization
Differentiate between clock synchronization and

time synchronization
network
synchronization
Objectives
be able to:
Outline product positioning of SYNLOCK T6020
Describe hardware structure of SYNLOCK

State the functions of boards and interfaces
List the typical system configuration of
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Describe the network structure and function of

Min 6, Max 12
SYNLOCK V3
Explain the functions of IEEE 1588v2 clock and

its advantages/disadvantages
SYNLOCK T6020
Describe clock levels and quality requirements

of clock at different levels
T6020
Describe common synchronization modes for

SDH networks
List common technologies for network
Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system

configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
675
25.8
OSS Training Programs Description
25.8.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Access Network)

Training Path
Objectives

ONU01
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d

U2000
Access Network Device Introduction

ONU08
Lectures
1d

alarm
common alarm events
Management
ONU02

performance events
Target Audience
Locate the alarm in the network
Explain the networking and application of

Huawei Access network equipment
products
Prerequisites
Having the basic knowledge of network
Describe the capacity and features of Huawei

network products
management
Describe the functions of Huawei network
Duration
Having the basic principle and equipment
2 working days
knowledge of Access network
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
676
25.8.2 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training

Training Path
iManager N2000 BMS
iManager N2000 BMS Administration

OBN56 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
Perform server configuration, server startup and

shutdown
3d
Perform system user management, N2000 user

management, NE user Management and so on
Target Audience
Perform service and process management,

Database management and NTP configuration
Perform database backup and restoration,

routine management, emergency management,
as well as know how to use management tool
Prerequisites
Duration
Having the basic knowledge of NMS

3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe system structure, orientation features,

network application and functions of the
677
25.8.3 iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Features

OBN80
Lectures
Northbound TL1 interface
Background of TL1 interface
Describe hardware and software architecture of

iManager N2000 BMS
4d
Describe the functions of each application

components
iManager N2000 BMS Installation

may cooperate with OSS and third-party

application and cases
1d
Describe fault, provisioning, performance,

management and security solution
Target Audience
Describe the solution and implementation of

NBI (North Bound Interface)

Prerequisites
Describe typical management solution which
Perform NBI operation and maintenance
Describe the solution and implementation of

dual system
Having the basic knowledge of NMS
Objectives
Install iManager N2000 system properly
Duration
be able to:
Describe HA solution
Describe Watchman principles
Perform Watchman maintenance
Describe NMS northbound interface
Northbound SNMP/CORBA interface
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
678
25.8.4 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)

Training Path
Objectives
iManager N2000 BMS Introduction

OBN00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d
Describe network management architecture
Describe the hardware and software

architecture of iManager N2000 BMS
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation

and Maintenance
OBN30
Hands-on Exercise
1d
iManager N2000 BMS Operation and

Maintenance (GPON)
1.5d
Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS
Describe the interfaces Provided by N2000
Login to N2000 Server via Client
Deal with the alarm
Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via

iManager N2000 BMS
Target Audience
Perform GPON FTTB/FTTC service

configuration via iManager N2000 BMS
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
network and GPON

Min 6, Max 12
679
25.8.5 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)

Training Path
Objectives

OBN00
Lectures
be able to:
0.5d


and Maintenance
OBN30
Hands-on Exercise
1d

Maintenance (DSLAM)
1.5d
Deal with the alarm
Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via

iManager N2000 BMS
Target Audience
Perform VDSL2 service configuration via

iManager N2000 BMS
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
network and DSLAM

Min 6, Max 12
680
25.8.6 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)

Training Path

OBN00
Lectures

0.5d

and Maintenance
OBN30
Hands-on Exercise
1d

Maintenance (MSAN)
Deal with the alarm

via N2000 BMS
1.5d
N2000 BMS
Target Audience
Perform MSAN V5 service configuration via

N2000 BMS

via N2000 BMS

Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
network and MSAN

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
681
25.8.7 iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training

Training Path
be able to:
iManager N2510 Software Test System

Overview
OBS01
Lectures
iManager N2510 AOS test system

0.5d
iManager N2510 Software Test System

OBS32 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise
2.5d
Target Audience
Analyze test item such as SELT, DELT
Understand the limits of measurements
Perform the N2510 system login
Perform the System Configuration
Carry out the line Testing operation
Carry out the line analysis operation
Carry out the line Optimization operation
Carry out the line Evaluation operation
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Prerequisites
Describe the function of each functional unit of
Min 6, Max 12
General understanding of access network
Objectives
682
25.8.8 iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training

Training Path
Objectives
iManager N2510 Hardware Test System

Overview
OBS02
Lectures
be able to:
1d
iManager N2510 Hardware Test System

2d
Describe LTS system typical networking
Outline LTS system function features
List part of testing measurement
Describe LTS system typical networking
Complete line resource configuration
Perform DMM, LB, FR and DMT via iManager

N2510
Target Audience
Duration

3 working days
Prerequisites
Complete some of the testing demonstration
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
683
25.8.9 iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training

Training Path
Objectives
iManager N2510 OLS System Overview

OBS03
Lectures
be able to:
1d
iManager N2510 OLS System Operation

and Maintenance
2d
Describe iManager N2510 OLS networking
Outline iManager N2510 OLS solution functions
List part of ODN common fault
Describe iManager N2510 OLS function
Perform iManager N2510 OLS operation and

maintenance
Duration
Target Audience
3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
684
25.8.10 iManager N2510 Administration Training

Training Path
be able to:
iManager N2510 Test System Overview

OBS04
Lectures
Outline the system architecture, the network

position, the networking solution and the
functional structure of iManager N2510
0.5d
Describe the workstation platform solution of

iManager N2510 software test system, such as
PC solution and ATAE solution
iManager N2510 Test System

Administration
iManager N2510 software test system
2.5d
Describe iManager N2510 installation

procedure
Target Audience
Describe iManager N2510 administration item
Perform iManager N2510 administration
Duration
Prerequisites
Describe the interfaces and its function of
3 working days
General understanding of access network and
Class Size
OS
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
685
26 Transmission Network Training Path

26.1
Transmission Engineer Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission

Network
TH02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d
Associate
Building Carrier OTN Transmission

Network
TH03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d
Transmission Technologies and Device

TH01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
686
15d
26.2

WDM Fundamental
Training
SDH Fundamental
Training
2d
1d
Ethernet
Ethernet
2d
2d
Hybrid MSTP
2d
ASON Fundamental
Training
Note: The training program in the

virtual box out of order
Transmission Network Principle Training
687
1d
26.3
Evolution and Trends Training Path
IP-oriented Transport Solution Training

2d
688
26.4
MSTP Training Path(TDM)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic

Training
2d
OptiX MSTP Network Design

Training
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II

/7500/9500 Product Overview
Training
0.5d
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced

Training
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II

/7500/9500 Installation Training
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and

2d
3d
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment

(TDM) Commissioning Training

(TDM) Advanced Operation and
13d
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH)

Network Planning and Design
Training
Improve
5d
4d
4d

(TDM) Basic Operation and
2d

(TDM) NMC Operation Training
10d

(TDM) Operation and Maintenance
Training
10d
Principle
IP-oriented Transport Solution
Principl
Training
2d
Elective Guide
689
5d
26.5
MSTP Training Path(Packet)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network

Design Training
2d
3d
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet)

5d

Training
2d

NMC Operation Training
10d

Training
12d
Principle
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental
Training
Training
2d
Elective Guide
690
2d
26.6
MSTP Training Path(Packet+TDM)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve

Training

Training
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II

4d
2d
2d
OptiX NG SDH Equipment

(Packet+TDM) Commissioning
Training

Training
4d
3d
8d
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH)

Training
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and


(Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and
3d

13d

(Packet+TDM) NMC Operation
Training

Design Training
15d
3d

(Packet+TDM) Operation and
18d
Principle
Principle
Training
7d
2d
Elective Guide
691
26.7
MSTP Training Path(OSN 500/550)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation


Training

Training
2d

Training
5d
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet)

3d
5d
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM)

8d
Principle
Principle
6d
Elective Guide
692
4d

13d
26.8
MSTP Training Path(Metro 100/500/1000/OSN 2000)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve

Training
2d

Training

Training
OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic

Training
1d
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning

Training
4d
3d
OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation

1d
OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and

4d
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and

8d
Principle
Principle
4d
Elective Guide
693
4d

13d
26.9
WDM Training Path(OSN380068008800)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Product Overview Training
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation

& Maintenance Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network

Design Basic Training
2d
OptiX NG WDM Network Design

Training
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800

(OTN) Advanced Operation and
13d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

3d
9d
4d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Training
2d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM)

Training
3d
0.5d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

NMC Operation Training
8d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Training
13d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide
694
26.10 WDM Training Path(OSN1800&OSN8800(packet))
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet)

Training

2d

Training
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800

13d
7d
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation

7d
3d
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and

5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
3d
Elective Guide
695
26.11 WDM Training Path(OSN3800A6800A)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A


2d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning

and Design Training
3d
2d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800

13d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic

Training
4d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM)

Training
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation

& Maintenance Training
2d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation

4d
5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide
696
26.12 WDM Training Path(BWS 1600G)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation

Training

2d
OptiX WDM Network Design

Training
2d
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning

Training
3d
OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered)

7d
OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line

3d
2d
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation

Training
5d
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line

10d
OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered)

Sub-marine System Operation and
10d
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered)

Sub-marine System Operation and
9d
Principle
WDM Fundamental Training

1d
Elective Guide
697
OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line

10d
26.13 RTN Training Path(RTN 900)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve

OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and

Commissioning Training (Hybrid)
OptiX RTN Network Planning

Basic Training
2d
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning

Training(Packet)

Commissioning Training (Packet)
3d

Training(Hybrid)
5d

(Hybrid+Packet)
3d

Training(Packet+Hybrid)
7d
OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation

2d
4d

Advanced Training
7d
5d
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and

Maintenance Training (Hybrid)
5d
2d

Maintenance Training (Packet)
5d

(Hybrid+Packet)
7d
Principle

Training
Principle
2d
4d
Elective Guide

698
26.14 RTN Training Path(RTN 900 V100R001& V100R002)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve

Basic Training
2d

Training(Packet)
3d

Training(Hybrid)
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic

Training
2d
2d
5d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation

and Maintenance Training(Including
10d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002

Training
3d

Advanced Training
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced

5d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic

Training
2d

Training
5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide
699
26.15 RTN Training Path(RTN 300&RTN 600)
Plan & Design
Implement & Operate
Improve


Basic Training
2d
4d

2d

3d
OptiX RTN 600 Installation &

5d

2d

Maintenance Training(Including the
Basic O/M Training)
5d
Principle
Principle
Training
2d
4d
Elective Guide
700
26.16 Transmission Network OSS Training Path
iManager U2000 LCT

Operation Training
ONU01
ONU12
0.5d
U2000 Alarm and

U2100 System Operation and

Maintenance
OTD08
5d
1d
iManager U2000 Access Network
iManager U2100 Operation and
Monitoring Training
0.5d
ONU02
Transmission Network Device

Introduction
ONU07
1d
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training

(Transmission Network only)
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic

Operation
1d
OTD01
OptiX iManager Security &

Database Management
1d
OTD02
Transmission Network Device

Introduction
OptiX iManager T2000 Routine

Maintenance & Troubleshooting
1d
OTD03
1d
ONU07
OptiX iManager T2000
OptiX iManager T2000
Monitoring Training
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby

System Operation & Maintenance
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta

OTD07
4d
OTD06
2d
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7
Standby Training
Delta Training
701
26.17 Planning and Design Training Path
OptiX SDH Network Design

Basic Training
2d
Training
Design Training
3d
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON

(SDH) Network Planning and
Design Training
4d
OptiX MSTP Planning & Design Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM

Network Design Basic
Training
2d
OptiX NG WDM Network
Design Training
Training
3d
3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON

(WDM) Network Planning and
Design Training
4d
OptiX BWS 1600S

(unrepeatered) Planning and
Design Training
3d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A

4d
OptiX WDM Planning & Design Training
702
OptiX RTN Network

Planning Basic Training
2d
OptiX RTN 900 Network

Planning Training (Packet)

Planning Training (Hybrid)
3d
3d

Planning Advanced Training
2d
OptiX RTN Planning & Design Training
703

Planning Training
(Hybrid+Packet)
4d
26.18 Assessment and Optimization Training Path
OptiX SDH Network

Assessment Training
OptiX SDH Network

3d
3d
OptiX SDH Network

Expansion and
Reconstruction Training
OptiX MSTP Optimization and Reconstruction Training
OptiX WDM Network

Assessment Training
OptiX WDM Network

2d
OptiX WDM Network

Expansion Training
1d
OptiX WDM Network

Reconstruction Training
2d
3d
OptiX WDM Optimization and Reconstruction Training
704
3d
27 Transmission Network Training Courses

Transmission Network For this project, the whole training solution is designed into the following programs.
List of Training Program(s) for Transmission Network Project
Level
Duration
(working
days)
Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission

Technologies and Device Training
15
6 ~ 16
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP

Transmission Network Training
10
6 ~ 16
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN

Transmission Network Training
10
6 ~ 16
SDH Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
WDM Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
Ethernet Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
ASON Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Product

Overview Training
0.5
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Installation

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Basic Operation and

6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation

Training
10
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Operation and
10
6 ~ 12
Training Programs
Training
Location
Class
Size
Transmission Engineer Certification
Principle

IP-oriented Transport Solution Training
MSTP
705
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Advanced Operation
13
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Basic Operation and

6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training
10
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Operation and

12
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and

6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation

Training
15
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Operation and

18
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM) Operation and

6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
0.5
6 ~ 12
WDM
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training
706
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Basic Operation and

6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) NMC Operation Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Operation and Maintenance

Training
13
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Advanced Operation and

13
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation

10
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System

6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training
10
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training
10
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training

(Hybrid)
6 ~ 12

(Packet)
6 ~ 12

(Hybrid+Packet)
6 ~ 12
RTN
707
OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid)
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Packet)
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training

(Hybrid+Packet)
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 300 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced Operation and

6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation and Maintenance

Training(Including the Basic O/M Training)
10
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 600 Installation & Commissioning Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 600 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including

6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network

only)
6 ~ 16
iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training
6 ~ 16
iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training
6 ~ 16
OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training
2~6
Transmission Network OSS
708
6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX MSTP Network Design Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Network Design Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid)
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid)
6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) Planning and Design

Training
6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training
4~8
OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training
4~8
OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training
4~8
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training
4~8
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training

Planning and Design
Assessment and Optimization
Level Description::Basic Course : Intermediate Course :Advanced Course : Expert Course
709
27.1
Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs
27.1.1 Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device

Training
Training Path
Describe the basic concept of MPLS

Describe the basic concept of PWE3
Transmission Technologies and Device
Describe the common SDH network topologies

and their features
OTH01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 15d
Explain the protection mechanism of

MSP/SNCP
Target Audience
Explain the system structure and features of

the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
Personnel who are going to take HCNA
State the main functions of the boards in the
HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device)

exam
Accomplish the SDH network configuration and

monitoring through NMS
Personnel who expect to learn about basic optical

transmission principles and Huawei SDH
Accomplish the PDH service configuration
equipment operation
through NMS
Prerequisites
Accomplish the Ethernet service

(EPL/EVPL/EPLAN) configuration through
Having a general knowledge of
NMS
telecommunications
List the common analysis methods of fault
Objectives
locating
Duration

be able to:
15 working days
Describe SDH working principle
Class Size
Describe WDM working principle
Min 6, Max 16
Describe OTN working principle

Describe Ethernet working principle
710
27.1.2 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission

Network Training
Training Path
commissioning
Describe the complex Networking of SDH
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission

Network
OTH02
Replacing the SDH Board

Analyze the discrete services on the NMS
10d
Tests for common Ethernet services indicators

Describe the principle of the clock protection
Target Audience
Describes the notes to do the SDH equipment
Personnel who are going to take HCNP
interconnection
HTMN(MSTP)(Huawei Certified Network
Complete the ECC maintenance
Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Describes the methods for handling typical
Network) exam
faults and alarms to troubleshoot networks in
Personnel who expect to learn SDH network
practice
commissioning, maintenance and troubleshooting
Describes the mechanism of pointer
Prerequisites
justification
Describes the functions of ASON
Pass HCNA HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
Duration

exam or having equivalent knowledge
10 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 16
be able to:
Describe the procedure of the SDH equipment
711
27.1.3 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission

Network Training
Training Path
Describe the network topologies and signal

flow
Building Carrier OTN Transmission

Network
OTH03
Implement the data configuration through

iManager U2000
10d
Implement the single station and system

commissioning step by step through
Target Audience
iManager U2000
List the common indices of WDM product and
Personnel who are going to take HCNP
perform the testing
HTON(OTN)(Huawei Certified Network

Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Describe the WDM protection principle
Network) exam
Describe the notice of traffic interconnection
Personnel who expect to learn WDM network
Describe the principle of ALC/IPA/APE
configuration, commissioning, maintenance and
Illustrate the application of common
troubleshooting
troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,

testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
Prerequisites
replacement, etc
Pass HCNA HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
from troubleshooting practice
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Duration
Objectives
10 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Describe the function and features of WDM
Min 6, Max 16
cabinet, sub-rack and boards
712
27.2
Principle Training Programs
27.2.1 SDH Fundamental Training

Training Path
signal to SDH signal

Outline the function of section and path
SDH Principle
OTA01
overhead
Lecture
Explain the working mechanism of the pointer
1d

and their features
Explain the protection mechanism of linear
SDH Networking and Protection

OTA02
Lecture
MSP
Explain the protection mechanism of MS
1d
shared protection ring

Target Audience
Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in

ring/mesh topology
SDH series equipment operation and maintenance
Analyze the service signal flow before/after the
engineer
protection switch takes place
Prerequisites
Duration
NA
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe the structure of the SDH frame
Illustrate the multiplexing procedure of PDH
713
27.2.2 WDM Fundamental Training

Training Path
Objectives
WDM Basics
OTC01
be able to:
Lecture
1d
Describe the function module and network

structure of WDM system
Target Audience
Outline the characteristics of various fibers

Explain the functions and characteristics of
WDM network operation and maintenance
various optical components
engineer
Explain the key technologies of WDM system,
Prerequisites
for example optical source, optical amplifiers,
Having working experience in the planning and
etc
design of WDM networks
Describe the characteristics of optical interface
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM
in WDM system
Network Design Basic Training and OptiX NG
Duration
WDM Network Design Training or having
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
714
27.2.3 Ethernet Fundamental Training

Training Path
Illustrate the Ethernet frame structure

Describe the function of VLAN and L2
Ethernet Basics
OTA03
switching
Lecture
Outline the classification of Ethernet service
2d
Explain the function and applications of

different types Ethernet service
Target Audience
Outline the basic concepts of data traffic
Personnel who requires a general knowledge of
List basic concepts of network and internet
Ethernet over SDH technology
Describe the applications of familiar protocol
Prerequisites
and standard
Having a general knowledge of data
Illustrate basic structure of IP network
telecommunications
Tell the basic knowledge of IP address
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
Min 6, Max 12
Explain the technical background of the

Ethernet and its basic concepts
715
27.2.4 ASON Fundamental Training

Training Path
Objectives
ASON Basics
OTA07
be able to:
Lecture
1d
Outline the standards of ASON

Illustrate the structure of ASON
Target Audience
Describe the networking characters of ASON

Explain the service characters of ASON
Technical manager, ASON operation and

maintenance engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Having a general knowledge of SDH and data
Class Size
telecommunications basics
Min 6, Max 12
716
27.2.5 Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training

Training Path
Describe the classification of IP addresses

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction

OTA45
Lecture
Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP

Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX
1d
Hybrid MSTP
Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
Hybrid MSTP Network Application

OTA46
Lecture
for Ethernet
1d

for TDM E1
Target Audience
Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product

networking
Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance engineer
Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
Hybrid MSTP novice
MSTP product
OptiX OSN 500/550 operation and maintenance
Classify the service types of Ethernet
engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
Having a general knowledge of SDH and Ethernet
2 working days
communications basics
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
717
27.3
Evolution and Trends Training Programs
27.3.1 IP-oriented Transport Solution Training

Training Path
Objectives
Hybrid MSTP Network Overview

OTA08
Lecture
be able to:
Describe the background of OptiX Hybrid
0.5d
MSTP
Explain the service characters of OptiX Hybrid
MSTP
All IP Transport Network Solution
Describe the networking characters of OptiX

OTA19
Lecture
0.5d
Hybrid MSTP
Outline the difference of OptiX Hybrid MSTP
network from other network technology
Metro OTN Solution

OTC09
Lecture
List the trend of Metro transmission network

Illustrate the features of OTN
0.5d
Describe the application of Huawei OTN

products
List the equipment types of OptiX RTN
OptiX RTN Microwave Network Overview
Outline main functions of OptiX RTN equipment

OTF48
Lecture
0.5d
Describe typical networking and protection of

OptiX RTN equipment
Target Audience
Know the typical solutions of OptiX RTN
Technical manager
equipment
Outline the technologies of the transmission
network for All-IP service
Personnel who requires a general understanding

of Huawei OptiX RTN equipment and solution
Describe the solutions for All-IP network
Prerequisites
Compare the All-IP transport solutions and

figure out the difference
Having the basic knowledge about
Duration
telecommunications network, especially

transmission network
2 working days
Having the experience for telecommunications
Class Size
equipment
Min 6, Max 12
718
27.4
MSTP Training Programs
27.4.1 OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Product Overview Training

Training Path
List the function of transmission network
Describe the network application of the OptiX

NG SDH & OCS system
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Product Overview

OTA27
Lecture
0.5d
Describe the structure of the OptiX NG SDH &

OCS equipment
Target Audience
List the main cards of the OptiX NG SDH &

OCS equipment
Non-technical manager
OptiX NG SDH & OCS products novice
& OCS equipment
Prerequisites
Understand the features of the OptiX NG SDH
Duration
NA
0.5 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
719
27.4.2 OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Installation Training

Training Path
OCS equipment
OCS equipment
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Installation

OTA26
Lecture, Multi-media
Outline the main boards of the OptiX NG SDH &
2d
Target Audience
List the equipment installation procedure
Describe the preparation for installation
State the required equipment room environment

and grounding condition checks
OptiX NG SDH & OCS installation engineer
Prerequisites
installations
Duration
NA
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Verify the cabinet, cables and component
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the features of the OptiX NG SDH &
720
27.4.3 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training

Training Path
Outline the system protection modes of the

OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware

Description (TDM)
OTA29
Lecture
State the main functions of the cards in the

1.5d

and their features

OTA02
Explain the protection mechanism of linear MSP
Explain the protection mechanism of MS shared

protection ring
1d
Lecture

ring/mesh topology

ONU01
Lecture

0.5d

U2000
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Commissioning

OTA32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
Describe the main functions of U2000
Describe the preparation for the commissioning
List the items for single station commissioning

for OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH & OCS commissioning engineer
commissioning for OptiX NG SDH & OCS
Prerequisites
Having working experience in transport network
Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics course
system
Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH & OCS system

commissioning
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Describe the network applications of the OptiX
Min 6, Max 12
NG SDH & OCS equipment
Summarize the equipment/network condition

after commissioning
or having equivalent knowledge
Outline the procedures of network
Explain the system structure and features of the

721
27.4.4 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
the OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
OptiX NG SDH & OCS System Description
OTA28
Lecture
Outline the system protection schemes of the
1d
Outline the operation environment of OptiX

SDH series equipment
List the status description of OptiX SDH series

equipment indicators
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and

Maintenance
OTA30
List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series

equipment

OptiX SDH series equipment
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance

OTA35
Complete the maintenance records of OptiX

Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX

iManager U2000 LCT
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment field maintenance
Create topology including create NE/Link/NM
Perform the NE configuration, board

configuration, service dispatching and
engineer
protection configuration for equipment via OptiX
Prerequisites
iManager U2000 LCT
Having a general knowledge of SDH basics
LCT
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Illustrate the networking applications of the

Min 6, Max 12
Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
Describe the system structure and features of
722
27.4.5 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training
Training Path
Prerequisites

Description (TDM)
OTA29
Lecture

1.5d
Objectives
OTA02
Lecture
be able to:
1d


OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation

ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d


Management
ONU02
Lecture

and their features
0.5d

protection ring
U2000 Security & Database Management

ONU04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ring/mesh topology
0.5d

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Products

Configuration
OTA31
Hands-on exercise

U2000
2d
Describe the main functions of U2000 Describe

the basic concepts in alarm and performance
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and

Maintenance
management of U2000
alarm
Lecture

common alarm events
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side

Maintenance
OTA40

performance events
0.5d
Target Audience
Explain the concept of security management
Complete the operation of NE and NMS security

management
OptiX NG SDH & OCS network operation center
engineer
723
Explain the concept of data management
Complete the operation of NE and NMS data
management
performance testing
Accomplish the network protection and SDH
Explain the concepts of common testing indices
service configuration through NMS
Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
Explain the functions and applications of
performance testing
different types Ethernet service
Implement the Ethernet performance testing

and analyze the result
List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH
Know the operation environment of NMS
& OCS equipment
List the maintenance tasks
Describe the functions and applications of the
Perform the basic maintenance operations
Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH & OCS
Complete the maintenance records
equipment
Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS
List the common indices of Ethernet service
State the purpose of Ethernet performance
Min 6, Max 12
testing
724
27.4.6 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting
Description (TDM)
OTA29
OTA14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Lecture
1.5d
1d
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH & OCS operation and maintenance

OTA02
engineer
Prerequisites
1d
Lecture
Having working experience in the maintenance

of SDH products

Configuration
OTA31
2d
Hands-on exercise

Objectives

be able to:
ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d


Maintenance

0.5d


Maintenance
2.5d

protection ring
0.5d

OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side

Maintenance
OTA40

ring/mesh topology
Lecture

and their features
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance


0.5d

U2000
725
iManager T2000 LCT

equipment


iManager T2000 LCT

Perform the routine maintenance via T2000

LCT
Explain the function and applications of different
types Ethernet service
& OCS equipment
locating
Describe the functions and application of the
Outline the fault handling flow
Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
equipment
error bit, etc
replacement, etc
testing

Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from

troubleshooting practice
performance testing
Analyze common faulty of the network consist

of OptiX NG SDH & OCS series
performance testing
Min 6, Max 12
726
27.4.7 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Advanced Operation and
Training Path


Description (TDM)
OTA29
Lecture

1.5d

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Features and

Application
OTA34
Describe the principle and process of TPS on

OptiX NG SDH equipment
List the main characteristics of TPS on OptiX

NG SDH equipment
Implement the configuration of TPS on OptiX

NG SDH equipment
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation

& Maintenance
Describe the feature of power source system in

OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
Grasp the protection principle and function of all

types of power sources in OptiX NG SDH &
OCS equipments
OptiX SDH Special Topics

OTA36
Grasp the principle of cross-connection & clock

active/standby switching in OptiX NG SDH &
OCS system
clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG
OptiX SDH System Advanced

Troubleshooting
Grasp the mechanism of cross-connection &

SDH & OCS system
2.5d
Describe the principle of SCC active/standby

switching in OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
SDH & OCS system
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH & OCS senior operation and
Prerequisites
Analyze the protection capability about the

complicated networks
Completion of OptiX NG SDH & OCS
Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance
Accomplish the service configuration of the

complicated network and verify the protection
Training or OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment
(TDM) NMC Operation Training
Describe the working mechanism of the L2

switching
Objectives
be able to:
Describe the traffic flow and service

configuration about the complicated networks
List the methods of SCC switching in OptiX NG

727
Interpret the basic of QoS
Outline the key technology in QoS
Describe the typical QoS application
Describe the frame structure of MPLS
Interpret the basic of QinQ
List the application of MPLS and QinQ
Describe the working mechanism of virtual
Accomplish the clock protection configuration

and verify it while the network fails
concatenation
Grasp the working principle of ECC
Describe the function of LCAS
Describe the network application of ECC and
Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the
how to separate huge ECC network into smaller
Ethernet signal
networks
Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods
Illustrate the extended applications of ECC
Analyze the common faults locating
Accomplish the configuration of ECC, verify
Outline the procedures of Ethernet
extended ECC and DCC transparent
troubleshooting
transmission
Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service
Outline common ECC command lines
Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service
Get further understand of the feature of OptiX
Compare the function of Ethernet port and
NG SDH & OCS system
service OAM
figure out the problem
Outline the typical application scenario of
Ethernet service OAM
Accomplish the OAM testing
Locate the fault position when error reports
Explain the meaning of clock protection related
Locate the faulty of the failed network and

summarize the key point of troubleshooting
Duration
13 working days
synchronization parameters
Analyze common cases in the real network and
Class Size
Explain the basic principles of implementing

Min 6, Max 12
clock protection networking
728
27.4.8 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training

Training Path
1500/3500/7500/7500II
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description

OTA48
Lecture
Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
1d

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

networking

OTA46
Lecture

MSTP product
1d
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning
Check the equipment condition such as power

connections, fiber connections, mounted boards,
OTA52
etc
Outline and perform the commissioning process

for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment
Perform the commissioning process of the

network
ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
1d
Describe methods of operation including circuit

provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
fault finding
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer
Perform commissioning tests on the equipment
Perform commissioning tests on the network
Prerequisites
U2000
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Describe the networking applications of the
Min 6, Max 12
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Describe the system structure of the OptiX OSN
729
27.4.9 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

OTA48
Lecture
1d



Maintenance

equipment
0.5d

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance


0.5d
Outline the function of basic menus of iManager

U2000 LCT
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance engineer
Create topology including create NE/Link

configuration, and service dispatching and
Prerequisites
protection configuration for equipment via
iManager U2000 LCT
Objectives
LCT
Duration

be able to:
2 working days
Class Size
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Min 6, Max 12

1500/3500/7500/7500II
730
27.4.10 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training

Training Path
Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics and

OTA45 Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction
courses or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives
OTA45
Lecture
1d
be able to:

OTA48
Lecture
1d

Hybrid MSTP


for Ethernet
for TDM E1
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products

Configuration
OTA49
Hands-on exercise

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
3d

1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application

1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side


U2000
Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
Configure the protection of TDM plane & packet

transport plane for the network and equipment
OTA46
Lecture
1d
Configure the common services for the TDM

plane
the packet transport plane
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP network operation center engineer
Prerequisites
Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service in
Outline the QoS model
Describe QoS basic concepts
Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid

MSTP network
731
equipment
Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system

according to the service demand
service OAM
networking
Describe the working mechanism and
application scene of MPLS OAM
Perform the basic maintenance operations for

Hybrid MSTP equipment

MSTP product
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM
Duration
application scene of PW OAM
Describe the operation environment of NMS
List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
732
27.4.11 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
OTA45
Lecture
OTA46
Lecture
1d
1d
Target Audience

OTA48
Lecture
Prerequisites
1d
Objectives
be able to:

Configuration
OTA49
Hands-on exercise
3d

Hybrid MSTP

for Ethernet

for TDM E1

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II


1500/3500/7500/7500II

1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d

U2000
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System

Troubleshooting


plane
733
iManager U2000 LCT
LCT
MSTP network
service OAM
Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,

APS switching failed, OAM errors, etc
Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP

network

troubleshooting methods for packet network

List the common analysis methods of packet

network fault locating

networking

MSTP product
Duration
equipment
12 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
U2000 LCT
734
27.4.12 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training

Training Path

MSTP product

OTA46
Lecture
1d

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

Description (TDM)
OTA29
Lecture

1500/3500/7500/7500II
1.5d

1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Commissioning
Check the equipment condition such as power

connections, fiber connections, mounted boards,
etc
for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment

OTA48
Lecture
Outline and perform the commissioning process
1d
Perform the commissioning process of the

network
Describe methods of operation including circuit

provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning
fault finding
Perform commissioning tests on the equipment
Perform commissioning tests on the network

ONU01
Lecture
0.5d


Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer

Prerequisites
Describe the preparation for the commissioning
List the items for single station commissioning

for OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
Outline the procedures of network

commissioning for OptiX NG SDH & OCS
Objectives
system
be able to:
Summarize the equipment/network condition

after commissioning
networking
735
Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
Duration
commissioning
8 working days
U2000
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
736
27.4.13 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA28
Lecture
1d



OTA48
Lecture

equipment
1d


Maintenance


U2000 LCT

OTA53


iManager U2000 LCT
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance engineer
LCT
Prerequisites

be able to:
Duration
3 working days
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Class Size

1500/3500/7500/7500II


Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
737
27.4.14 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training

Training Path
Maintenance
OTA45
Lecture

1d
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP network operation center engineer

ONU01
Lecture
Prerequisites
0.5d
Objectives
Configuration
OTA49
Hands-on exercise

3d
be able to:
2d
Hybrid MSTP

for Ethernet
OTA46
Lecture
1d

for TDM E1
U2000


Description (TDM)
OTA29
Lecture

1.5d


Configuration
Hands-on exercise

plane
OTA31
2d

MSTP network
738
MSTP product

service OAM

& OCS equipment
equipment
equipment

testing

performance testing
performance testing


Duration
15 working days
Class Size

networking
Min 6, Max 12
739
27.4.15 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Maintenance
OTA45
Lecture

1d

Configuration
OTA49
Hands-on exercise

3d
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Objectives

be able to:

OTA46
Lecture
1d

Hybrid MSTP
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System

Troubleshooting

for Ethernet

for TDM E1

Description (TDM)
OTA29
Lecture

1.5d

plane

Configuration
OTA31
Hands-on exercise

2d

MSTP network
740

service OAM


& OCS equipment
equipment
testing
equipment

performance testing

performance testing
networking


MSTP product

locating

error bit, etc
replacement, etc
Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP
network
Duration
18 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12


741
27.4.16 OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
on the OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM)
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation &

Maintenance
OTA38

OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM)

OSN 500/550 series equipment
Target Audience
List the status description of OptiX OSN

500/550 equipment indicators
engineer
500/550 equipment
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 500/550 equipment
Having experience in the operation and
maintenance of optical network equipment
List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN

OSN 500/550 equipment
Objectives
Configure protection attributes in OSN 500/550

network, such as SNCP, LMP, RMP etc
be able to:
Duration
Appreciate the networking applications of the
5 working days
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM)
Class Size

the OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM)
Configure services of OSN 500/550
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the main functions of the boards used
742
27.4.17 OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
on the OptiX OSN 500/550(Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation &

Maintenance

OptiX OSN 500/550(Packet)

OSN 500/550 series Equipment
Target Audience

500/550 Equipment indicators
engineer
500/550 Equipment
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 500/550 Equipment

OSN 500/550 Equipment
Objectives
Configure MPLS APS protection attributes in

OSN 500/550 network
be able to:
Duration
5 working days
OptiX OSN 500/550(Packet)
Class Size

the OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet)
Configure packet services on OSN 500/550
Min 6, Max 12
743
27.4.18 OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

OptiX OSN 500/550(TDM+ Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM+Packet)

Operation & Maintenance
OTA56
OSN 500/550 series equipment

8d
Prerequisites
Configure MPLS APS protection, SNCP, LMP,

RMP etc attributes in OSN 500/550 network
Configure services of OSN 500/550(TDM+

Packet)
be able to:
Duration
8 working days
OptiX OSN 500/550(TDM+ Packet)
Class Size

the OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM+ Packet)

OSN 500/550 equipment
Objectives

OptiX OSN 500/550 equipment

500/550 equipment
engineer

500/550 equipment indicators
Target Audience
Min 6, Max 12

on the OptiX OSN 500/550(TDM+ Packet)
744
27.4.19 OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation

& Maintenance
4d
Describe the frame structure of MPLS
Interpret the basic of QinQ
List the application of MPLS and QinQ
Describe the working mechanism of virtual

concatenation
Target Audience
Describe the function of LCAS
Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the
Ethernet over SDH equipment senior operation and
Ethernet signal
Prerequisites
Be familiar with NMS
Be familiar with OptiX SDH service
Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods
Analyze the common faults locating
Outline the procedures of Ethernet

troubleshooting
configuration and maintenance
Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service
Be familiar with the Ethernet service
Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service
configuration and maintenance

service OAM
Upon completion of OTA03 Ethernet Basics
course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives
be able to:
switching
Interpret the basic of QoS
Describe the typical QoS application
Duration
Describe the working mechanism of the L2
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
745
27.4.20 OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
ASON Basics
Implement the creation of ASON network
Create SLA services and test the protection and

restoration of them
Lecture
OTA07
1d
Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON

network
ASON Operation and Maintenance

OTA12
Target Audience
ASON operation and maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
Be familiar with NMS
Be familiar with SDH service configuration and
Explain the operation precaution of ASON
Explain the fault reported by the ASON network
Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting
Solve the typical ASON trouble
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
maintenance
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
746
27.4.21 OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
List the main functions of T2000V2R7

OptiX OSN 2000 Operation & Maintenance
OTA39
Target Audience
engineer

Prerequisites


equipment
OptiX OSN 2000 operation and maintenance

Objectives

be able to:
OptiX OSN 2000
the OptiX OSN 2000

on the OptiX OSN 2000
locating

OptiX OSN 2000
Describe the common SDH network topology

Explain the protection mechanism
Configure the attributes of equipment via NMS
Configure protection attributes in OptiX OSN

2000 network, such as SNCP,LMP,RMP etc
Configure services of OptiX OSN 2000
Grasp T2000 V2R7 new function
Analyze case of service interruption
Analyze case of bit error
Analyze case of protection fault
Analyze case of wrong fiber type
Duration
8 working days
Class Size
T2000V2R7

error bit, etc
and features
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the directory structure of T2000V2R7
747
27.4.22 OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Describe the network application of OptiX Metro

500
OTA15
List the functions of OptiX Metro 500
Describe operation environment of OptiX Metro
OptiX Metro 500
Target Audience
100/500 equipment
OptiX Metro 100/500 operation and maintenance
engineer
Accomplish the basic maintenance operations

of OptiX Metro 100/500 equipment
List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro

100/500 equipment
Prerequisites
Outline the hardware structure and features of
OptiX Metro 100/500 Operation and

Maintenance
Describe the functions of basic menus of

Web-LCT
Objectives

configuration, service dispatching and clock &
orderwire configuration for equipment via
be able to:
Web-LCT
Metro 100
Duration
1 working day
OptiX Metro 100
Class Size

OptiX Metro 100
Perform the routine maintenance via Web-LCT
Min 6, Max 12

OptiX Metro 100
748
27.4.23 OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training

Training Path

OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning

OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
OTA17
commissioning of OptiX Metro 1000 equipment
Target Audience
OptiX Metro 1000 commissioning engineer
transport network

iManager T2000 LCT
Objectives
be able to:
Duration
4 working days
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300

LCT

iManager T2000 LCT
Having working experience in the optical
Interconnect all the equipment and perform

system commissioning
Prerequisites
Complete hardware and software
Class Size

OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Min 6, Max 12
749
27.4.24 OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
1000 equipment
OptiX Metro 1000 First Line Maintenance
Prerequisites

iManager T2000 LCT

be able to:
Duration
1 working day
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Class Size

OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300

LCT

155/622H(Metro 1000) V300

iManager T2000 LCT
Objectives

of OptiX Metro 1000 equipment
OptiX Metro 1000 field maintenance engineer
List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro 1000

equipment
Target Audience
Min 6, Max 12
750
27.4.25 OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
1000 Equipment
Equipment
OptiX Metro 1000 Second Line

Maintenance

of OptiX Metro 1000 Equipment
Target Audience
OptiX Metro 1000 operation and maintenance
T2000V2R7
engineer
Prerequisites
List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro 1000
Accomplish the network creation and SDH

service configuration of OptiX 155/622(H)(Metro
Objectives
1000) equipment
be able to:
locating
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
error bit, etc
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Duration

4 working days
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Class Size

OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Min 6, Max 12
751
27.5
WDM Training Programs
27.5.1 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training

Training Path
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical

transport network
OptiX NG WDM System Description
Describe the functions and features of OptiX

OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
OTC24
Lecture
0.5d
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems, which
Target Audience
include OTU, MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC/ESC,
OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance
XCS etc
engineer
Prerequisites
Describe the protection and features of OptiX

Duration
Having basic knowledge of telecommunications
Objectives
0.5 working day

Class Size

be able to:
Illustrate the functions of different units in OptiX
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the position of OptiX OSN
752
27.5.2 OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training

Training Path
different units in OptiX WDM products
OptiX WDM Installation
Describe the hardware installation procedure
Describe cable routing and related installation

specifications for the equipment
OTC04
2d
during the installation
Target Audience
WDM network installation engineer

Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Perform the hardware installation inspection

according to the checklist
Prerequisites
Outline the safety precautions to be taken
Outline the functions and features of the
753
27.5.3 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training

Training Path
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Hardware Description & Application
OTC25
Lecture
2d
Describe the advantages of OTN
Describe the OTN frame structure and list the

different components function
Describe the main features of the optical layer

grooming and electrical layer grooming
Describe OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

system signal flow and fiber connection, which
include OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in

different network elements
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Products Configuration
OTC26 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3.5d
Describe the functions, architecture and the

menus of iManager U2000
Implement iManager U2000 basic operations,

OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) data
configuration and system management
OptiX NG WDM Commissioning
products through iManager U2000
Target Audience
Prerequisites
boards, etc
equipment
be able to:
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
Outline the system protection modes of OptiX
List the common network topologies and
Perform indices testing during the

commissioning process
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
Eliminate the fault occurring during the

Describe the network applications of OptiX OSN

3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX

OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
network elements of OptiX OSN
Perform the commissioning of supervisory

channel
Perform the single station commissioning of

OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment

Describe the main functions of the boards
Outline and perform the commissioning

procedure for OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Check the equipment running condition such as

power connections, fiber connections, mounted
Objectives

validity
transport network
Configure the typical protection for the

equipment
OptiX NG WDM commissioning engineer
Configure OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Duration
9 working days
U2000
754
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
755
27.5.4 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

OSN 3800/6800//8800(OTN) systems
OptiX NG WDM System Description
Describe the status of OptiX OSN

3800/6800/8800(OTN) products alarm
OTC24
Lecture
0.5d
indicators
Describe the running environment of OptiX

OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
OptiX NG WDM(OTN) Field Maintenance
List the routine maintenance items of OptiX


OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products,
Target Audience
such as board replacement, fiber connection,

OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance
optical power adjusting, etc
engineer
Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of WDM basics

Outline the common menus of OptiX iManager

U2000/Web LCT
Objectives

configuration, and protection configuration of
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products via
be able to:
iManager U2000/Web LCT
Describe the position of OptiX OSN
Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical
3800/6800/8800(OTN) products via iManager
transport network
U2000/Web LCT
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems, which

include OTU, MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC/ESC,
Min 6, Max 12
XCS etc
756
27.5.5 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) NMC Operation Training

Training Path

in WDM system
WDM Basics

OTC01
Lecture
1d

OTN Basics
OTC05
Lecture
1d
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
Lecture
Lecture

U2000
2d

ONU01

3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

OTC25
Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance

signals and function for different layers
0.5d
Outline alarm and performance events

generation mechanism
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

locate the failures in OTN
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM network operation center engineer




be able to:

Objectives

Prerequisites
Analyze the alarm and performance events and

etc

equipment
757
Class Size

validity
Min 6, Max 12
Duration
8 working days
758
27.5.6 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
WDM Basics
OTC01
be able to:
Lecture
1d

OTN Basics

OTC05
Lecture
1d

etc
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

OTC25
Lecture

in WDM system
2d



3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)


3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems

U2000
OptiX NG WDM Commissioning


NG WDM (OTN) System Troubleshooting

OTC30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d

Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance

engineer
Prerequisites

of WDM products


759
channel


Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN

3800/6800/8800(OTN) troubleshooting
Describe the fault handling flow
validity
Analyze and eliminate the common faults of
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
boards, etc
Explain the troubleshooting ideas and methods

for OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
equipment




OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
Improve the ability of eliminating faults through

case analysis and practice
Duration
procedure for OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

13 working days
equipment
Class Size

OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
Min 6, Max 12
760
27.5.7 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path
Describe the characteristics of various

protection types and their application scenarios
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)

Protection
Understand the operations related to the OSN

3800/6800/8800 product protection
Fulfilled the service configuration and verify the

characteristics of various protection types
OptiX NG WDM Ethernet Operation &

Maintenance
Perform the routine maintenance in various

protection types
Illustrate the protection mechanism of OptiX NG

WDM Ethernet protection: VLAN SNCP, BPS,
DBPS and DLAG
OptiX NG WDM Ethernet Protection

Configuration
Outline the difference between BPS and DBPS
Describe the scenario of VLAN SNCP, BPS,
DBPS and DLAG
Outline the application scenarios of OptiX NG

WDM Ethernet protection
OptiX NG WDM Features Special Topics
Complete the OptiX NG WDM Ethernet

protection configuration through T2000
Preventive maintenance of OptiX OSN

3800/6800/8800 system
OTN 1588V2 Feature Introduction
Locate and eliminate the trouble based on

maintenance rules
OTC37
Lecture
0.5d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)

Advanced Troubleshooting
Illustrate troubleshooting common operation
List the troubleshooting methods
Briefly introduce the general workflow in OptiX

OSN 3800/6800/8800 equipment
troubleshooting
Enhance the troubleshooting analyze and

reaction ability through case discussion and
Target Audience
practice
OptiX NG WDM senior operation and maintenance
modes of the IPA
engineer
Prerequisites
Describe the principles and implementation
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
Implement the configuration of the IPA
Describe the principle and implementation

mode of the APE
(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation

Training
Objectives
Perform the configuration method of the APE
Implement the locating and handling methods

for typical APE troubles
Describe the working principle of ALC
be able to:
Outline the related boards of ALC function
761
Grasp the configuration of ALC
Explain the IP over WDM principle
Describe the Ethernet service and protection of
1588V2 in OTN network

Duration
NG WDM equipment
13 working days
Configure the Ethernet service and protection
Class Size
through iManager U2000
Describe the principle and the application of
Min 6, Max 12
Implement the routine maintenance and

troubleshooting of NG WDM Ethernet service
762
27.5.8 OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
and QinQ
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Technology

Introduction
OTC85
Lecture
1d
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware,

Networking & Application Introduction
OTC86
Lecture
Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN
0.5d
Describe the OSN 8800 hardware
List the OSN 8800 packet boards
Describe the networking application of OSN

8800 (Packet)
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Service

Configuration
Illustrate the service and protection type of OSN

8800 (Packet)
Implement the data configuration through

iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet service
and protection
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Features
Describe the function and features of QoS in

OSN 8800 (Packet)
Implement the QoS configuration through

iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Routine

Maintenance
Describe the function and features of OAM in

OSN 8800 (Packet)
Implement the OAM configuration through

iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) System

Troubleshooting
for OSN 8800 (Packet)
OptiX OSN 8800 (packet) network operation and
Prerequisites

Having working experience in WDM
Analyze common faulty of the OSN 8800

(Packet) network
transmission network

Target Audience
Implement the NMS side routine maintenance
Duration
Upon completion of OptiX OSN

3800/6800/8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance
7 working days
Training or having equivalent knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
763
Min 6, Max 12
764
27.5.9 OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
and their features
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Hardware

Description & Application
OTC48
Lecture

protection ring
1d

ring/mesh topology

ONU01
Lecture

0.5d
Configure OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) product
Configure the required

SDH/Synchronization/Overhead units
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Product

Configuration
Configure the typical protection for the network

and equipment
Configure the common services for the typical

SDH networks
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Field Maintenance
Analyze and maintain the configured

equipment/units/services
Describe the status of OptiX OSN 8800(OCS)

product indicators
Describe the operation environment of OptiX

OSN 8800(OCS) equipment

configuration, service provisioning and
protection configuration for equipment via NMS
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) operation and maintenance
Perform the routine maintenance via NMS

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment such as
engineer
board replacement, resetting etc
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment
Objectives
be able to:
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) system

error bit, etc
8800(OCS) system
locating
OSN 8800(OCS) system

U2000
Complete the routine maintenance records of


765
Duration

replacement, etc
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

766
27.5.10 OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
OptiX NG WDM ASON

Operation&Maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM ASON operation and maintenance
engineer
Fulfill the WDM ASON trail configuration
Complete the ASON routine maintenance items
Implement the troubleshooting for ASON

common faults
Prerequisites
Duration
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
3 working days
(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation
Class Size
Training
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
767
27.5.11 OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
1800
OTN Basics
OTC05

Lecture
boards, etc
0.5d
Describe OptiX OSN 1800 system signal flow

and fiber connection
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation&Maintenance
1800 data configuration and system

management
OptiX OSN 1800 operation and maintenance
Prerequisites
Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of

OptiX WDM network faults
Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX
WDM network
OptiX OSN 1800

Duration
5 working days
OSN 1800
Class Size

network elements of OptiX OSN 1800
Perform the common troubleshooting

operations of WDM network
Apply different troubleshooting methods

according to actual faults
be able to:


OSN 1800
Objectives

OptiX OSN 1800
of WDM products

validity
engineer

equipment
Target Audience
Implement NMS basic operations, OptiX OSN
Min 6, Max 12
768
27.5.12 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Commissioning Training

Training Path
network elements of OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A

systems
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Hardware

OTC54
Lecture

3800A/6800A systems
1d

boards, etc
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Equipment

Commissioning

procedure for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
equipment
Target Audience

OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A equipment
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Commissioning engineer
Prerequisites

channel

OSN 3800A/6800A equipment
Objectives

be able to:

Duration
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A systems
2 working days
Class Size
OSN 3800A/6800A systems
Min 6, Max 12
769
27.5.13 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
systems
3800A/6800A systems

OTC54
Lecture
1d
Describe the status of OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A

products alarm indicators

OSN 3800A/6800A products
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Field

Maintenance


OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products, such as
Target Audience
board replacement, fiber connection, optical

OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A field maintenance
power adjusting, etc
engineer
Prerequisites

Outline the common menus of iManager U2000

Objectives
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products via

iManager U2000
be able to:
3800A/6800A products via iManager U2000
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN
Min 6, Max 12
770
27.5.14 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path


OTC54
Lecture

1d
Describe OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A system

signal flow and fiber connection, which include
OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Products

Configuration


OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A System

OptiX OSN3800A/6800A data configuration and

system management
Target Audience
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products

Duration
Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN

3800A/6800A troubleshooting
be able to:

for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products

validity
Objectives

equipment
Configure OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products

through iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A operation and
5 working days
Class Size
systems
Min 6, Max 12

3800A/6800A systems
771
27.5.15 OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and

Training Path
etc
Implement the equipment hardware

configuration
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and

Maintenance
Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS

1600S system
Implement data configuration, optical power

adjustment, protection configuration and
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)

network expansion through iManager U2000
List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S

equipment and perform the WDM products
testing
OptiX SLM 1630/RPT 1660 Operation and

Maintenance

troubleshooting methods, such as optical power
replacement, etc
Target Audience
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance
engineer
be able to:
mechanisms
sub-marine system
U2000
Describe the structure, functions and features of
Implement the clock, orderwire, protection

configurations and network expansion through
different boards
iManager U2000
Describe the network topologies, system
applications and network protection
Execute the on-site operation, such as board

replacement, board or equipment resetting and
mechanisms
State the service application and protection

mechanism
OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
Implement the service configuration, alarm and

performance monitoring through iManager
Describe the characteristics of optical interfaces

in WDM sub-marine system

Explain the functions, characteristics of optical

components and the key technologies of WDM
Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE

equipment
Explain the functions and specifications of

different boards
Objectives

OptiX NPE equipment
Prerequisites
fiber connection
Perform iManager U2000 operation and
maintenance, such as alarms and performance

browsing, parameters setting, database
browsing, parameters setting, etc
restoration/back-up, security/user management,

772

configuration
replacement, etc

Duration
10 working days
Class Size
mechanisms

different boards

OptiX SLM/RPT equipment
Implement data configuration through iManager

U2000
Min 6, Max 12
773
27.5.16 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and

Training Path
1600S system
Implement data configuration, optical power

adjustment, protection configuration and
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and

Maintenance
network expansion through iManager U2000
List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S

equipment and perform the WDM products
testing
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)

troubleshooting methods, such as optical power

replacement, etc
Target Audience
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance
Prerequisites
components and the key technologies of WDM
mechanisms
performance monitoring through iManager
in WDM sub-marine system
U2000
configurations and network expansion through
iManager U2000
Execute the on-site operation, such as board
mechanisms
replacement, board or equipment resetting and
fiber connection
browsing, parameters setting, database
restoration/back-up, security/user management,
etc
Implement the clock, orderwire, protection
different boards
State the service application and protection

mechanism
Implement the service configuration, alarm and
Describe the characteristics of optical interfaces
OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
Explain the functions, characteristics of optical

sub-marine system
Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE

equipment
be able to:
Explain the functions and specifications of

different boards

OptiX NPE equipment
Objectives

engineer
configuration
Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS
replacement, etc
774
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Duration
9 working days
775
27.5.17 OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training

Training Path
menus of OptiX iManager T2000/T2000-LCT
operations, WDM data configuration and
OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

& Application
OTC07
Lecture
Implement OptiX iManager T2000 basic

system management
1.5d
Configure OptiX WDM products through OptiX

iManager T2000/T2000-LCT
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic Operation

equipment
OTD01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d

validity

OptiX WDM Products Configuration
mounted boards, etc
Outline the commissioning process for OptiX

BWS 1600G equipment
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment
OptiX BWS 1600G commissioning engineer

BWS 1600G equipment
Prerequisites

transport network

channel
Target Audience

process
Objectives

T2000V2
Describe the directory structure of T2000V2
be able to:
List the main functions of T2000V2
Perform the basic operations of T2000, such as

start/stop T2000 server and client, backup
database, browsing alarms and performance,
browsing help, etc
BWS 1600G equipment
Duration
7 working days
network elements of OptiX BWS 1600G system
Class Size
Describe the network applications of OptiX

BWS 1600G system
Min 6, Max 12
776
27.5.18 OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

BWS 1600G system
OptiX BWS 1600G System Description
Describe the status of OptiX WDM products

alarm indicators
OTC06
Lecture
1d

WDM products
OptiX WDM Equipment Field Maintenance

WDM products

OptiX WDM products, such as board
replacement, fiber connection, optical power
Target Audience
adjusting, etc
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment field maintenance
engineer
WDM products
Prerequisites

T2000-LCT

Objectives
OptiX WDM products via OptiX iManager

T2000-LCT
be able to:
Describe the position of OptiX BWS 1600G
products via OptiX iManager T2000-LCT
system in an optical transport network
Duration
Describe the functions of OptiX BWS 1600G

2 working days
system
Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX WDM
Class Size

BWS 1600G system, which includes OTU,
Min 6, Max 12
MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC, etc
777
27.5.19 OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training

Training Path


& Application
OTC07
Lecture

BWS 1600G system
1.5d


system management
OTD01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d


equipment
validity
Target Audience
OptiX BWS 1600G network operation center

T2000V2
engineer
Prerequisites

Objectives

browsing help, etc
be able to:
Duration

5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
BWS 1600G equipment
778
27.5.20 OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path
WDM Basics

OTC01
Lecture
1d

etc

& Application
OTC07
Lecture

in WDM system
1.5d

BWS 1600G equipment


BWS 1600G system

OptiX WDM Equipment Field Maintenance

system management

OptiX WDM System Troubleshooting

OTC12
Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

equipment
2d

validity
Target Audience
alarm indicators
OptiX BWS 1600G operation and maintenance
engineer

OptiX WDM products, such as board
Objectives
replacement, fiber connection, optical power

adjusting, etc
be able to:

WDM products
of WDM products

WDM products
Prerequisites
Describe the status of OptiX WDM products

WDM products

779
T2000-LCT
OptiX WDM products via OptiX iManager
T2000-LCT
Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX WDM

OptiX WDM products
BWS 1600G equipment
Illustrate basic operation for OptiX WDM

troubleshooting
mounted boards, etc

for OptiX WDM products
products via OptiX iManager T2000-LCT

process

Duration
10 working days
Class Size
channel
Min 6, Max 12
BWS 1600G equipment
780
27.5.21 OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

BWS 1600G equipment
OTN Basics
OTC05
Lecture
1d


BWS 1600G system
OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware

OTC07
Lecture
1.5d
mounted boards, etc

BWS 1600G equipment

OTC10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

2d

channel
OptiX WDM Testing

BWS 1600G equipment

WDM Optical Power Management Topic


process
2d
Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power

calculation
which includes complied standards, system
OptiX WDM System Advanced

Troubleshooting
Outline OptiX WDM system testing overview,

reference points and test instruments
3d
Outline OptiX WDM system common testing

indices
Target Audience
include OTU/MUX/DEMUX/OA units testing
OptiX BWS 1600G senior operation and
Completion of OptiX BWS 1600G Second Line
Perform orderwire telephone testing, bit error

testing etc
Maintenance or NMC Operation Training
Objectives


be able to:
Implement the supervisory channel indices

testing
Prerequisites
Implement the main path indices testing, which

781
Illustrate the function of IPA
Describe ALC technology used in WDM system
Describe the functions and features of APE
WDM network
technology
Duration
Perform the common troubleshooting
10 working days
operations of WDM network
Class Size
Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of

OptiX WDM network defaults

Apply different troubleshooting methods

according to actual faults
Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX
Min 6, Max 12
782
27.6
RTN Training Programs
27.6.1 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid)

Training Path
Objectives
OptiX RTN 900 System Description

OTF47
Lecture
be able to:
Describe the relation among the different parts
0.5d
of OptiX RTN 900

Illustrate the installation procedures and steps
of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application
Implement the outdoor and indoor components

OTF32
Lecture
0.5d
installation of OptiX RTN 900

Describe the installation criterions for each part
of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
OptiX RTN 900 Installation

OTF18
900
1d
Describe the system structure, functions and

application of every unit
Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
OptiX RTN 900 Commissioning

OTF38
Hands-on exercise
microwave
1d
Describe the networking application under

PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
List out the protection technologies in OptiX
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid

Domain)
OTF46
Hands-on exercise
Describe the features and applications of the
2d
protection technologies
Finish proper preparations before the
Target Audience
commissioning
Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN
OptiX RTN 900 series installation and
900
commissioning engineer
Perform system commissioning of the OptiX
Prerequisites
RTN 900
Having basic experience of telecommunications
Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
equipment installation criterion
Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
Having working experience in the optical transport
Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN
network and microwave products
900
Duration
Having equivalent knowledge of digital microwave

5 working days
communication basics
783
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
784
27.6.2 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Packet)

Training Path
of OptiX RTN 900


OTF47
Lecture

0.5d

of OptiX RTN 900

OTF32
Lecture

900
0.5d


OTF18
microwave
1d

RTN 900 network

OTF38
Hands-on exercise
1d
commissioning
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Packet

Domain)
OTF29
Hands-on exercise

900
2d

RTN 900
Target Audience
Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS

Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
configuration in packet plane
Prerequisites
Implement Ethernet service / CES service /
ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
plane via NMS

Describe the parameters' meaning in service
configuration of packet plane

Duration

5 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
785
27.6.3 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid+Packet)

Training Path
Objectives

OTF47
Lecture

be able to:
0.5d

of OptiX RTN 900

OTF32
Lecture
0.5d

of OptiX RTN 900

OTF18
1d

OTF38
Hands-on exercise

1d
plane via NMS


Domain)
OTF46
Hands-on exercise

900
2d


Domain)
OTF29
Hands-on exercise
microwave
2d

RTN 900 network
Target Audience



commissioning
Prerequisites
900
RTN 900

786
Class Size

900
Min 6, Max 12
Duration
7 working days
787
27.6.4 OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

OTF47
Lecture
be able to:
0.5d

900
OptiX RTN 900 Field Operation &

Maintenance
OTF33
1d
microwave
Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX
RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 NE Database Topic

OTF34
Hands-on exercise

RTN 900
0.5d
Implement the maintenance operations of
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900

Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 series field maintenance engineer
Describe the functions of CF card
Prerequisites
Routing maintenance of NE database

Backup NE database
Having the general knowledge of Microwave
Duration
basics
2 working days
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and
Class Size
QinQ
Min 6, Max 12
788
27.6.5 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid)

Training Path
Describe the concept and characters of digital

microwave communication
Digital Microwave Communication Basics

OTF01
Lecture
Describe the theory and function of every part

in the digital microwave system
0.5d
List the networking application for digital

microwave system
List the fadings in microwave propagation

OTF47
Lecture
List the common technologies of antifading

0.5d

900

OTF32
Lecture
0.5d
microwave

Domain)
2d
OTF46
Hands-on exercise

RTN 900 network
Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting
OptiX RTN 900

OTF35
Lecture
1.5d
Outline the methods of faults analyzing and

locating
Target Audience
Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
OptiX RTN series operation and maintenance
RTN 900
engineer
Prerequisites

Having working experience in the maintenance of
900
Microwave products
Duration

5 working days
QinQ
Class Size
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
789
27.6.6 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Packet)

Training Path

OTF01
Lecture

0.5d
microwave system

OTF47
Lecture

0.5d
900

OTF32
Lecture

microwave
0.5d


Domain)
2d
OTF29
Hands-on exercise
RTN 900 network

OptiX RTN 900

OTF35
Lecture
1.5d
locating
Target Audience
RTN 900
engineer
Prerequisites

Microwave products
plane via NMS
QinQ
Duration

Objectives
5 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
790
27.6.7 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid+Packet)

Training Path
Objectives

OTF01
Lecture
be able to:
0.5d


OTF47
Lecture
0.5d
microwave system

OTF32
Lecture

0.5d


Domain)
2d
OTF46
Hands-on exercise
plane via NMS


Domain)
2d
OTF29
Hands-on exercise
900
microwave

OTF35
Lecture

1.5d

RTN 900 network
Target Audience

engineer
OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites
locating
Microwave products
RTN 900
QinQ
791
Class Size
900
Duration
Min 6, Max 12
7 working days
792
27.6.8 OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

testing
Hybrid Services Testing

OTF23

performance testing
1.5d
Explain the concept of common testing indices

performance testing
OptiX RTN 900 QoS&OAM Technology

OTF36
Outline the basic concept of QoS and

ETH-OAM
1.5d
Describe the working principles of QoS

Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
service boards on the OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 Clock&DCN Topic

OTF31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
List the planning principles of QoS
1.5d
Describe the configuration flow of QoS

Describe the usage of ETH-OAM
Configure clock tracing
OptiX RTN 900 System Control Unit and IF

Feature Topic
1d
OTF30
Lecture
Configure clock protection

Configure SSM byte in RTN 900
Check clock status in RTN 900 network
Manage and configure ECC link
Configure extended ECC

OTF35
Lecture
Enable/disable ECC link
1.5d
Configure IP over DCC, inband DCC

Configure DCC transparent transmission
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN series senior operation and
locating
Prerequisites

RTN 900
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line

Describe system architecture and functions of

the SCC unit
Objectives
Outline the new features supported by OptiX
RTN 900
be able to:
Describe the function and application of the
new features
Know the technical background of the Ethernet
Duration
and its basic concepts
7 working days
Draw the Ethernet frame structure
Class Size

switching
Min 6, Max 12
793
794
27.6.9 OptiX RTN 300 Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path


OTF80
Lecture
Be familiar with windows operating system

Objectives
0.5d

be able to:
OptiX RTN 310 Feature Description

OTF81
Lecture
310
0.5d


OTF82
Lecture
of OptiX RTN 310

Describe the features and application of OptiX
0.5d
RTN 310
Implement the installation of OptiX RTN 310
of OptiX RTN 310

OTF83
1d

commissioning
OptiX RTN 310 Data Configuration

OTF84
Hands-on exercise
310
1.5d
RTN 310
Target Audience
Configure services of the OptiX RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 installation and commissioning
Duration
engineer
4 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
795

Training Path

310

OTF80
Lecture

0.5d

of OptiX RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Field Operations &

Maintenance
OTF85
RTN 310
Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
1.5d
RTN 310
Target Audience
Duration
OptiX RTN 310 field maintenance engineer
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Having a general knowledge of microwave basics
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
796
27.6.11 OptiX RTN 300 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives

OTF80
Lecture
be able to:
0.5d

310
OptiX RTN 310 Feature Description

OTF81
Lecture
0.5d
of OptiX RTN 310

Describe the features and application of OptiX
RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Data Configuration

OTF84
Hands-on exercise

Configure services of the OptiX RTN 310
1.5d
Implement the routine maintenance via NMS

OptiX RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
OTF86

0.5d
locating
RTN 310
Target Audience
Duration
OptiX RTN 310 operation and maintenance

engineer
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Microwave products
797
27.6.12 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path
List the types and features of the IDU

List the functions of boards in the IDU
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Hardware &

Network Application
OTF17
Lecture
List the functions of ODU, Hybrid coupler and

antenna
1d
Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 900

Explain the functions of AM and Hybrid
Microwave

OTF18
Lecture

1d

RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Commissioning

OTF19
Explain the application of OptiX RTN 900

Ethernet services
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Data

Configuration
OTF21
Lecture, Hands-on
of OptiX RTN 900

2d
exercise
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 series installation and
of OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites

commissioning
900
RTN 900
Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN
910950
Objectives

910950

be able to:
Duration
5 working days
900
Class Size
Describe the system structure, software and

hardware structure of OptiX RTN 900
Min 6, Max 12
798
27.6.13 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path

application of every units
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Field

Maintenance
OTF20
List all the protection modes which supported

by OptiX RTN 900
Configure the OptiX RTN 900 equipment for all

types of the network application
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 System

Description
OTF45
Lecture
Microwave
Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX
0.5d
RTN 900
Target Audience

RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series field maintenance
engineer
RTN 900
Prerequisites

Duration
Having a general knowledge of Microwave basics

2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
900
799
27.6.14 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

microwave system

OTF01
Lecture

0.5d

900
Describe the system structure, software and

Network Application
OTF17
Lecture
hardware structure of OptiX RTN 900

1d

List the functions of boards in the IDU
List the functions of ODU, Hybrid coupler and
antenna

Configuration
OTF21
2d

Microwave

Configuration (Scenarized for Second
Line)

0.5d
RTN 900 network


Troubleshooting
OTF22
Explain the application of OptiX RTN 900

1d
Ethernet services
Target Audience
Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN

910950
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series operation and
910950
Prerequisites

OptiX RTN 900

Microwave products

locating


RTN 900
Objectives
Configure TDM services in mixed networking
Apply the tag attributes in different scenario
be able to:
Configuration of E-Line Services and E-LAN
Services
Duration

5 working days
800
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
801
27.6.15 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path

testing
Hybrid Services Testing

OTF23

performance testing
1.5d
Explain the concept of common testing indices

performance testing
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 QOS&OAM

Technology
OTF24
Outline the basic concepts of QoS and

ETH-OAM
1.5d
Describe the working principles of QoS

Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
service boards on the OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Clock &DCN

Processing
OTF25
List the planning principles of QoS
1d
Describe the configuration flow of QoS

Describe the usage of ETH-OAM
Manage and configure ECC link

Troubleshooting Case Study
OTF26
Configure extended ECC

Enable/disable ECC link
1d
Configure IP over DCC

Configure DCC transparent transmission
Target Audience
Configure clock tracing

OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series senior operation
Configure clock protection
and maintenance engineer
Configure SSM byte in RTN 900
Prerequisites
Check clock status in RTN 900 network
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 2nd Line
Read the actual faulty cases of OptiX RTN 900
Analyze the causes of fault that occurs in

actual network
Objectives
Improve the competency of troubleshooting
Practice the troubleshooting skills in the lab
be able to:
Duration

Know the technical background of the Ethernet
5 working days
and its basic concepts
Class Size
Draw the Ethernet frame structure
Min 6, Max 12

switching
802
27.6.16 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
RTN 900 network


Network Application
OTF42
Lecture
1d
RTN 900
RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Field Operation

& Maintenance
OTF14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d

RTN 900
Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900V100R001 series field maintenance
RTN 900
engineer
Prerequisites

900 include the AM function
Describe the system structure of OptiX RTN
Having the general knowledge of Microwave
900
basics
List the functions and features of the boards in
IDU, ODU, Hybrid coupler and antenna
QinQ
Objectives
Describe the classification of the services in the

OptiX RTN 900 network
be able to:
Describe the networking application of OptiX
RTN 900
RTN 900 network
900
Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
RTN 900
803
27.6.17 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the
Basic O/M Training)
Training Path

Basics of Packet Switch Network (PSN)

OTF13
Lecture
for TDM, Ethernet and ATM services

Outline the PWE3 application scenarios of
1d
OptiX RTN 900

Complete iManager T2000 ( Web LCT)
software installation

Network Application
OTF42
Lecture
Apply all menus in iManager T2000 (Web LCT)

1d
Implement data configuration and maintenance

operations for OptiX RTN 900 series through
iManager T2000 (Web LCT)
List out the contents, meaning and operation
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Field Operation

& Maintenance
OTF14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
methods of all the OptiX RTN 900 series

maintenance items
Complete data configuration and daily
maintenance for OptiX RTN 900 series
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation &

Maintenance
OTF15
Explain reasons of OptiX RTN 900 series

common faults and outline the common
7d
methods for troubleshooting

Analyze the common faults of OptiX RTN 900
series and perform the troubleshooting
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900V100R001 series operation and
Prerequisites
900
Microwave products
QinQ
Objectives

RTN 900
be able to:
RTN 900 network
Describe the basic principle of IP routing
Describe the MPLS tunnel (LSP) creation
procedure
Outline the MPLS OAM functions
900
804
RTN 900
RTN 900
RTN 900
RTN 900

RTN 900 network
Duration
10 working days
Class Size

RTN 900
Min 6, Max 12
805
27.6.18 OptiX RTN 600 Installation & Commissioning Training

Training Path

of OptiX RTN 600
OptiX RTN 600 Hardware and Network

Application
OTF02
Lecture

600
1d
Describe the system structure and software

and hardware structure of OptiX RTN 600
OptiX RTN 600 Operation & Maintenance

OTF03
List the functions of boards in the IDU, ODU,

Hybrid coupler and antenna
2.5d

Microwave

OTF07
List the common network types of OptiX RTN
0.5d
600
RTN 600

OTF08
List the network and equipment protection

schemes supported by the OptiX RTN 600
1d
Describe the configuration requirements of all

types of protection mode in OptiX RTN 600
Target Audience
Describe the functions of the T2000 and the

T2000 Web LCT

Install the T2000 Web LCT
Prerequisites
Configure services and protection by using the

T2000 and the T2000 Web LCT
RTN 600
RTN 600
commissioning
Objectives
Performing NE commissioning of the OptiX

RTN 600

be able to:
Performing hop commissioning of the OptiX

RTN 600

of OptiX RTN 600

commissioning

Performing NE commissioning of the OptiX

RTN 600

Performing hop commissioning of the OptiX

806
Class Size
RTN 600
Duration
Min 6, Max 12
5 working days
807

Training Path


Application
OTF02
Lecture

1d
Microwave
600
OptiX RTN 600 Field Maintenance


RTN 600
1d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 600 series field maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

RTN 600
Having a general knowledge of Microwave basics
Objectives
RTN 600
be able to:
Duration

2 working days
600
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
808
27.6.20 OptiX RTN 600 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
600

OTF01
Lecture

0.5d


Application
OTF02
Lecture

1d
Microwave
600
OptiX RTN 600 Operation & Maintenance
RTN 600
OTF03
2.5d


OTF06
Lecture, Case-study

Describe the functions of the T2000 and the
1d
T2000 Web LCT
Target Audience
Install the T2000 Web LCT

Configure services and protection by using the
OptiX RTN 600 series operation and maintenance
T2000 and the T2000 Web LCT
engineer
Prerequisites
RTN 600
Microwave products
RTN 600
Objectives

locating
Outline the Fault Handling Flow
be able to:
error bit, etc
Duration

5 working days
Class Size
microwave system
Min 6, Max 12

809
27.7
Transmission Network OSS Training Programs
27.7.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only)

Training Path

U2000

ONU01
Lecture

0.5d


Management
ONU02
Lecture
alarm
0.5d
common alarm events

performance events
Transmission Network Device Introduction

ONU07
Lecture
1d
Huawei Transmission network equipment

Target Audience
products
U2000 operator and maintainer
Prerequisites
network products
Having the basic knowledge of network
Duration
management
Having the basic principle and equipment
2 working days
knowledge of Transmission network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 16
be able to:
810
27.7.2 iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training

Training Path
be able to:
List the main menus of iManager U2000 LCT
iManager U2000 LCT Operation

ONU12
Perform the NE configuration, service

configuration for NG SDH equipment via
1d
U2000 LCT
Target Audience
LCT
Duration
U2000 LCT user

Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Having the basic knowledge of Windows OS

Objectives
Min 6, Max 16
811
27.7.3 iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Describe the basic command of Operating

system and Sybase
U2100 System Operation and

Maintenance
OTD08
Describe the system structure, management

capacity and menus of iManager U2100
5d
Browse the SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid MSTP trail

and their alarm through iManager U2100
Target Audience
Create and delete SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid

MSTP trail through iManager U2100
U2100 administrator and operator
Check the running status of U2100 and perform
Prerequisites
the routine maintenance

Be familiar with Windows operating system and
Perform the U2100 troubleshooting, deal the
Database
NMS and network problems with U2000
Having the knowledge of Operating system and
Duration
Sybase basics
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
List the features and basics of Operating
system and Sybase
812
27.7.4 OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training

Training Path
be able to:
Transmission Network Device Introduction

ONU07
Lecture
T2000V2
1d


OTD01

browsing help, etc
1d

Huawei Transmission network equipment
Target Audience

T2000 operator and maintainer
products
Transmission network routine monitor and
maintainer
network products
Prerequisites

Duration

2 working days
optical transport network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 16
813
27.7.5 OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training

Training Path
Explain the concept of security management

Complete the operation of NE and NMS
OptiX iManager Security & Database

Management
OTD02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
security management
Explain the concept of data management
1d
Complete the operation of NE and NMS data

management
List T2000 routine maintenance items
OptiX iManager T2000 Routine

Maintenance & Troubleshooting
OTD03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Perform operations of routine maintenance

1d
Complete routine maintenance for T2000 and

network
Target Audience
localization
T2000 operator and maintainer
Locate T2000 NMS faults
Prerequisites
Get the experience for T2000 troubleshooting

Analyze and handle the typical faults
Be familiar with Windows operating system and
Duration
Database
Upon completion of OTD00 Operating system &
2 working days
Sybase Basics course or having equivalent
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
be able to:
814
27.7.6 OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training

Training Path
Outline Veritas hot backup system basic

concepts
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby

System Operation & Maintenance
OTD06
Describe Veritas Volume Management and

Replication principle
4d
Describe Veritas Cluster Management working

principle
Target Audience
Perform Veritas hot backup system basic

operations
T2000 Veritas system administrator
Execute Veritas hot backup system routine
Prerequisites
maintenance
Upon completion of Operating system & Sybase
Perform Veritas hot backup system
Basics course or having equivalent knowledge
troubleshooting
Objectives
Outline Veritas hot backup system installation

preparations
Describe Veritas hot backup system installation
be able to:
procedure
Outline the main features of Operating system
List Veritas hot backup system installation
Perform some basic operation of SUN
checking items
workstation
Duration
Describe some basic commands of Operating

system
4 working days
Outline the main features of Sybase
Class Size
Start, shutdown, backup and restore Sybase

Min 2, Max 6
database
Describe some basic SQL language
815
27.7.7 OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training

Training Path

T2000V2R7
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta

OTD07

2d
List the new features of T2000V2R7

Describe the realization method of the new
Target Audience
features
Perform the operation of the new features
T2000 administrator and maintainer
Describe the concepts and architecture of
Prerequisites
T2000V2R7 distributing management system
Be familiar with OptiX iManager T2000 before
List the functions of T2000V2R7 distributing
V2R7 version
management system
Objectives
Add instance in distributing management

system
Perform the routine maintenance
be able to:
Duration
T2000V2
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
816
27.8
Planning and Design Training Programs
27.8.1 OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training

Training Path


OTA28
Lecture

1d

Describe the structure of SDH network
Outline the service types of SDH network
OptiX SDH Network Design Basics
Illustrate the common protection mechanism of

1d
SDH network
List the procedures of SDH network design
Target Audience
Describe the basic factors that should be
SDH network junior planning & design engineer
involved in the SDH network design
Prerequisites
Accomplish the SDH/PDH service design

Duration
Having the basic knowledge of

telecommunications and SDH network
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
817
27.8.2 OptiX MSTP Network Design Training

Training Path
service requirement
List the procedures of SDH network design

OTA44
Lecture, Case-study
Outline network protection types

Describe the key point of complicated network
3d
design
Figure out the details of network reliability
Target Audience
design
SDH network planning & design engineer
Perform SDH network design including the
Prerequisites
network reliability and clock trace design
List the factors of data service design
telecommunications and MSTP network
Describe the key point of the data service
planning according to the bandwidth
design of MSTP networks
requirement
Perform data service design in the SDH
Objectives
network
Duration
be able to:
3 working days
Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH &

OCS system
Class Size
Outline the equipment capacity of OptiX NG
Min 6, Max 12
SDH & OCS system

Choose the right equipment according to the
818
27.8.3 OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training

Training Path
system
Outline the equipment capacity for packet
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design

OTA47
Lecture, Case-study
service access of OptiX NG SDH system

Outline the common boards for packet service
3d
of OptiX NG SDH equipment

Choose the right equipment according to the
Target Audience
service demand
Hybrid MSTP network planning & design engineer
Consider all the required main points for
Prerequisites
planning a Hybrid MSTP network

List the procedure for designing the Hybrid
MSTP network
telecommunications and Hybrid MSTP network
Perform the Hybrid MSTP network design
Duration
design of Hybrid MSTP networks

Objectives
3 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH
819
27.8.4 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
List the configuration of iManager MDS 6600

Describe the characters of iManager MDS
iManager MDS 6600 ASON (SDH)

Network Design
OTA33
Lecture, Case-study
6600
Perform SDH ASON network design through
4d
iManager MDS 6600

Describe the considerations of ASON planning
Target Audience
List the steps of ASON planning
OptiX SDH ASON senior network planning &
Describe the function of ASON planning tool
design engineer
Accomplish SDH ASON network design
Prerequisites
Perform data import/export operation between
telecommunications and SDH network
iManager MDS 6600 and NMS
Having a general knowledge of ASON
Verify the import/export operation
Duration
design of SDH networks
4 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe the structure of iManager MDS 6600
820
27.8.5 OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training

Training Path

etc
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design

Basics
OTC47
Lecture
2d
in WDM system
Target Audience
different units in OptiX WDM/NG WDM

WDM network junior planning & design engineer
products
Prerequisites
Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM
Having a general understanding of
network planning, such as power budget,
telecommunications
dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation

and nonlinearity
Objectives
Outline the design process of WDM network

Duration
be able to:
2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

821
27.8.6 OptiX WDM Network Design Training

Training Path
Evaluate the WDM networks including the

network architecture, protection mechanism,
signal flow and network capacity

OTC03
Lecture, Case-study
Analyze typical configuration of OptiX WDM
3d
series products
Analyze the design process of WDM network
Target Audience
Design a complete OptiX WDM network
WDM network planning & design engineer
according to requirements
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
different units in OptiX WDM products
822
27.8.7 OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training

Training Path
Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product

capacity and features

OTC31
Lecture, Case-study
Describe WDM network topologies and system

applications
3d
Outline the designing procedure of WDM

network
Target Audience
Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX NG
OptiX NG WDM network planning & design
WDM
engineer
Memorize the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
Prerequisites
system capacity with different traffics

Apply the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 system

design of WDM products
functions and configuration principles in
network planning
Describe the designing procedure of NG WDM
Network Design Basic Training or having
FOADM network
Fulfill the hardware configuration of NG WDM
Objectives
FOADM network
Duration
be able to:
3 working days
Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
Class Size
networking
Outline OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
Min 6, Max 12
functions
823
27.8.8 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Describe NG WDM ASON network features

Outline NG WDM ASON network planning
OptiX NG WDM ASON Network Planning &

Design
2d
OTC36
Lecture, Case-study
steps
Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
design
Understand the special topics of NG WDM
ASON network planning and design
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner

Operation
OTC74
Understand NG WDM ASON network features

1d
Outline NG WDM ASON network planning

steps
Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
design
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer

Operation
OTC75
Describe features and functions of the
1d
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner

Plan WDM network
Target Audience
Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Planner operation

Implement the WDM network plan by the MDS
OptiX NG WDM ASON senior network planning &
6600 WDM Planner
design engineer
Outline system architecture of iManager MDS
Prerequisites
6600
Describe features and functions of the
design of WDM products
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer
Complete WDM network design
Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Designer operation
Implement the WDM network design by the
Objectives
MDS 6600 WDM Designer

Duration

be able to:
4 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

824
27.8.9 OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training

Training Path
Objectives

OTF01
Lecture
be able to:
0.5d

OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic

OTF40
Lecture
1.5d
microwave system
Target Audience

Microwave network junior planning engineer
Familiar with the microwave network design
Prerequisites
contents
Know the basic information about microwave
Having a general knowledge of Digital Microwave
planning
Communication
Duration

QinQ
2 working days
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet and
Class Size
QoS
Min 6, Max 12
825
27.8.10 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)

Training Path

contents

OTF49
Lecture

in the digital microwave system for details
1.5d
Know the microwave planning principles

Familiar the interference analysis methods
Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service,
OptiX RTN Network Service Planning

(Packet)
OTF60
Lecture
CES service, ATM/IMA service and MPLS

tunnel planning
0.5d
Know how to select the proper equipment type

and functions for different scenarios
Implement network design according to the
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning

OTF51
Lecture
guideline to ensure the high and efficient

1d
packet service delivery

Familiar with the working mechanism of clock &
Target Audience
DCN
Microwave network planning engineer
Know how to select the proper clock & DCN
Prerequisites
mode for different scenarios

Familiar with the clock & DCN planning
guidelines
Communication
Implement clock & DCN design according to
the guideline to ensure the high and efficient
QinQ
planning delivery
Duration
QoS
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
826
27.8.11 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid)

Training Path
contents

OTF49
Lecture

1.5d

Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service
and TDM service planning

(Hybrid)
OTF59
Lecture

0.5d

guideline to ensure the high and efficient hybrid
service delivery

OTF51
Lecture
1d
DCN
Target Audience
Prerequisites
guidelines
Communication
planning delivery
Duration
TDM
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
827
27.8.12 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid)

Training Path


OTF49
Lecture
Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service

and TDM service planning
1.5d


(Hybrid)
OTF59
Lecture
guideline to ensure the high and efficient hybrid

service delivery
0.5d

tunnel planning

(Packet)
OTF60
Lecture

0.5d


OTF51
Lecture

1d
DCN
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case

Analysis
OTF61
Lecture

guidelines
0.5d

Target Audience

planning delivery
Prerequisites

tunnel planning
Communication
QinQ
QoS
Objectives
Duration
4 working days
be able to:
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
contents
828
27.8.13 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training

Training Path
DCN

OTF51
Lecture

1d
guidelines
OptiX RTN Network QoS Planning

OTF62
Lecture
planning delivery
0.5d

tunnel planning
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case

Analysis
OTF61
Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience
Microwave senior network planning engineer

Prerequisites
tunnel planning
Communication
QinQ
QoS
Duration
Be familiar with RTN product
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
829
27.8.14 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training

Training Path
products
Evaluate the network resilience, which include
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Network

Planning & Design
OTC53
Lecture, Case-study
network architecture, protection mechanisms,

signal flow, and network capacity
4d
Outline the designing procedure of WDM

network
Target Audience
Fulfill the hardware configuration of optical and
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A senior network planning
electrical layer grooming
& design engineer
Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX OSN
Prerequisites
3800A/6800A
Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM
Having working experience in planning and design

telecommunication networks
network planning, such as power budget,
dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation

and nonlinearity
Objectives
Complete the exercises of WDM network

design
be able to:
Duration

4 working days
Class Size
Describe OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A access

capacity
Min 6, Max 12
Identify wavelength distribution and service

process ability for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
830
27.8.15 OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training

Describe OptiX BWS 1600S system access
Training Path
capacity
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered)
Planning and Design
OTC71
Lecture, Case-study
Identify wavelength distribution and service

process ability for OptiX BWS 1600S products
3d
Evaluate the network resilience, which include

network architecture, protection mechanisms,
signal flow and network capacity
Target Audience
Outline the designing procedure of OptiX BWS
OptiX BWS 1600S senior network planning &
1600S network
design engineer
Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX BWS

1600S products
Prerequisites
Complete the exercises of OptiX BWS 1600S
network design

Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12

BWS 1600S products
831
27.9
Assessment and Optimization Training Programs
27.9.1 OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training

Training Path
Describe the main contents about SDH service

capacity and efficiency assessment
SDH Network Assessment

OTA93
Lecture, Case-study
Describe the items and contents about SDH

network security assessment
3d
Describe the measures about SDH survivable

network assessment
Target Audience
List the methods about trail usability
OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or
assessment
senior maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
network O&M assessment

Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment
assessment
Having working experience with at least 2 years in
Describe the methods about clock subnetwork
the maintenance of optical transport network
assessment
Objectives
Describe the methods about spare part

assessment
be able to:
Duration
List the main items of SDH network resource
3 working days
List the main items of SDH network
Class Size
assessment
Describe the requirement of SDH network
Min 4, Max 8
resource assessment
832
27.9.2 OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training

Training Path
SDH equipment
Optimize the trails to improve the network
SDH Network Optimization

OTA94
Lecture, Case-study
usage efficiency
3d
network security optimization

Describe the measures about SDH survivable
Target Audience
List the methods about trail usability
optimization
Prerequisites

network O&M optimization
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment
Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork
Having working experience with at least 2 years in
optimization
the maintenance of optical transport network
Describe the methods about clock subnetwork
Upon completion of OptiX SDH Network
optimization
Assessment Training
Describe the methods about spare part
Objectives
optimization
Duration
be able to:
3 working days
Describe the causes and effects of discrete
Class Size
services
Recognize the discrete services of the network
Min 4, Max 8
Eliminate discrete services

Optimize the lower level cross-connection of
833
27.9.3 OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training

Training Path
Outline the scenario of SDH network expansion

List the key point of network expansion
SDH Network Expansion & Reconstruction

OTA43
Interpret the operation of SDH network

expansion
3d
Perform SDH network expansion and verify the

service interconnection
Target Audience
Outline the scenario of SDH network

reconstruction
List the key point of network reconstruction
Interpret the operation of SDH network
Prerequisites
reconstruction
Perform SDH network reconstruction and verify
SDH products
the service interconnection
Having been attend SDH series 2nd Line
Duration
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size

be able to:
Min 4, Max 8
834
27.9.4 OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training

Training Path
Describe methods of assessing WDM network

design performance
OptiX WDM Network Assessment

OTC72
Lecture, Case-study
Analyze and assess WDM network design

performance
2d
Provide suggestions on optimizing WDM

network design performance
Target Audience
Describe methods of assessing running
OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or
performance of a WDM network
Analyze and assess running performance of a
Prerequisites
WDM network
Provide suggestions for optimizing running
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Second Line Maintenance Training program or

Duration
OptiX BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance

Training program or OptiX Metro 6100 Second
2 working days
Line Maintenance Training program
Class Size
Objectives
Min 4, Max 8

be able to:
835
27.9.5 OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training

Training Path
Describe the method for optimizing design

OptiX WDM Network Optimization

OTC73
Describe the procedure for designing a solution

to design performance optimization of a WDM
1d
network
Complete the solution to the design
Target Audience
performance optimization of a WDM network

Describe how to optimize operating
Describe the process of optimizing operating
Prerequisites

Design solutions to optimizing operating
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 4, Max 8

be able to:
836
27.9.6 OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training

Training Path
Objectives
OptiX WDM Network Expansion

be able to:
2d
Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power

calculation
Outline the process of OptiX WDM network
Target Audience
expansion
Implement the indices testing during network
expansion
Prerequisites
Complete the OptiX WDM network service

expansion of OTM/OADM stations

Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Min 4, Max 8
837
27.9.7 OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training

Training Path
Describe OptiX WDM system upgrade &

reconstruction methods, which include 2 5G
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction

upgrading to 10G, 10G upgrading to 40G and

400G upgrading to 800G
3d
Describe OptiX WDM equipment software

upgrade methods
Target Audience
Describe OptiX WDM network reconstruction

methods, which include the site type
reconstruction, the protection type
reconstruction and wavelength reconstruction
Prerequisites
Complete the OptiX WDM network

reconstruction
Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Objectives
Min 4, Max 8

be able to:
838
28 PS Training Path
28.1
PS Training Path
GPRS/UMTS PS
2d
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel

The Difference between
ATCA and CPCI SGSN
Training
3d
SGSN9810 Routine
Training (ATCA)
3d
SGSN9810 Data
(ATCA)
7d
CG9812 Operation and

(Windows)
2d
(UNIX)
GGSN9811 Routine
Training (V9)
2d
UPCC ATCA platform

Training (UPCC HSS)
2d
UPCC Data Configuration

Training
2d
2d
GGSN9811 Data
Configuration Training (V9)

Maintenance
Training(ATCA)
6d
2d
UPCC Service Policy

Configuration and Analysis
Training
2d
Field Maintenance Engineers,

Routine Maintenance Engineers
PS Performance Monitoring
Training
PS Emergency Recovery
Training
PS Alarm Monitoring and

Management
1d
1d
1d
Field Maintenance Engineers,

Routine Maintenance Engineers
GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL

Training
4d
SGSN APN and
international roaming
Training
PS Interface Signaling
Analysis
PS QOS Training
IP Convergence for Packet

Core Training
2d
GPRS/UMTS PS Network
Security Training
3d
2d
4d
PS Signaling Procedure
Analysis and
PS Data Transfer
1d
2d
UPCC Service Policy

Application and Design
Training
2d
UPCC Gx Interface
Signaling Analysis and
1d
GGSN Service Awareness

Training
2d
GPRS/UMTS Senior Engineers and Experts
Figure1. GPRS/UMTS Product Training Path
839
2d
GPRS/UMTS PS
2d
PS Interface Signaling
Analysis
3d
Optimize Training
3d
Planning and Design
Training
3d
PS Network Planning Engineers, System Design Engineers

Figure2. GPRS/UMTS Network Planning and Design Training Path
840
EPC Principle Fundamental

Training
From GPRS to EPC Delta

Training
1d
EPC Equipment
Comissioning Training
3d
2d

USN ATCA platform
Training (2G/3G/4G )
2d
USN9810 (SGSN)
Data
Configuration
Training (2G/3G)
USN9810 (MME)
Data
Configuration
Training (4G)
7d
UGW Routine Operation

(2G/3G/4G)
2d
USN9810
(SGSN&MME) Data
Configuration
Training (2G/3G/4G)
3d
9d
UGW (GGSN)
Data
Configuration
Training (2G/3G)
UGW
(SGW&PGW) Data
Configuration
Training (4G)
UGW
(SGW&PGW&GGSN)
Data Configuration
Training (2G/3G/4G)
4d
5d
4d
Field Maintenance
Engineers, Routine
Maintenance Engineers
USN9810 APN and

Roaming Solution Training
SingleEPC Solution
Introduction Training
MME POOL Training
2d
2d
EPC interface protocol

analysis Training
EPC Protocol and

Procedure Training
1d
EPC VOLTE Solution

Training
2d
3d
PS IPv6 Feature Training
EPC Troubleshooting
Training
3d
EPC Senior Engineers and Experts
Figure3. EPC Product Training Path
841
1d
eMBMS Smart Content

Delivery Feature Training
1d
1d
EPC Principle Fundamental

Training
From GPRS to EPC Delta

Training
1d
3d
EPC Protocol and

Procedure Training
3d
EPC interface protocol

analysis Training
2d
EPC Network Planning and

Design Training
2d
EPC Network Planning Engineers, System Design Engineers

Figure4. EPC Planning and Design Training Path
EPC HSS Operation and

4d
Figure5. EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training Path

iManager M2000 PS
Training
2d
Figure6. iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training Path
DNS9816 Operation and

1d
Figure7. DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training Path
842
uBro UAG Operation and

4d
Figure8. uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training Path
WASN Operation and

5d
Figure9. WASN Operation and Maintenance Training Path
MAG9811 Engineer
Training( 3days)
3d
Figure10. MAG9811 Engineer Training Path
CDMA WAG Operation and

CDMA PDSN Operation and

4d
7d
CDMA HA Operation and

4d
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation

and Maintenance Delta
Training
2d
Figure11. CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training Path
PS SUR Operation and

PS Nastar Training
PS Netview Training
2d
2d
PS PRS Engineer Training

(Nastar SUR)
1d
2d
Figure12. PS Report System Training Path
GPRS Fundamental(WBT)
GPRS Signalling
Procedure(WBT)
1.5h
EPC Principle(WBT)
GTP Protocol
Analysis(WBT)
3h
EPC Product Survey(WBT)

6h
EPC SIgnaling Analysis

(WBT)
2h
EPC Data Management

(WBT)
3h
EPC Alarm and Monitoring

(WBT)
EPC Health Check (WBT)

12h
2h
1h
Figure13. Packet Core Net(WBT) Training Path
843
2h
28.2
MBB Training Path

MBB features seminars
2d
QoS Guarantee for MBB

Valued Subscribers and
Services Solution
1.5d
Figure14. MBB Solution Training Path
844
QoE evaluation and

optimization solution
Training
Smart phone signaling

optimization Training
1.5d
2d
29 PS Training Courses
PS, MBB Training Courses are designed as follows:
Program
Level
Duration
(workdays)
Training
Location
Class Size
N/A
6 ~ 12
SGSN9810 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training

(ATCA)
N/A
6 ~ 12
SGSN9810 Data Configuration Training (ATCA)
N/A
6 ~ 12
SGSN APN and international roaming Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
The difference of ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
GGSN9811 Routine Operation and Maintenance

Training(V9)
N/A
6 ~ 12
GGSN9811 Data Configuration Training (V9)
N/A
6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(Windows)
N/A
6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(UNIX)
N/A
6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA)
N/A
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
SGSN Gb Reconstruction(From TDM to IP)Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS QOS Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
GGSN Service Awareness Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting

Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS Interface Signaling Analysis
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS Emergency Recovery Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS Performance Monitoring Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management
N/A
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Principle Fundamental Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
From GPRS to EPC Delta Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Protocol and Procedure Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC interface protocol analysis Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
Class Type
PS Product Technology Training

GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training
SGSN Product Training (PS8.1 or before V9R11)
GGSN Product Training
CG Product Training (2/3/4G Public Product)
GPRS/UMTS Solution Training
PS Performance and Monitor Training (Special for NOC)
GPRS/UMTS Planning and Optimize Training
EPC Principle Training
PS/EPC Product Training (After PS9.1, 2/3/4G integration)

EPC Equipment Commissioning Training
845

USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training
(2G/3G/4G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training

(2G/3G/4G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training

(2G/3G/4G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training

(2G/3G/4G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
N/A
6 ~ 12
MME POOL Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC VOLTE Solution Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
IPv6 Feature Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Troubleshooting Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
UPCC ATCA Platform Operation and Maintenance

Training (UPCC HSS)
N/A
6 ~ 12
UPCC Data Configuration Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
UPCC Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
UPCC Service Policy Application and Design Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and

N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
N/A
6 ~ 12
CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta

Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Solution Training
EPC Planning and Optimize Training

EPC Network Planning and Design Training
UPCC Product Training
HSS Product PS Training

EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training
M2000 Product Training
iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training
DNS Product Training
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training
uBro Product PS Training
uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training
WiMax Product PS Training
WASN Operation and Maintenance Training
WLAN Product PS Training
MAG9811 Engineer Training
CDMA Product PS Training
PS Report System Training
846

PS Netview Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS Nastar Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS SUR Operation and Maintenance Training
N/A
6 ~ 12
PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR)
N/A
6 ~ 12
Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile Internet
N/A
6 ~ 12
MBB Features Seminars
N/A
6 ~ 12
QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued Subscribers and

Services Solution
1.5
N/A
6 ~ 12
Smart Phone Signaling Optimization Training
1.5
N/A
6 ~ 12
QoE Evaluation and Optimization Solution Training
1.5
N/A
6 ~ 12
GPRS Fundamental (WBT)
0.25
N/A
6 ~ 12
GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT)
0.5
N/A
6 ~ 12
GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT)
0.3
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Principle (WBT)
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT)
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Health Check (WBT)
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Data Management (WBT)
0.3
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT)
0.3
N/A
6 ~ 12
EPC Product Survey (WBT)
N/A
6 ~ 12
MBB Solution Training
Packet Core Net (WBT)
847
29.1
PS Training Courses
29.1.1 GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training

Training Path
Objectives

OWA01
Lecture
be able to:
Describe the UMTS PS Network Structure.
2d
Describe the PS Core Network interface and
Target Audience
Protocol.
Describe the PS Core Network Working
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line
Principle.
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance

Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
A general mobile communication and data

communication.
Min 6, Max 12
848
29.1.2 PS Interface Signaling Analysis

Training Path
PS Interface Signaling Analysis and
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB77
exercise, Demonstration
maintenance.
Successful completion of the program of
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training.
Objectives
3d

be able to:
Target Audience
Describe important procedures and parameters

Routine Maintenance Engineers, Optimization
of RANAP/MAP/GTP.
Engineers, Senior Maintenance Engineers.
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
A general understanding of mobile communication
Class Size
and data communication.
Min 6, Max 12
Get familiar with TCP/IP.

1 years related experience in PS equipment
849
29.1.3 SGSN9810 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA)

Training Path
SGSN9810 Routine Operation and
Maintenance (ATCA) Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB92
exercise
Objectives
be able to:
3d
Describe the physical and logical structure of

SGSN9810 equipment.
Explain the functions of different boards in
Target Audience
SGSN.
Describe the software upgrade procedure and
patch/license loading.
Engineers
Perform routine operation and maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
Successful completion of the program
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
850
29.1.4 SGSN9810 Data Configuration Training (ATCA)

Training Path
Objectives
SGSN9810 Data Configuration (ATCA)

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB93
exercise

be able to:
7d
Perform configuration of SGSN hardware, Gb,

Iu-PS, Gn/Ga, Gr and basic service
configuration.
Target Audience
Duration
Second Line Maintenance Engineers, Routine
7 working days
Maintenance Engineers.
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Successful completion of the program SGSN9810

Routine Operation and Maintenance Training.
851
29.1.5 SGSN APN and international roaming Training

Training Path
Successful completion of the program SGSN

routine operation and maintenance training.
SGSN Advanced Data Configuration

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB35
exercise
Successful completion of the program SGSN data

configuration Training.
2d
Objectives
Target Audience
be able to:
Describe the principle of HSAP+, international
roaming, APN rectify and 2G/3G restrict and
Engineers
the configuration.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
communication.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
GPRS/UMTS Principle Training.
852
29.1.6 The difference of ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training

Training Path
training.
CPCI and ATCA SGSN Delta Training

Lecture, Hands-on
OWB25
exercise
(CPCI) data configuration Training.

Objectives
3d

be able to:
Target Audience
Describe Software Difference Between ATCA

and CPCI.
Describe Hardware Difference Between ATCA
Engineers
and CPCI.
Prerequisites
Describe the routine operation and

maintenance of ATCA SGSN.

Duration
communication.
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
SGSN(CPCI) routine operation and maintenance
853
29.1.7 GGSN9811 Routine Operation and Maintenance TrainingV9

Training Path
Objectives
GGSN9811Routine Operation and

Maintenance (V9) Training
Lecture, Hands-on
2d
OWD92
exercise

be able to:
the GGSN9811.
Describe the board function of GGSN.
Target Audience
Perform the software upgrade and

patch/license loading procedure.
Perform the routine operation and
Engineers
maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
854
29.1.8 GGSN9811 Data Configuration Training V9

Training Path
Objectives
GGSN9811Data Configuration (V9)

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWD93
exercise
be able to:
6d
Perform configuration of Gn/Gp, Ga and Gi

interfaces and route.
Perform configuration of reliability networking,
Target Audience
VPN, APN and charging.

Second Line Maintenance Engineers, Routine
Describe the SA (Service Awareness) principle.
Maintenance Engineer.
Perform basic debugging of GGSN9811.
Prerequisites
Duration
6 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
855
29.1.9 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance TrainingWindows

Training Path
Objectives
CG9812 Administration (Windows)

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWI30
exercise

be able to:
2d
Describe the charging principle of PS core

network.
Describe the CG9812 system structure.
Target Audience
Configure key maintenance parameters in CG

server.
Perform routine operation and maintenance of
Engineers
CG server.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
856
29.1.10 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance TrainingUNIX

Training Path
Objectives
CG9812 Administration (UNIX) Training
be able to:
Lecture, Hands-on
OWI31
exercise
2d
Describe the charging principle of PS core

network.
Describe the CG9812 system structure.
Target Audience
Configure key maintenance parameters in CG

server.
Perform the routine operation and maintenance
Engineers
of CG server.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
857
29.1.11 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA)

Training Path

Objectives
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance

Training (ATCA)
Lecture, Hands-on
2d
OWI50

be able to:
Perform CG9812 routine maintenance.
Master CG9812 client software installation and
Target Audience
CDR browsing/query.
Duration
2 working days
Engineers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12

858
29.1.12 GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training

Training Path

SGSN POOL Training

OWB76
Case-study, discussion
4d
Objectives
be able to:
Target Audience
Understand the principle of SGSN POOL.

Perform data configuration of SGSN POOL.
Perform Operation and Maintenance of SGSN
Engineers
POOL.
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
communication.
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
859
29.1.13 SGSN Gb ReconstructionFrom TDM to IPTraining

Training Path

GB Interface Reconstruction From TDM

to IPTraining
Lecture, Hands-on
1d
OWB71
exercise
Objectives
be able to:
Target Audience
Perform Gb interface reconstruction network

design.
Perform Gb interface reconstruction
Engineers
Configuration.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
communication.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

860
29.1.14 PS QOS Training

Training Path
Objectives
PS QOS Training
OWA11
be able to:
Lecture
2d
Describe PS QoS parameter.

Know PS QoS negotiation process.
Target Audience
Describe PS service QoS parameter default

value.
Describe SGSN QoS handling.
Describe UE and Radio Part QoS handling.
Prerequisites
Duration

and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP
2 working days
and GPRS principle.
Class Size
2 years related experience in PS domain.
Min 6, Max 12
861
29.1.15 GGSN Service Awareness Training

Training Path
Successful completion of the program GGSN

SA Application Configuration Training

Lecture, Hands-on
OWD30
exercise
Successful completion of the program GGSN data

2d
Objectives
Target Audience
be able to:
Describe GGSN SA Structure.
Perform the SA application -content base
Engineers
charging and service control.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
communication.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
862
29.1.16 IP Convergence for Packet Core Training

Training Path
Describe IP backbone and key Datacom

technology.
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training
Describe interconnection solution between PS
Lecture, Hands-on
OWA06
and CE.
4d
Describe
IP Planning between PS and CE.
Describe Data configuration between PS and

Target Audience
CE.
Describe Iu/Gb/Gr/Gn/Ga interface networking
and reliability solution.
Describe O/M interface networking and
Prerequisites
reliability solution.
Describe PS networking troubleshooting
method.
Get familiar with TCP/IP and GPRS Principle.
Common troubleshooting case study.
Objectives
Duration
4 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Describe TCP/IP fundamental related to
Min 6, Max 12
GPRS/UMTS PS network.
863
29.1.17 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training

Training Path
Objectives
PS Network Security Training
be able to:
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB50
exercise
1d
Describe the Common Network Attack to

CN-PS.
Perform the configuration to avoid of typical
Target Audience
network attack.
Senior Engineers, Specialist, Expert
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Successful completion of the programs.
Class Size
SGSN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training.

Min 6, Max 12
GGSN9811 Operation and Maintenance Training.
864
29.1.18 PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting Training

Training Path

PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and

Troubleshooting
Lecture, Hands-on
2d
OWB76
Objectives
be able to:
Target Audience
of MM/SM.
Perform MM/SM/Service Troubleshooting.
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

maintenance.
865
29.1.19 PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training

Training Path

PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training

Lecture, Hands-on
2d
OWA78
Objectives
be able to:
Perform locating method of Data Transfer fault.
Target Audience
Perform Troubleshooting method of Data

Transfer fault.
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

maintenance.
866
29.1.20 PS Emergency Recovery Training

Training Path
maintenance.
PS Emergency Recovery Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB91 exercise, Demonstration
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Target Audience
Master SGSN9810 Emergency O/M.

Master GGSN9811 Emergency O/M.
Master CG9812 Emergency O/M.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
867
29.1.21 PS Performance Monitoring Training

Training Path
maintenance.
PS Performance Monitoring Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB92
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Target Audience
Master Key Performance Indicator of SGSN.

Master Key Performance Indicator of GGSN.
Perform KPI getting method.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
868
29.1.22 PS Alarm Monitoring and Management

Training Path
maintenance.
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB93
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Target Audience
Understand basic alarm.

Understand basic method of alarm monitoring
and management.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

869
29.1.23 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training

Training Path

SGSN/GGSN data configuration Training.
PS Network Optimization Training
Objectives
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB67
exercise
3d

be able to:
Outline the general procedure of PS core
Target Audience
network optimization.
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimization Engineers,
Analyze the PS core network KPI.
System Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and
Describe Traffic Statistics Model Extraction.
Experts
Master Evaluation and Optimization of the
Prerequisites
SGSN9810/GGSN9811/DNS/CG Resource
Capacity.

Duration
communication.
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
SGSN/GGSN routine operation and maintenance

training.
870
29.1.24 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training

Training Path

SGSN/GGSN data configuration Training.
PS Network Planning Training

OWB68
Lecture
Objectives
3d

be able to:
Target Audience
Describe PS Network Planning Principle.

Perform the Networking Scheme for
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning Engineers,

System Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and
Gb/Iu/SS7/Gn/Gp/OM/Ga/Li/Gy and
Experts
GGSN-SUR, GGSN-SCCG networking

scheme.
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
communication.
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

SGSN/GGSN routine operation and maintenance
training.
871
29.1.25 EPC Principle Fundamental Training

Training Path
Objectives
EPC Principle Fundamental Training

OEA10
Lecture,LVC
be able to:
1d
Describe the EPC network structure.

Describe the EPC Network interface and
Target Audience
protocol.
Describe the EPC Network working
procedures.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Be familiar with Windows operating system.

Having basic knowledge of mobile network.
Min 6, Max 12
872
29.1.26 From GPRS to EPC Delta Training

Training Path
Objectives
From GPRS to EPC Delta Training

OEA11
Lecture
be able to:
2.5d
Describe difference between GPRS Protocol

and EPC Protocol.
Target Audience
Describe different interface between GPRS

and EPC network.
Perform the difference routine operation and
maintenance between GPRS and EPC
Engineers
equipment.
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
873
29.1.27 EPC Protocol and Procedure Training

Training Path
Understand the EPC network structure.

Understand the EPC Network interface and
EPC Protocol and Procedure Training
protocol.
Lecture, Case-study,
OEA01
discussion, LVC
Understand the key concepts for EPC.
3d
Understand the EPC Network working

procedures.
Target Audience
Perform EMM signaling flow and key

parameters analysis.
PS Network Planning Engineers, System Design
Perform ESM signaling flow and key
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts
parameters analysis.
Prerequisites
A general understanding of GPRS network
Duration
principle, mobile communication and data

communication.
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
874
29.1.28 EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training

Training Path
communication.
Objectives
EPC Signaling Analysis Training

Lecture, Hands-on
OEA02

2d
be able to:
Perform USN9810 signaling tracing method.
Perform UGW9811 signaling tracing method.
Target Audience
Duration
EPC Engineers and Experts, PS Network Planning
2 working days
Engineers, System Design Engineers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12

875
29.1.29 EPC Equipment Commissioning Training

Training Path

communication.
EPC Equipment Commissioning Training

Lecture, Hands-on
2d
OEB90 exercise, Demonstration
Objectives
be able to:
Perform USN9810 commissioning.
Target Audience
Perform UGW9811 commissioning.

Duration
2 working days
Engineers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
876
29.1.30 USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe system structure and hardware
USN ATCA platform Operation and

Lecture, Hands-on
2d
OEB9B
structure of USN9810.
Perform software related installation and
upgrade procedure.
Perform hardware operation and maintenance.
Target Audience
including security management, system
information management, alarm management,
Engineers
trace management ,data management, license

management ,performance management.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Successful completion of the program EPC

Principle Fundamental Training.
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
877
29.1.31 USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G)

Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration

Training (4G)
Lecture, Hands-on
3d
OEB9B

be able to:
Describe the functions of protocol stacks of
different interfaces.
Perform configuration of USN hardware,
Target Audience
System Information, interworking with eNodeB,

HSS, MME, S-GW, DNS and NTP.
Perform configuration of mobility management
Engineers
and session management.
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Successful completion of the program EPC USN
Min 6, Max 12
878
29.1.32 USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)

Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data

Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
Lecture, Hands-on
9d
OEB9B exercise, Demonstration
be able to:
Describe the functions of protocol stacks of
different interfaces.
Perform configuration of USN hardware,
Target Audience
System Information, interworking with eNodeB,

HSS, MME, S-GW, DNS, NTP and GGSN.
Perform configuration of mobility management
Engineers
and session management.
Prerequisites
Duration
9 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
879
29.1.33 USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)

Training Path

USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration

Training (2G/3G)
Lecture, Hands-on
7d
OEB91
Objectives
be able to:
Perform configuration of SGSN hardware, Gb,
Target Audience
Iu-PS, Gn/Ga, Gr and basic service

configuration.
Duration
Engineers
7 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
880
29.1.34 USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training

Training Path

Objectives
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OEB31

2d
be able to:
Understand principle of international roaming.
Master roaming data configuration of
Target Audience
SGSN/GGSN/DNS/FW.
Understand principle of APN rectify.
Master data configurations of APN rectify.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
881
29.1.35 UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G)

Training Path
EPC UGW Routine Operation and
Lecture, Hands-on
be able to:
structure of UGW9811.
Perform software related installation and
2d
upgrade procedure.
Perform hardware operation and maintenance.
Target Audience
including authorization management, system
information management, alarm management,
Engineers
trace management ,log management, license

management ,patch management ,data backup
Prerequisites
and restore.
Duration

2 working days
Successful completion of the program EPC
Class Size
Principle Training.
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
882
29.1.36 UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G)

Training Path
Objectives
EPC UGW Data Configuration Training
be able to:
Lecture, Hands-on
OEB30
4d
Perform data configuration of S1-U/S11,S5/S8

and SGi interfaces Describe basic concept of
VPN,APN and charging.
Target Audience
Perform configuration of VPN, APN and

charging.
Describe the SA principles, content based
Engineers
charging principles and PCC concepts.
Prerequisites
Perform configuration of the SA function,

service control function and PCC.

Duration

Successful completion of the program of EPC
4 working days
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance
Class Size
Training.
Min 6, Max 12
883
29.1.37 UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)

Training Path
Objectives
UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data

OED99
Lecture
be able to:
5d
Perform data configuration of S1-U/S11,S5/S8

and SGi interfaces Describe basic concept of
Target Audience

charging.
Describe the SA principles ,content based
Engineers
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days

Training.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
884
29.1.38 UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)

Training Path
Objectives
UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training

OED99
Lecture
be able to:
4d
Perform data Describe basic concept of

Target Audience

charging.
Describe the SA principles, content based
Engineers
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
Class Size

Training.
Min 6, Max 12
885
29.1.39 MME POOL Training

Training Path

MME POOL Training

Lecture, Hands-on
Training.
Objectives
2d

be able to:
Target Audience
Understand principle of MME pool.

Master data configuration of MME pool.
Duration
Engineers
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
886
29.1.40 EPC VOLTE Solution Training

Training Path

Training.
EPC VOLTE Solution Training

OEB33
Lecture
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Target Audience
Understand signaling analysis of SRVCC.

Understand signaling analysis of CSFB.
Duration

Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

887
29.1.41 eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training

Training Path

Training.
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature

Training
1d
OED99
Lecture
Objectives
be able to:
Target Audience
Understand of the Feature of eMBMS Smart

Content Delivery.

Duration

Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

888
29.1.42 EPC Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
EPC Troubleshooting Training

Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives
be able to:
3d
Describe USN9810/UGW9811 EMM / ESM

troubleshooting method.
Common USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
Target Audience
related troubleshooting case study.

Senior maintenance Engineers, Specialist, Experts
Perform USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
Prerequisites
related fault located with signaling analysis.

Duration

3 working days
Class Size
EPC USN Data Configuration Training.

Min 6, Max 12
EPC UGW Data Configuration Training.
889
29.1.43 SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training

Training Path
Know about Huawei Single EPC solution.

Describe the Single EPC FUP solution and its
SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training

OEY00
Lecture, LVC
successful cases.
Describe the Single EPC SA solution and its
1d
successful cases.
Describe the Single EPC visualization solution
Target Audience
and its successful cases.
Describe the Single EPC online charging
Prerequisites
solution and its successful cases.

Duration

1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Outline the development trend of the mobile
broadband.
890
29.1.44 EPC Network Planning and Design Training

Training Path
EPC Network Planning and Design
Training
Lecture, Case-study,
OEA07
discussion
Product Survey Training

Objectives
2d
be able to:
Describe EPC planning and designing steps.
Determine IP address, QoS, APN needs for
Target Audience
different services.
PS Network Planning Engineers, System Design
Determine capacity for different interfaces.
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts
Determine the internetworking for different
Prerequisites
interfaces.
Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Protocol and Procedure Training.

891
29.1.45 UPCC ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training (UPCC HSS)
Training Path
Objectives
UPCC Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWR20 exercise, Demonstration

be able to:
2d
Describe the function, internetworking, and

features of UPCC.
Describe the software and hardware
Target Audience
architecture, boards and service flow of UPCC.

Perform daily O/M for UPCC.
Perform UPCC redundancy.
Engineers
Perform UPCC system commissioning.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
892
29.1.46 UPCC Data Configuration Training

Training Path
Objectives
UPCC Data Configuration Training
be able to:
Lecture, Hands-on
OWR21
2d
UPCC hardware data configuration.

UPCC BE data configuration.
UPCC FE data configuration.
Target Audience
UPCC redundancy principle.
Second line Maintenance Engineers, support
UPCC redundancy interworking.
Engineers.
UPCC redundancy data configuration.
Prerequisites
UPCC system commissioning commands.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Successful completion of the program of UPCC

Operation and Maintenance Training.
Min 6, Max 12
893
29.1.47 UPCC Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training

Training Path
Configuration of Service, Quota, Account,

Policy, Rule, Notification, Condition Group,
UPCC Service Policy Configuration and

Analysis Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWR22
Action Group, Service Flow, Rating and

Roaming etc.
2d
Introduction of PGW Web LMT.

How UPCC subscriber information is
Target Audience
configured on the PGW.
Second line Maintenance Engineers, support
Volume based FUP service analysis.
Engineers.
Volume based FUP service configuration.
PCC Service Planning Engineers, System Design
Volume based FUP service verification.
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts.
Time section based policy analysis.

Time section based policy configuration.
Prerequisites
Time section based policy verification.
Introduction of UPCC System Architecture.
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Introduction of UPCC Web UI.
Min 6, Max 12
Overview of Subscriber Policy Configuration.
894
29.1.48 UPCC Service Policy Application and Design Training

Training Path
UPCC Service Policy Application and
Design Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWR23 exercise, Demonstration
concepts Such as Objects, Condition and

Action etc.
Typical service scenarios requirement analysis,
service disassemble and configuration.
2d
Perform UPCC-GGSN scenarios statistic rules

requirement analysis, service disassemble and
Target Audience
configuration.
Perform UPCC-GGSN scenarios dynamic rules
PCC Network Planning Engineers, System Design
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts.
configuration.
Prerequisites
Perform UPCC-SIG scenarios statistic rules

configuration.
Duration
Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training.

2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe service policy configuration Principle.
Describe service policy configuration key
895
29.1.49 UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Objectives
UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and

Lecture, Hands-on
1d
OWR24

be able to:
Introduce Diameter Protocol flow and
messages.
Describe DCCA Protocol flow and messages.
Target Audience
Describe PCC service signaling flow messages

analysis and key parameter.
Describe Gx Troubleshooting Methods.
Prerequisites
Perform Gx Interface troubleshooting based on

signaling analysis.

Duration

1 working day
Class Size
Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training.
Min 6, Max 12
896
29.1.50 EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Describe HSS9820V900R006 board function.

Describe HSS9820 signaling flow.
EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OHC10/OEC90 exercise, Demonstration 4d
Describe HSS9820 software structure.

Perform installation of operation PGW client.
Perform the method of adding or deleting
subscriber.
Target Audience
Modify subscription according to customer

requirement.

Perform configuration of subscription data.
Engineers
Describe the steps of HSS9820 data
Prerequisites
configuration.
Perform hardware and system data
configuration.
and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP
Perform interface data configuration.
and GPRS Principle.
Objectives
validity.
Perform basic debugging of SAE-HSS9820.
be able to:
Duration
Describe HSS9820V900R006 product function

4 working days
and application.
Class Size
Describe HSS9820V900R006 interface

protocol function.
Min 6, Max 12
Describe HSS9820V900R006 physical and

logical structure.
897
29.1.51 iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
M2000 Routine Operation and
Lecture, Hands-on
OWL21
exercise
be able to:
configuration and interfaces of the M2000.
2d
Describe the software structure of the M2000

equipment, the functions of different parts.
Target Audience

of M2000 client.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
communication.
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
898
29.1.52 DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Describe the main functions and key features

of DNS9816 equipment.
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
1d
OEN11
Describe the theory of system realizing and

query procedure of DNS9816 equipment.
architecture of DNS9816 equipment.
Target Audience
Perform the basic data configurations of

DNS9816 equipment.
Perform the data configurations of optional
features about equipment.
Engineers.
Perform the routine operation and
Prerequisites
maintenance.
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
899
29.1.53 uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
UAG Operation and Maintenance Training

Lecture, Hands-on
4d
OWB34
exercise
be able to:
UAG equipment.
Explain the functions of different boards in
Target Audience
UAG.
Perform the hardware, eIU, Iu-PS, Iu-Cs and
AHR/NTP interface data configuration of UAG.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
900
29.1.54 WASN Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

structure of WASN9770.
WASN9770 Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OXE30
exercise
Describe signaling flow and message.

Perform operation and maintenance of
5d
hardware and software.

Perform data configuration of basic service,
Target Audience
route and VPN.

Describe typical application scenarios of IP-CS

authentication access, Mobile IP, hot-lining,
Engineers
Eth-CS.
Perform system commissioning and
Prerequisites
performance management.
Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
901
29.1.55 MAG9811 Engineer Training

Training Path
be able to:
Understand principle of AP and Subscriber
MAG9811 Engineer Training

Lecture, Hands-on
OXC11
accessing like some concept of PPPOE and

DHCP.
3d
Understand WLAN network structure solution.

Understand MAG9811 software and hardware
Target Audience
structure.
Master MAG9811 Routine O/M.
Master MAG9811 data configuration.
Engineers
Master MAG9811 Subscriber management.
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
902
29.1.56 CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
4d
OWX90
exercise
be able to:
Master principle of WAG.
Describe WAG hardware structure.
Master WAG software structure.
Target Audience
Master WAG routine operation and
maintenance.
Master WAG interface data configuration.
Engineers
Master WAG service provisioning and related
Prerequisites
skill.
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
903
29.1.57 CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
7d
ORP03
exercise
be able to:
Perform the routine and emergency operation
of CDMA PDSN equipments.
Perform data configuration for equipment
Target Audience
interconnection and charging of PDSN.

Implement data configuration for service of
CDMA PDSN.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
904
29.1.58 CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Describe HA system structure and function.

Describe HA hardware structure.
CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
ORH21
Master HA software structure.

Master HA routine operation and maintenance.
4d
Master HA interface data configuration and

system data configuration.
Target Audience
Describe principle of content based charging
and Principle of VPN and related data
configuration.
Engineers
Describe principle of content based charging.
Prerequisites
Describe CSN/Mobile IP/Domain/Follow control

feature and related data configuration.
Describe User Profile structure.
Duration

Objectives
4 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
905
29.1.59 CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta Training

Training Path
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and
Maintenance Delta Training
Lecture, Hands-on
ORH20
Objectives
be able to:
2d
Describe HA system structure and function.

Master deference between HA and PDSN.
Describe HA hardware structure.
Target Audience
Master HA software structure.
Master HA routine operation and maintenance.
Master HA interface data configuration and
Engineers
system data configuration.
Prerequisites
Describe principle of content based charging.
Describe CSN/Mobile IP/Follow control feature.
Duration
2 working days
Successful completion of the program of CDMA
Class Size
PDSN Operation and Maintenance.
Min 6, Max 12
906
29.1.60 PS Netview Training

Training Path
Objectives
PS Netview Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWV21
be able to:
2d
Describe PS Netview architecture, hardware

deployment and feature Function.
Grasp PS Netview Typical networking,
Target Audience
Software installation.
Perform service report configuration and
Maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
907
29.1.61 PS Nastar Training

Training Path
Objectives
PS Nastar Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWT12
be able to:
2d
Describe PS Nastar architecture, hardware

deployment and feature Function.
Grasp PS Nastar Typical networking, Software
Target Audience
installation.
Perform Client Service Operation, configuration
and Maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
908
29.1.62 PS SUR Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

SUR9815 Operation and Maintenance

Training
Lecture, Hands-on
OWU20
exercise
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Target Audience
Describe the hardware structure of SUR.

Perform software installation of SUR.
Engineers
of SUR.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
communication.
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
909
29.1.63 PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR)

Training Path

PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR)

Lecture, Hands-on
2d
OWW01 exercise, Demonstration

Objectives
Target Audience
be able to:
Master function and system structure of PRS.
Master hardware deployment.
Engineers
Master PRS operation and maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
communication.
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
910
29.1.64 GPRS Fundamental (WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
GPRS Fundamental (WBT)

OWA31
WBT
be able to:
0.25d
Describe the UMTS PS Network Structure.

Describe the PS Core Network interface and
Target Audience
Protocol.
Describe the PS Core Network Working
Principle.

Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
0.25 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
911
29.1.65 GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT)

OWB00
WBT
be able to:
0.5d
Analysis RANAP/MAP/Gx/Gy Protocol.

Target Audience
of RANAP/MAP/Gx/Gy protocol.
Duration
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Engineers, System

Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts
0.5 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
912
29.1.66 GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT)

OWB01
WBT
be able to:
0.3d
Analysis GTP Protocol.

Target Audience
of GTP protocol.
Duration
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Engineers, System

Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts
0.3 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
913
29.1.67 EPC Principle (WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
EPC Principle (WBT)

OEB00
WBT
be able to:
1d
A general understanding of mobile

communication and data communication.
Target Audience

Duration

Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
914
29.1.68 EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT)

Training Path
Product Survey Training.

Objectives
EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT)

OEA00
Lecture

2d
be able to:
Perform signaling flow and key parameters
Target Audience
analysis for EPC, including attach, detach, TAU,
EPC Engineers and Experts, PS Network Planning
S1-release, handover, service-request and
Engineers, System Design Engineers
security procedures.
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP.

Successful completion of the program of EPC Data
Min 6, Max 12
Configuration Training.
915
29.1.69 EPC Health Check (WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (MME) Introduction to USN

Information Collection and Health Check
Tools
1d
OEB22
Lecture

be able to:
Versatile Tools Suite (VTS)-related operations.
Information collection and health check
Target Audience
scenarios supported by the unified service

node (USN).
Methods of using the VTS for information
collection and health check.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day

and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
916
29.1.70 EPC Data Management (WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
EPC Data Management (WBT)

OEB01
WBT
be able to:
0.3d
Understand EPC data management principle.

Master EPC data management method.
Target Audience
Master EPC data management basic

procedure.

Duration

Engineers
0.3 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
917
29.1.71 EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT)

OEB02
WBT
be able to:
0.3d
Understand basic alarm.

Understand basic method of alarm monitoring
Target Audience
and management.
Duration

0.3 working day
Engineers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12

918
29.1.72 EPC Product Survey (WBT)

Training Path
be able to:
Outline the main function, features and key
EPC Product Survey Training (WBT)

OEB10
WBT
specification of USN9810.
0.5d
specification of UGW9811.
Target Audience
specification of UPCC.
specification of SAE-HSS9820.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
919
29.1.73 IPv6 Feature Training

Training Path

IPv6 Solution for PS / EPC

Lecture, Hands-on
OEY00
Objectives
1d

be able to:
Describe the IPv6 implementation for PS and
Target Audience
EPC.
Describe the data configuration for IPv6
solution in PS and EPC.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

920
29.2
MBB Training Courses
29.2.1 Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile Internet

Training Path
Understand the development trend of telecom

services and cutting-edge technologies of the
mobile Internet.
Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile

Internet
OEY10
Lecture
Understand challenges faced by carriers and
1d
business mode changes.

Understand the MBB operation solution.
Target Audience
Improve the all-service operation capability.
Managers of carriers
Improve the capabilities of developing and
Prerequisites
operating mobile Internet products.

Duration
With basic knowledge of mobile

communications.
1 working day
With experience in telecom operation.
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
921
29.2.2 Smart MBB Network Solution

Training Path
Understand how to implement the key

technologies in the smart MBB solution.
Smart MBB Network Solution

OEY11
Lecture
Understand how to implement the signaling

optimization technologies for smart terminals.
2d
Understand how to implement and apply the

differentiated bandwidth control solution.
Target Audience
Understand the E2E QoE terminal experience
Network planning personnel and technical
and visualization.
managers
Understand the features of the WiFi Offload
Prerequisites
solution.
Duration
With experience in telecom operation

management or Network Planning.
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Understand the features of the Smart MBB
network.
922
29.2.3 QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued Subscribers and Services

Training Path
QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued
Subscribers and Services
Lecture, Hands-on
OEY12
Understand QoS mapping in the core network,

radio network, and data communication
domains.
Understand the recommended QoS
1.5d
configurations for user subscription.

Understand the QoS deployment for PCC
Target Audience
service policies.
Understand the impact of inter-system
Wireless mobile broadband technical engineers
handover on the QoS.
Prerequisites
Understand the QoS processing on the

With experience in mobile network planning and
wireless side.
maintenance.
Understand the QoS processing on UEs.
With experience in technical management.
Be familiar with the E2E QoS configurations.
Objectives
Be familiar with the QoS deployment in typical

scenarios.

Duration
be able to:
Understand the architecture of the 3GPP E2E
1.5 working days
QoS.
Class Size
Understand the definitions and applications of

Min 6, Max 12
QoS parameters.
Understand the process of QoS negotiation.
923
29.2.4 MBB Signaling Optimization for Smart Terminal

Training Path
be able to:
Know the challenge of Smartphone signaling
MBB Signaling Optimization for Smart

Terminal
OEY13
Lecture
storm.
Know PS Smartphone signaling optimization
1.5d
feature.
Know RAN Smartphone fast dormancy feature.
Target Audience
Duration
1.5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
With basic knowledge about mobile
Min 6, Max 12
communications and data communication.

Objectives
924
29.2.5 MBB QoE Improvement Solution

Training Path
manageable architecture of the MBB E2E

mobile data service quality.
MBB QoE Improvement Solution

Lecture, Hands-on
OEY14
Understand the MBB O/M for excellence,

including visualized/smart O/M, VIP valued
1.5d
service, and QoE improvement.

Demonstrate service scenarios of the SEQ
Target Audience
Analyst, including KQI presentation and

management and applications of the SEQ
Analyst.
Prerequisites
Be familiar with typical service (WAP and Web)

With basic knowledge about mobile
KQI modeling, the QoS KQI system, and
communications and PS communication.
association between KQIs and KPIs.
With experience in mobile data service
Duration
assessment and optimization.

1.5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Understand the assessable, visual, and
925
30 Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Path

CSOFTX3000 Training Path
CDMA NSS Softswitch
For all Technical and non-technical personnel
CSOFTX3000(ATCA) Routine
Training
CSOFTX3000(CPCI) Routine
Training
For Field/1st line

Technicians
For Field/1st line

Technicians
CSOFTX3000 Delta Training
For Field/1st line

Technicians
OR
CSOFTX3000 Advanced
Training
For NMC/ 2nd line

Engineers
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis

Training
CDMA NSS Planning and

Dimensioning Training
For Senior Engineers, Specialist and Expert

For Target Audience
Diagram 1 COSFTX3000 Training Path
926
UMG8900 Training Path
CDMA NSS Softswitch

For all Technical and non-technical personnel
UMG8900 Operation and

For Field Technicians,

Engineers
UMG8900 Advanced
Training
For NMC/ 2nd line

Engineers
For Target Audience
Diagram 2 UMG8900 Training Path
927
CDMA MSC61 Training Path
CDMA MSC61 Operation

For Field Technicians,

Engineers
For Target Audience
Diagram 3 CDMA MSC61 Training Path
928
31 Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Courses

Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 Delta Training
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training
6 ~ 12
CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training
6~8
CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
10
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
CSOFTX3000 Training Courses
UMG8900 Training Courses
CDMA MSC61 Training Courses

CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance Training
929
31.1
CSOFTX3000 Training
31.1.1 CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training

Training Path
Describe the Networking and Interfaces of

CDMA LMSD network.
Describe the fundamental of CDMA Softswitch
CDMA NSS Softswitch Fundamental

ORL01
Lecture
technology.
2d
Describe the number planning of CDMA.

Describe the service area of CDMA system.
Describe CDMA location update flow in CDMA
Target Audience
LMSD network.
This course is designed for personnel who need to
Describe CDMA calling/called flow in CDMA
know basic knowledge of CDMA softswitch
LMSD network.
network and Huawei CDMA NSS products.
Describe various bear establishment flows in
Prerequisites
CDMA LMSD network.

Duration
None.
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6max 12
Outline the development of CDMA Softswitch

structure.
Describe the architecture of CDMA NSS part.
930
31.1.2 CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Systems.
Describe the CSOFTX3000 cascade
structures.
Describe the function, indicators, ports and
2d
Lecture
ORL01
working mode of each board.
Prerequisites

different fibers and cables.
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(CPCI)

ORL10
Lecture
Describe the internal control signaling

processing flows in CSOFTX3000.
1d
Describe internal signaling processing flows in

CSOFTX3000.
Explain the basic hardware configuration rules
CSOFTX3000 Basic Data Configuration(CPCI)
for CSOFTX3000, and calculate parts number

ORL30
4d
and type for typical networking requirement.

Explain the architecture of CSOFTX3000,
hardware and software components of
CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and

Maintenance(CPCI)
ORL21
CSOFTX3000 operation and maintenance

system.
3d
Manage BAM server, for example: checking its

working status and version.
Target Audience
Use CSOFTX3000 operation and maintenance

tool--LMT.
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance

Engineers;
Manage authorities of users.
Technical Support Engineers.
Perform operations on the alarm console.
Prerequisites
Manage equipments, for example: checking

board status and version.
At least one year experience of operation and
maintenance of GSM NSS/CDMA NSS or other
data, executing MML commands.
telecommunication equipments;
Manage logs, for example: querying logs,
Being familiar with MS Windows Operation
saving logs.
System;
Manage tracing tasks, for example: creating a
A basic knowledge of telecommunications;
tracing task, checking tracing result, saving
Successful completion of the programs CDMA
result.
NSS Softswitch Fundamental Training.
Check status of the traffic tasks, start/stop the
Objectives
tasks on performance console.
Query the CDRs on bill console.
be able to:
Describe the system functions of
tasks (daily, weekly and monthly).
CSOFTX3000.
Manage iGWB server
Describe the CSOFTX3000 key characteristics.
Perform Checking billing system
Describe the CSOFTX3000 Hardware
Describe the CSOFTX3000 data configuration

931
method and procedure.
Verify the system status after configuration and

modification.
Configure data to new MGW.

Duration
Configure data to new BSC.

Configure data to new office direction.
8 working days
Perform the dynamic data configuration and
Class Size
modification.
Min 6max 12

validity.
932
31.1.3 CSOFTX3000 Delta Training

Training Path

CSOFTX3000.
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) O&M Training

Systems.
Prerequisites

structures.
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(ATCA)

ORL11
2d

Target Audience


Engineers;

CSOFTX3000.
Prerequisites
Successful completion of the programs
CSOFTX3000CPCI) Routine Operation and
Duration
Maintenance Training and UMG8900 and
2 working days
HLR9820 Operation and Maintenance Training
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12

be able to:
933
31.1.4 CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Systems.
structures.
2d
Lecture
ORL01
Prerequisites

CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(ATCA)

ORL11
Lecture
2d

CSOFTX3000.
CSOFTX3000 Basic Data Configuration(ATCA)

ORL32
5d

Describe the CSOFTX3000 system functions,

Maintenance(ATCA)
ORL22
structures and key characteristics.

1d

Perform the data configuration to MGW, BSC,
Target Audience
and PSTN.
CDMA NSS Field Maintenance Technicians;

modification.

Engineers;
Perform operation through LMT.
Backup system data, execute MML commands,

etc.
Prerequisites
Manage tracing tasks.
Monitor alarms of CSOFTX3000.
Describe the CSOFTX3000 data configuration
System;
Configure data to new MGW.
Successful completion of the programs CDMA
Configure data to new BSC.
NSS Softswitch Fundamental Training.
Configure data to new office direction.
Objectives

modification.
be able to:
validity.
CSOFTX3000.
modification.
934

Duration
Class Size
Min 6max 12
8 working days
935
31.1.5 CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Know dual-home fundamental.
Configure the data for dual-homing system
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) O&M Training or

CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) O&M Training
Perform the operation on dual-homing network.

Perform the operation on Multi-area network.
Prerequisites
Perform number analysis for Mobility

Management KPI.
Softswitch Service Deployment

ORL31
Perform analysis for Mobility Management KPI.

Perform analysis for Service KPI.
2d
Perform analysis for System load KPI.

Perform operation on billing system.
Perform complex number analysis.
Special Topic
Perform integrative trouble shooting for location

ORL33
2d
update.
Perform integrative trouble shooting for call
processing.
CSOFTX3000 Troubleshooting
Perform integrative trouble shooting for SMS

service.
ORL40 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Case 2 d
Perform integrative trouble shooting for call

Supplementary service.
Target Audience
Perform integrative trouble shooting for

performance
Engineers;
charging system.

Duration
Prerequisites
6 working days
Class Size

Maintenance Training and UMG8900
Min 6max 12

Objectives
936
31.1.6 CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training

Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
CSOFTX3000 Advanced O&M Training
Analyze H.248 signaling protocol.

Analyze SIP signaling protocol.
Prerequisites
Analyze MAP signaling protocol.

Describe the detailed communication flow in
CDMA softswitch network.
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis

ORL55
Analyze the bearer establishment flows of

3d
various cases.
Analyze the important parameters in the
Target Audience
messages.
Analyze and locate the signaling problem of
core network.
Engineers;
Duration

Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size

Min 6max 12

937
31.1.7 CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training

Training Path

CSOFTX3000 Advanced O&M Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
Describe the concept and parameter about
core network design and planning.
CDMA NSS Design and Planning

ORL56

Case
Calculate the network signaling bandwidth.

3d
Calculate the network voice channel

bandwidth.
Design the signaling network.
Target Audience
Design the traffic network.
Duration
Engineers;
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6max 8
938
31.2
UMG8900 Training
31.2.1 CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path


ORL01

2d
Lecture
Prerequisites
processing flows in UMG8900.

Describe the various bearer (TDM/IP)
processing flows in UMG8900.
UMG8900 Hardware System(R8) or

UMG8900 Hardware System(R9)
ORM10/11
Lecture
1d
for UMG8900, and calculate parts number and

type for typical networking requirement.
Explain the architecture of UMG8900,
UMG8900 Data Configuration

ORM30
hardware and software components of

UMG8900 O&M system.
3d
Use UMG8900 operation and maintenance

tool--LMT.
Perform operations on the alarm console.
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance

ORM21
1d
board status and version.

Manage data, for example: backuping MML
Target Audience
script, executing MML commands.

CDMA NSS Field Maintenance Technicians;
saving logs.
Operation and Maintenance Engineers;
Prerequisites
saving result.
Check status of the traffic tasks, start/stop the
tasks on performance console.
System;
Describe the UMG8900 data configuration
Objectives
Edit hardware data scripts.

Edit H.248 data scripts.
Edit SG data scripts.
be able to:
Edit bearer data, including TDM, IP.
Describe the system functions of UMG8900.
Complete the initial data configuration file.
Describe the UMG8900 key characteristics.
Describe the UMG8900 hardware structures.
modification.
Describe the UMG8900 cascade structures.

939

Duration

validity.
5 working days
Class Size
modification.
Min 6max 12
940
31.2.2 CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
maintenance of CDMA NSS.

Objectives

be able to:
Perform trouble shooting for signaling
Prerequisites
Perform trouble shooting for voice

Perform trouble shooting for IP bearer
UMG8900 Troubleshooting
ORM40
Perform integrative trouble shooting for most

2d
kind of service.
performance.
Know the UMG8900 IP interface
UMG8900 Special Topic

ORM41
Lecture
Perform the UMG8900 IP network planning
1d
Describe the application of UMG8900 in MSC

pool solution.
Target Audience
Perform operation and maintenance on

UMG8900 based on MSC pool network.

Engineers,
Duration
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6max 12
UMG8900 Routine Operation and Maintenance

Training;
At least two year experience of operation and
941
31.3
CDMA MSC61 Training
31.3.1 CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the basic structure and features of the
CDMA system.
CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance

ORC30
Lecture
Describe the functions and features of the
10 d
CDMA MSC61 system.

Describe the hardware configuration of the
CDMA MSC61 system.
Target Audience
Implement the data configuration of the CDMA

MSC61 system.
Engineers;
Implement the routine operation and
maintenance of the CDMA MSC61 system.
Prerequisites
Execute commands to resolve the basic faults.

Register performance tasks and query alarm
information through LMT.
maintenance of telecommunication equipments

Duration

System
10 working days
A basic knowledge of mobile communications
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6max 12
942
32 Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Path

32.1
WCDMA-CS Training Path

GSM/UMTS Softswitch
Fundamental
UMG8900 Hardware System

Training
MSOFTX3000 Hardware
System Training

MSOFTX3000 Operation
UMG8900 Data
MSOFTX3000 Data
MSS Troubleshooting
Training
MSS Service Provision

Training
GSM/UMTS Typical
Signaling Flow Training
Number Translation
Training
GSM/UMTS Softswitch
Core Network Design
SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ

Analyst Operation and Maintenance
Training
MSS Signaling Analysis

Training
MSS IP
Technology
MSS Common Emergency Operation
AoIP
and Troubleshooting Practice
Training
GSM/UMTS Softswitch
Core Network Optimization
SmartCare NetView Core

Training
943
MSC POOL Training
2G/3G Core Network

Sharing Training
32.2
GSM-R Training Path
GTSOFTX3000 Product
Training
GSM-R UMG8900 Product

Training
GSM-R Feature Training
32.3
UGC Training Path
UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway

Office) Operation and Maintenance
Training
32.4
SmartCare Training Path
SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ

Analyst Operation and Maintenance
Training
SmartCare NetView Core Training
944
33 Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Courses

Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental Training
6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System Training
6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Data Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System Training
6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Data Configuration Training
6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
MSS Service Provision Training
6 ~ 12
GU UMG8900 Hardware System Training
6 ~ 12
GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
UMG8900
6 ~ 12
GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow Training
6 ~ 12
MSS Signaling Analysis Training
6 ~ 12
Number Translation Training
6 ~ 12
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Design Training
6 ~ 12
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Evaluation and

6 ~ 12
MSC POOL Training
6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta Training
6 ~ 12
MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI)
6 ~ 12
2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training
6 ~ 12
MSS IP Technology Training
6 ~ 12
SmartCare Netview CoreTraining
6 ~ 12
MSS Troubleshooting Training
6 ~ 12
AoIP Training
6 ~ 12
MSS Common Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting

Practice
2~6
MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT)
4H
No limit
GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network Principle(WBT)
1H
No limit
MSC POOL Principle(WBT)
1H
No limit
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
WCDMA-CS
Data Configuration Training
945
UMG8900 System Overview(WBT)
1H
No limit
MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and Principle(WBT)
2H
No limit
GU CS Core Network Design Overview(WBT)
0.5H
No limit
GTSOFTX3000 Product Training
10
6 ~ 12
GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
6 ~ 12
GSM-R
UGC
UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway Office) Operation and
SmartCare
SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ Analyst Operation and
946
33.1
WCDMA-CS Training Courses
33.1.1 Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental Training

Training Path
Describe architecture of UMTS R4 system

Describe interfaces in UMTS R4
Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental

OWA02
Lectures, LVC
Describe protocols in Circuit Switch domain of

R4
1d
Describe call procedure in Circuit Switch

domain of R4
Describe Features of Core Network
GSM/UMTS Softswitch Products Overview

OWG01
Lectures, LVC
Describe system structure of MSOFTX3000

and UMG8900
1d
Describe functions and services provided by

Target Audience
MSOFTX3000 and UMG8900

Describe typical networking and application of
Prerequisites
Duration
None
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
947
33.1.2 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System Training

Training Path
Objectives
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System

OWG10
Lectures, LVC
be able to:
1d
Describe logical structures of MSOFTX3000

Describe the board functions of MSOFTX3000
Target Audience
Describe the internal connection and cables of

MSOFTX3000
Core network monitor engineers

Duration
Installation engineers
Commissioning engineers
1 working day
Operation and maintenance engineers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
A basic knowledge of mobile communication
948
33.1.3 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Data Configuration Training

Training Path
MSOFTX3000 and HLR (MTP-based

networking mode, M2UA-based networking
MSOFTX3000(CPCI) data configuration

OWG21
Lectures, Hands-on
mode, M3UA-based non-peer-to-peer

networking mode, M3UA-based peer-to-peer
6d
networking mode, STP-transferred networking
Exercise
mode)
Target Audience
Perform interworking configuration between

MSOFTX3000 and BSC (MTP-based
Core network commissioning engineers
Prerequisites
networking mode, Mini-A-Flex networking

mode, IP-based A interface)
Perform interworking configuration
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(CPCI)
MSOFTX3000 and PSTN (networking mode
Hardware System Training"
based on MTP, M2UA, M3UA)
Objectives

MSOFTX3000 and RNC (M3UA
be able to:
Non-Peer-to-Peer, Iu-Flex, IP-Based Iu
Describe configuration flow of local office
Interface)
integration
Perform hardware configuration of
MSOFTX3000 and MSC (ISUP over MTP,
MSOFTX3000
ISUP over M3UA, BICC over M3UA, SIP-I)
Perform physical port configuration of
Verify the configuration result
MSOFTX3000
Duration
Perform the interconnection between

6 working days
Class Size
Perform the local office information (SPC, MCC,

MNC, MSRN) configuration
Min 6, Max 12
949
33.1.4 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Perform alarm management (browsing alarms,

querying alarms, printing alarms, dumping
alarm logs)
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and

Maintenance
OWG23
Lectures, Hands-on
Perform performance management ( creating
3d
performance measurement tasks, customizing
Exercise
performance entity, dumping the result of
Target Audience
measurement)
Perform iGWB operation(checking status of
processes, browsing CDR, checking hard disk
space, iGWB switchover)
Prerequisites
Query equipment status
Query resource information
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(CPCI)
Query the service status
Replace board or cable
Objectives
Duration
3 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Operate BAM process and manager
Min 6, Max 12
Check BAM status

Backup and restore system
950
33.1.5 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System Training

Training Path
functions
Describe MSOFTX3000 peripherals and other
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System

OWG11
Lectures, LVC
components
Describe MSOFTX3000 internal connection
1d
and external connection

Describe logical system architecture of
Target Audience
MSOFTX3000
Describe the signaling processing flow, service
processing flow, maintenance processing flow,
alarm management flow of MSOFTX3000
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe MSOFTX3000 boards and its
951
33.1.6 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Data Configuration Training

Training Path

MSOFTX3000 and HLR (MTP-based
MSOFTX3000(ATCA) data configuration

OWG22
Lectures, Hands-on

6d
networking mode, M3UA-based peer-to-peer
Exercise
networking mode, STP-transferred networking

mode)
Target Audience
MSOFTX3000 and BSC (MTP-based
Prerequisites

networking mode, Mini-A-Flex networking
mode, IP-based A interface)
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(ATCA)
MSOFTX3000 and PSTN (networking mode
Objectives
based on MTP, M2UA, M3UA)

be able to:
MSOFTX3000 and RNC (M3UA
Install the host software and local maintenance
Non-Peer-to-Peer, Iu-Flex, IP-Based Iu
software after MGC and MGW hardware
Interface)
installation
Describe configuration flow of local office
MSOFTX3000 and MSC (ISUP over MTP,
integration
ISUP over M3UA, BICC over M3UA, SIP-I)
Perform hardware configuration of
Verify the configuration result
MSOFTX3000
Duration
Perform physical port configuration of

6 working days
MSOFTX3000
Class Size
Perform the interconnection between

Min 6, Max 12
Perform the local office information (SPC, MCC,

MNC, MSRN) configuration
952
33.1.7 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Operating the tracing task

Perform the alarm operation
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and

Maintenance
OWG24
Lectures, Hands-on
Querying Logs
Perform security management
3d
Perform the OMU status checking
Exercise
Perform the License management
Target Audience
Perform the Database processes starting and

stopping
Perform the system backup and recovery
Perform the service checking
Prerequisites
Perform the replacing boards
Perform the iGWB configuration and
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(ATCA)
maintenance
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Perform the device management
953
33.1.8 MSS Service Provision Training

Training Path
Configure call service, USSD service

Changing the resource of VLR
MSS Service Provision

OWG31
Lectures, Hands-on
Setting authentication configuration and cipher

configuration
5d
Configure roaming data in MSC Server
Exercise
Configure IN service in MSC Server
Target Audience
Adjusting the load among SS7 trunk routes

Adjusting the load among M3UA or MTP3
signaling links
Makeup tone file
Prerequisites
Setting announcement configuration

Adding an MSISDN number segment
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000 Data
Modifying a route in an office direction
Configuration Training" and "UMG8900 Data
Duration
Configuration Training"
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size

be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Configure roaming restriction
954
33.1.9 GU UMG8900 Hardware System Training

Training Path
Objectives
GU UMG8900 Hardware System

OWH10
Lectures, LVC
be able to:
1d
Describe UMG8900 hardware structure

Describe UMG8900 logical architecture
Target Audience
Describe UMG8900 software architecture
Describe UMG8900 Cascading System
Describe main boards' functions of UMG8900
Describe Internal message processing flow
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
955
33.1.10 GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance

Training
2d
OWH23
Lectures, Hands-on
be able to:
Exercise
Operate performance task
Target Audience
Perform system backup and recovery

Replace the hardware boards
Prerequisites
Replace the cable

Duration

Successful completion of "GU UMG8900
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
956
33.1.11 UMG8900
Data Configuration Training
Training Path
be able to:
Perform hardware and hardware interface
GU UMG8900 Data Configuration Training

OWH22
Lectures, Hands-on
configuration
Perform bearer(IP, TDM, ATM) configuration on
2d
UMG8900
Exercise
Perform UMG8900 interworking with BSC
Target Audience
Perform UMG8900 interworking with

MSC/PSTN
Perform UMG8900 interworking with RNC
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
maintenance of Huawei UMG8900

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
957
33.1.12 GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow Training

Training Path
be able to:
Analysis key parameters of location update
GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow

Training
OWA03
Lectures, Hands-on
flow
Perform configuration related location update
3d
Perform authentication and encryption flow
Exercise
analysis
Target Audience
Perform configuration related authentication

and encryption

Perform basic call flow analysis
Optimization engineers
Perform configuration related basic call

Perform SMS flow analysis
Prerequisites
Perform configuration related SMS

Duration
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other
3 working days
telecommunication equipments
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
958
33.1.13 MSS Signaling Analysis Training

Training Path
function
Describe classification of RANAP messages
MSS Signaling Analysis Training

OWA04
Lectures, Hands-on
Analysis Iu connection Management, RAB

assignment, SRNS Relocation
5d
CS Domain MM, CC procedures in Iu
Exercise
Interfaces
Target Audience
Perform protocol stack and main functions of

SIGTRAN
Analysis SCTP association establishment and
close flows
Describe UA concepts introduction (AS, SG,
Prerequisites
IPSP, Entity, Routing key)
At least two years experience of operation and
Perform messages analysis of SCTP, M2UA,
M3UA
Describe H248 Protocol stack and functions
A basic knowledge of mobile communication and
Perform message analysis of H248 based on
soft switch principle
scenario
Objectives
Describe BICC protocol stack and functions
Analysis key parameters of BICC
be able to:
Analysis BICC message

Duration
Describe BSSAP protocol stack and function

Analysis main procedures of BSSAP(Paging,
5 working days
Initial MS Message, Cipher Mode Control,
Class Size
Assignment, Handover, Release, DTAP
Min 6, Max 12
Message)
Describe Iu interface protocol stack and
959
33.1.14 Number Translation Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe number translation flow
Number Translation Training

OWG41
Lectures, Hands-on
Perform number change

Perform failure process
2d
Perform call barring
Exercise
Perform typical number translation based on
Target Audience
scenarios
Perform general routing configuration on

request of priority, load-sharing and time
schedule
Perform routing configuration based on TDM
Prerequisites
and IP bearer
Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
960
33.1.15 GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Design Training

Training Path
Describe GSM/UMTS softswitch network

planning procedure and rules
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network

Design Training
OWG53
Lectures, Hands-on
Calculate broadband signaling interfaces in

core network
3d
Perform signaling network design
Exercise
Perform traffic network design
Target Audience
Perform access network interconnection

design
Core network operation and maintenance
Perform service network interconnection
engineers
design
Core network design engineers
Perform billing system interconnection design
Prerequisites
Perform EMS interconnection design

At least one year experience of core network
Duration
design
3 working days
A basic knowledge of core network design
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
961
33.1.16 GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Evaluation and Optimization Training

Training Path
Perform evaluation and optimization of the

hardware resource, logical resource, signaling
resource, TC/EC resource, trunk resource,
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network

Evaluation and Optimization Training
OWG54
Lectures, Hands-on
traffic resource
3d
Perform paging success rate analysis and
Exercise
optimization
Target Audience
Perform SMS success rate analysis and

optimization
Perform assignment success rate analysis and
engineers
optimization
Perform handover success rate analysis and
Prerequisites
optimization
Perform MO/MT call completion rate analysis
and optimization
Duration
A basic knowledge of core network optimization
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe procedure for evaluating resources of
V/G office
962
33.1.17 MSC POOL Training

Training Path
Describe MSC Pool configuration flow overview

Perform MSC Pool feature configuration in
MSC POOL Training

OWG62
Lectures, Hands-on
MSC Server and MGW

Perform MSC Pool configuration based on
5d
different scenarios(NNSF implemented by RNC,
Exercise
NNSF implemented by MGW, Restructure
Target Audience
MSC Pool based on current network)

Monitor MSC Pool Load in real time
Operate performance report of the MSC Pool
Perform migration of subscribers
Prerequisites
Perform MSC Pool configuration

synchronization between NE and M2000
Perform end-to-end tracing of calls on the MSC
Pool
Understand the measurement units,
Objectives
measurement entities, and related calculation

formulas for the MSC Pool
Understand how to analyze the operating
be able to:
status of networks before and after an MSC
Describe MSC Pool networking
Pool reconstruction
Describe principles related to the MSC Pool
Duration
features (The load balancing of MSC Pool,

Handover in MSC Pool, Disaster tolerance in
5 working days
MSC Pool, Subscriber migration in MSC Pool,
Class Size
A-Flex by the MGW, Managing A-Interface

Min 6, Max 12
Circuits on the MGW, Charging based on

Virtual MSC IDs or Location Areas)
963
33.1.18 MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta Training

Training Path
ATCA platform
Describe MSOFTX3000 system principle
MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta

Training
OWG70
Lectures,
Hands-on
based on ATCA platform

Perform the hardware and module
3d
configuration based on MSOFTX3000 ATCA
Exercise
Platform
Target Audience
Perform OMU maintenance and database

Perform log operation, software loading, and
Core network installation engineers
equipment health check based on ATCA
platform
Describe the difference between ATCA and
Prerequisites
CPCI platform
Describe the affect of the new difference
maintenance of Huawei MSOFTX3000V100
Duration
equipment.
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe MSOFTX3000 hardware structure of
964
33.1.19 MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI)

Training Path
be able to:
Describe Structure of the ETSI lawful
MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI)

OWG33
Lectures, Hands-on
interception system
Outline MSC Server Function in LI system
1d
Outline function of X1 , X2 interface in LI
Exercise
system
Target Audience
Outline function of X3 interface in LI system

Describe the XPTU Configuration in the MSC
Server
Perform the XPTU interworking with LIG
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
965
33.1.20 2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training

Training Path
mechanism(authentication and encryption)

Perform GSM security mode setting
2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training

OWG61
Lectures, Hands-on
Perform UMTS security mode setting

Describe GSM to UMTS inter-system handover
1d
operation
Exercise
Describe UMTS to GSM inter-system handover
Target Audience
operation
Describe Iu interface protocol stack and
function
Describe key parameters of RANAP
Prerequisites
messages(
Iu connection Management, RAB assignment,
SRNS Relocation
CS Domain MM, CC procedures in Iu
Interfaces)
Objectives
Duration
1 working day
be able to:
Class Size
Describe GSM security

Min 6, Max 12
mechanism(authentication and encryption)

Describe UMTS Security
966
33.1.21 MSS IP Technology Training

Training Path
IP fundamental
OWI71
Objectives
Lectures, Hands-on
1d
Exercise
be able to:
Outline the structure of IP Bear network and the
CN internal IP Netwoking
OWI72
Lectures, Hands-on
main protocols used

outline the IP fundamental knowledge and the
0.5d
application in CN
Exercise
Describe the IP networking inside CN

Describe the hardware of datacom equipments
Datacom Equipments in CN
OWI73
Lectures, Hands-on
used in CN
perform the O and M of the datacom
1d
equipments used in CN
Exercise
Describe the IP reliability solutions in CN

Perform the data configuration of the IP
CN IP Reliability and QOS
reliability solutions
OWI74
Lectures, Hands-on
1d
outline the QOS requirements for IP bear
Exercise
network
apply the QOS methods in CN
CN IP Troubleshooting
OWI75
Lectures, Hands-on
When there happens the IP related trouble,

basically analysis the trouble location and
1.5d
recover the service
Exercise
Duration
Target Audience
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
967
33.1.22 SmartCare Netview CoreTraining

Training Path
Describe the hardware and software structure

of NetView system
CS Netview Core Operation and

Maintenance
OWG71
Lectures, Hands-on
Describe the function and interface of NetView

elements
2d
Perform the system installation
Exercise
Perform the system commissioning
Target Audience
Perform the security operation of NetView
Perform the log management of NetView
engineers
Perform the alarm management of NetView

Perform the client operation of NetView
Prerequisites
Perform the server operation of NetView
Perform the real-time call trace
Perform network and service quality monitoring
Perform signaling monitor
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Outline position of NetView system and typical
Min 6, Max 12
networking
968
33.1.23 MSS Troubleshooting Training

Training Path
Objectives
MSOFTX3000 Troubleshooting Training

OWG38
Lectures, Hands-on
be able to:
3d
Perform tracer, CSIS of MSOFTX3000 to fault

finding and locating
Exercise
MSOFTX3000 signaling troubleshooting

GU UMG8900 Troubleshooting Training
OWH36
Lectures, Hands-on
MSOFTX3000 service troubleshooting and

case analysis (Call fault, Data service fault,
2d
SMS fault, Location Update fault,
Exercise
announcement playing)
Target Audience
Perform tracer, loopback, voice recorder for

fault finding and troubleshooting
Perform signaling troubleshooting
Perform the bearer troubleshooting
Prerequisites
Perform the voce quality troubleshooting
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
969
33.1.24 AoIP Training

Training Path
AoIP
Describe the function of each network element
AoIP Training
OWG77
on AoIP
Lectures, Hands-on
Describe AoIP codec selecting policy
2d
Describe the signaling flow difference between
Exercise
AoIP and AoTDM
Target Audience
Describe the principle of QoS and IP domain on

AoIP
Configure AoIP data on MSC Server and MGW
Analyze and handle faults related to core
Prerequisites
network AoIP
Complete analysis and handling of common
faults
Duration

2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Outline the Modifications from AoTDM to
970
33.1.25 MSS Common Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting Practice

Training Path
Perform the emergency operation of the mobile

switching system
MSS Common Emergency Operation and

Troubleshooting Practice
5d
OWG78
Lectures, Hands-on
Collect information for troubleshooting

Tracing the intra signaling message
Query call analysis data
Exercise
Analysis abnormal call by MSS call LOG
Target Audience
Troubleshoot by using CSIS
Check post status
Perform MGW port loopback test

Query billing
Prerequisites
Make
EC/TC dialing test
Perform record tone practice
Check CPU loadshare and TC/EC resource
Perform the emergency operation of the MSC
Pool networking
Objectives
Segregate abnormal MSC Server in Pool
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Perform the health check of the mobile
Class Size
switching system
Backup and restore system
Min 2, Max 6
Switch system and replace parts
971
33.1.26 MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT)

Training Path
difference between BICC CS1 and CS2

Describe basic BICC call procedures
MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT)

OWG79
Lectures
Describe the functions of SIGTRAN

Describe SIGTRAN protocol structure,
4H
message and signaling flow

Describe SCTP functions
Target Audience
Describe the signaling message and
procedures of SCTP
Describe the functions of SIGTRAN UA layers
Prerequisites
Describe the procedures and implementation of

M2UA

Describe the procedures and implementation of
M3UA
A basic knowledge of mobile communication and
Describe H248 protocol function
soft switch principle
Describe H248 message structure
Objectives
Describe the function of H248 commands

Describe H248 signaling procedure
Duration
be able to:
Describe BICC protocol stack and functions
4 hours
Describe the Bearer Independent Call Control
Class Size
model
No limit
Describe BICC message structure

Describe the similarities and differences
between BICC and ISUP, and the main
972
33.1.27 GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network Principle(WBT)

Training Path
Write down the Softswitch core network

structure
GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network

Principle(WBT)
1H
OWG80
Lectures
Describe the Softswitch core network technical

features
Describe interfaces and protocol in softswitch
Write down the call flow in Softswitch core
Target Audience
network
Duration
1 hour
Prerequisites
Class Size
No limit
Objectives
be able to:
973
33.1.28 MSC POOL Principle(WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
MSC POOL Principle(WBT)

OWG81
Lectures
be able to:
1H
Describe MSC Pool networking

Describe principles related to the MSC Pool
Target Audience
features (The load balancing of MSC Pool,
Handover in MSC Pool, Disaster tolerance in
MSC Pool, Subscriber migration in MSC Pool,

A-Flex by the MGW, Managing A-Interface
Prerequisites
Circuits on the MGW, Charging based on
Virtual MSC IDs or Location Areas)
Duration
1 hour
A basic knowledge of mobile
Class Size
No limit
974
33.1.29 UMG8900 System Overview(WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
UMG8900 System Overview(WBT)

OWG82
Lectures
be able to:
1H
Describe UMG8900 product orientation

Describe product feature
Target Audience
Describe system architecture

Describe service and networking applications

Duration
Prerequisites
1 hour
Class Size
No limit
975
33.1.30 MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and Principle(WBT)

Training Path
the network
Describe MSOFTX3000 system structure
MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and

Principle(WBT)
OWG83
Lectures
Describe the networking and application of

MSOFTX3000
2H
Describe the interfaces and protocols

Describe MSOFTX3000 physical structure
Target Audience
Describe MSOFTX3000 logical system
architecture
Describe Signaling internal processing flows
Prerequisites
Duration
2 hours
Objectives
Class Size
No limit
be able to:
Describe the orientation of MSOFTX3000 in
976
33.1.31 GU CS Core Network Design Overview(WBT)

Training Path
Objectives
GU CS Core Network Design

Overview(WBT)
OWG84
Lectures
be able to:
0.5H
Describe the importance of network design

Describe the main contents of network design
Target Audience
Duration
0.5 hour
engineers
Class Size
Core network design engineers
No limit
Prerequisites
At least one year experience of core network
design
977
33.2
GSM-R Training Courses
33.2.1 GTSOFTX3000 Product Training

Training Path
GTSOFTX3000 and MGW

Perform GTSOFTX3000 Office information
GTSOFTX3000 Hardware System

OMH20
Lectures,
configuration
Perform data configuration between
0.5d
GTSOFTX3000 to HLR
GTSOFTX3000 and BSC (M2UA based, M3UA
GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration

OMH22
Lectures, Hands-on
based)
Perform the data configuration from
6d
GTSOFTX3000 to RNC based on IP and ATM
Exercise

GTSOFTX3000 and PSTN/MSC in different
GTSOFTX3000 Operation and

Maintenance
OMH21
Lectures, Hands-on
mode
3.5d
Manage equipments, for example: checking
Exercise
board status and version

Manage data, for example: backup system
Target Audience
GSM-R core network monitor engineers
saving logs
Manage tracing tasks, for example: creating a
tracing task, checking tracing result, saving
GSM-R core network commissioning engineers,
result
Prerequisites

Operation of replace the hardware board
A basic knowledge of telecommunication
Operation of change the cable
Objectives
Operation of system backup

Operation of system recovery
be able to:
Manage alarms (browsing alarms, querying
Describe the MSOFTX3000 hardware
alarms, printing alarms, dump alarm logs)
structures
Create performance tasks
Describe the MSOFTX3000 cascade structures
Checking status of performance tasks
Customized performance tasks
Dump the measurement result
Explain the types and applications of different
Start and stop the process of BAM
fibers and cables
Point out key information and its directory of
Describe the concept of Hardware
BAM
Configuration
Duration
Perform hardware configuration
10 working days
Know how to verify hardware configuration

Perform the connection between
978

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
979
33.2.2 GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training

Training Path
Describe main boards' functions of UMG8900

Describe Internal message flow of UMG8900
GSM-R UMG8900 Hardware System

OMH30
Lectures,
Describe function of SIWF

Configure SIWF
1d
Perform operation and maintenance of SIWF

GSM-R UMG8900 Operation and

Maintenance
OMH31
Lectures, Hands-on
Perform backup and recovery of UMG8900

2d
Exercise
Browse alarm information

Browse the performance task
GSM-R UMG8900 Data Configuration

OMH32
Lectures, Hands-on
Configuring System Parameters

Configuring System Time
2d
Configuring Frames and Boards
Exercise
Configuring the Clock
Target Audience
Configuring the NMS Interface
Configuring the MGW Control Interface and

SIGTRAN Interface
installation engineers
commissioning engineers
Configure ATM bearer, IP bearer, TDM bearer
operation and maintenance engineers
Configure signaling transfer
Configure MGW data
Configure the link
GSM-R core network commissioning engineers,
Perform interworking with MGW based on

different networking
Perform interworking with BSC based on
Prerequisites
different scenarios
Perform interworking with MSC/PSTN based
Objectives
on different networking
Duration

be able to:
5 working days
Describe UMG8900 hardware structure
Class Size
Describe UMG8900 logical architecture
Min 6, Max 12
Describe UMG8900 software architecture

Describe UMG8900 Cascading System
980
33.2.3 GSM-R Feature Training

Training Path
Configure and verify eMLPP service

Configure and verify USS1 service
GSM-R Overview
OMH01
Configure and verify VBS service

Lectures
Configure and verify VGCS service
0.5d
Configure and verify Multiple-Engine service

Configure and verify functional addressing
Configure and verify call area restriction

OMH40
Lectures, Hands-on
Configure and verify location dependent

4.5d
addressing service
Configure and verify SMC integration service
Exercise
Configure and verify access matrix service
Target Audience
Configure and verify break-in and force release

GSM-R core network telecommunication
service
engineers
Configure and verify missed call SMS prompt
GSM-R core network commissioning engineers
service
Configure and verify priority cell service
Prerequisites
Perform AC (Acknowledgement Center) server

software installation and uninstallation
A basic knowledge of railway telecommunication
Configure AC in BAM
system
Operate GMS(Group Management Server)
Objectives
installation
Duration
be able to:
5 working days
Describe the fundamental of GSM-R
Class Size
Describe the architecture of GSM-R system

Describe the service and function of GSM-R
Min 6, Max 12
system
981
33.3
UGC Training Courses
33.3.1 UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway Office) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Perform software O and M(checking process

status and so on)
OMS2600 (UGC) Operation and

Maintenance
OZC10
Lectures, Hands-on
Introduce the UGC3200 hardware structure

Introduce the function, location and working
1d
flow of UGC3200
Exercise
Perform number analysis configuration

Perform the local office data and the data
UGC3200(CGO) Operation and

Maintenance
OZE08
Lectures, Hands-on
configuration related to H248 and SIP

Perform the interworking data with MGW,PSTN,
4d
GSM, CDMA, etc
Exercise
Perform device and service status check

Perform iGWB operation and maintenance
UMG8900(CGO) Operation and

Maintenance
OZE04
Lectures, Hands-on
Introduce the system functions of UMG8900

2d
Introduce the UMG8900 hardware structure
Exercise
Introduce the function, indicators, ports and

iManager NMS (CGO) Operation and

Maintenance
OZO05
Lectures, Hands-on
Perform UMG8900 Mc(H248) interface

configuration
1d
Perform UMG8900 interworking with
Exercise
MSC-PSTN-MGW data configuration
Target Audience
Operate GUI
Convergency Gateway Office monitor engineers
Perform routine maintenance
Describe the NMS structure
Perform system login

Operate user right management
Prerequisites
Operate topology management
Operate fault management
Objectives
Operate performance management
Perform system monitor
be able to:
Backup database
Introduce the hardware structure, the power
Duration
system and the board functions of ATCA

8 working days
platform, as well as the monitor system
Class Size
Describe function and features of OMS2600

Perform OMS2600 hardware
Min 6, Max 12
operation(replacing boards, checking running

status)
982
33.4
SmartCare Training Courses
33.4.1 SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ Analyst Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path
Describe function of different hardware parts of

NetProbe3010
SmartCare SEQ Analyst Operation and

OWL01
Lectures, Hands-on
Describe function of different software

sub-systems of NetProbe3010
2d
Configure probe
Exercise
Maintain probe
Describe position, feature, function, interface
SmartCare NetProbe 3010 Operation and

OWM01
Lectures, Hands-on
protocol and structure of SEQ Analyst

Describe hardware structure and function of
1d
different parts of SEQ Analyst
Exercise
Describe software structure and function of
Target Audience
different software sub-system of SEQ Analyst
Core network monitoring engineers
Configure server, module group, local service
Prerequisites
IP and service data of SEQ Analyst

Monitor network
Analysis KPIs
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS and PS
Handle equipment fault
Objectives
Duration
3 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Describe typical networking, function, system

structure and interface protocol of
Min 6, Max 12
NetProbe3010
Describe typical configuration of NetProbe3010
983
34 NGN&STP Training Path

34.1
NGN Training Path

NGN System Overview
Training
2d
For telecom management

engineer
984
NGN Operation and

SoftX3000 Operation and

9d

4d
NGN Core
Network
Elements
iManager N2000 UMS

Operation and
2d
UA5000 (NGN) Operation

1d
SG7000 (NGN) Operation

3d
MRS6100 Operation and

IAD Operation and

1d
2d
U-Path Operation and

SE2000 Operation and

1d
2d
SHLR9200 Operation and

2d
For operation and maintenance

engineer, technical support
engineer
NGN Advanced Operation

985
NGN Advanced Operation

SoftX3000 Advanced
Operation and
8d
UMG8900 Advanced
Operation and
3d
NGN Core
Network
Elements
iManager N2000 UMS

Advanced Operation and
2d
SE2000 Advanced
Operation and
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced

Training
2d
2d
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced

Training
1d
SHLR9200 Advanced
Operation and
1d
MRS6100 Advanced
Operation and
1d
For technical support engineer
For Target
Audience
Training Upgrade
Path
986
34.2
STP Training Path

STP Operation and
DRA(SPS V3) Operation

7d
2d

engineer, technical support engineer

engineer, technical support engineer
987
35 NGN&STP Training Courses

NGN&STP Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
NGN System Overview Training
6 ~ 12
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SE2000 Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
IAD Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Training
6 ~ 12
MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
STP Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance Training
6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT)
3.5H
No limit
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
NGN
STP
988
35.1
NGN Training Courses
35.1.1 NGN System Overview Training

Training Path
Describe the basic concepts, system

architecture, services, networking and
NGN System Overview

OA011
Lectures
applications of NGN.
Describe the network topology, services and
0.5d
functions of NGN equipment.

Outline the functions of NGN protocols.
Outline the features, advantages, actuality and
NGN Product Overview

OA012
Lectures
development trend of NGN.

Outline the components, services, networking
1d
and applications of Huawei U-SYS solution.

Describe the network topology, services and
functions of NGN equipment in Huawei U-SYS
NGN Service Description
solution.
OA013
Lectures
0.5d
Outline the system structure, networking,

applications and technical specifications of
Target Audience
NGN equipment in Huawei U-SYS solution.
Telecom management personnel
Describe the functions, characteristics,

applications and uses of all services (including
Prerequisites
basic voice services, supplementary services
A general understanding of
and IN services) supported by Huawei U-SYS
solution.
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
Describe the structure of the
Min 6, Max 12
telecommunication network.
989
35.1.2 SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
functions, system structure, board functions,

board indicators, networking, applications and
technical specifications of SoftX3000.
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance

OAX01
Outline the service data configuration steps of
Lectures, Hands-on exercise 9d
SoftX3000, and execute the common service

data configuration (local office data
Target Audience
configuration, charging data configuration,

media gateway data configuration, MRS data
Operating and maintenance personnel, technical
configuration, protocol data configuration, SS7
support personnel
signaling data configuration, routing data
Prerequisites
configuration, trunk data configuration, number
Familiar with computer operation and Windows
analysis data configuration, subscriber data
system
configuration).
A general understanding of telecommunications

and data communications
of SoftX3000 (operator authority management,
At least one year of experience in the operation
database backup and restoration, data
and maintenance of telecommunications
consistent checking between the host and BAM,
equipment
log management, alarm management, device

management, media gateway management,
Objectives
protocol and signaling management, trunk

circuit management, subscriber management,
be able to:
bill management, traffic statistics).
Describe the basic concepts, system
architecture, services, networking and
of iGWB.
applications of NGN.
Perform the common troubleshooting of
Outline the components, services, networking
SoftX3000.
and applications of Huawei U-SYS solution.
Duration
Explain the functions, features, applications,

9 working days
terms, stack structure and messages of NGN
Class Size
protocols (MGCP, H.248, SIP, SIGTRAN and

H.323).
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the network topology, services,
990
35.1.3 UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

technical specifications of UMG8900.
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance

OAU01
Lectures, Hands-on exercise 4d
UMG8900, and execute the common service

data configuration (MGW data configuration, IP
Target Audience
bearer data configuration, TG data

configuration, AG data configuration, SG data
configuration).
support personnel
Prerequisites
of UMG8900 (database backup, log
management, alarm management, device
system
management, protocol tracing, service
management, POTS subscriber testing).

UMG8900.

Duration
equipment
4 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
991
35.1.4 iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Explain the functions and applications of
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and

Maintenance
OAN01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
SNMP.
2d
functions, system structure, networking,

Target Audience
iManager N2000 UMS.

NMS operator, operating and maintenance
of iManager N2000 UMS (network topology
personnel, technical support personnel
management, network element management,
Prerequisites
network alarm monitoring, network

performance monitoring, environment and user
system
right management).
Duration

2 working days
Class Size

equipment
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
992
35.1.5 MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance

OAM01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise

2d
technical specifications of MRS6100.

Target Audience
MRS6100, and execute the system data

configuration.
Perform the voice file loading.
support personnel
Prerequisites
of MRS6100 (log management, alarm

management, device management, message
system
tracing).
Duration

2 working days
Class Size

equipment
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
993
35.1.6 SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

SG7000 (NGN) Operation and

Maintenance
OAS01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
technical specifications of SG7000.
3d

SG7000, and execute the common service
Target Audience

configuration, MTP data configuration, M3UA
data configuration).
support personnel
Prerequisites
of SG7000 (database backup, log management,
alarm management, device management,
system
signaling tracing).
SG7000.
Duration
3 working days
equipment
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
994
35.1.7 SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
procedure of NGN network intelligentizing.

SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance


board indicators, signaling procedure,
2d
networking, applications and technical

specifications of SHLR9200.
Target Audience

SHLR9200, and execute the common service
support personnel
configuration, MTP data configuration, SCCP
Prerequisites
data configuration, subscriber data
configuration).
system
of SHLR9200 (log management, alarm
management, device management, signaling
tracing, service data management).
Duration
equipment
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe the concepts, principle, networking,
applications, services and service processing
995
35.1.8 SE2000 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

SE2000 Operation and Maintenance

OAE01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise

SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300).
2d

SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300), and execute
Target Audience
the common service data configuration (SNMP

data configuration, signaling PROXY and
media PROXY data configuration, IADMS
support personnel
PROXY data configuration).
Prerequisites
of SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300) (log
system
management, alarm management, device
management, signaling proxy and media
PROXY debugging, IADMS PROXY
debugging).
Duration

equipment
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Explain the working principle of PROXY.
996
35.1.9 UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and

Maintenance
OAG01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise

1d
technical specifications of UA5000.

Target Audience
UA5000, and execute the common service

data configuration (hardware data configuration,
MG interface data configuration, POTS service
support personnel
data configuration).
Prerequisites

of UA5000 (database backup, log management,
system
alarm management, device management,
subscriber testing).
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
equipment
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
997
35.1.10 IAD Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
IAD Operation and Maintenance

OAI01
Lectures, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
1d
Describe the network topology, product

classification, services, functions, system
structure, networking, applications and
Target Audience
technical specifications of IAD.

support personnel
IAD, and execute the common service data
Prerequisites
configuration (MG data configuration,

subscriber data configuration).
system
of IAD (log management, alarm management,
device management).

Duration

1 working day
equipment
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
998
35.1.11 U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
U-Path Operation and Maintenance

OAP01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
1d

Target Audience
U-Path.
Perform the software installation of U-Path.
support personnel
Perform the service configuration of U-Path.
Prerequisites
Outline the related data configuration on

SoftX3000 side.
system
of U-Path (log management, system status
browsing, and bill management).

Duration

1 working day
equipment
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
999
35.1.12 SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Execute the service data configuration of

SoftX3000 (number changing data
configuration, call barring data configuration).
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
OAX02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
Perform the operation and maintenance of
8d
SoftX3000 (using of database tool, traffic

statistics, system security and defense).
Target Audience
Perform the troubleshooting of SoftX3000.

Describe the principle, processing procedure,
Technical support personnel, technical specialist
operation and original bill format of NGN
Prerequisites
charging system, and describe the system

Successful completion of the NGN Operation and
structure and configuration of iGWB.
Describe the principle, application, data
At least a half year of experience in the operation
planning and data configuration of NGN dual
and maintenance of NGN
home, and perform the routine maintenance of
Objectives
NGN dual home.

List the means of improving voice quality of
NGN.
be able to:
Duration
Explain the command parameters and call

processing procedure of NGN protocols, and
8 working days
perform the common problem analysis and
Class Size
processing of NGN protocols.

Min 6, Max 12
Describe the working principle and service

processing procedure of SoftX3000.
1000
35.1.13 UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Describe the working principle and service

processing procedure of UMG8900.
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
OAU02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise

UMG8900 (PRI data configuration, R2 data
3d
configuration), and outline the related data

configuration on SoftX3000 side.
Target Audience

UMG89000 (testing management, performance
statistics, using of software tool).
Prerequisites
Perform the troubleshooting of UMG8900.

Duration
3 working days
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
1001
35.1.14 iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
iManager N2000 UMS (test management,

authority and domain based management,
subscriber service provisioning, OSS
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced

OAN02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
interconnection).
2d
Perform the system administration of iManager

N2000 UMS (user accounts management,
Target Audience
UMS user management, log management,

service and process management, database
management, file and disk management,
Prerequisites
database backup and restoration).
Perform the troubleshooting of iManager
N2000 UMS.
Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
1002
35.1.15 MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
MRS6100 Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
OAM02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
1d
Describe the working principle, announcement

principle and service processing procedure of
MRS6100.
Target Audience
Perform the language conversion of voice.

Perform the voice conversion and voice
Prerequisites
loading.
Perform the troubleshooting of MRS6100.
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
1003
35.1.16 SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
OAS02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d
be able to:
SG7000 (MTP load sharing data configuration,
SCCP load sharing data configuration).
Target Audience
Perform the troubleshooting of SG7000.

Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

1004
35.1.17 SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
be able to:
1d
Explain the stack structure, functions,

messages and applications of MAP+.
Execute the custom-made service data
Target Audience
configuration of SHLR9200.
Perform the troubleshooting of SHLR9200.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
1005
35.1.18 SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe the working principle, security, QoS
SE2000 Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
OAE02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
and reliability of SE2000

Series(SE2200/SE2300).
2d

SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300) (security
Target Audience
data configuration, QoS data configuration,

reliability data configuration).
Perform the troubleshooting of SE2000
Prerequisites
Series(SE2200/SE2300).
Duration
2 working days
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
1006
35.1.19 UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Objectives
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and

Maintenance
OAG02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d
be able to:
Describe the working principle of UA5000.
UA5000 (system maintenance, DSP resources
Target Audience
maintenance).
Perform the troubleshooting of UA5000.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
1007
35.2
STP Training Courses
35.2.1 STP Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
performance features of SG7000.

Describe SG7000 logical architecture and
SS7 Signaling System

OST01
Lectures
signaling flow.
Describe the basic concepts of SS7 Signaling
1.5d
System.
Describe the architecture of SS7 Signaling
System.
SG7000 Hardware System

OST02
Lectures
State the format of TUP, ISUP and SCCP

message and the meaning of the message
0.5d
which are often used.

State the signaling procedures of TUP, ISUP
and SCCP.
SG7000 Operation and Maintenance
Trace and analyze the signaling message.

OST03 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 5d
Describe the terminal and alarm system of

SG7000.
Target Audience
Configure the hardware data and service data.

Implement the common operation of
Personnel who maintain STP equipment
maintenance such as message tracing and link
Prerequisites
management.
At least one year of experience in the operation or
Describe the MNP service flows.
maintenance of STP or other switch equipment
Configure the MNP data.
Being familiar with computer operation
Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Describe SG7000 system structure and

hardware architecture.
State the cabinet, frame, board and the
1008
35.2.2 DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
function and features.

Describe the system architecture of SPS,
DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance

including the hardware structure, software

structure.
2d
Explain the SPS protocols and interfaces.

Describe the SPS configuration flows.
Target Audience
Perform the SPS data configuration, including
Operating and maintenance engineer
the hardware data configuration, basic data
Technical support engineer
configuration, signaling interworking data

configuration, function and feature data
Prerequisites
configuration.
Perform SPS routine operation and
At least one year of experience in operation and
maintenance, including the routine
maintenance of telecom field
maintenance tasks, routine maintenance
General understanding of telecommunications and
commands, logs and alarm checking.
data communications
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the SPS product location, typical

application, network structure, the basic
1009
35.2.3 iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT)

Training Path
client.
Perform user right management on the N2000
iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT)

OANE1
Multimedia
client.
Monitor the device information on the N2000.
3.5H
Monitor the N2000 server information on the

N2000.
Target Audience
Perform the database backing up and
Operating and maintenance engineers
restoration.
Prerequisites
Perform the NE data backing up and

restoration.

General understanding of telecommunications and
Perform NGN service signaling tracing.
data communications
Check the signaling tracing result.

Duration
Objectives
3.5 hours

be able to:
Class Size
Perform topology management, configuration
No limit
management on the N2000 client.

Check device alarm and log on the N2000
1010
36 C&C08 Training Path

36.1
C&C08 Training Path
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation

18 d
For NMS engineer, technical

support engineer
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced

15 d
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance

Training
10 d
For Target
Audience
Training Upgrade
Path
1011
37 C&C08 Training Courses

C&C08 Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance

Training
18
6 ~ 12
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and

15
6 ~ 12
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training
10
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
C&C08
1012
37.1
C&C08 Training Courses
37.1.1 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Explain the basic principle and structure of the

C&C08 Switch system.
C&C08 Switch System Overview

OSC01
Lectures
Outline the performance of C&C08 Switch

system.
0.5d
Perform the troubleshooting for minor faults.

Explain the alarm subsystem and perform the
routine operation.
C&C08 Switch Hardware System
Perform the various tests and analyze the test

results.
OSC02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 3.5d
Use the common tools in the maintain

subsystem.
Perform the routine operations in the bill
C&C08 Switch Data Configuration
management subsystem.
OSC03 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
8d
Perform the routine operations in the traffic

statistics subsystem.
Perform the routine maintenance tasks.
C&C08 System Maintenance

Set and maintain the office data.

Set and maintain the user data.
5d
Set and maintain the trunk data.

Set and maintain the charging data.
Describe the system structure at module, frame
C&C08 Switch Troubleshooting
and board level and the performance features

of C&C08.
1d
Identify the hierarchy and network architecture

of AM/CM.
Target Audience
Explain the system resource allocation, the
NMS operator, Technical support engineer
control architecture and the communication
Prerequisites
process of SM.
Identify the general hardware structure of
Being familiar with Windows operating system
C&C08.

Duration
telecommunication
18 working days
or maintenance of SPC switch
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
1013
37.1.2 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
Objectives
C&C08 Switch In-depth Introduction

OSD01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
be able to:
3d
Describe the planning and configuration

principle of C&C08 switch.
Describe the network management principle of
C&C08 switch.
C&C08 Switch Advanced Maintenance

Perform the basic design of C&C08 switch
7d
according to requirements.
Describe the detailed call process of C&C08
switch.
C&C08 Switch Advanced Troubleshooting

Describe the principle of trunk line hunting.

Describe the MTP and ISUP principle.
2d
State the general procedures and methods of

troubleshooting.
Describe the alarm information and use the
C&C08 Switch Introduction to Special

Subject
maintenance tool for troubleshooting.

2.5d
Perform troubleshooting for various faults.

Perform the whole system hardware
configuration.
C&C08 Switch Network Planning

OSD05
Lectures
Perform the whole system software installation.

Perform the advanced data setting such as
0.5d
number change, call failure process and

auxiliary signaling.
Target Audience
Describe the principle of software parameter.
Specialist
Describe the knowledge of Windows NT and
Prerequisites
Database.
Describe the loading procedure of C&C08
Having completed the C&C08 Digital SPC
hardware system.
Switching System Operation and Maintenance

Training
Describe the principle of C&C08 clock system.
Describe the principle of C&C08 charging
maintenance of SPC switch
system.
Being familiar with Windows operating system
Duration
Being familiar with the basic knowledge of
15 working days
telecommunication
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
1014
37.1.3 C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
hardware.
Describe the hierarchy and network
Basic Knowledge of Intelligent Network

OSP01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise
architecture of AM/CM.
Describe the system resource allocation, the
3d

process of SM.
C&C08-SSP Hardware System

OSP02
Lectures
C&C08 SSP.
Analyze the general malfunction of the
2d
C&C08-SSP system.
Perform the troubleshooting of the C&C08-SSP
system.
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance
Describe troubleshooting flow of the

4d
C&C08-SSP.
Describe the basic architecture of C&C08 SSP
hardware.
C&C08-SSP Troubleshooting
Describe the hierarchy and network

architecture of AM/CM.
1d
Describe the system resource allocation, the

Target Audience
process of SM.
C&C08 SSP technical support engineer
C&C08 SSP.
Prerequisites
Describe the basic knowledge of SS7 signaling

system.
maintenance of SPC switch
Describe the basic knowledge of SCCP, TCAP
Being familiar with computer operation and
and INAP protocol.
Windows operating system
State the application of SS7 in the IN system.
Being familiar with the basic knowledge of
Duration
telecommunication
10 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
Describe the basic architecture of C&C08 SSP
1015
38 Core Network OSS Training Path

38.1
iManager M2000 Training Path

iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring
Engineer Training
2days
Target audience: CN product maintenance
engineer and network monitor
iManager M2000 PRS Operation and

2days
Target audience: PRS system operator and
administrator
iManager M2000 Service Feature

Training
1day
iManager M2000 Delta Training

1day
1016
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and
Maintenance Training (SUN SingleServer)
Maintenance Training (SUN HA)
3days
3days
Network management
Network management
operator
operator
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN)

5days
M2000 Administrator
Target audience: M2000 system (SUN Server) operator and administrator
Maintenance Training (HP SingleServer)
Maintenance Training (HP HA)
3days
3days
Network management
Network management
operator
operator
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP)

5days
M2000 Administrator
Target audience: M2000 system (HP Server) operator and administrator
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training

(ATAE Cluster)
3day
s
Target audience: M2000 system (ATAE) operator and administrator
1017
39 Core Network OSS Training Courses

CN OSS Training Courses are designed as follows:
Level
Duration
(working
days)
iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring Engineer Training
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN)
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP)
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Service Feature Training
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN

SingleServer)
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP

SingleServer)
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN

HA)
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP

HA)
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 PRS Operation and Maintenance Training
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Administrator Training - Europe Only
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Delta Training
4 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE

Cluster)
6 ~ 12
Training Courses
Training
Location
Class
Size
iManager M2000
1018
39.1
iManager M2000 Training Courses
39.1.1 iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring Engineer Training

Training Path
Perform query NEs status through topology

view, NEs monitoring list.
Understand NEs status type and meaning.
iManager M2000 System Overview

ONW11
Master setting NEs reconnection.

Describe alarms and events concept and
0.5 d
difference, alarm severity and type, alarm

status and changing status, alarm reporting
procedure.
iManager M2000 Network Monitoring
Perform synchronizing NE alarms manually,
Operation
ONW21
querying alarms and events, setting the
1.5 d
alarm/event template, monitoring network

status, locating alarms and events, collecting
Target Audience
statistics on alarms and events.

Perform setting the alarm/event notification.
Network monitor
Describe performance basic concept, principle
Prerequisites
and main procedure.

Perform querying performance measurement
System
status, performance measurement results,
viewing threshold alarms, exporting
Objectives
performance measurement results.

Perform setting result query conditions.
Describe configuration basic concept : MIT ,
be able to:
MML commands, NEs resource status.
Describe iManager M2000 system principle
Perform checking NEs configuration
and main function.
information and NEs status.
Describe M2000 modules function.

Duration
Know M2000 hardware composing and

software structure.
2 working days
List M2000 typical Networking and hardware
Class Size
Configuration.
Min 4max 12
Describe topology basic concept, topology

monitoring daily job.
1019
39.1.2 iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN)

Training Path
and methods.
Perform NEs mediation software installation
and updating.
iManager M2000 Operation System and
Describe M2000 system Backup and Restore
Database ManagementSUN
ONW30
base knowledge.
1 d
Master how to backup and restore M2000 data.

Know the base knowledge of M2000 system
emergency maintenance.
iManager M2000 Administrator Operation
List M2000 system emergency scene.

ONW27
4d
Master the methods and steps of M2000

system emergency maintenance.
Target Audience
Know M2000 dangerous operations.
M2000 Server maintenance engineer
Master normal Trouble Shooting methods.
Prerequisites
Describe Northbound interface functions in

M2000 system.
Master Operating system basic operations
Describe Operating system 10 system
Master Sybase database basic operations
management commands.
Objectives
Describe files system structure.
Perform system management operation.
be able to:
Describe Sybase15 database modules.
Describe user type in M2000 system.
Describe Sybase15 database operation
Master how to create, modify, delete user
commands.
information.
Implement start and stop data process.
Manage user group in M2000 system.
Master how to import and export database.
Manage user network right and operation right.
Duration
Complete monitor user state.
5 working days
Complete M2000 system log management.
Class Size
Master NEs status checking methods.

Describe M2000 system software structure
Min 4max 12
Describe system software updating procedure
1020
39.1.3 iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP)

Training Path
and methods.
and updating.
iManager M2000 Operation System and
Database ManagementHP
ONW31
base knowledge.
1 d


ONW27
4d

Target Audience
Prerequisites

M2000 system.
Master Linux SUSE system basic operations
Describe Linux SUSE10 system management
Master Database database basic operations
commands.
Objectives
Describe files system structure.
Perform system management operation.
be able to:
Describe Database10g database modules.
Describe Database10g database operation
commands.
information.
Implement start and stop data process.
Master how to import and export database.
Manage user network right and operation right
Duration
5 working days
Class Size

Describe M2000 system software structure.
Min 4max 12
1021
39.1.4 iManager M2000 Service Feature Training

Training Path
Describe fault report flow.

Describe server process fault capability.
Master how to modify fault configuration files.
iManager M2000 Service Feature

ONW14
Describe the performance interface between
1d
network entities and M2000.

Describe performance files process flow.
Target Audience
Describe server process performance
Network monitor
capability.
Prerequisites
Master how to modify performance

configuration files.
Complete M2000 Client O&M training

Duration
Know basic concept and oprations about

M2000 PM & FM
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 4max 12
be able to:
Describe fault type and fault draw in M2000
system.
1022
39.1.5 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN SingleServer)
Training Path
Perform M2000 routine maintenance tasks.

Describe process of setting up a physical
topology view.
iManager M2000 System Solution and
Perform creating topology subnet, NEs, links.
Networking
ONW13
Perform managing topology view, modifying
0.5 d
topology object, exporting an NE information,

setting SNMP parameter.
Describe alarm processing procedure.
iManager M2000 Client Management
Perform managing the NE object group,

ONW22
1. 5d
managing the alarm/event name group.

Perform clearing alarms manually, setting
alarm/event auto processing, recording
iManager M2000 Server O&MSUN
alarm/event maintenance experience.
SingleServer
ONW23
Perform managing alarm/event correlation rule,
1d
defining an NE Alarm.
Describe performance management main
Target Audience
procedure, performance measurement

principle, performance threshold alarm
Network management operator
principle.
Prerequisites
Performance setting performance

measurement tasks, setting performance
System
counters threshold, setting exporting
performance measurement results,

activating/deactivating a counter threshold,
Objectives
activating/deactivating a performance
measurement task.
be able to:
Know M2000 hardware and software structure.
Describe M2000 software modules structure
Master how to configure NEs by MML
and modules functions.
commands.
List M2000 server typical configuration.
Performance processing NEs configuration
Describe M2000 server networking.
data.
Describe M2000 SUN Single Server network
Duration
system structure, logical, hardware, software
3 working days
structure.
Class Size
List M2000 server file system composing.

List M2000 system user type.
Min 4max 12
Perform powering on/powering off the M2000,

monitoring system status, M2000 database
management, system backup and restore.
1023
39.1.6 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP SingleServer)
Training Path

topology view.
Networking
ONW13
0.5 d


ONW22
1 .5d

iManager M2000 Server O&MHP
SingleServer
ONW24
1d
Target Audience

principle.
Prerequisites

System

Objectives
measurement task.
be able to:
commands.
data.
Describe M2000 HP Single Server network
Duration
system structure, logical, hardware, software
3 working days
structure.
Class Size

Min 4max 12

monitoring system status, M2000 database
management, system backup and restore.
1024
39.1.7 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN HA)
Training Path

topology view.
Networking
ONW13
0.5 d


ONW22
1. 5d

iManager M2000 Server O&MSUN HA

ONW25

1d
Target Audience

principle.
Prerequisites

System

Objectives
measurement task.
be able to:
commands.
data.
Describe M2000 SUN HA network system
Duration
structure, logical, hardware, software structure.
3 working days
Class Size

Min 4max 12
managing cluster resources, monitoring system

status, M2000 database management, system
backup and restore.
1025
39.1.8 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP HA)
Training Path

topology view.
Networking
ONW13
0.5 d


ONW22
1 .5d

iManager M2000 Server O&MHP HA

ONW26

1d
Target Audience

principle.
Prerequisites

System

Objectives
measurement task.
be able to:
commands.
data.
Describe M2000 HP HA network system
Duration
structure, logical, hardware, software structure.
3 working days
Class Size

Min 4max 12
managing cluster resources, monitoring system

status, M2000 database management, system
backup and restore.
1026
39.1.9 iManager M2000 PRS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe PRS base concept.
Know PRS system structure and principle.
Performance Report System Overview

ONW15
Know PRS system position in the network.

0.5 d
Describe PRS function and technology

counters.
Master how to Power On and Power Off the
PRS, Setting the Server Parameters for the
Performance Report System Operation
PRS System, Managing the Clients of the PRS

ONW35
1.5 d
System, Managing PRS System Logs,

Monitoring the PRS System, Managing PRS
Target Audience
Processes and Services, Managing the PRS
Network Performance analyzing and maintenance
System Database, Managing Files and Disks of
engineer
the PRS System.

Know routine maintenance of the PRS System.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
System
Class Size

Objectives
Min 4max 12
1027
39.1.10 iManager M2000 Administrator Training - Europe Only

Training Path
Describe M2000 system software structure.

and methods.

ONW27
4d
and updating.
Target Audience
base knowledge.
Prerequisites

Having several year M2000 maintenance
experience
Objectives
be able to:
M2000 system.
information.
Duration
4 working days
Manage user network right and operation right.
Class Size

Min 4max 12
1028
39.1.11 iManager M2000 Delta Training

Training Path
be able to:
Describe iManager M2000 product function
and capacity change.
iManager M2000 Delta

ONW19
Describe iManager M2000 product GUI
1d
change.
Describe iManager M2000 product new
Target Audience
features.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
System
Min 4max 12

Objectives
1029
39.1.12 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE

Cluster)Training Path
topology view.

- ATAE Cluster
ONW17
Lectures

0.5 d


ONW29
LecturesHands-on Exercise

1d


ONW22
LecturesHands-on Exercise
1.5 d
Target Audience
principle.
Prerequisites

Objectives
measurement task.
be able to:
Master the basic concept and structure of ATAE
Cluster
commands.
Master the networking and technology solution
of ATAE Cluster
data.

function of OSMU
Duration
Master the system management of OSMU
3 working days
Master the equipment management, service

Class Size

maintenance OSMU
Min 6, Max 12
Master the method to backup and restore the

1030

Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training ManualV2.1

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training ManualV2.1

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge

Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department

2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Huawei Training&Certification Service ........................................................................................................................ 1

ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution ...................................................................................... 1

Learning Path ............................................................................................................................................. 1

Training Instructors ..................................................................................................................................... 1

Enterprise IP Training Path ......................................................................................................................................... 1

Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ...................................................................................... 1

WLAN Certification Training Path ............................................................................................................... 1

IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path .................................................................................. 1

NE Routers Training Path........................................................................................................................... 1

AR G3 Routers Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 1

AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path ................................................................................................ 1

AR G3 Voice System Training Path ............................................................................................................ 1

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path ......................................................................................... 1

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path ........................................................................................... 1

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path ........................................................................ 1

WLAN (AC/AP) Training Path..................................................................................................................... 1

MSCG(ME60) Training Path....................................................................................................................... 1

PTN Product Training Path......................................................................................................................... 1

Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path ................................................................. 1

Enterprise Network Design Training Path................................................................................................... 1

Enterprise IP Training Courses ................................................................................................................................... 1

Certification Training Programs .................................................................................................................. 1

HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training ............................................................. 1

HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training............ 1

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training ................................... 1

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training ................................. 1

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training ................................. 1

HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training ................................................ 1

HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training (Fast-Track 3 days)................. 1

Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training ..................................................................... 1

IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Programs .......................................................................... 1

IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ................................................................................... 1

Huawei VRP System Training ............................................................................................................ 1

Enterprise LAN Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1

Enterprise WAN Technology Training................................................................................................. 1

Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ........................................................................................ 1

IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track) ......................................................................................... 1

2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Advanced Technology Training Programs .................................................................................................. 1

Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training.................................................................................... 1

Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training ............................................................................................. 1

Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training .................................................................................... 1

Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training ....................................................................................... 1

Enterprise QoS Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1

Enterprise HA Technology Training .................................................................................................... 1

Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1

Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs ............................................................................................. 1

NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training ........................................................................ 1

NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 1

NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ......................................................... 1

NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................... 1

AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................................. 1

AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 1

AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ................................................... 1

Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)..................................... 1

AR Series Industrial Routers Training Programs ........................................................................................ 1

AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................... 1

Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 1

Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ..................................................... 1